JP7389495B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information obtained based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the game performance (variable performance) is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common.

Among such gaming machines, there is also known one that executes a performance using a predetermined performance device (performance button, movable member, lamp, image display device, etc.) (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2019-033816A

However, conventional gaming machines such as those described in the above-mentioned patent documents have a problem in that the interest in playing the games is low.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to the present invention, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting port) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port) a board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and executing the special game before the determination performed by the determining means. A pre-judgment means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to play, and a specific game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game ends state control means (main control board 110), and according to the result of the determination, game effects (variable effects with variable display of effect symbols, variable effects only with variable display of the fourth symbol, variable effects only with flashing lamps) a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing the game performance, and the performance control means is configured to perform a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, line preview performance, step-up notice) that vibrates the operating means during the execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances related to performances, pseudo continuous performances, developed performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc., and the vibration performances have an operational validity period and , a first vibration performance that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period (vibration performance related to a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the operation validity period, and the first vibration performance is based on the judgment. The second vibration effect can be executed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, and the second vibration effect can be performed at a timing earlier than the first vibration effect. The game performance can be executed so that the first vibration performance and the performance period do not overlap, and the game performance includes a first vibration performance based on the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. 1 game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. and a predetermined period after the start of the game performance (high-speed (up to the first temporary stop after the fluctuation), the ease with which the second vibration performance is performed is different, and the first vibration performance is different in the normal game state than when the first game performance is performed in the specific game state. The present invention is characterized in that when a game performance is executed, there are more types of vibrations of the vibration performance that can be executed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a diagram showing an example of a front view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame. FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 2; It is a figure showing a main board case. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal. FIG. 7 is a rear perspective view of the main board case when it is disassembled. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the structure of a main control board. It is a front view of the main board case when the main control board is housed. It is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal use. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern determination table for probability variation/normal time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for special time saving. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a preliminary determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot game end processing on the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in a production control part. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the production control section. It is a diagram showing customer waiting performance processing in the performance control section. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration standby time determination table. It is a figure which shows the menu operation process in a production control part. It is a figure which shows the prefetch type|system|group performance process in a performance control part. It is a figure showing icon change production decision processing in a production control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. It is a figure showing icon change production execution processing in a production control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for pending icons. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a one-step change pattern determination table for the icon, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the two-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows the continuous preview performance determination process in a performance control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for performance modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for performance modes D to H (specific game states). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous preview performance scenario determination table for performance modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous preview performance scenario determination table for performance modes D to H (specific game states). It is a figure which shows the continuous notice performance execution process in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows lamp change production execution processing in a production control part. It is a figure which shows the light emission effect determination process at the time of a prize in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of a prize winning. It is a figure showing the fluctuating performance pattern judgment processing in a performance control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states). It is a diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table for performance mode H (specific game state). It is a figure showing timer performance decision processing in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an event timer frequency|count determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st suggestion event determination table for one timer. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd suggestion event determination table for timer 2 times. It is a figure which shows an example of an update pattern determination table. It is a diagram showing jackpot preview performance determination processing in the performance control section. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a table for determining a variable start accessory notice for performance modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a table for determining the accessory advance notice at the start of variation for performance modes D to H (specific game states). It is a diagram showing an example of a ready-to-reach advance notice determination table for production modes A to C (normal gaming state). It is a diagram showing an example of a ready-to-reach advance notice determination table for production modes D to H (specific game states). It is a figure which shows an example of a dialogue notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of an advanced production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a fixed performance pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a re-lottery performance pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a fixed performance pattern determination table. It is a diagram showing the ratio of the advance notice restriction period related to the loss variation performance in the performance modes A to C. It is a diagram showing the ratio of the advance notice restriction period related to the loss variation performance in the performance modes D to G. It is a figure showing the ratio of the advance notice restriction period related to the loss fluctuation performance of the performance mode H. It is a diagram showing the types of vibration effects for each effect mode. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the overall control unit. It is a figure showing accessory initial processing in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return process in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial movement pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power-on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the state after a power supply restoration is in the midst of the variable display of a special symbol, and with reservation memory. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command (a power-on designation command, a power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a first example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a third specific example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a fourth specific example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 in which only the power supply to a main control board is restarted after stopping. It is a figure which shows the modification when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the modification of the accessory initial processing in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power-on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the state after a power supply restoration is in the midst of the variable display of a special symbol, and with reservation memory. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command (a power-on designation command, a power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a first example in which power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. 11 is a diagram showing a third specific example in which power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a fourth specific example in which power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where the operation unit is operated while waiting for a customer. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of performing performance customization while waiting for a customer. It is a timing chart in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the production example in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a player changes a performance element during the 1st variable performance in a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a player changes a performance element during the 2nd variable performance in a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a look-ahead motion performance and a step-up notice performance are performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when a look-ahead motion performance and a step-up notice performance are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a pseudo continuous performance is performed before a reach performance. It is a figure showing an example of a performance in a case where a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a ready-to-win performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a development performance is executed and an SP ready-to-reach performance is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when the development performance is performed and the SPSP reach performance is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a cut-in performance is executed during the SP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance in the case where a cut-in performance is executed during the SP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a figure showing example 1 of a performance in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing a continuation of performance example 1 in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a figure showing example 2 of a performance in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing a continuation of performance example 2 in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing the execution timing of the timer effect for each variable effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when two timer performances are performed during a variable performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a special SP ready-to-win performance is executed in the second variable performance in performance mode A (normal gaming state) and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a chance performance is executed in the first variable performance in performance mode G (specific game state) and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a variable mission performance is executed during a jackpot. It is a diagram showing an example of opening performance and ending performance of a jackpot game for each game state. It is a diagram showing an example of the opening performance and ending performance of the jackpot game during the special time-saving game state. It is a diagram showing an example of performance when a special time-saving game state occurs. It is a diagram showing an example of performance when a special time-saving game state that has occurred in a state where there is no jackpot history ends. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when the special time-saving game state which occurred in the state where there is a jackpot history ends. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change performance and lamp change performance. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when restarting after power supply to a gaming machine is stopped during execution of the said icon change performance and lamp change performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of a look-ahead effect performance, a pending icon change performance, and a lamp change performance. It is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the prefetch effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. This is a timing chart 1 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of timing chart 1. This is a timing chart 2 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example 1 of performance at various timings of timing chart 2. This is a second example of performance at various timings of timing chart 2. This is timing chart 3 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example 1 of performance at various timings of timing chart 3. This is a second example of performance at various timings of timing chart 3. This is a timing chart 4 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of timing chart 4. This is a timing chart 5 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of timing chart 5. FIG. 6 is a timing chart 6 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of a performance at various timings of the timing chart 6. It is a timing chart 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of a performance at various timings of timing chart 7. FIG. 8 is a timing chart 8 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of the timing chart 8. This is a first modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a second modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a third modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a fourth modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a fifth modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 9 where a command cannot be received normally. This is a tenth specific example of a case where a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 11 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a twelfth specific example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 13 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a 14th specific example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 15 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 16 in which a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the fixed effect pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a diagram showing a specific example when a game ball hit to the left enters the starting hole in the normal gaming state. It is a diagram showing a specific example when a game ball hit to the left enters the starting slot in a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states). It is a figure showing special icon change production decision processing of a production control part in a 2nd embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table for the MAX hold chance. (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a puzzle suspension chance performance pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a MAX pending chance performance is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a puzzle suspension chance performance is performed.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a on which game balls flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front and rear directions, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The game board mounting frame 3 has a mounting part (not shown) for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and is removable from the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism part 6 at one end in the horizontal direction. and is rotatably supported using the first hinge mechanism section 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is removably connected to the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism part 7 at one end in the horizontal direction so as to cover the front of the mounting part of the game board mounting frame 3, It is rotatably supported using the second hinge mechanism section 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the mounting portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be viewed through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and game balls etc. put out from a payout device 100 described later. an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls; a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and have flowed into the overflow ball channel described later; and a game ball firing operation. A firing operation device 13 is provided for performing the following steps.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations on the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval between them, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to perform sound (music, voice) production. It has become. Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted from each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a dispensing abnormality, which will be described later, occurs.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage section 11a is sloped downward toward the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, in the center front side of the upper plate 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for determining and selecting various productions to be described later. They are arranged side by side on the left and right.

The performance button device 16 includes a performance button 17 (not shown) that can perform a decision operation etc. (operation input), a performance button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 9) that detects an operation on the performance button 17, and a performance button A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 9) for driving the gaming machine 17 is provided, and the player can input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The production button 17 performs production light emission by lighting the production button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white, red, rainbow color). It is now possible. In addition, it is possible to move in the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located below and the production position located above by the driving force of the button drive motor that is a part of the button drive device 17b. The button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the button is at the origin position. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a production operation by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode using the driving force of a button vibration motor that is a part of the button drive device 17b, so that production can be performed even when the button vibration motor is vibrating. Button 17 can be operated.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can perform operations such as selection operations, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) connected to the cross key 19 to detect operations on the cross key 19. (see FIG. 9) is provided, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

Further, on the right side of the upper tray 11, there is provided a rental operation section 20 that can perform operations for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance. When the lending button of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the remaining amount stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted, and the game balls are lent out. When the return button of the operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

An overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving game balls that cannot fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 9) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls. While this is being detected, the payout of game balls by the payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 9), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 9) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a plurality of firing volumes 15b (see FIG. 9) for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A handle LED (frame lighting device 10) is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is activated and game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting part 25 for mounting the game board 5, a firing device 26 for firing a game ball toward the gaming area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A locking mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with a front opening at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices installed on the back side of the game board 5 can be installed at the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Coming.

The firing device 26 includes a firing member 28 for firing a game ball, a firing solenoid 28b (see FIG. 9) for driving the firing member 28, and a solenoid 28b (see FIG. 9) that extends upward from the firing member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. An inclined firing rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at a firing position which is the inclined lower end of the firing rail 29 are provided. When the game ball sent out by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot out toward the game area 5a by the operation of the shooting member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member that guides the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 are provided. A firing ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 for guiding the game ball fired by the firing device 26 to the upstream part of the gaming area 5a. Furthermore, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls that have flown down to the outside of the gaming area (to the collecting section of the gaming board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40, called a so-called center case, that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to A stage section 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the interior and making them flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the bottom of the gaming area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always be entered are provided at intervals, and these general winning holes 43 When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are ejected from the payout device 100 (not shown) as prize balls. It is dispensed onto plate 11.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, there are provided normal game gates 44 (normal game starting area) through which the game balls can pass, and the game balls that have passed through the general game gates 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 9), a normal symbol winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. Note that the winning lottery for normal symbols will be described later.

At the lower part of the gaming area 5a and directly below the stage part 42, a first starting opening 45 (special figure starting area) is provided in which a game ball can always enter a prize (ball), and this first starting opening 45 When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) is detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are transferred from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. It is about to be paid out. In addition to paying out prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, a game ball is placed in a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a normal symbol winning lottery). A variable starting section 46 is provided which is converted into an open state (special mode) in which winning (ball hitting) is possible or easy.

The variable starting section 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) through which a game ball can enter a prize (ball entering), and a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) that allows a game ball to enter a prize (entering ball) into the second starting port 47. A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 9), a movable member 48 that converts (variably) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 9). When the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are delivered from the payout device 100 to the top tray as prize balls. It is set to be paid out on the 11th. In addition to paying out prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

A prize opening lamp NR (not shown) is provided between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 to illuminate the area around the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect by emitting light from a panel illumination device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guiding member 37 and downstream of the right-hand general figure gate 44, there is a closed state in which it is impossible to win a game ball (ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the jackpot determination of the special symbol). A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from the basic mode to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won.

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can be won (balls entered), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (Fig. 9), an opening/closing member 51 for converting (variable) the big winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51. When the grand prize opening 50 is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball, and when the grand prize opening 50 is in an open state, winning a game ball (entering a ball) is difficult. ) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are transferred from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, and a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, An out ball flow path is provided that receives the game balls detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a and the big winning port detection switch 50a, and the game balls that have flowed into the out port 39, collects them, and allows them to flow down. An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream part of the ball flow path. The game balls flowing down this out ball channel and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a are discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

Outside the gaming area 5a, there are a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reservation display 63, a second special symbol reservation display 64, as well as. A normal symbol holding display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 9) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) to be described later is executed, and a round number display 66 (see FIG. 9) during a jackpot game (special game) or a time-saving game state. A right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 9) that prompts you to fire the game ball toward the right side of the gaming area 5a, and a status confirmation display that indicates that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. A main information display device 59 consisting of a device 68 (see FIG. 9) is provided.

Further, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). On this winning probability display sticker, the jackpot winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) and set value (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment are printed. Note that the position where this winning probability display sticker 200 is pasted is just one example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, but may be on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the game ball enters the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the prize gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot determination of the first special symbol means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a random number value for jackpot determination, etc. (first special symbol determination information) is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination This corresponds to comparing the random number value and the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot". In addition, when the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60, and after a predetermined period of time, a stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

Jackpot determination of the second special symbol means that when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, a random number value etc. for jackpot determination (second special symbol determination information) is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination This corresponds to comparing the random number value and the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot". In addition, when the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and after a predetermined period of time, a stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and in the variable display of each special symbol, the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order. do. When the special symbols are to be stopped and displayed, the LEDs are lit in a manner that indicates the result of each jackpot determination (jackpot mode, loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" means executing a jackpot game (special game) in the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the first special symbol or the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the second special symbol. refers to the state in which one has acquired the right to do something. The term "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the jackpot 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time are reached, a predetermined number of game balls can be opened in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls entered), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous for the player in which the player can easily win the prize ball. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage to the player, which will be described in detail later.

The normal symbol winning lottery is to acquire a random number value for determining a hit when a game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44, and compare the obtained random number value for determining a hit with the winning determination value to determine whether it is a "win". This corresponds to determining whether or not. In addition, when a winning lottery of a normal symbol is performed, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display 62, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display of the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LED lights up in a manner that indicates the result of the winning lottery (a winning manner or a losing manner).

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "winning game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 may be opened even before the maximum number of openings or the maximum opening time is reached. The winning game (auxiliary game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) win a prize (balls entered). In other words, the "winning game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition for the variable display is likely to be satisfied). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol holding display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is used to determine the jackpot of the first special symbol that is stored when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 (balls entered). This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing a variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Note that although up to four first reservation memories are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is used to determine the jackpot of the second special symbol that is stored when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 (balls entered). This is for displaying the number of rights (second pending memory) for performing the variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second pending memories. In addition, although up to four second reservation memories are stored, it may be fewer or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a normal symbol winning lottery (fluctuating display of normal symbols) that is stored when a game ball enters (passes) the common symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (Fuzuzu pending memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of Fuzuzuzu pending memory. In addition, although up to four ordinary figures are stored in the storage, the number may be smaller or larger than four.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can also be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if you win a special symbol jackpot, "7" will be displayed as a stop sign, and if you lose, a "-" will be displayed as a stop sign, and while the variable display is in progress, the light will turn off and "-" will be displayed as a stop sign. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous fluctuation display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the fluctuation display starts, the fluctuation display can be started by turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand what has started.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. starts lighting up, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if it is a jackpot game with two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left will light up, and if it is a jackpot game with sixteen rounds, all the LEDs will light up.

The right-hand hitting indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is a right-hand hitting indicator 67 that prompts you to fire the game ball toward the right side gaming area (so-called right-hand hitting) during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state. This is for displaying a winning display, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is for indicating that the setting change mode, which will be described later, or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. When the mode shifts to , the LED starts lighting up, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, the status confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine. It is possible to easily check whether the settings are set or not.

Note that the installation position of the status confirmation display 68 is just an example, and is not limited to the installation position of this embodiment, and may be any position in the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display is displayed in the same manner (lit display) regardless of whether it is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, but the display is made so that it is possible to recognize which mode it is set to. You may do so. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinking. When the setting change mode is set, either the status confirmation display 68 or the second game information display device 69 lights up, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status is displayed. Only the confirmation display 68 may be displayed by lighting.

Further, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or one LED of the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

At the lower right inside of the gaming area 5a, there are a sub-first fluctuation display 81, a sub-second fluctuation display 82, a sub-first reservation display 83, a sub-second reservation display 84, and a sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85. A sub-information display device 80 is provided, which includes a sub-normal figure reservation display 86, and a sub-right-hitting display 87 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). Note that the sub-information display device 80 is not provided with a display indicating that the sub-information display device 80 is set to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, such as the status confirmation display 68 described above.

The sub-first fluctuation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 is for displaying the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. (notification), and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the corresponding special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp symbol LZ or the second lamp symbol LZ is displayed in a variable manner), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is a jackpot. The result of the judgment (lights up if it's a jackpot, turns off if it's a loss) is displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, in the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82, so that it can be grasped only whether or not the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed, it blinks and stops while the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed. It may be configured to turn on or off when displayed.

The sub-first reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories (number of reservations), and the sub-second reservation display 84 displays the number of second reservation memories (number of reservations). It is made up of two LEDs on the left and right. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and when the number of reservations is "2", the LED on the right turns off. The left and right LEDs light up, and when the number of reservations is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reservations is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the LED blinks at predetermined intervals (variable display). Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, an aspect indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights on in the case of a win, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in order to be able to grasp only whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the sub-normal symbol fluctuation display 85 is configured to blink while the normal symbol is in the fluctuating display, and to turn on or off when the normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state. You can.

The sub-universal drawing reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of ordinary drawings (reservation number), and is constituted by two LEDs arranged on the left and right. Then, when the number of reserved general drawings is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, and when the number of reserved general drawings is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and the number of reserved general drawings is ``1''. When the number of reservations is "2", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reserved ordinary cards is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the production space 40a, and a , a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is provided, which is a liquid crystal display whose display area is smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A first movable member 73 is provided that resembles the same, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the performance space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays various effects according to the progress of the game. Performance displays include customer waiting demonstration performances that are executed during a customer waiting state (standby state where the game is not in progress) where special symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner, and production symbols that are executed while special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. There is a fluctuating effect accompanied by a fluctuating display of 70a.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas: a left area, a center area, and a right area. By scrolling the effect pattern 70a vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, a special symbol display area is formed in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area is changed to a special symbol variable display. By correspondingly scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61. In response to (synchronized with) the fluctuating display of the symbols, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 70a is performed. That is, in response to the start of the fluctuating display of the special symbol, the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and before the fluctuating display of the special symbol stops, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (swinging display), and the special symbol is fluctuating. In response to the stop display of the display, the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 70a is stopped (still display). Note that, in addition to the symbols indicating numbers, symbols indicating alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided as the effect symbols 70a.

Note that the "temporary stop display" is a display in which the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (completely stopped). (not done).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a is stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of jackpot determination. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same performance symbols such as "777" or the combination of regular performance symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is any other format. be. Note that the manner in which the performance symbols 70a are variably displayed is not limited to this, and may be one that scrolls in the left-right direction, or one that rotates (rotates) on the spot.

Also, during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as reach effect, background images, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), depending on the result of jackpot determination. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectations for a jackpot (special game) to be executed (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot winning expectation level") are increased. There is.

Here, "reach performance" is a jackpot game executed for the player in which a part of the combination of performance symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a pattern of variation that is expected to occur. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot (jackpot result mode), two performance symbols 70a are displayed in the left and right regions. 7'', the game stops temporarily, and the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the types of reach performances are "normal reach performance", "SP reach performance", "SPSP reach performance", "SPSP "7" reach performance", "full rotation reach performance", and "special SP reach performance". There are seven types.

"Normal reach effect" is a reach state in which the background image before reach is displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a is fluctuated in the center area. This is a reach performance that is performed with a .

"SP reach effect" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect pattern 70a with the reach state formed is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the effect is higher than the normal reach effect (the expectation of a jackpot is high) ) is a reach performance where the performance is performed.

"SPSP reach performance" is a reach performance that is executed after the normal reach performance or SP reach performance, and has a performance effect (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the normal reach performance or SP reach performance.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes at a low speed when all the combinations of the plurality of effect symbols 70a that notify a jackpot are aligned. In this embodiment, this is a reach effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot determination.

"Special SP Reach" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect symbol 70a with the reach state formed is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the effect is higher than the normal reach effect (the expectation of a jackpot is high) ) This is a reach performance that is different from the normal SP reach performance.

In this embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation regarding the reach performance increases in the order of normal reach performance < SP reach performance < SPSP reach performance < full rotation reach performance (jackpot confirmed), and in the order of normal reach performance < special SP reach performance. It is getting high.

In addition, at the bottom of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a number of first special symbols with a number corresponding to the first reserved number of special symbols (U1), which is the number of the first reserved symbols currently stored in the normal gaming state, is displayed. A first reservation icon display area 70B for displaying reservation icons and a number of second reservation icons corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) which is the current number of second reservation storage in the specific gaming state. A second pending icon display area 70D for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a) being executed in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. A region 70C is formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display area 70B1, a second display area 70B2, a third display area 70B3, and a fourth display area 70B4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display the number of first reservation icons corresponding to the number of first reserved special symbols (U1). In other words, the number of first reserved icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of first reserved special symbols (U1).

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is first performed, and the second display section 70B2 displays the first pending icon H11. The first pending icon H12 indicating the first pending memory is displayed on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed third, and the third display section 70B3 displays the variable display of the first special symbol. A first pending icon H13 indicating the first pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first pending icon H14 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display area 70D1, a second display area 70D2, a third display area 70D3, and a fourth display area 70D4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display second reservation icons in a number corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2). In other words, the number of second reserved icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of second reserved special symbols (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon H21. A second pending icon H22 indicating a second pending memory is displayed in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the third display section 70D3. A second pending icon H23 indicating a second pending memory is displayed, and a second pending icon H24 indicating a second pending memory in which variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display section 70D4. be done. In addition, in this embodiment, the "first reserved number of special symbols" may be referred to as the "first reserved number" and the "second reserved number of special symbols" may be referred to as the "second reserved number".

The icon display area 70C displays the first pending icon or the second pending icon that was displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a). As the second pending icon displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TI is displayed, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a) The icon TI disappears (erases). Note that the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). Note that in this embodiment, the "first pending icon", the "second pending icon", and "the icon" may be collectively referred to as "icon".

In addition, on the left side of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a first pending number indicating the current number of first reserved special symbols (U1) is displayed in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. 1st special figure reservation number display area 70E for displaying the second special figure reservation number display area 70E for displaying the second reservation number indicating the current number of second special figure reservation number (U2) in the normal game state and the specific game state. A number display area 70F is formed.

The first movable member 73 is capable of emitting dramatic light by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the first movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 9), moves the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located above and the presentation position located below. By moving to , it is possible to perform a performance operation, and the first position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the second movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 9), moves between the standby position (origin position) located at the upper right and the production position located at the lower left. It is possible to perform a performance operation by moving diagonally up and down, and a second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other's production positions, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate at the same time. By not doing so, they avoid conflict with each other.

Note that if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, when one movable member moves to the production position and returns to a position that does not overlap with the production position of the other movable member, The other movable member may be moved to the presentation position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball rental), and game balls supplied from island equipment, etc. A game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) that includes a main control board 110 that centrally controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110. A payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and a production that controls the production according to production control commands from the main control board 110. A production control device 130A (not shown) that includes a control board 130, a power supply device 160A (not shown) that includes a power supply board 160 that supplies power voltage to various control devices, and game information (not shown) external to the gaming machine. A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 9) for outputting a game signal (game signal) is provided.

Further, an opening/closing door-type cover member is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left-right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire production control device 130A from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member, display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and various lighting devices. A changeover switch 22 (see FIG. 9) is provided for switching adjustment modes related to adjustment of the amount of light of the devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76).

On the front side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m to clear the memory contents or to indicate the level of advantage of the game. an RWM clear switch 111a that inputs a signal for updating the set value (different advantages); a signal for moving the set value to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting key; A setting key switch 112a for inputting information, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that allow the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped, and the like are installed.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and is composed of four 7-segment displays having decimal points DP arranged side by side. There is. An identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type) is configured on two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits. A numerical value segment is configured to display numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information.

(Configuration of the back of the game board)
Next, the structure of the back side of the game board will be explained using FIGS. 2 and 3.
FIG. 2 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame, and FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 2.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a base frame 170 (liquid crystal base frame) having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is assembled on the back surface (rear surface) of the game board 5. An image display unit (first image display device 70 and image display cover 185) 180 is assembled on the back side (rear side) of the image display unit 180 so as to close the opening. A lamp relay board 186 is assembled on the back (rear surface) of the image display cover 185 (liquid crystal cover), and a main controller 110A (main control board) is attached to the lower back of the image display cover 185 below the lamp relay board 186. The main board case 200 containing the main board 110 is attached.

The base frame 170 (liquid crystal base) is a substantially rectangular annular body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and its annular front surface 171 is attached to and fixed to the back surface of the game board 5. The back side of the base frame 170 has a space for arranging various circuit boards and parts.
An effect control board 130 is arranged on the back side of an image display unit 180 (liquid crystal unit) fixed to the back side of the base frame 170. The image display unit 180 can be slid freely from the sides (left and right), up and down, or diagonally of the base frame into a gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the production control board. It is configured so that it can be installed on the
Various circuit boards arranged on the back side of the base frame are covered by a lid member 190.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the main board case 200, at least the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a included in the main control board 110 are exposed.
Furthermore, the information display 113 included in the main control board 110 is visible through the transparent main board case 200.
The staff of the game parlor open the door of the game machine, visually check the information display 113 on the back of the game machine, and operate the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a to clear the RWM, change the settings, and check the settings. You can perform operations such as checking the performance information of the gaming machine.

The RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed, and the operation member 685 can be operated by the staff of the game parlor through an opening provided in the main board case 200 at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. stands out.
When a staff member or the like depresses the operating member 685, the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed by the depressed operating member 685. This causes the RWM clear switch 111a to be operated.

The setting key switch 112a has a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110, and a keyhole into which a key is inserted is provided in the end surface of the cylindrical member.
The end face of the setting key switch 112a provided with a keyhole is exposed through an opening provided in the main board case 200.
A staff member of the game parlor can operate the setting key switch 112a by inserting a key into the keyhole.

(Main board case)
Next, the configuration of the main board case 200 according to this embodiment will be described using FIGS. 4 to 6.
In addition, in this embodiment, the game board 5 side will be described as the front side with respect to the main board case 200, and the direction opposite to the game board 5 will be described as the rear side. Therefore, the left-right direction in the figure is the left-right direction when main board case 200 is viewed from the side opposite to game board 5.

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the main board case 200, FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case 200 including the pedestal, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the main board case 200 when it is disassembled. be.
The main board case 200 of this embodiment is assembled to the back of a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine via a pedestal 280, with the main control board 110 carrying electronic components accommodated therein.

The pedestal 280 is a connecting means for attaching the main board case 200 to the gaming machine side holding part (in this embodiment, the lamp relay board 186) provided on the back side of the gaming machine main body.
The main board case 200 that accommodates the main control board is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back of a game board such as a pachinko game machine via the pedestal 280, so the main board case 200 houses the main control board. Electronic components mounted on the internal main control board 110 can be visually recognized through the case piece 220.

The pedestal 280 is a component used to attach the main board case 200 to the rear side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG. 5, the pedestal 280 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the left and right directions are longer than two sides along the up and down direction, and a pair of shaft portions 281 are provided near both left and right ends of the lower side. It has a plate shape in the center of the upper side in the left and right direction. The shaft portion 281 has an axial direction that coincides with the left-right direction.

The main board case 200 is provided with a pair of hook parts 249 that are engaged with each shaft part 281. A pair of hook portions 249 are provided on the lower side of upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hook portion 249 is formed in a U-shape that is convex toward the front side.

When attaching the main board case 200 to the pedestal 280, the main board case 200 is arranged so that the hook portion 249 is convex toward the back side. Then, the hook portions 249 become engageable with the shaft portions 281, so the main board case 200 is brought closer to the pedestal 280, and each hook portion 249 is engaged with each shaft portion 281.

Then, when the hook portion 249 engages with the shaft portion 281, the free end side of the main board case 200 is rotated upward around the shaft portion 281, and the main board case 200 is stacked on the pedestal 280. At this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper side of the pedestal 280 is caught in the depression D provided on the upper side of the main board case 200. Therefore, the main board case 200 is fixed to the pedestal 280 by the engagement between the hook part 249 and the shaft part 281 and the engagement between the plate-like hook 282 and the main board case 200.

Thereafter, the protective cover 229 is attached to the main board case 200. The protective cover 229 covers a lower portion of the main board case 200 including the hook part 249. In this way, the main control device 110A is attached to the rear side of the game board 5.

The main board case 200 consists of two transparent resin case pieces (lower case piece) that house a single-sided mounting type main control board 110 (printed board) with electronic components arranged only on one side. 210, an upper case piece 220), a cutting member 230 for cutting a tamper-proof seal held between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, and a main body to which a tamper-proof seal 250, which will be described later, is adhered. A cap 240 is detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 of the board case 200.

Main board case 200 encloses main control board 110 with a plurality of connectors 771 to 776 mounted on main control board 110 exposed. The main board case 200 is made of a light-transmitting member such as transparent plastic, for example.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 constitute a main board case body (sealing body 300).
A protective cover 229 is disposed at the lower part of the upper case piece 220 to cover a connecting portion between an internal connector and an external connector provided on the main control board 110 inside.
In this embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 with the main control board 110 in between by a caulking member.

A caulking part 291 using a caulking member is arranged at a suitable location along the edge of the main board case 200, and a caulking member (locking member) is inserted into a caulking hole (sealing part) provided in the caulking part 291. ), the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are locked in a closed state. By removing (breaking) the caulking member driven (locked) into the caulking fastening hole, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 become openable, closable, and detachable.

In the caulking portion 291 of the main board case 200 of this embodiment, two caulking holes are provided (caulking holes 291A, 291B).
Each caulking fastening hole 291A, 291B is configured by a lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and an upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220 communicating with each other.

Note that only one caulking hole is used for one time of fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. After removing (breaking) the caulking member and releasing the connection (after opening the main board case 200), if you want to perform the connection again, drive the caulking member into the other remaining caulking hole. conduct. That is, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to two times.

The lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form an internal enclosing portion 581 for enclosing the main control board 110. The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side of the main board case 200, which is the main control unit 110m side. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side of the main board case 200, which is the opposite side to the main control unit 110m side.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 each include control board housing parts 211 and 221 that house the main control board 110, and sealing parts 212 and 222 that constitute a sealing base part 310, which will be described later. There is. The control board storage parts 211 and 221 are provided with plate parts 211a and 221a formed in a substantially rectangular shape, respectively, and protrude from the peripheral edges of these plate parts 211a and 221a, and are provided on one side of each of the plate parts 211a and 221a. It is formed in a shape having flange portions 211b and 221b surrounding the surface.

Further, on the left side of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210, a cylindrical portion 565 is provided that extends toward the rear, which is the main control board 110 side. A hole 566 is formed in the cylindrical portion 565 and extends in the front-rear direction. A thread is formed inside the hole 566. In the main control board 110, a hole 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565.

Main control board 110 is fixed to lower case piece 210. More specifically, the hole 567 of the main control board 110 is arranged behind the cylindrical part 565 of the lower case piece 210. The shaft portion of a screw for fixing the main control board 110 is inserted into the hole 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 through the hole 567 from the rear side of the main control board 110. The thread formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread provided on the shaft of the screw. As a result, the main control board 110 is sandwiched between the head of the screw and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. That is, the main control board 110 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

A portion of the flange portion 211b of the control board storage portion 211 that protrudes from the plate portion 211a along two long sides of the plate portion 211a (hereinafter referred to as the “male portion”) is formed in an L-shape. Three hooking pieces 211c are formed respectively. On the other hand, a portion of the flange portion 221b of the control board storage portion 221 that protrudes from the plate portion 221a along two long sides of the plate portion 221a (hereinafter referred to as the “female portion”) has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 221c into which the male portion of the control board storage portion 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming a double wall. Furthermore, a hook piece 221d is formed in each insertion groove portion 221c.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 110 is screwed is combined with the upper case piece 220, the male part of the flange part 211b is inserted into the female part of the flange part 221b. Then, the control board storage sections 211 and 221 are slid relative to each other in the direction of arrow α in FIG. 6 along the left-right direction. Then, the hook piece 211c provided on the male part engages with the hook piece 221d, so the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are assembled together so that they will not come off unless they move in the opposite direction to the arrow α. It will be done.

When combined in this manner, the control board housing parts 211 and 221 form a box-shaped inner envelope part 581 that is shielded from the outside. Since the main control board 110 is housed in the inner packaging part 581, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the main control board 110, the main control section 110m, etc. are illegally replaced.

The main control board 110 is attached inside the control board storage part 221 before the control board storage parts 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, the IC and the like mounted on the main control board 110 are attached so as to face the plate section 221a of the control board storage section 221. Since the plate portion 221a is also made of transparent plastic, even if the main control board 110 is housed in the main board case 200, electronic components such as the main control unit 110m mounted on the main control board 110 can This is so that it can be confirmed from the outside via the plate portion 221a whether or not it has been illegally replaced. In this embodiment, when the main control device 110A including the main board case 200 is attached to the game board 5, the main control board 110A in the main board case 200 is mounted on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 through the upper case piece 220 from the back side of the game machine 1. Electronic components can be visually recognized.

Sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at the right end portions of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. As shown in FIG. 34, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw stopper piece 91 and a second screw stopper piece 92 above the sealing parts 212 and 222. When the control board housing parts 211 and 221 are slid and combined, a sealing base part 310 is formed by the sealing parts 212 and 222 at the longitudinal end of a sealed body 300 in which these parts are combined. Then, when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 by covering the sealing base 310, the first screw piece 91 and the second screw piece 92 are attached to the longitudinal end of the sealing body 300. , the third screw stopper piece 393 of the cap 240 overlaps to form a screw stop part 390 for screw fastening.

The sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided to protrude rightward from the right end portions of the control board storage portions 211 and 221. The sealing parts 212 and 222 are formed to have the same height in the left-right direction and the same width in the up-down direction. In each of the sealing parts 212 and 222, elongated groove parts 212a and 222a are formed along the left-right direction. In the sealing part 222, two parallel grooves 222a are formed along the left-right direction, separated by a predetermined distance, and in the sealing part 212, one groove 212a is formed in the left-right direction. When the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the sealing parts 212 and 222 form a sealing base part 310 on the right side of the combined control board storage parts 211 and 221. In the sealing base part 310, the sealing parts 212 and 222 are arranged in parallel with a constant interval, and an insertion/extraction space is formed between the faces of the sealing parts 212 and 222 facing each other.

The tamper-evident seal 250 is used as a means to seal the main board case 200, and certifies that it is a genuine product issued by an organization with certification qualifications. The tamper-proof seal 250 is made of an easily cutable material such as paper with an adhesive surface provided on one side, and has a plurality of cuts in consideration of cuttability. As will be described later, the tamper-proof seal 250 has, for example, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark) printed thereon, and the like. Further, the words "Do not tamper" are also printed on the tamper-proof sticker 250.
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230a, a pair of pinching portions 361, and a cutting portion 364. A base portion 230a, which is the basis of the cutting member 230, is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cutting portion 364 is formed on one of the two long sides of the base portion 230a. The cutting portion 364 is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed into a blade shape. The knob portions 361 are provided at both ends of the base portion 230a in the longitudinal direction, and are formed into a shape that is bent into a dogleg shape overall. The left end of the knob 361 is referred to as a free end 361a.

The cap 240 is formed in a size that can be placed over the sealing base part 310 to cover the entire sealing base part 310, and is formed to be detachable from the sealing base part 310. The cap 240 includes a bowl-shaped cap body 241 that covers the sealing base 310 and a third screw stopper 393 formed at one end of the cap body 241 in the longitudinal direction. A protrusion 382 is provided on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end 361a of the knob 361 of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/extraction space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base 310. It is provided. Furthermore, a groove portion 386 is formed on the inner surface of the cap body 241.

The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion/extraction space of the sealing base 310. Thereafter, a tamper-proof sticker 250 is attached. Further, when the cap 240 is placed over the sealing base portion 310, the groove portion 386 fits into a portion of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/extraction space 310a. Furthermore, the protrusion 382 engages with the free end 361a of the knob 361 of the cutting member 230.

When the cap 240 is placed over the sealing base 310, the third screw stopper 393 is a combination of the first screw stopper 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the second screw stopper 92 of the upper case piece 220. overlaps with each other to form a screw-fastening portion 390 for screw-fastening. When the caulking member 94 is driven into the screw fixing portion 390, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240 are fixed to each other.

When unsealing the main board case 200, the caulking member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base 310. The same applies when the seal on the main board case 200 is illegally broken. The cutting member 230 and the cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base 310 at the same time. Then, the tamper-proof seal 250 is irreparably damaged by the cut portion 364 and the like.

(Main control board)
Next, the configuration of the main control board 110 according to this embodiment will be described using FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the structure of the main control board.
The main control board 110 that controls the game includes a main control section 110m, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, and a plurality of electronic components 595 (IC, resistor, connector, etc.) different from the main control section 110m. capacitors, coils, etc.), a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, etc. are mounted.

The main control unit 110m stores memory contents used for controlling games. The main control unit 110m also stores memory contents that affect the outcome of the game.
The main control unit 110m is a one-chip microcomputer that integrates a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c, which will be described later.
The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right at the bottom of main control board 110. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided at the bottom of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

Among the plurality of connectors 771 to 776, two connectors 774 and 775 are referred to as detection signal connectors 774 and 775. The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include one of the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, and the big winning opening detection switch 50a, which detect that a game ball has won. Signals from at least some of them are input. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include a first starting opening detection switch 45a that detects that a game ball has won, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, and a big winning opening detection switch. It is assumed that all the signals of the switch 50a are input. Detection signal connectors 774, 775 have a different color from other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 have a fluorescent color, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, and 776 have a color different from the fluorescent color.

The main control unit 110m includes a plate-shaped main body extending in the left-right direction, and a plurality of signal pins (first signal pins) extending downward from the lower end of the main body and electrically connected to the main control board 110. We are prepared. The signal pin (first signal pin) is mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200.
The plurality of electronic components 595 each include a signal pin (second signal pin) provided on each of the plurality of electronic components. The signal pin (second signal pin) is mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200.

The RWM clear switch 111a will be explained.
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed. The upper case piece 220 of the board case 200 is provided with a recess 688, and an opening 687 is provided within the recess 688.
As can be seen from FIG. 5, the operating member 685 is provided at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a, and when a staff member or the like presses the operating member 685, the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed by the depressed operating member 685. be done. This causes the RWM clear switch 111a to be operated.
A cover member 686 is provided within the recess 688 . The cover member 686 is rotatably supported within the recess 688 between a first position in which the operating member 685 is closed and cannot be operated, and a second position in which the operating member 685 is opened and operable. has been done.
By moving the operating member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 111a can be operated.
By doing so, it is only necessary to provide the board case 200 with an opening 687 large enough to allow the operation member 685 to be inserted therein. Furthermore, the operation member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, unauthorized access to the inside of the board case 200 can be prevented.
The end of the RWM clear switch 111a may be exposed through the opening 687 so that it can be directly operated without being operated using the operating member 685.

The setting key switch 112a has a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110, and a keyhole into which a key is inserted is provided in the end surface of the cylindrical member.
The end face of the setting key switch 112a provided with a keyhole is exposed through the opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200, but is slightly lower than the surface of the board case 200.
A staff member or the like can operate the setting key switch 112a by inserting a key into the keyhole.

(Identification display)
The identification display 520 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 5, the identification display 520 is attached to the main control board 110, the main control section 110m, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The identification display 520 is a display that includes information regarding the gaming machine 1. In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the main control board 110 is referred to as an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the main control unit 110m is referred to as an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is referred to as an identification display 523, the identification display 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is referred to as an identification display 524, and the identification display 520 provided on the cap 240 is referred to as an identification display 523. It is called display 525.

As shown in FIG. 5, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 110 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is attached to the main control unit 110m by a stamp. The identification display 522 is an information identification section for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200 are information identification parts for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right side of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by marking with a mold used to manufacture the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 33).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by marking with a mold for manufacturing the cap 240. The display mode of the identification display 523 will be described later.

Identification indicia 521-525 are related to each other and include at least the same identification indicia 529. In this embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string "ABCD05". The same identification display 529 among the identification displays 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is a display corresponding to, for example, a manufacturer name and a model name. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name, and "CD" represents the model name.

In the identification displays 521 to 525, instead of displaying the manufacturer name as "AB" included in "ABCD", the manufacturer name itself may be displayed. Furthermore, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed. Further, the model of the gaming machine may be displayed in the identification displays 521 to 525.

(Seal member)
The seal member will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 8, a seal member 1560 and a seal member 1561 are attached to the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

The sealing member 1560 is attached to a position display section 561 provided at the lower left side of the upper case piece 220 in the left-right direction. is pasted on.
The sealing members 1560 and 1561 are both made of a light-transmitting material, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent (made of a transparent material).
Seal members 1560 and 1561 are each placed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8). Note that, in FIG. 5, illustrations of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 located in front of the seal members 1560 and 1561 are omitted.

The seal member 1560 is a seal for managing the main board.
In this example, a seal member main body 1560A (base portion) of the seal member 1560 is provided with a watermark for preventing forgery. That is, the seal member 1560 (opener display seal) is a processed seal in which a watermark is applied to the seal member main body 1560A.
A "watermark" is a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and various types of watermarks can be applied, such as those using holograms and those that look different depending on the physical shape. .
However, the sealing member main body 1560A is transparent even though it has been subjected to a predetermined process (watermarking), and at least has high light transmittance to ensure a certain level of visibility.

The sealing member 1560 has a blank entry area 1570 (entry field), a code section 1572, and an information display section 1573 in a black frame with a heading such as "Main Board Management Number" on the sealing member main body 1560A. We are prepared.
The entry area 1570, the code area 1572, the information display area 1573, and the character displays associated with these areas, which will be described later, are non-transparent with low translucency because the transparent material of the sealing member main body 1560A is not exposed. Department.
The sealing member 1560 includes a plurality of non-transparent parts, and it is difficult to visually recognize the main control board 110 inside the main board case 200 through these non-transparent parts.
The code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the writing area 1570 as non-transparent portions are provided at a position on the seal member body 1560A that does not overlap with the main control portion 110m and the information display 113.

On the other hand, the transparent material of the seal member main body 1560A is exposed and the transparent material of the seal member main body 1560A is exposed, and the writing area 1570, the code section 1572, the information display section 1573, and the areas other than the character display attached to these areas, which will be described later, are translucent. The transparent portion 1574 has a high
The light transmitting portion 1574 is the above-mentioned viewing portion that allows the electronic component 595 on the main control board 110 inside the main board case 200 to be seen and confirmed through the transparent material.

In the main board case 200, the main control board 110 is visible through the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 110. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 110 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Moreover, regardless of the presence or absence of a transparent part or a non-transparent part, the seal member 1560 is attached to a position where the seal member 1562 attached to the main control part 110m on the main control board 110 is visible from all angles. has been done.
Furthermore, regardless of the presence or absence of a transparent portion or a non-transparent portion, the entire sealing member 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, overlaps the main control portion 110m from all angles. It is set so that it is in a position where
Therefore, when main board case 200 is viewed from the front, main control section 110m is always visible through main board case 200.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control section 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control unit 110m and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Regardless of the presence or absence of a transparent part or a non-transparent part, the seal member 1560 is located at a position where the entire seal member 1560, including the writing area 1570, code part 1572, and information display part 1573, does not overlap the information display 113 from any angle. It is set up so that
Therefore, when main board case 200 is viewed from the front, information display 113 can be visually recognized through main board case 200.

Although it cannot be said that the seal member 1560 and the information display device 113 are located in the vicinity in FIG. 8, the seal member 1560 does not overlap the main control unit 110m and the information display device 113, If the following conditions are satisfied: the seal member 1560 and the information display 113 are located at a sufficient distance from the connectors 771 to 776, and the seal member 1561 does not overlap the information display 113, the seal member 1560 and the information display 113 are located close to each other. You can.

The display contents of the seal member 1560 will be explained in detail below.
The entry area 1570 is an area for entering the person who opened the main board case 200 and the date of opening.
The writing area 1570 is a white base formed on a transparent material on which writing can be done with a pen or the like.
For example, six entry areas 1570 are provided, three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, in which three sets of "opener" and "opening date" can be entered.
The writing area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) base.

Above the entry area 1570, headings such as "Opened by" and "Date opened" are printed in black, and on the left side of each entry area, a circled number indicating the number of the entry area is printed.
That is, above the entry area 1570 in the upper left corner, "Opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 in the upper right corner, "date opened" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the upper left entry area 1570. A circle 2 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 at the vertical center on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the lower left entry area 1570.

For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200, the inspector writes the inspector's name in the entry area 1570 on the left, and writes the date of opening the main board case 200 in the entry area 1570 on the right. . Note that the inspector may write in the entry area 1570 the date and time when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 110 was tampered with.

The cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of the seal member 1560. Code section 1572 includes predetermined information. The code section 1572 is a section from which information is read by another device, and for example, a QR code (registered trademark), barcode, etc. is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. There is. In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code section 1572 is linked to, for example, information stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "other device") and indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110.
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code section 1572, is read by a camera installed in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access other devices via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the mobile information terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 110 (for example, the name of the store where the gaming machine 1 was delivered), and whether the gaming machine 1 has been disposed of. Contains information such as. This allows the inspector to easily confirm information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Therefore, the inspector can check the information on the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not a fraud has been committed in which the main control board 110 from a different delivery destination has been installed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Information display section 1573 includes various information. The information display section 1573 may include the same information as the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, a character string "EF001" is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area on the information display section 1573. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 110. Using the management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been disposed of, based on information linked to the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string in the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, etc. Further, the rectangular region of the information display section 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code section 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

The transparent portion 1574 (peeping portion) included in the sealing member 1560 will be described.
The transparent portion 1574 includes a writing area 1570, a code portion 1572, an information display portion 1573, a notation of “main board management number”, a frame, an opening person, an opening date notation, and circles 1 to 15 in the sealing member main body 1560A. This is an area other than the notation 3.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is, for example, a region extending in the left-right direction and existing between three rows of writing regions 1570 in the vertical direction.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is also a region extending in the left-right direction and existing between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged left and right, and the upper two writing areas 1570.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is also a region extending in the vertical direction between the two rows of writing regions 1570 in the left-right direction.
The inspector can check the electronic component 595 (see FIG. 62(a)) through the light-transmitting portion 1574. Therefore, compared to the case where the transparent portion 1574 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not tampering has been performed on the electronic component 595. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The seal member 1561 will be explained.
The seal member 1561 is attached to the main control board 110 at a position where it can be viewed from any angle.
The seal member 1561 is provided at a position that does not overlap the main control section 110m from any angle.
Therefore, when main board case 200 is viewed from the front, main control section 110m is always visible through main board case 200.
The seal member 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the information display 113 from any angle.
Therefore, when main board case 200 is viewed from the front, information display 113 can be visually recognized through main board case 200.

Furthermore, the seal member 1561 is an information identification section for displaying specific information.
For example, at least one of the model name, manufacturer name, rated voltage, and total capacity is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In this embodiment, the part on which this information is printed is also referred to as a printing part 1563. Further, specific information displayed on the seal member 1561 is referred to as an identification display 1595. In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu GH101" including the model number, the manufacturer name "AA Company", the rated voltage and the total capacity (AC24V±5%, 250VA).
In addition, in the area where the model name is displayed, a base is formed on the transparent material in a conspicuous color such as red or yellow, and the model name is displayed in white letters on the base.

Further, a seal member 1562 is attached to the main control section 110m.
The seal member 1562 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of a model name and a manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed on the seal member 1562 as predetermined information. Further, specific information displayed on the seal member 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal member 1562.
Further, the seal member 1561 and the seal member 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595 and 1596. In this embodiment, the species name "CR Aiu", the model type "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is only necessary that some of them are the same.
Note that although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main board case 200 and the main control unit 110m, they may be attached to other members. For example, it may be displayed on the main control board 110 including the same identification display as the identification displays 1595 and 1596.

As described above, in this embodiment, the sealing members 1560, 1561 are arranged to straddle at least part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8), so for example, the sealing members 1560, 1561 and the electronic component 595 are By checking the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 110 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, since a region 1575 is provided in the sealing member 1560, the inspector can write the name of the inspector and the date when the main board case 200 was opened in the region 1575 (more specifically, in the entry region 1570). can be filled in. The inspector can also write in area 1575 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not fraud was committed on the main control board 110. Further, since the light-transmitting portion 1574 (peeking portion) is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than when only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the examiner to confirm the characters written in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Furthermore, since the sealing member 1560 is provided with a light-transmitting portion 1574 (viewing portion), the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the light-transmitting portion 1574 (viewing portion). Therefore, compared to the case where the transparent part 1574 (peeping part) is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not tampering has been carried out with respect to the electronic component 595. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, the cord section 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the main control section 110m. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control section 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control unit 110m and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, the code section 1572 is linked with information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110, which is stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1. Thereby, the inspector can easily confirm information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 using the code section 1572. Therefore, the inspector can check the information on the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not a fraud has been committed in which the main control board 110 from a different delivery destination has been installed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, a seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110m, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal member 1562. Therefore, by checking the seal member 1562, the inspector can easily confirm that the main control unit 110m is being replaced illegally. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, since at least one of the model name and the manufacturer's name is printed on the seal member 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and the manufacturer's name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and manufacturer name and easily determine whether fraud is being committed. Therefore, players can play games with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Note that the various information displayed on the seal members 1560 and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the main control unit 110m to be visually recognized.
The main board case 200, especially the upper case piece 220, does not have ventilation holes.
The main board case 200 has date marks formed on a lower case piece 210 and an upper case piece 220.
A date mark is a mark for lot management that is added to a case, which is a plastic molded product, during manufacturing (molding).
A feature of this embodiment is that no component is provided near the main control unit 110m at a height that would make the seal member 1562 invisible.

As explained above, the main control board 110 is equipped with the main control unit 110m that controls the game, the information display 113 that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and other electronic components 595 different from these. There is. A transparent sealing member 1560 is attached to the main control board 110. Thereby, other electronic components 595 can be visually recognized through the transparent sealing member 1560 and the main board case 200. Further, the main control unit 110m and the information display 113 can be directly viewed through the main board case 200.

By watermarking the transparent portion of the sealing member 1560 that has a transparent portion and a plurality of non-transparent portions that need to be attached to the main board case 200, duplication of the sealing member 1560 can be prevented. In addition, by pasting the sealing member 1560 in a position that does not overlap the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, the main control unit, which is an important board component, is not affected by watermarking or multiple non-transparent parts. 110m, the visibility of the information display 113 that needs to be read accurately can be ensured.

Regarding the electronic components 595 whose importance is lower than the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, the status can be confirmed through watermarking from the gaps between the multiple non-transparent parts and the surrounding transparent parts 1574 (peeping parts). I can do it. Even if there are multiple non-transparent parts, visibility of the board components can be ensured by the transparent parts. Further, predetermined information, such as necessary information such as identifying the main control unit 110m, can be displayed in the non-transparent portion. Different information can be displayed or written on each of the non-transparent parts.

Note that the information display 113 may be arranged at the lower end of the main control board 110 instead of at the upper end. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 be arranged on the opposite (opposite) upper end side to the information display 113.
The information display 113 may be arranged on the left end side or the right end side of the main control board 110. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 be arranged at the opposite (opposite) end to the information display 113.
Furthermore, as described above, the information display 113 may be arranged inside the main control board 110 instead of at the end thereof. Even in that case, it must be placed in a position that does not overlap with the cables, harnesses, seal members 1560, etc. extending from the connectors 771 to 776.

In the present embodiment, the RWM clear switch 111a is described as being disposed on the main control board 110, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and it may be disposed on the payout control board 120. Further, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 112a is described as being disposed on the main control board 110, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The setting key switch 112a can be placed at a separate position from the main control board 110 as long as it is electrically connected to the main control board 110.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically explained using FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 centrally controls the progress of the game (basic operations). The main control board 110 includes a main control unit 110m as a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It is equipped with an input port for main control, an output port, etc. The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the production control board 130, etc.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 is It is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the production control board 130.

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , a magnetic detection sensor 53a, a radio wave detection sensor 54a, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, a payout control board 120, and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, a winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, a main information display device 59, a game information output terminal board 90, a payout control board 120, a performance control board 130, etc. is connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various indicators, and game notifications to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) from the gaming information output terminal board through the output port. Information etc. are output.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of the payout command from the main control board 110, and also controls the firing of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, etc. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and operates the payout device 100. control, and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the production control board 130, etc.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, etc. A dispensing motor 100b provided in the dispensing device 100 is connected to an output port of the dispensing control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives the payout command from the main control board 110, it drives the payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to control the payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and controls the payout ball detection switch 100a to pay out a predetermined number of game balls. When the payout of game balls is detected, the control for paying out game balls is ended.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, etc. (not shown). A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to an input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feeding solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, etc. are connected to an output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed based on the detection signal from the firing volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is fired so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. The game ball is fired by driving the solenoid 28b.

The firing solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to a rotating shaft, and as the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates and launches the game ball A. . Note that the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to approximately 99.9 times/minute based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the firing of the game ball in one minute is approximately 99.9 times per minute. The number is approximately 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, the game ball will be fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The performance control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the performance command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b in which an effect control program is stored, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an effect control unit 130m, and a first image display device 70 (main display control unit 140 that controls the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the panel drive device 75, and the panel lighting. It includes a lamp control section 150 that controls the device 76 and the like, and an input port, an output port, etc. for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby processing commands received from the main control board 110. In response to input signals from the display button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects (data and commands are transmitted). Output).

A performance button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), etc. are connected to the input port of the performance control board 130. In the production control board 130, a production button detection signal indicating that the production button 17 has been operated is input from the production button detection switch 17a, and a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the production control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. or controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that collectively controls image display and audio output based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m, and a control unit 141 that controls display control commands (display list) from the general control unit 141. A video control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and a voice control unit that receives voice control commands from the general control unit 141. It includes an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on the audio data, and an audio ROM 149 that stores audio data and the like.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which LSI is connected.

The overall CPU 141a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out an overall control program stored in the overall ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while utilizing the overall RAM 141c as a work area. Thereby, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device It performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command instructing the effect sound to be output from the audio controller 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The VRAM 143 provided in the image control unit 145 (VDP) is a display list storage area that temporarily stores the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142a), and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , and a frame buffer area corresponding to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing starts.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the “frame buffer for drawing” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the general control unit 141. The drawing data is read from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, and a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second It is output to an image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display various images.

Note that the image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by frequency-dividing this operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display Generates a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and displays the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Output to. In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) based on various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 130m. Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display on the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In response to performance instruction commands and the like, control is performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined performances (data and commands are output).

The frame lighting device 10, button drive device 17b, panel lighting device 76, and sub information display device 80 are connected to the input/output port of the lamp control section, and the information is transmitted from the production control section 130m (sub CPU 130a). Based on the various production data (including commands), the lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 is performed, and the button driving device 17b and, It also performs drive control of drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine 1, and supplies the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, production control (substrate 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power outage detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power outage (power outage). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 during a power outage (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the supply of main power is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a becomes operational when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, and the main CPU 110a enters an operational state when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is applied to the gaming machine, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. supply As a result, even in the event of a power outage (power outage), the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c will be retained, and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the gaming control state will be returned to the state before the power outage (power outage). It can be restored. Note that backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the production control board 130.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the states related to jackpot determination of special symbols include a "low probability state" and "high probability state," and the states related to the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 include a "non-time saving state" and ""time saving state".

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) Normal gaming state that is a “low probability state” and a “non-time-saving state” (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state)
(2) A time-saving gaming state that is a “low probability state” and a “time-saving state” (low-probability time-saving gaming state)
(3) A variable probability gaming state that is a "high probability state" and a "time saving state" (high probability time saving gaming state)

Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state." In addition, in this embodiment, the "low-probability time-saving gaming state" and the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, so they may be referred to as "specific gaming states."

In this embodiment, the "low probability state" means, for example, when the set value (jackpot probability in jackpot determination), which is the stage of advantageousness of the game, is "1", the first starting port 45 or the 2 Refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set as low as about 1/300 in jackpot determination of a special symbol performed on the condition that a game ball enters a starting hole 47. On the other hand, "high probability state" means that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in a low probability state, and when the setting value is "1", the probability of winning a jackpot is set as high as approximately 1/60. Indicates the game state.

Specifically, there are four setting values, ``1'' to ``4.'' When the setting value is ``1,'' the probability of winning the jackpot in a low probability state is approximately 1/300, which is a high probability. The probability of winning the jackpot in the state is approximately 1/60, and if the setting value is "2", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/295, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately If the setting value is "3", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/290, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately 1/58, and the setting value is "3". 4, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/285, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high probability state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low probability state". Further, the low probability state changes to the high probability state after the jackpot game described later is completed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state is referred to as a "probable jackpot". In addition, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a low probability state is called a "normal jackpot."

In this embodiment, the "non-time saving state" refers to the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbols that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44. This is a game state that is set longer than the "time saving state" and in which the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and a variable display of the normal pattern is performed on the normal pattern display 62, but after the variable display of the normal pattern starts, For example, the display stops after 30 seconds. If the lottery result is a win, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the normal symbols are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, the "time saving state" means that in a normal symbol winning lottery that is performed on the condition that a game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the regular symbols corresponding to the lottery result is 0. .5 seconds, which is shorter than the "non-time-saving state", and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set, for example, to 2.5 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time-saving state". Tells the game status. Furthermore, in the "non-time saving state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time saving state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to be low, for example 127/128. is set high. Therefore, in the "time saving state", when the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time saving state". As a result, in the "time saving state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game in a state where it is difficult to consume game balls.

The "time-saving game state" includes a normal time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game (via the jackpot game), which will be described later, and the establishment of a predetermined condition (based on execution of RWM clear, end of the jackpot game). A special time-saving game state that is controlled (without going through a jackpot game) when the number of loss fluctuation displays of special symbols executed from 0 clear of the number of fluctuations reaches a specified number (900 times in this embodiment) is set.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time saving state" is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery are more advantageous than the "non-time saving state". However, the "time saving state" is set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. Good too. Further, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be set to, for example, 0/128.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is five times the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state (common regardless of the setting value). The probability is not limited to 5 times, but may be set to any value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as it is 10 times or less.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the jackpot determination, a small win that is less advantageous to the winner than a jackpot is not won, but for example, a small win is set to be won with a probability of about 1/100. Good too. In this case, it is preferable that the small win probability be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the setting value is, the more advantageous it becomes to the player (higher jackpot probability), but conversely, the smaller the setting value is, the more advantageous it becomes to the player (higher jackpot probability). You may also do so.

In addition, the probability of being judged as a jackpot in a low probability state and/or a high probability state may be set to be the same for all setting values (1 to 4), or for example, for two or three setting values (1 and 4), 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of determining a jackpot in the low probability state and/or the high probability state may be the same. Further, although the setting values in this embodiment are in four stages from 1 to 4, they are not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages (for example, even if it is one stage) good).

In addition, there are a normal time-saving game state and a special time-saving game state as time-saving game states, but as a result of the jackpot determination process, a special loss that is different from a normal loss is won, and as a result of the fluctuating display of special symbols, a special loss special In response to symbols being stopped and displayed, a specific time-saving game state may be generated for a predetermined period of time (for example, until the variable display of special symbols is executed 100 times, etc.). Various controls in the specific time-saving gaming state may be conducted in accordance with the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15.

(Jackpot judgment table)
FIG. 10(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting port 45. , FIG. 10(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 10(a) and (b), the jackpot judgment table corresponds to the current setting value, the current probability state, the random value for jackpot judgment, and the jackpot judgment result (jackpot, loss). As a reference, the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot" is listed in the far right column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10(b), and determines the current setting value, probability state, and jackpot. Based on the random number value for determination, it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss".

For example, according to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. The random number value for determination is determined to be a "jackpot". Then, random numbers for jackpot determination other than those determined to be jackpots are determined to be "losses".

Note that the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored in the first special figure determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c, The special figure determination information acquired based on the winning is stored in the second special figure determination information reservation storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when making a jackpot determination, the special symbol determination information stored in the first special symbol determination information retention storage area or the second special symbol determination information retention storage area is shifted to the special symbol determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c. , jackpot determination will be performed using the shifted special figure determination information.

In addition, the first special figure judgment information reservation storage area is divided into a first storage part to a fourth storage part, and the reservation corresponding to the special figure judgment information stored in these first storage part to fourth storage part is divided into the first to fourth storage parts. The icons are displayed on the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B, respectively. The second special figure determination information reservation storage area is divided into first to fourth storage sections, and the reservation icons corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first to fourth storage sections are They are displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 11(a) is a special symbol determination table for jackpot for determining the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 11(b) is a special symbol determination table for determining the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined. This is a special symbol determination table for losing to determine the type.

As shown in FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b), the special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the random value for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol, and the information corresponding to the determination result. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result are associated.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which a jackpot game is not executed. Special symbols "01" and "04" are special jackpot symbols that execute the first jackpot game, and special symbols "02" and "05" are jackpot symbols that execute the second jackpot game. , the special symbol "03" is a jackpot symbol for executing the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game in which the grand prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to six times. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed. Further, after the first jackpot game ends, the normal time-saving game state (low probability non-time-saving game state) is set until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 50 or 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", a round game in which the grand prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. Furthermore, after the second jackpot game ends, the variable probability game state (highly accurate time-saving game state) is set until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, judging from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

In the "third jackpot game", a round game in which the second jackpot 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the jackpot is closed for two seconds is executed up to four times. Furthermore, after the third jackpot game ends, the variable probability game state (highly accurate time-saving game state) is set until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, judging from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

Although one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of losing special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Good too.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of FIGS. 11(a) to 11(b), and determines the type of special symbol, based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed and the random value for special symbol determination. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the type of jackpot special symbol and the type of loss special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player can play the game with peace of mind without having complicated gameplay.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for normal use)
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special symbol fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 12(a) is a normal special symbol variation pattern determination table 1 that is referred to when performing a basic special symbol variation display in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 12(b) is the normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination that is referred to when executing the fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining number of reserved second special symbols at the end of the special time saving state when transitioning from the special time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. This is table 2.

(Special figure variation pattern judgment table for definite variation/normal time saving)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for probability variable/normal time saving that is referred to when determining a special symbol variation pattern in the variable probability gaming state or the normal time saving gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 13(a) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table 1 for probability variation/normal time saving that is referred to when performing a basic special symbol variation display in the probability variation gaming state or the normal time saving gaming state. FIG. 13(b) is the normal time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table 2 that is referred to when executing the final special symbol variation display in the normal time-saving gaming state.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for special time saving)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for special time saving that is referred to when determining a special symbol fluctuation pattern in the special time saving game state.

Specifically, FIG. 14(a) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for special time saving that is referred to when performing a special symbol fluctuation display when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c. 14(b) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table 2 for special time saving that is referred to when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and a variable display of the special symbol that is the beginning of the special time saving gaming state is executed; FIG. 14(c) shows a special time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table 3 that is referred to when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and a variable display of special symbols before the final one of the special time-saving gaming state is executed. FIG. 14(d) shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination for special time saving that is referred to when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and the special symbol fluctuation display that is the final round of the special time saving gaming state is executed. This is table 4.

As shown in Figures 12 to 14, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening) that performs variable display, the jackpot determination result, and the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data). , the random number for reach determination, the first special figure reservation number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2), the random value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, the special figure fluctuation pattern as a determination result, and the special The variation time of the symbol is associated with a special symbol variation pattern designation command indicating the special symbol variation pattern.

Therefore, the "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be one that can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, and determines the jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), random number for reach determination, and first special symbol reservation number (U1 ) or the second special figure reservation number (U2), the special figure variation pattern is determined based on the random value for special figure variation pattern determination, and the production control board 130 issues a special figure variation pattern designation command according to the special figure variation pattern. It is supposed to be sent to.

In addition, the performance control board 130 determines the content (performance mode) of the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance symbols 70a, in accordance with the fluctuation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.), as will be described later. Therefore, in the rightmost column of the special pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the production contents that can be executed with the variable production are described for reference.

As for the production contents shown in the variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, "normal variation", "shortened variation", and "ultra shortened variation" mean that the three production symbols 70a vary at high speed and reach It means to stop without stopping.

In addition, "reach" means that the player expects a jackpot game to be executed in which a part of the combination of presentation symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other presentation symbols 70a change. means the manner in which it changes. For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot, the same performance symbols 70a in the left and right regions temporarily stop at "7". , refers to a mode in which the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (not completely stopped). refers to the manner in which the

In addition, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a changes in the center area, and the expectation level of jackpot is the lowest. This is a reach production.

Moreover, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects that have a higher expectation of a jackpot than normal reach effects, and are performed after the normal reach effect and the extended effect. For example, the two performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to the corners of the first image display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is used to perform a special reach performance. . Note that in the "Special SP Reach", a more special effect than in the "SP Reach" is executed.

Furthermore, "SPSP reach" and "SPSP '7' reach" are special reach performances that have higher expectations for a jackpot than super reach performances, and are executed after the normal reach performance or the super reach performance. For example, a normal reach performance is performed to a development performance, and then the three performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to a corner of the first image display device 70, using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. It is designed to perform a special reach effect than "SP reach". In addition, in "SPSP reach", a reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a other than "7", and in "SPSP "7" reach", a reach effect is performed with a pattern of "7".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach that guarantees a jackpot, and is executed after the normal reach performance. For example, a development effect is executed from a normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and change at a low speed, and "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. It is designed to have a special reach effect (reach effect that guarantees a jackpot) than "SPSP '7' Reach".

In addition, "resurrection fluctuation (this)" is a performance in which a resurrection effect is performed that suggests that the player will return to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player due to a jackpot, and it changes from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. This is executed without going through the reach after an end notification performance is performed that suggests the end of a specific game state that is advantageous to the player after the transition.

"Chance production variation (current)" is a variation production in which a chance production suggesting that it is a chance to execute a jackpot game is executed, and is executed without going through a reach. For example, after a character image "Chance Approaching" is displayed on the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which three effect symbols 70a are displayed in a lined state.

"Result fluctuation" refers to the result of gaming during a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving gaming state continues, triggered by a jackpot game from the normal gaming state called the so-called first win, in the final fluctuation display of the normal time-saving gaming state. The result is displayed. Note that the results may be displayed not from the first win, but from a series of advantageous periods during which conditions advantageous to the player continue.

"Result revival variation (current)" is a production in which a revival effect is performed that suggests that the player will return to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player due to a jackpot, and is a variation in the final game of the normal time-saving gaming state. Executed without going through reach after the result is displayed on the display.

"(Sudden)～Fluctuation" means that when it is the first fluctuation of the special time-saving gaming state, a short entry effect is performed that suggests entering the special time-saving gaming state in a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds), and the special time-saving gaming state is If it is not the first change in the time-saving game state, it indicates that the short entry performance is not performed.

"Long entry performance variation" means that in the first variation of the special time-saving game state, a long entry performance that suggests entering the special time-saving game state in a relatively long time (for example, 6 seconds) is performed. This is a variation pattern exclusively for the first variation of the special time-saving gaming state when there is a jackpot history.

"Immediate hit variation (win)" is a performance in which the player is notified of an advantageous result (jackpot) without going through the reach, and in the end, the three performance symbols 70a are aligned. It is designed to perform effects that are displayed depending on the state.

The "end suggestion variation" is a performance in which an end notification performance suggesting the end of the special time-saving game state is performed, and is executed in the final variation display of the special time-saving game state with a jackpot history.

"End Suggestion Revival Fluctuation (This)" is a performance in which a resurrection effect is performed that suggests a jackpot and a return to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It is executed without going through the reach after the end notification effect is started in the variable display.

In addition, when the first special symbol fluctuates and is displayed in the normal gaming state, the "immediate hit fluctuation" is not executed, but even when the first special symbol fluctuates and is displayed, the "immediate hit fluctuation" is not executed. "Win variation" may be executed.

The first feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that during the final variation display of the normal time-saving gaming state (series of advantageous periods), a variation effect in which a result display is performed is executed. There are several points that can be mentioned. By doing so, the player can check the results of the games during a series of advantageous periods, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the games.

The second feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that during the fluctuation display, which is the final round of the special time-saving game state, the end notification effect is performed without displaying the result. Can be mentioned. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied with the display of the results of games during a series of advantageous periods even though no jackpot games have been executed, and to increase the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the

A third feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that different special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables are used for the normal time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state. By doing this, even if they are in the same time-saving game state, the performance contents can be made different between the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that in the fluctuation display during the special time-saving gaming state, a special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table that differs depending on the presence or absence of jackpot history (RWM clear) is used. The following points can be mentioned. By doing so, the performance content during the variable display in the special time-saving game state can be varied depending on the presence or absence of a jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that in the first fluctuation during the special time-saving gaming state, a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that differs depending on whether there is a jackpot history (RWM clear) is used. The following points can be mentioned. By doing so, the performance content during the first variable display in the special time-saving game state can be varied depending on the presence or absence of a jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that in the first fluctuation during the special time-saving gaming state, the number of special symbol fluctuation patterns when there is a jackpot history (RWM clear) is higher than the number of special symbol fluctuation patterns when there is a jackpot history (RWM clear). , The number of special pattern fluctuation patterns that are determined is larger when there is no jackpot history. By doing so, the performance content during the first variable display in the special time-saving game state can be varied depending on the presence or absence of a jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that if the first fluctuation in a special time-saving gaming state with a jackpot history (RWM clear) is a loss, a dedicated special symbol is used for the first time. One point is that the figure fluctuation pattern is determined. By doing so, a special performance (long entry performance) can be performed in the first fluctuation during the special time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that in the final fluctuation during the special time-saving gaming state, a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that differs depending on whether there is a jackpot history (RWM clear) is used. The following points can be mentioned. By doing so, the performance content during the last variable display in the special time-saving game state can be varied depending on the presence or absence of a jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that in the final fluctuation during the special time-saving gaming state, the number of special pattern fluctuation patterns when there is a jackpot history (RWM clear) is , The number of special pattern fluctuation patterns that are determined is larger when there is no jackpot history. By doing so, the performance content during the last variable display in the special time-saving game state can be varied depending on the presence or absence of a jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that if the final fluctuation during a special time-saving gaming state with a jackpot history (RWM clear) results in a loss, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. One point is that the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined. By doing so, a special performance (end suggestion performance) can be performed at the final change during the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that during the special time-saving gaming state, when the loss variation display (first variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed, When the loss variation display (second variation performance) of the second special symbol is executed, there are more types of special symbol variation patterns (variation production pattern) to be determined (executed). By doing so, the player can be induced to display the second special symbol in a variable manner that is advantageous to the player in the special time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that the average fluctuation time of the special symbols (mainly the second special symbol) during the time-saving gaming state is different from that of the normal symbol during the time-saving gaming state. The average fluctuation time of By doing this, even in the time-saving gaming state where the average fluctuation time of the special symbols is shorter than in the normal gaming state, the second pending memory is likely to accumulate, and by quickly executing the fluctuation display of the special symbols. , it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Pre-judgment table)
FIG. 15(a) is an example of a preliminary determination table for the non-time-saving state for pre-judging (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 during the non-time-saving state. FIG. 15(b) is a diagram illustrating a time-saving state preliminary judgment for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47 during the time-saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of a determination table.

As shown in FIG. 15, the preliminary determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. , a special figure scheduled variation pattern as a determination result and a prefetch designation command indicating the special figure scheduled variation pattern are associated.

Therefore, the "special pattern scheduled variation pattern" can be said to be able to specify the type of special symbol, the result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern scheduled to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the advance determination table shown in FIG. 15, and determines the planned special pattern fluctuation based on the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. The pattern is determined and a prefetch designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern is sent to the production control board 130.

(Game status setting table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 16, the gaming state setting table includes the stop special symbol data of the jackpot special symbol, the gaming state information at the time of winning the jackpot, and the gaming state flag to be set (time saving flag indicating that it is a time saving state, (high probability flag indicating that it is a high probability state), the first time saving number (J1) which is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol that ends the time saving gaming state, and the second special symbol that ends the time saving gaming state The second time saving number (J2), which is the number of variable displays, corresponds to the third time saving number (J3), which is the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that end the time saving gaming state. It is attached.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 is that the second time saving number (J2) set when the game is executed in the normal gaming state is higher than the second time saving number (J2) set when the game is performed in the normal gaming state. One point is that there is a jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of times shortened by 2 hours (J2) is greater. By doing this, the second time saving number (J2) set depending on the type of jackpot game can be varied, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 is that three types of time saving times are set, so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are changed during the time saving state. No matter which one is executed, the time saving state ends after an appropriate number of times, so it is possible to provide a fair time saving state among the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 17. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a disables all interrupts in step S1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and performs startup wait processing for other boards in step S3. Specifically, in order to avoid missing commands from the main control board 110, the CPU waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 to start up.

The main CPU 110a allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing to permit the shooting device 26 to shoot the game ball.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power has been restored, and the process moves to step S7; if the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that the power is turned on for the first time, and the process moves to step S8.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed in step S8. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process moves to step S9 as a transition to setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process moves to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S9. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a setting value area of the gaming RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. Displays the current setting values saved in and sends a setting change designation command to the production control board 130.

Furthermore, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) in the range of "1" to "4", the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is When there is a setting confirmation operation that changes the setting from the ON state to the OFF state, the changed (updated) setting value is saved in the setting value area to confirm the setting value, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended. At the same time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

In addition, in the production control board 130 which received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed will be performed. Specifically, a settings change screen is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 to indicate that the settings are being changed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are displayed in a predetermined manner while the settings are being changed. All the lights are turned on with the same emission color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 9 may output a settings change notification sound (“Settings are being changed”) indicating that settings are being changed.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal in step S10. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), the process moves to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), Assuming that it is not possible to normally return to the control state before power-off, the process moves to step S12.

Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S12. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an irreversible error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130. , sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and after clearing the output port, outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process for notifying an unrecoverable error.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (no transition to game control occurs), and is not canceled unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, even if you turn off the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 and then turn on the power switch without changing settings, it will not be canceled and the It is now necessary to turn on the power switch in conjunction with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Note that although the "unrecoverable error" is not cleared unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be cleared when RWM clear is executed without the setting change process.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a notification to make the user aware that an unrecoverable error has occurred. "), the frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 76 are lit in a predetermined color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the audio output device 9. An unrecoverable error sound ("Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) indicating that the error has occurred is output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board illumination device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "production device."

The main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed in step S13. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, it is assumed that RWM clear is to be executed and the process moves to step S14, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, processing is performed to initialize the gaming control state (initialize the gaming RWM area other than the setting value area).

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command to the payout control board 120 and the power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state). It is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the process moves to step S21. As a result, the production control board 130 performs processing for executing power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135" ), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit up in a predetermined color (for example, red) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), and the RWM area is displayed from the audio output device 9. This means outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) to indicate that the device has been initialized.
Note that in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S17 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was cut off. The process moves to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a setting value area of the gaming RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. Displays the current set values saved in and sends a setting confirmation designation command to the production control board 130.

Furthermore, when there is a confirmation end operation that changes the setting key switch 112a from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended, and the state confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is ended, Performs processing to end setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in the production control board 130 which received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed will be performed. Specifically, the image display devices 70 and 71 display a setting confirmation screen indicating that the settings are being confirmed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 emit a predetermined light while the settings are being confirmed. Turn on all lights in a color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Setting values are being confirmed”) indicating that the settings are being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the gaming RWM area, and sets the gaming RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the production control board 130 a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage occurred. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process for terminating setting confirmation notification, etc., which will be described later, and executing power recovery notification.

"Power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect The frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 are fully illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g. blue) for a predetermined period (e.g. 60 seconds), the audio output device 9 A power restoration notification sound ("power has been restored" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power outage) is output for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds).
Note that in the power restoration notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that the power has been restored may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a executes other commands (a command for specifying the number of reserved special symbols (U1) and a second reserved number of special symbols (U2), and the number of reserved regular symbols (G)). A command for specifying the number of reserved general figures shown) is transmitted to the production control board 130. As a result, the performance control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols and the number of reserved regular symbols, and also perform processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70. It will be done.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the production control board 130 in step S21. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the production control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are transmitted. Furthermore, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time a variable display of special symbols starts, or each time a jackpot game starts.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol determination to determine the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and in step S25, An initial value random value update process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether a power outage detection signal is input from the power outage detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power outage detection signal is not input, the process moves to step S24, and the power outage detection is performed. If a signal is input, the process moves to step S27.

The main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step S27, clears the output port in step S28, and clears the gaming RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c in step S29. In step S30, a process is performed to save a backup flag in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, Processing is performed to prohibit RAM access, and the process waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, it is not possible to change settings easily, which makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts and improve the security of gaming machines. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is greater than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, making it possible to avoid the most fraudulent setting changes. It is possible to increase the security of events where acts are likely to be committed, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, causing the game machine to perform unexpected operations and causing inconvenience to the game parlor and players. This eliminates the need for overtime, making it possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, if the value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, in other words, if the previous power-off may have occurred while changing the settings, irreversible error processing will be executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with setting values that are not intended by the game parlor, thereby improving the reliability of the game machine. Become.

Also, while changing settings (setting change mode) or checking settings (setting confirmation mode), on the front (surface) of gaming machine 1, there are a status confirmation display 68, image display devices 70 and 71, and a frame lighting device. It is possible to recognize that the settings are being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back side (back side). ing. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front) or the back (back) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the condition for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. By doing so, the number of conditions increases, so fraudulent acts can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

In addition, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is performed. is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the gaming program initializes the gaming RWM area (clears it to 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the setting value area. Then, the process may be moved to step S13.

Additionally, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power has been restored) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the gaming program initializes the gaming RWM area (clears it to 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the setting value area. , the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current gaming state, but after transmitting the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the current gaming state Alternatively, a gaming state designation command indicating the game state may be transmitted.

In addition, when the power is turned off or turned on, the gaming program calculates the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c, but the information program calculates the checksum. may be calculated. In this case, it is preferable to save the calculated checksum in the information RWM area.

Also, when the power is turned off or turned on, the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but even if the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may proceed to irreversible error processing.

Additionally, a settings change designation command is sent at the start of the settings change process, and a power-on designation command is sent after the settings change process ends, but instead of the settings change designation command, a settings change start designation command is sent. However, instead of the power-on designation command, a setting change end designation command may be sent. In this case, the settings change end designation command may be sent at the end of the settings change process, or may be sent after the settings change process ends.

Further, when a setting change is made, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting change is made, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting change is made.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, updates the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter such as the opening time of special electric accessories, etc. It performs time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as updating processing of , normal symbol time counter updating processing, and updating processing of opening/closing time of the movable member 48 . Specifically, 1 is subtracted from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting port opening timer counter, and a starting port closing timer counter.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for hit determination, a random value for normal symbol determination, and a regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination. Performs specific random number update processing to update random numbers. Specifically, each random value and random number counter are updated by adding +1. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial value random value is set as a new round initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a, similarly to step S30, sets the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination. Perform initial value random value update processing to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, etc. It determines whether or not there is an input to each switch, and performs input control processing to set predetermined data if there is an input. The details will be described later using FIG. 19.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a operates a special figure special electric line for determining the number of reserved special figures (judgment of jackpot, etc.), controlling the display of special symbols, controlling opening/closing of the grand prize opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), controlling the gaming state, etc. Performs control processing. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a executes a normal pattern and general electric power control process for determining the number of normal patterns stored (hit determination, etc.), controlling the display of normal symbols, controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), etc. conduct.

It should be noted that the type of winning normal symbol and the type of losing normal symbol determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol determination information performed in the ordinary symbol and electric power control process are the same without changing depending on the setting value. By doing so, the gameplay is not too complicated and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various winning ordinary symbols and the selection ratio of various losing ordinary symbols, which are determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol judgment information performed in the ordinary symbol general electricity control process, do not change depending on the setting value and remain constant. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation command to the payout control board 120 for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120, and sends a prize ball counter (3 prize ball counter, 10 award balls counter, 15 award balls counter), and performs payout control processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning holes to the payout control board 120. Thereby, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and issues a magnetic abnormality error specification command and a radio wave abnormality error specification command. Performs magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting commands to the production control board 130. In addition, when the production control board 130 receives the error designation command for magnetic abnormality or the error designation command for radio wave abnormality, it performs control to perform magnetic abnormality error notification or radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (gaming information) from the gaming information output terminal board 90, starting opening opening/closing data outputting to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening/closing data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60 and second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, and performs data creation processing to create data such as special symbol pending display data to be output to the second special symbol pending display 64 and normal symbol pending display data to be output to the normal symbol pending display 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing to output signals such as the external information data, starting opening opening/closing data, and big winning opening opening/closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , a display output process that outputs signals such as special symbol pending display data, normal symbol pending display data, etc., and a payout command transmission process that transmits a command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Also, an output control process is performed to execute a production command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the production control board 130.

The main CPU 110a performs information program call processing in step S800. Specifically, after disabling interrupts, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program using a CALL instruction.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the number of payouts during normal play, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes (general winning hole, big winning hole, starting hole) during normal gaming state, Processing is performed to count the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, regardless of the gaming state. .

In addition, the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal play, and the number of outs during normal play are gaming information that is not affected (unrelated to the setting value) even if the setting value is changed, so these By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value to be described later) that excludes the influence of the set value, and it becomes possible to use it for understanding the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((Number of payouts during normal play ÷ Number of outs during normal play) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. Processing is performed to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is divided into a first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored, and a one-time storage area. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous gaming section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the two previous gaming sections, and a normal base value in the three previous gaming sections. A fourth area for playing the game is provided, and the base values for four game sections including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base value (performance information) for four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area is displayed on the information display 113 while being switched every 5 seconds. Performs processing to set performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, processing is performed to create test data (test information) to be output to test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing is performed to output signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various indicators, and processing is performed to output signals such as test data created in step S870 above. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing upon returning to the gaming program. Specifically, processing is performed to restore the flag register from the gaming RWM area, enable interrupts, and return to the gaming program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the setting change processing, RWM clear processing, and setting confirmation processing, so it is not possible to count the number of payouts and outs, calculate the performance information of the gaming machine, and perform the processing of the gaming machine. Since the performance information is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board 110.

Although the performance information calculation process was performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Further, the game ball counting process may also be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. In this general winning hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning a prize opening detection switch 43a, the process moves to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, data indicating 5 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (5 prize ball counter) for the general winning hole used for prize balls and updated. Then, after adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updating it (D←D+1), the general winning hole detection switch input process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. In this big winning hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the big winning hole detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process moves to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning opening detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter (15 winning balls counter) for the big winning opening used for winning balls. Update and add "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that entered the winning slot and update (D←D+1) to determine whether the current jackpot game (special game) is in progress. Determine whether If you are currently playing a jackpot game, add "1" to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have entered the big winning hole 50 and update it (C←C+1). Detection switch input processing ends.

If the current gaming state is not a special gaming state, the number of illegal winning balls that have won (balls entered) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, big winning opening 50) outside the winning winning period. Add "1" to the counter (E) and update it (E←E+1), determine whether the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number (for example, 10), and If the value of the ball counter (E) is less than or equal to the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is ended.

If the value of the illegal prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, an illegal prize winning (unauthorized winning ball) in which a game ball wins a prize (balls entered) outside the winning period has occurred, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is designated. Set the command to the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, an error specifying command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 issues a fraudulent winning error notification to notify that a fraudulent winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the big winning opening is detected. End switch input processing. As a result, a fraudulent winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to grasp (specify) that a fraudulent winning has occurred.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. In this first starting port detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or not. Note that details of the first starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. In this second starting port detection switch input process, it is determined whether the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 47 or not. Note that details of the second starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the regular figure gate 44 or not. If no detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process ends.

When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of regular symbols held, which is the number of regular symbols stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area, is less than four. If the number of reserved general drawings is not less than 4, the input control process is ended.

If the number of reserved symbols is less than 4, the number of reserved symbols is updated by adding "1", and the ordinary symbol judgment information (random value for hit determination, random value for determining ordinary symbols, fluctuation pattern of ordinary symbols) is updated. Random value for determination) is acquired, and the vacant storage sections are searched in order from the first storage section in the normal symbol storage area, and the acquired ordinary symbol determination information is stored in the empty storage section and input. Control processing ends.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, the main CPU 110a updates the 3-prize ball counter used for prize balls. A random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, a random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-5, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start The mouth detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and updating it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the main CPU 110a performs processing to update the first special symbol pending number (U1). A first special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the figure reservation number (U1) is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special figure reservation number designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the first special figure reservation number.

The main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the first special symbol reservation storage area in step S230-7. Specifically, since the first special symbol holding storage area is divided into the first storage part to the fourth storage part, the empty storage parts are searched in order from the first storage part, and the empty storage part is searched in order. The special figure determination information obtained in the above is stored.

As a result of the above, the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area stores special symbol determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, and special symbol fluctuation pattern determination). A first pending memory (first pending) consisting of random numbers, etc.) is stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current gaming state is in a non-time saving gaming state (normal gaming state). If it is in a non-time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S230-9, and if it is not in a non-time-saving gaming state (in a fixed-variable gaming state or a time-saving gaming state), it is assumed that a left-handed hit error has occurred. The process moves to step S230-12.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special time-saving gaming state is reached within a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, five times). If it is not within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the process moves to step S230-10, and if it is within the predetermined number of fluctuations, it is assumed that the pre-read determination of the special figure determination information is not executed and the current first starting opening detection switch input processing is performed. end.

The main CPU 110a performs a first prefetch determination process in step S230-10. In this first look-ahead determination process, a preliminary determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special symbol determination information (first pending memory) acquired this time is pre-determined prior to execution of the variable display of special symbols based on the determination information. Then, a planned variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a sets the first prefetch designation command corresponding to the determined scheduled fluctuation pattern in the performance transmission data storage area, and ends the current first starting opening detection switch input process.

As a result, the first prefetch designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 starts changing the special symbol corresponding to the first prefetch designation command. It is possible to execute a prefetched preview performance that executes a predetermined preview performance over a plurality of variable displays. Note that the pre-read preview effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76. This is done using

In step S230-12, the main CPU 110a sets a left-handed hit error designation command in the presentation transmission data storage area, and ends the current first starting opening detection switch input process. As a result, a left-handed hitting error designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 issues a left-handed hitting error notification to promote right-handed hitting.

(Input processing of the second starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The second starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the second starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is input (a game ball enters the second starting port 47). If the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is input, the process moves to step S240-2, and if the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is not input, the current 2. End the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the one-prize ball counter used for the prize ball by adding data indicating one prize ball, and in step S240-3, the main CPU 110a updates the one-prize ball counter used for the prize ball with the special figure determination information ( A random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, a random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is less than four. If the second special figure reservation number (U2) is less than 4, the process moves to step S240-5, and if the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not less than 4, the current second start The mouth detection switch input process ends.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) and updating it (U2←U2+1), and in step S240-6, the main CPU 110a performs processing to add "1" to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) and update it (U2←U2+1). A second special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the figure reservation number (U2) is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the second special figure reservation number designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the second special figure reservation number.

The main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the second special symbol retention storage area in step S240-7. Specifically, since the second special symbol holding storage area is divided into the first storage section to the fourth storage section, the empty storage sections are searched in order from the first storage section, and the empty storage section is searched sequentially from the first storage section to the fourth storage section. The special figure determination information obtained in the above is stored.

As a result of the above, the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area stores special symbol determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, and special symbol fluctuation pattern determination). A second pending memory (second pending) consisting of random numbers, etc.) is stored.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current gaming state is a variable probability gaming state or a time saving gaming state. If the game is in the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S240-9, and if it is not in the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (if it is in the normal gaming state), it is determined that a right-handed hit error has occurred. As such, the process moves to step S240-12.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations is within a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, five times) after the start or before the end of the time saving state. If it is not within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the process moves to step S240-10, and if it is within the predetermined number of fluctuations, it is assumed that the pre-read determination of the special figure determination information is not executed and the current second starting opening detection switch input processing is performed. end.

The main CPU 110a performs a second prefetch determination process in step S240-10. In this second look-ahead determination process, a preliminary determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special symbol determination information acquired this time (second pending memory) is pre-determined prior to execution of the variable display of special symbols based on the determination information. Then, a planned variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S240-11, the main CPU 110a sets a second prefetch designation command corresponding to the determined scheduled variation pattern in the performance transmission data storage area, and ends the current second starting opening detection switch input process.

As a result, the second prefetch designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 starts the first or previous execution before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the second prefetch designation command starts. It is possible to execute a prefetched preview performance that executes a predetermined preview performance over a plurality of variable displays. Note that the pre-read preview effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the panel lighting device 76. This is done using

In step S240-12, the main CPU 110a sets a right-hand hit error designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the current second starting opening detection switch input process. As a result, a right-handed hitting error designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 issues a right-handed hitting error notification to promote left-handed hitting.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric line processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric line processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, The current special map special electric train control process ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the reserved memory (special figure judgment information), the variable time is set, and the start command (special figure judgment information) is started. Performs processing for transmitting (symbol memory designation command, gaming state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) to the production control board 130, processing for changing special symbol special electric processing data to "1", etc. A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) is executed. The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.

If the special pattern special electric processing data = 1, the variable display of the special pattern is stopped as the variation time elapses, the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set, and the stop command (special pattern stop command) is produced and controlled. A special symbol variation process (step S320) is executed to perform a process for transmitting to the board 130 and a process for changing the special figure special electric process data to "2". The details of the special symbol variation process will be described later.

If the special pattern special electricity processing data = 2, the special pattern special electricity processing data will be changed to "0" if the special symbol is a loss as the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has passed, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, it will be a jackpot. The opening time of the game is set, and processing for transmitting an opening designation command to the performance control board 130 and special symbol stop processing (step S330) for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the round game is started as the opening time of the jackpot game has elapsed, and the jackpot is executed based on the processing for transmitting the round number designation command to the production control board 130 and the end of the final round game. Executes jackpot game processing (step S340) for setting the ending time of the game and transmitting an ending designation command to the production control board 130, processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", etc. do.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process for ending the jackpot game as the ending time passes, and the game state after the jackpot ends (low-accuracy time-saving game state, high-accuracy time-saving game state, high probability number of times, time-saving number) ), a jackpot game end process (step S350) is executed to perform a process to set the special figure special electric line process data to "0", etc. The details of the jackpot game ending process will be described later.

(Special symbol memory determination processing of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the special symbol is not in the variable display state, the process moves to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process goes to step S310-4. move.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second special figure reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1," and in step S310-6, the second special figure reservation number (U2) corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after the subtraction. A special symbol storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, sets the gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data stored in the storage section, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage sections is shifted to the previous storage section.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage part which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage part. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process goes to step S319-1. move.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special figure reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the main CPU 110a updates the special figure reservation number (U1) corresponding to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after the subtraction. A symbol storage designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol holding storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) after subtraction is stored in the main RAM 110c. set in a predetermined area. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the second special figure reservation number is However, in the order in which the game balls enter the starting hole, the first special figure judgment information holding storage area or the second special drawing judgment information holding storage area is It may be shifted (subtracting the number of reserved 1st special symbols and the number of reserved 2nd special symbols in the winning order), or the 1st special symbol determination information retention storage area may be prioritized over the 2nd special symbol determination information retention storage area. You may also shift (subtract the first special figure reservation number with priority over the second special figure reservation number).

The main CPU 110a performs jackpot determination processing in step S311. Specifically, the special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is checked against the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 10, and a jackpot is determined. Determine whether or not. In addition, the special symbol determination information (random value for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is checked against the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, and the special symbol is stopped. Performs processing to determine the type of.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable performance.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing in step S313. Specifically, the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is compared with the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined. Performs processing to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variable performance pattern which is a performance mode of a variable performance performed during the variable display of special symbols is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , starts changing display of special symbols. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S800, so that the first A variable display of special symbols will be performed on the special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and ends the current special symbol memory determination process. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process moves to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbols are not displayed fluctuating and the special game (jackpot game) is not being executed, but the requirement also includes that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. You can.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is completed. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to encourage the player to play.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment process of main control board)
The special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the normal gaming state. If it is in the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S313-2, and if it is not the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the game is in the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, and the process moves to step S313-3.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects a corresponding table (matching the gaming situation) from the normal special symbol variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12) for determining the special symbol variation pattern in the normal gaming state. Then, the process moves to step S313-4.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a determines the special pattern fluctuation pattern that corresponds to the game situation (matches the gaming situation) from the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 13 and 14) for determining the special pattern fluctuation pattern in the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. A table is selected and the process moves to step S313-4.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random value for reach determination, the number of reservations (U1 or U2), and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. The special figure variation pattern is determined by comparing it with the special figure variation pattern determination table.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special figure variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6, sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. A pattern designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and a process for determining a variation production pattern which is a production mode of the variation production is performed.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current state is a low probability state. If it is not a low probability state (it is a variable probability gaming state), the process moves to step S313-9, and if it is a low probability state, in step S313-8, the number of fluctuations and specifics stored in the main RAM 110c are Specifically, the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is updated by +1 after a predetermined condition is satisfied (RWM clear, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0). The number of variations is updated by +1 regardless of whether it is a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a variable display of the first special symbol, or a variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, this number of fluctuations will be referred to in the special symbol fluctuation processing described later.

In step S313-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current state is a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or special time-saving game state). If it is not in the time-saving game state, the current special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is ended, and if it is in the time-saving game state, in step S313-10, a time-saving number designation command corresponding to the remaining time-saving number is transmitted for production purposes. Set in the data storage area. As a result, a command for specifying the number of time reductions is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the remaining number of time reductions is notified. When this process is finished, the current special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is ended.

(Special pattern variation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time set in the above-described special symbol variation pattern determination process has elapsed. If the variation time has elapsed, the process moves to step S320-2, and if the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation process ends.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops and displays the special symbols determined in the above-described jackpot determination process, and in step S320-3, sets a stop time (basically 0.5 seconds) according to the gaming situation. Set it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the time saving flag is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time saving flag is set, the remaining number of working hours is to be updated and the process moves to step S320-5; if the time saving flag is not set, the remaining number of working hours is not to be updated and the process moves to step S320-5. The process moves to S320-10.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current variable display of the special symbol is the first special symbol. If it is the first special symbol, in step S320-6, the first time saving number (J1), which is the time saving number of the first special symbol saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the first special The third time saving number (J3), which is the total time saving number of the symbol and the second special symbol, is subtracted by 1, and if it is not the first special symbol (it is the second special symbol), in step S320-7, the main The second time saving number (J2), which is the time saving number of the second special symbol saved in the gaming RWM area of the RAM 110c, and the third time saving number (J3) mentioned above are subtracted by one.

In step S320-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether any one of the first number of time reductions (J1), the second number of time reductions (J2), and the third number of time reductions (J3) has become "0". If it becomes "0", the time-saving gaming state is terminated and the process moves to step S320-9, and if it does not become "0", the process moves to step S320-12.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a clears the high probability flag, time saving flag, and various time saving times (J1, J2, J3) saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and starts the normal gaming state.

In step S320-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is not a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S320-12, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, in step S320-11, the high probability flag and time saving flag saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c Then, the various time saving times (J1, J2, J3) are cleared and the normal game state is started. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S320-16.

In step S320-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of fluctuations saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c has reached a specified number (900 in this embodiment). If the number of fluctuations has reached the specified number of times, the process moves to step S320-13 as a special time-saving gaming state is to be started, and if the number of fluctuations has not reached the specified number of times, the special time-saving gaming state is started. The process moves to step S320-15 as not to be allowed.

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a sets the special time saving number of times (J1=100, J2=750, J3=750) in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S320-14, sets the number of time reductions in the main RAM 110c. A special time-saving flag is set in the gaming RWM area to shift to a special time-saving game state.

In step S320-15, the main CPU 110a sends a time saving number designation command corresponding to the various time saving numbers (J1, J2, J3) saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c to the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. set. As a result, a command for specifying the number of time reductions is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the remaining number of time reductions is notified.

In step S320-16, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "2", and in step S320-17, the main CPU 110a sets the current gaming state (the gaming state specified from the presence or absence of the high probability flag and the time saving flag). A corresponding game state designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 performs processing for updating the gaming state. When this process is finished, this special symbol variation process ends.

In this way, when the number of variable displays of the special symbol executed after the predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of variations based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), the special time saving game state is activated. Since this is designed to generate, it is possible to give the player the surprise of a time-saving state occurring without going through a jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of fluctuations (900 times) that the special time-saving game state occurs is larger than the maximum time-saving number (100 times) set in the normal time-saving game state, so that during the normal time-saving game state, Since a special time-saving game state does not occur, the inconvenience that the player loses track of the progress of the game does not occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when a special time saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to zero. Therefore, between jackpot games (after the special time-saving gaming state starts or ends), the special time-saving gaming state will not occur again, making it possible to ensure a balance of profits between the gaming parlor and the player. It is also possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the maximum number of time savings in the normal time saving game state (100 times) is not set to be less than the number of fluctuations (900 times) at which the special time saving game state occurs, but the maximum number of time saving times in the normal time saving game state. and the number of fluctuations in which the special time-saving gaming state occurs may be the same number of times. In this way, the normal time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state will be seamlessly connected, making it feel as if the normal time-saving gaming state has been extended, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, when a special time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared to 0, and a special time-saving occurrence flag indicating that the special time-saving gaming state has already occurred is set in the main RAM 110c (for gaming RWM). In this case, if there is no special time-saving occurrence flag when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number (500 times), the number of fluctuations is cleared to 0 and a special time-saving gaming state is generated, and if there is a special time-saving occurrence flag, It is preferable to clear the number of fluctuations to 0 to prevent the special time-saving gaming state from occurring.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a acquires the stop special symbol data set in the main RAM 110c in step S350-1, selects the gaming state setting table (see FIG. 16) in step S350-2, and in step S350-3, The stop special symbol data is checked against the game state setting table to determine the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a sets gaming state information (high probability flag, time saving flag, number of time saving times) corresponding to the determined gaming state in the main RAM 110c. As a result, a variable probability gaming state or a normal time saving gaming state will occur.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a sets a time saving number designation command corresponding to the set time saving number (J1, J2, J3) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a time saving number designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing such as displaying the remaining number of time saving times is executed.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the set game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S350-7, sets "0" in the special figure special electric processing data. ” is set, and the current jackpot game ending process is ended. As a result, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for performing an effect according to the current gaming state is executed.

(Main processing of the production control section)
Next, the main processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the production control section 130m.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, flags etc. stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial settings is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupts in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random numbers stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
The timer interrupt process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the production control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and when there is an input, processing is performed to set predetermined data.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, the process determines whether or not various commands are being transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands are being transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change/confirmation process in step E170. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if a setting change designation command has been received, the above-mentioned settings are A process for executing change notification is performed, and if a setting confirmation designation command is received, a process for executing the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power-on designation command has been received, processing is performed to execute a power-on notification. More specifically, a power-on notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to output audio. For example, the device 9 may output a power-on sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power restoration designation command has been received, processing is performed to execute a power failure restoration notification. In detail, a power recovery notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a power recovery screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to output audio. For example, the device 9 may output a power restoration sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing in step E300. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if a command has been received, performs processing to perform a customer waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. conduct. To be more specific, a customer waiting production command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demonstration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to A customer waiting demo sound is outputted from the output device 9. The details of the customer waiting performance process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs menu operation processing in step E320. Specifically, depending on the operation of the production button 17 or cross key 19, various menu items ("model description" that explains information about the model, settings that set the execution rate of various productions executed during variable production) are selected. ``Customize the effect'' to select, ``Pachilog'' to manage the game history in conjunction with the player's mobile phone or other terminal, and ``Exit'' to end the menu operation. Performs processing. Note that details of the menu operation process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a gaming state update process in step E350. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received, and if it has been received, updates the gaming state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs pending information update processing in step E400. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to, and it is determined whether or not a command for specifying the number of special drawings reserved or a command for specifying the number of regular drawings reserved is received, and if the command is received, it is stored (ascertained) in the sub-RAM 130c. ), the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of second reserved special symbols, the number of regular symbols, etc. are updated.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch effect process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a prefetch designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if a prefetch designation command is received, icon change effects, continuous preview effects, and lamps are performed as prefetch effects. Performs processing related to change effects. Note that the details of the look-ahead performance processing will be described later.

"Icon change performance" is a type of pre-reading preview performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the pending icon and the display mode of the icon. The timing of the performance sometimes overlaps with the performance. In the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a pending icon may be referred to as a "hold icon change effect" and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect."

"Continuous preview performance" is a type of advance notice performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined performance over one or more variable performances, and after the start of the variable performance. However, the timing of the performance does not overlap with the jackpot preview performance described later.
"Lamp change performance" is a type of advance notice performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the lighting mode of the prize opening lamp over one or more variable performances, and is described below. The timing of the performance may overlap with the jackpot preview performance.

The sub CPU 130a performs special figure special electric production processing in step E600. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round number designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command are executed. etc., and if so, performs processing to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a performs a general figure and general electric display process. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c and receives a normal symbol designation command, a regular symbol variation pattern designation command, a regular symbol stop designation command, a winning opening designation command, a winning ending designation command, etc. It is determined whether or not the command is received, and if the command is received, processing is performed to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

The sub CPU 130a performs production mode update processing in step E800. Specifically, updating the production mode (production stage) in which production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined. It is determined whether the conditions (changes in the game state, winning of the mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach effects that result in a loss, etc.) are met, and if the update conditions are met, multiple production modes are executed. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

"Production mode" includes production modes A to C set in the normal gaming state, production modes D to E set in the variable probability gaming state, production modes FG to G set in the normal time saving gaming state, and special production modes. A production mode H is provided which is set in the time-saving gaming state. In addition, when the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (for example, after changing settings, clearing RWM, confirming settings, etc.), the first performance mode set is always performance mode A, and when the power is turned on, When the power is turned on, the production mode that is set first is always production mode D, and when the power is turned on and the production is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, the production mode that is first set is always production mode D. The mode is always production mode F, and the production mode that is first set when the special time-saving game state is controlled when the power is turned on is always production mode H.

In addition, in production modes A to C, the production pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters corresponding to the numbers (decoration part) + design effect images (decoration part) that decorate the backgrounds of the numbers and characters, Numbers and character designs differ between production modes. In the performance modes D to H, the performance pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters), and the design of the numbers is common among the performance modes. Furthermore, in production modes A to H, the background image corresponding to each production mode is normally scrolled left and right (reciprocating movement, dynamic display).

Also, in the normal gaming state, the production mode is better when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed than when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is executed. Because the following change conditions are likely to be met (SP/SPSP reach effect that results in a loss is likely to be executed, mode update lottery is likely to be won, look-ahead zone effect is likely to be executed, etc.), the second special symbol fluctuating display ( The production mode is easier to change when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable production) is executed than when the second variation production is executed. Therefore, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable display (variable performance) of special symbols executed in the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed in various time-saving game states than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed in the normal gaming condition, It is more difficult for the update conditions of the production mode to be satisfied (SP/SPSP reach production that results in a loss is difficult to execute, it is easy to win the mode update lottery, it is difficult to execute the look-ahead zone production, there are fewer production modes) etc.). Therefore, it is possible to vary the presentation effect when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable presentation) is executed depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, we have increased the number of production modes in variable probability gaming states and various time-saving gaming states (normal working-time saving gaming state, special working-time saving gaming state), and increasing the number of production modes in variable-probability gaming states and various time-saving gaming states (normal working-time saving gaming state, special working-time saving gaming state). , the production mode changes more easily when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable production) is executed than when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variation production) is executed. You can do it like this.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. , or terminate the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it performs processes such as outputting signals such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting performance processing by the performance control department)
The customer waiting performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting performance processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E300-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process moves to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E300-2 until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance. Select the demonstration standby time determination table (see FIG. 30) for determining the standby time of . Note that details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demo standby time and sets it in the demo standby timer. Specifically, with reference to the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 30, one demonstration waiting time is determined from among a plurality of demonstration waiting times based on the current gaming state and the current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is on standby for a demonstration. Specifically, it is determined whether a demonstration standby timer is set. If the demo is not on standby, the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated as not to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance, and if the demo is on standby, the demo waiting timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether the demo standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not 0, it is assumed that the customer waiting demonstration performance has not yet been executed, and the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated.If the demo waiting timer = 0, the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed in step E300-7. The command is set in the transmission buffer and the current customer waiting performance process is ended. As a result, a customer waiting demonstration performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a customer waiting demonstration performance that appeals to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demo standby time determination table)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table that is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration production.

In the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30, the gaming state, the current state, and the selected demo standby time are associated with each other. Four types of demonstration standby times from 30 seconds to 80 seconds are set for the demonstration standby time in the normal gaming state, and four types of demonstration standby times from 35 seconds to 85 seconds are set for the demonstration standby time in the specific gaming state. is set.

The first characteristic of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The demonstration waiting time after the is displayed statically, the demonstration waiting time after the fluctuating display of the production symbol ends (the fluctuation time has elapsed) and the production symbol is statically displayed, and the demonstration symbol after the end of the customer waiting demo production. The difference is that the waiting time for the demonstration after it is displayed statically is different. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the fluctuating display of the performance symbols ends (variation The point is that the demonstration waiting time is longer after the performance pattern is displayed statically after the time has elapsed. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the demonstration pattern waits for a longer time after the performance symbols are displayed statically on the image display device. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the waiting time for the demonstration after the design is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the demonstration standby time is the shortest after the performance symbols are statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance. Therefore, the appeal of the game to players can be effectively increased, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The sixth feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Menu operation processing of production control section)
Menu operation processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing menu operation processing in the production control section 130m.

In step E320-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is currently in a customer waiting state. If the customer is in the waiting state, the process moves to step E320-2, and if the customer is not in the customer waiting state (the fluctuating performance or jackpot performance is in progress), the process related to the menu operation is not performed and the process moves to step E320-2. Processing moves to step 7.

In step E320-2, the sub CPU 130a obtains the menu process number that is updated in each process of the menu operation process, refers to the branch destination address from the menu process number, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address.

Specifically, if the menu processing number = "0", various menu items (model description, customization, pachilog, exit) are displayed according to the operation of the production button 17, and the menu is displayed by operation of the cross key 19. Select an item and determine the menu item by operating the effect button 17, and enter the menu processing number corresponding to the determined menu item (“1” for “Model Description”, “2” for “Customize Effect”) , "3" for "Pachilog" and "0" for "End") is executed (step E320-3), and the menu operation process ends.

If the menu processing number = "1", a model description that sequentially displays various explanatory information regarding the model according to the operation of the cross key 19, and sets the menu processing number to "0" by selecting and deciding the end item. The process (step E320-4) is executed, and the menu operation process ends.

If the menu processing number = "2", various performances (for example, icon change performance, continuous preview performance, timer performance, etc.) executed during the variable performance according to the operation of the cross key 19 are executed at the normal rate. Select the normal setting (normal mode) and the simple setting (simple mode) that is executed at a lower rate of decline than the normal rate, and execute the effect customization process (step E320-5) determined by operating the effect button 17; Ends menu operation processing.

If the menu processing number = "3", the input of the history password using the production button 17 and the cross key 19 is accepted, and the update of the play history is started, and the updated version according to the production button 17 and the cross key 19 is Performs processing such as issuing a history password according to the gaming history, and executes pachilog processing (step E320-6) to manage the gaming history in cooperation with a terminal such as a mobile phone owned by the player; Ends menu operation processing.

If the menu operation number is "4", a termination process (step E320-7) is executed to terminate the menu operation and set the menu process number to "0", and the menu operation process is terminated.

In this way, based on the operations of the production button 17 and the cross key 19, various productions (such as icon change production, continuous preview production, timer production, and role-playing preview production at the start of variation, etc., which will be described later) performed during the fluctuation production can be performed. Can be set to a normal setting (normal mode) and a simple setting (simple mode) with different execution ratios (execution ratios can be set for icon change effects, continuous preview effects, timer effects, variable start announcement effects, etc.) Therefore, the player can customize the performance balance to his/her preference, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, rather than customizing the execution ratio of various performances (customized performances) executed during variable performances by selecting between normal settings and simple settings, the execution ratio of various performances (customized performances) executed during variable performances is not customized. ) can be set individually to customize the performance balance, or the user can select between normal settings and simple settings and set the high and low execution ratios of various performances (customized performances). The presentation balance may be customized by allowing individual settings.

In addition, the customization targets are not only the above-mentioned icon change performance, continuous preview performance, timer performance, and role-playing announcement performance at the start of fluctuation, but also the role-playing announcement performance at the start of fluctuation, and the pre-reach preview performance (line preview). Performances, step-up preview performances), confirmed performances, etc. may be customizable performances, and the execution ratio may be set for normal settings and simple settings.

In addition, the execution rate of specific performances among the customization target performances (for example, dialogue preview pattern 6 for extremely hot dialogue with high expectations, dialogue preview pattern 1 for normal dialogue with low expectations, etc.) is executed. may be set individually.

(Pre-reading performance processing by the performance control unit)
The pre-reading performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to perform the icon change effect, the mode of effect of the icon change effect, and the like. Note that details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process in step E520 (changes the already displayed pending icon or the display mode of the icon). Perform execution processing. Note that details of the icon change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance determination process for determining whether to execute the continuous preview performance, the presentation mode of the continuous preview performance, and the like. Note that details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance execution process for executing the continuous preview performance determined to be executed in the continuous preview performance determination process. Note that details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process to execute a lamp change effect (light up the prize opening lamp NR so that the display mode becomes a light emitting mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed). The details of the lamp change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E560, the sub CPU 130a sets the top lamp 10b located at the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 in a different light emission mode from the normal light emission mode according to the result of the pre-read determination when the game ball enters the starting slot. Winning light emitting effect for determining whether to execute a winning light emitting effect that indicates the level of expectation that a special game will be executed by emitting light in a special light emitting mode, and the presentation mode of the winning light emitting effect to be executed. Perform decision processing. The details of the process for determining the light emitting effect upon winning will be described later.

In step E570, the sub CPU 130a performs a winning light emitting effect execution process for executing the winning light emitting effect determined to be executed in the winning light emitting effect determining process, and ends the current pre-reading effect process.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E510-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the icon change effect. If it is the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-7.

The "executable period of icon change performance" refers to a case where a jackpot game is not being executed, an icon change performance is not being executed, or an icon change performance is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, if the received prefetch designation command is based on winning at the first starting port 45, it is a normal gaming state, and the received prefetching designation command is based on winning at the second starting port 47. In some cases, it may be provided that the game is in a specific gaming state (a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), or the like.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random value for determining the icon display mode for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-5. , selects the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 34) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Note that details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. One icon final display mode is determined from among the icon final display modes.

In step E510-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) in which an icon change effect is executed. If the display mode is such that an icon change effect is executed, the process moves to step E510-9, and if the display mode is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 32) for determining a change scenario for the icon change effect. Note that details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the pending icon appears until it disappears.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. One change scenario is determined from among the change scenarios.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode initially displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and displays the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination process is completed. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect will be output.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table includes the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode in the normal setting and simple setting by effect customization, and the icon final display mode to be selected. For reference, the type of notification sound when the icon is generated is listed for each type of icon.

The final icon display mode includes a white icon as a normal icon, and a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon as special icons that indicate the possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game will be executed). has been done.

The expectation level of winning a jackpot related to special icons increases in the order of (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon, and the rainbow icon is an icon that is guaranteed to be a jackpot.

When the white icon is displayed on the image display device, the first occurrence alarm sound is output, when the blue icon is displayed, the second occurrence alarm sound is output, and when the red icon is displayed, the second occurrence alarm sound is output. , the third occurrence notification sound is output, and when the rainbow icon is displayed, the fourth occurrence notification sound is set to be output.

Note that the rate at which blue icons and red icons are selected in simple settings is set to be 1/2 of the rate at which blue and red icons are selected in normal settings, but the rate at which blue icons and red icons are selected in simple settings is 1/2. It may be more or less.

Here, the first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied depending on the scheduled variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the planned variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, special icons are selected at a higher rate than when the planned variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in reach. It is supposed to be done.

A second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that the execution rate of the icon change effect changes depending on the effect customization setting (normal setting, simple setting) by the player. By doing so, it is possible to set the performance balance that suits the player's preference, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that in the case of a jackpot, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the final icon display mode, but it may be selected.

In addition, different notification sounds were set for multiple icon display modes (4 types), but the notification sound when a white icon was generated changed to a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon. There may be two types of sound, including a time change notification sound, or the notification sound may not be output when a white icon is generated, and the notification sound may be output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. Further, for the rainbow icon that is certain to be a jackpot, a dedicated notification sound may be provided and there may be three types.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, and is used as a reference. Preliminary changes in each change scenario and how icons are updated in the changes are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, Scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation and during the execution of the variation (pending icon change effect and the icon change effect is executed) ) scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) is set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of this embodiment, a scenario is determined in which the display mode of the icon is changed regardless of whether or not a reach effect (a reach effect other than a normal reach effect may be performed) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by a change scenario determination table that uses as a determining factor whether or not a reach effect that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed in advance variation is executed. Alternatively, the scenario in which the When using such a change scenario determination table, the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, the display mode of the icon changes during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed, and the pre-variation in which a reach effect is not executed, but the reach effect is lower than during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set in such a way that changes in the display mode of the icon occur at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon change performance execution processing of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing icon change performance execution processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process moves to step E520-2, and if the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon change production execution process is ended.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to change (update) the display mode in the current variable performance. Determine whether there is an icon. If there is a pending icon that changes the display mode, the process moves to step E520-4, and if there is no pending icon that changes the display mode, the process moves to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table for hold icons (see FIG. 37) for determining a change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. Note that details of the change pattern determination table for pending icons will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for pending icons shown in FIG. 37, one of the multiple pending icon change patterns is selected based on the mode of pending icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%). One pending icon change pattern is determined from the following.

In step E520-6, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change production command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the pending icon will change, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) will be output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) of the icon is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the scenario of the icon is stored, the process moves to step E520-8, and if the scenario of the icon is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the pre-read information storage area when the power is restored or when winning a prize. The current icon change performance execution process is terminated on the assumption that a command abnormality has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the pre-read information storage area due to failure to normally receive the time command (special map reservation number designation command, pre-read designation command).

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon change effect execution process is ended.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects from among the change pattern determination tables for a plurality of icons for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed in the current variation performance. A change pattern determination table (see FIG. 38) for the icon is selected according to the change stage at which the icon changes. Note that details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, multiple icons are selected based on the mode of icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from among the change patterns.

In step E520-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect execution process. As a result, a change production command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the icon will change, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) will be output.

(Change pattern determination table for pending icon)
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for hold icons that is referred to when determining a change pattern for hold icons.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the pending icon change mode in the current variation performance, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the selected pending icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of a pending icon change effect and the change stage in each pending icon change pattern are described.

The hold icon change pattern includes normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shifted and displayed (at the start of variation) in response to the icon disappearing. , normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while changing with the output of a sound effect, and the display of the icon as a character appears and an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as a starting point is performed. A character action change pattern 01 in which the aspect changes, and a change notification pattern indicating that the display form of the icon changes as a result of the fluctuation effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and an effect effect that acts on the pending icon using the change notification pattern as a starting point. A symbol effect change pattern 01 is set in which the display mode of the pending icon changes as a result of this change.

The timing at which the pending icon change effect occurs is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect: when the variable effect starts (at the start of the change), when the change effect is being executed (during change), and when the change effect occurs during the change effect. There are times when the 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the pending icon includes 1UP, which changes the display mode of the jackpot winning expectation level to one level higher (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, or a change from a blue icon to a red icon), and a jackpot winning expectation level. 2UP (for example, change from a white icon to a red icon) is set to change the display mode to a two-step higher display mode.

Note that, although the change effect generation timing of the pending icon is set to the above three timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that a variable performance is being executed (during variation) until a reach is established, a normal reach is being executed, an SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, etc.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. This is a table to be referred to, and FIG. 38(b) is a table to be referred to when changing the display mode of the icon in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation performance, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the timing at which the icon change effect occurs and the change stage in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change patterns include normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes at the start of the variation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes during the variation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character effect change pattern 01 are set in which a character appears and an action effect is performed that acts on the icon starting from the character and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing at which the change effect of the icon occurs is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and is classified as when the change effect is started (at the start of change), during the execution of the change effect (during change), and when the change effect is in progress. There are times when the 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the icon includes 1UP, which changes the display mode of the jackpot winning expectation to one level higher (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, a change from a blue icon to a red icon), and a jackpot winning expectation. 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon, a change from a blue icon to a rainbow icon) is set to change the display mode to a higher level by two levels.

Note that in the change pattern determination table for the icon of this embodiment, the symbol effect change pattern 01 is not selected, but may be selected. For example, in a fluctuating performance that performs a pseudo-continuous performance, when the temporary stop display of the performance symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo continuous performance" is a fluctuating display of performance symbols as if multiple times in response to a jackpot determination based on winning (ball landing) in one starting hole (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47). In order to make it appear as if the game has been executed, all prizes will be awarded within the special figure fluctuation time determined for each winning (ball entering) into the starting hole (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47). This is a special form of fluctuating display of the performance symbol in which a re-fluctuation display in which the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops and then starts fluctuating again is performed once or multiple times.

In addition, although the change effect generation timing of the said icon was set to the above-mentioned two timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that a variable performance is being executed (during variation) until a reach is established, a normal reach is being executed, an SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, etc.

(Continuous preview production decision processing by production control unit)
The continuous preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing continuous preview performance determination processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E530-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E530-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current continuous preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is an executable period for continuous preview presentation. If it is the executable period for continuous notice performances (pre-read action production, pre-read effect production, pre-read vibration production, pre-read zone production), the process moves to step E530-4, and if it is not the executable period for continuous notice production. , the process moves to step E530-16 assuming that the continuous preview performance based on the currently received prefetch designation command is not to be executed.

In the "pre-reading motion performance", a special game is executed by executing an operation performance (notice performance) that operates the second movable member 74 in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of the variable performance in one or more variable performances. It is a performance that intermittently hints at the level of expectation.

The "look-ahead effect performance" is a special game by executing an effect performance (notice performance) that displays an effect image of a predetermined color around the performance symbol 70a at the timing immediately after the start of the variable performance in one or more variable performances. The performance intermittently hints at the level of expectation that will be carried out.

"Pre-read vibration performance" is a vibration performance (advance performance) that vibrates the performance button 17 in a predetermined manner without causing the effective period of the performance button 17 to occur at the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation performance in one or more variable performances. This is a performance that intermittently suggests the level of expectation that a special game will be executed when executed.

"Pre-reading zone performance (pre-reading mode performance)" refers to the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing a mid-zone performance (notice performance) that displays a zone image from a predetermined timing in one or more variable performances. It is a performance that continuously suggests the following.

The "executable period of continuous notice performance" means that there is no continuous notice performance in advance pending, that the jackpot game is not in progress, and that a prefetch designation command based on winning in the first starting opening 45 is received. In this case, it is a normal gaming state, and when a prefetch designation command based on winning to the second starting port 47 is received, it is a specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), etc. Can be mentioned.

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the continuous notice type determination table (see FIGS. 40 and 41) according to the current production mode, and in step E530-5, refers to the continuous notice type determination table and The type of notice (whether or not to execute a continuous notice performance, and the type of continuous notice performance to be executed) is determined. Note that details of the continuous notice type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the type of continuous preview is to execute a continuous preview effect. If the continuous notice effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-16, and if the continuous notice effect is to be executed, in step E530-7, the continuous notice scenario determination table (Fig. 42 , see FIG. 43). Note that details of the continuous notice scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for which the prefetch action effect is to be executed has been determined. If the prefetching motion effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-10, and if the prefetching motion effect is to be executed, in step E530-9, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario of the prefetching motion effect is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for which the prefetch effect production is to be executed has been determined. If the look-ahead effect performance is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-12, and if the look-ahead effect performance is to be executed, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referred to in step E530-11, and the preview scenario of the look-ahead effect performance is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous notice type for which the pre-read vibration effect is to be executed has been determined. If the pre-reading vibration effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-14, and if the pre-reading vibration effect is to be executed, in step E530-13, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario of the pre-read vibration effect is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-14, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for executing the prefetch zone effect (prefetch mode effect) has been determined. If the prefetch zone (prefetch mode effect) effect is not to be executed, the current continuous preview effect determination process is ended, and if the prefetch zone effect is to be executed, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referred to in step E530-15. A preview scenario for the prefetch zone performance (prefetch mode performance) is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current continuous preview performance determination process is completed.

In step E530-16, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-previous scenario for the continuous preview performance (a preview scenario indicating that the continuous preview performance will not be executed), sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and executes the current continuous preview performance. End the determination process.

Note that the preview scenario or the non-previous scenario set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to in the above-described continuous preview performance execution process of step E540, and the process for executing the continuous preview performance or the continuous preview performance is executed. Steps will be taken to prevent this from happening.

In this way, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 39, in the normal game state, the pre-reading action performance related to the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) is not executed. , when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed, the pre-reading motion effect (the second movable member 74 actions) are easier to perform. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable presentation) in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 39, in the normal game state, the pre-reading vibration performance related to the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) is not executed. The pre-reading vibration effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is more effective when the variable display of the first special symbol (fluctuating effect) is executed than when the variable display of the second special symbol (fluctuating effect) is executed. It is easier to implement. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable presentation) in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 39, in a specific game state, the look-ahead motion performance related to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable performance) is not executed. The look-ahead motion effect (movement of the second movable member 74) is better when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is executed. is becoming easier to implement. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) in a specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 39, the pre-reading vibration performance is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (fluctuating performance) in a specific game state. The pre-read vibration effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is executed more when the variable display of the second special symbol (fluctuating effect) is executed than when the variable display of the special symbol (fluctuating effect) is executed. It is becoming easier to Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) in a specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice type determination table)
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a continuous notice type determination table that is referred to in order to determine the continuous notice type in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. ) is a diagram showing a continuous preview performance determination table that is referred to in order to determine the continuous preview type.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the continuous notice type determination table includes the read-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each continuous notice type in the normal setting and simple setting by effect customization, and the selected number. Continuous notice types are associated with continuous notice types, such as ``non-execution'' in which continuous notice effects are not executed, ``look-ahead motion effect'' in which one of multiple types of continuous notice effects is executed, and `` "Look-ahead effect performance", "Look-ahead vibration performance", "Look-ahead zone performance", "Look-ahead effect performance & Look-ahead vibration performance" where two types of multiple types of continuous notice performances are executed, "Look-ahead motion performance & Look-ahead zone performance" ” has been established.

For example, if the prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern) is a loss and the SP reach effect is executed, "non-execution" is determined at 85%, "prefetch effect production" is determined at 5%, At 4%, "look-ahead motion effect" is decided, at 3%, "look-ahead vibration effect" is decided, at 2%, "look-ahead zone effect" is decided, and at 1%, "look-ahead effect performance & look-ahead vibration effect" is decided. be done.

Note that the rate at which various types of continuous preview effects are selected in the simple setting is set to be 1/2 of the rate at which various types of continuous preview effects are selected in the normal setting. It may be more or less.

Here, the first feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state, the first continuous notice performance (pre-read effect effect, pre-read chance effect, pre-read movement effect, pre-read vibration effect, pre-read zone effect) The execution rate of any one of these) is the first rate, and the second consecutive notice effect (the first consecutive of the pre-read effect effect, pre-read chance effect, pre-read action effect, pre-read vibration effect, and pre-read zone effect) The execution rate of (one other than the preview effect) becomes the second rate, and the second variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization. In this case, the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance performance, the look-ahead action performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is different from the first ratio (in this case, 0%). and the execution ratio of the second continuous notice performance (one of the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead motion performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second ratio (here 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in performance customization, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable performance (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the second feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state, the first continuous notice performance (pre-reading effect presentation, pre-reading chance effect, pre-reading action presentation, pre-reading vibration presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) The execution rate of any one of the above) is the first rate, and the second continuous notice performance (the first continuous notice among the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance look performance, look-ahead action performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution ratio of (one other than the performance) becomes the second ratio, and the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization. If the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is different from the first ratio (in this case, 0%). , the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead movement performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second ratio (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in performance customization, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable performance (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the third feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific gaming state, the first continuous notice performance (among them: look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance eye performance, look-ahead movement performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution rate of any one of the above) is the first rate, and the second continuous notice performance (the first continuous notice among the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance look performance, look-ahead action performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution ratio of (one other than the performance) becomes the second ratio, and the first variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization. If the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is different from the first ratio (in this case, 0%). , the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead movement performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second ratio (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in performance customization, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable performance (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the fourth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific gaming state, the first continuous notice performance (among them: look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance eye performance, look-ahead movement performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution rate of any one of the above) is the first rate, and the second continuous notice performance (the first continuous notice among the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance look performance, look-ahead action performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution ratio of one of the effects (one other than the effect) becomes the second rate, and the first variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization. If the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is different from the first ratio (in this case, 0%). , the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead movement performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second ratio (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization, the production effect can be changed depending on the type of variable production (special symbol), making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

Furthermore, the fifth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state, the first continuous notice performance (pre-reading effect presentation, pre-reading chance effect, pre-reading action presentation, pre-reading vibration presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) The execution rate of any one of the above) is the first rate, and the second continuous notice performance (the first continuous notice among the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance look performance, look-ahead action performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution ratio of (one other than the performance) becomes the second ratio, and the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization. If the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is different from the first ratio (in this case, 0%). , the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead movement performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second ratio (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable performance (special symbol), which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Additionally, the sixth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state, the first continuous notice performance (pre-reading effect presentation, pre-reading chance effect, pre-reading action presentation, pre-reading vibration presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) The execution rate of any one of the above) is the first rate, and the second continuous notice performance (the first continuous notice among the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance look performance, look-ahead action performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution ratio of (one other than the performance) becomes the second ratio, and the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization. If the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is different from the first ratio (in this case, 0%). , the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead movement performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second ratio (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable performance (special symbol), which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

In addition, the seventh feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state, the first continuous notice performance (pre-reading effect presentation, pre-reading chance effect, pre-reading action presentation, pre-reading vibration presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) The execution rate of any one of the above) is the first rate, and the second continuous notice performance (the first continuous notice among the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance look performance, look-ahead action performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution ratio of (one other than the performance) becomes the second ratio, and the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization. If the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is different from the first ratio (in this case, 0%). , the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead movement performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second ratio (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable performance (special symbol), which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

In addition, the eighth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the second specific game state (special time-saving game state), the first continuous notice performance (pre-reading effect presentation, pre-reading chance effect presentation, pre-reading action presentation, The execution ratio of the pre-reading vibration production, pre-reading zone production) is the first ratio, and the second consecutive notice production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading chance production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading vibration production, pre-reading zone) In the first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) after the execution rate of the performance (one of the performances other than the first continuous notice performance) becomes the second ratio and the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization. When the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed, the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance look performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is a ratio different from the first ratio (here, 0%), and the second consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effects, look-ahead chance effects, look-ahead motion effects, and look-ahead vibration effects other than the first continuous notice effect) The execution ratio of the first one) is different from the second ratio (in this case, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable performance (special symbol), which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, the ninth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the first specific gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state), the first continuous notice performance (pre-reading effect presentation, pre-reading chance effect presentation, pre-reading action presentation, The execution ratio of the pre-reading vibration production, pre-reading zone production) is the first ratio, and the second consecutive notice production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading chance production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading vibration production, pre-reading zone) In the second specific game state (special time-saving game state) after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the execution ratio of the performance (one of the performances other than the first continuous notice performance) becomes the second ratio. When the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed, the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance look performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is a ratio different from the first ratio (here, 0%), and the second consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effects, look-ahead chance effects, look-ahead motion effects, and look-ahead vibration effects other than the first continuous notice effect) The execution ratio of the first one) is different from the second ratio (in this case, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable performance (special symbol), which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Continuous preview performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a continuous notice scenario determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a continuous notice scenario determination table for performance modes D to H (specific gaming state). It is a diagram.

The continuous notice scenario determination table is associated with the number of special symbols on hold, the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the selected notice scenario. Preliminary fluctuations (before 4 fluctuations, before 3 fluctuations, before 2 fluctuations, before 1 fluctuation) and the performance mode of continuous preview performance in the fluctuations are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

The presentation mode of "weak notice" differs depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of a look-ahead motion production, the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak motion, and a weak motion sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead effect production, a blue effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and a blue effect sound effect is output, and in the case of a look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating the zone 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the production button 17 flashes white. In the case of a pre-read zone production, a blue zone image is displayed and a zone sound effect is output. It is to be done.

The presentation mode of "strong notice" differs depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of a look-ahead motion production, the second movable member 74 emits red light and performs a strong motion, and a strong motion sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead effect production, a red effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and a red effect sound effect is output, and in the case of a look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds, and the production button 17 flashes red. In the case of pre-read zone production, a red heat zone image is displayed and a heat zone sound effect is displayed. is output.

Continuous notice performance scenarios include scenarios in which weak or strong notices are not executed during advance fluctuations and weak notices or strong notices are executed during the fluctuations (for example, scenario 11), and scenarios where weak notices or strong notices are executed during the fluctuations in advance, A scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak notice or a strong notice is executed is set therein.

The first feature of the various tables related to continuous preview effects shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that they are more useful when multiple types of continuous preview effects are executed than when a single type of continuous preview effect is executed. However, there is a point where the expectation of jackpot is high. Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The second feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the performance modes D to H (specific game state) are better than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). One of the points is that continuous preview performances are likely to be executed (execution rate is high), that is, the expectation level of jackpot when continuous preview performances are executed is low. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that instead of differentiating the execution rate of continuous preview performances between production modes A to C and production modes D to H, for example, continuous preview production is executed more in production mode B than in production mode A. For example, the execution rate of continuous preview performances may be made different between production modes A to C, or for example, continuous preview production may be made easier to execute in production mode E than in production mode D. For example, the execution rate of the continuous preview performance may be made different between the performance modes D to H. In this way, the expectation of a jackpot in the continuous preview performance changes between performance modes, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), when the normal reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result), Also, in production modes D to H (specific game states), if the normal reach production is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), it is easier to execute the continuous notice production (here, pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production). There are several points. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where there are more (super) shortening fluctuations than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

The fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), the SP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result). In production modes D to H (specific game states), when the SP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result), it is better to use continuous preview production (here, pre-read effect performance, pre-read movement performance, pre-read zone). One of the points is that it is easy to carry out the performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where there are more (super) shortening fluctuations than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

The fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), the SPSP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result). In performance modes D to H (specific gaming states), when SPSP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result), continuous preview production (here, pre-read effect performance, pre-read movement performance, pre-read zone) One of the points is that it is easy to carry out the performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where super shortening fluctuations tend to occur more frequently than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the full rotation reach performance is scheduled to be executed in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) (pre-read results). In production modes D to H (specific gaming states), when the full rotation reach production is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), the continuous notice production (in this case, pre-reading action production, pre-reading zone production) One point is that it is easy to implement. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where super shortening fluctuations tend to occur more frequently than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than the performance modes D to G (specific game state). The point is that the pre-reading vibration performance (vibration performance without displaying the valid period of the performance button 17 or the operation promotion image) is easily executed (high execution rate = different jackpot expectation level). Therefore, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state) where the stay period tends to be longer than production modes D to H (specific gaming states), it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the pre-reading vibration production, and increase the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the In addition, in production modes D to H (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), the pre-reading vibration production can be given rarity, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Note that the pre-reading vibration performance may be executed more easily (the execution rate may be higher) in the performance modes D to H than in the performance modes A to C. In addition, in the normal gaming state, by making it easier to execute pre-reading continuous effects in production mode A than in production modes B or C, the execution rate of pre-reading vibration effects can be reduced between production modes A to C. In a specific game state, the pre-read vibration effect can be executed more easily in the effect mode D than in the effect modes E-H. The performance execution ratio may be varied. In this way, it is possible to vary the expectation level of a jackpot when the pre-read vibration performance is executed between the performance modes, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables related to continuous notice performances shown in FIGS. ) is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), a specific reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) is scheduled to be executed in performance modes D to H (specific gaming states) ( If the result is a pre-read result, the pre-read vibration effect is more difficult to execute (the execution rate is lower). Therefore, in production modes D to H (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), it is possible to give rarity to the pre-reading vibration production and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

The ninth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the performance modes D to H (specific game state) are better than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). One of the points is that the look-ahead motion effect is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, in production modes D to H (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), it is possible to give rarity to the pre-reading vibration production and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

The tenth feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). In the case where a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in production modes D to H (specific game states), it is better to perform a reach performance (normal reach performance) in a variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance. , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in performance modes D to H (specific game states). In the case where a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), it is better to perform a reach performance (normal reach performance) in a variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance. , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are easy to execute. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. In modes A to C (normal game state), a continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed, while in performance modes D to H (specific game state), a continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed. If it is executed, it is difficult to execute the reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) in the variable performance that is the preview target of the continuous preview performance. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 13th feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. , When a continuous preview performance that spans three variable performances is executed in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), the reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance) in the variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance , SPSP reach performance) can be easily executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. , when a continuous preview performance that spans three variable performances is executed in production modes D to H (specific game states), it is better to perform a reach performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot in the variable performance that is the subject of the continuous preview performance (for example, , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are easy to execute. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the movable members are the same in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to H (specific game state). (The second movable member 74) can be used to perform the pre-reading action effect, but the pre-reading action effect is not possible in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The difference is that the expected jackpot when executed is different. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 16th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the pre-read motion performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance mode D to H (specific game state). In this case, the ratio (100%) of operating the second movable member 74 not used in the final performance is higher than the ratio (0%) of operating the first movable member 73 used in the final performance described later. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an inconvenience in which the player mistakenly assumes that there will be a jackpot just because the look-ahead motion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the first movable member 73 may be operated instead of operating the second movable member 74 at the strong notice of the pre-reading action performance. Even in this case, when performing the pre-reading motion performance in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and performance modes D to H (specific gaming state), the ratio of operating the first movable member 73 is , it is preferable that the rate at which the second movable member 74 is operated becomes higher.

The seventeenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the pre-reading vibration performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance mode D to H (specific game state). In this case, the percentage of the production button 17 in the normal state (0%) is higher than the percentage of the production button 17 in the protruding state (0%). Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the performance button 17 being in the protruding state (it is in the protruding state only in the fixed performance described later), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the strong notice of the pre-read vibration performance, the performance button 17 may not be vibrated in the normal state, but may be vibrated in the protruding state. Even in this case, when performing the pre-reading vibration performance in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to H (specific game state), the ratio of the performance button 17 to the protruding state is , it is preferable to set the ratio of the normal state to be higher.

The 18th feature of the various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. During the high-speed fluctuation period), a weak preview of the look-ahead motion performance (weak motion of the first movable member 73 + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the look-ahead effect performance (display of a blue effect image around the performance pattern 70a) are executed. The point is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a weak preview of the pre-reading vibration effect (weak vibration of the effect button 17 for 1 second) is executed without displaying an operation promotion image than when the operation promotion image is displayed. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations by using the operating means that the player can operate, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature of the various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. During the high-speed fluctuation period), a strong notice of the look-ahead action performance (strong action of the first movable member 73 + red light emission) and a strong notice of the look-ahead effect performance (display of a red effect image around the performance pattern 70a) are executed. One point is that the expectation level of a jackpot is higher when a strong preview of the pre-reading vibration performance (3 seconds of strong vibration of the performance button 17) is executed than when the pre-reading vibration performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations by using the operating means that the player can operate, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous preview performance execution processing by the performance control unit)
The continuous preview performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing continuous preview performance execution processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E540-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process moves to step E540-2, and if the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current continuous notice performance execution process is ended.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the preview scenario of the continuous preview effects (prefetch action effects, prefetch effect effects, prefetch vibration effects, and prefetch zone effects) stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and executes the step E540-2. At E540-3, it is determined whether a preview scenario for continuous preview performance is stored. If the preview scenario is stored, the process moves to step E540-4, and if the preview scenario is not stored, it is assumed that power has been restored or a command abnormality (such as missing a prefetch specified command) has occurred. The continuous notice performance execution process ends.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines the preview pattern (type of continuous preview performance, weak preview, strong preview) to be executed in the current variable performance according to the preview scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Then, in step E540-5, a continuous preview presentation command corresponding to the determined preview pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a continuous notice performance command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a continuous notice performance according to the determined notice pattern is executed. When this process is finished, the current continuous notice performance execution process is finished.

According to the continuous preview performance execution process shown in FIG. 44, if the performance scenario for the continuous preview performance is not stored in the prefetch information storage area due to power restoration or a command abnormality (missing of a prefetch designation command, etc.), the continuous preview performance execution process will start from now. Continuous preview performances are not executed during variable performances. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as the execution of continuous preview effects becoming unstable due to power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether an icon change scenario is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, it is assumed that an icon change effect is to be executed and the process moves to step E550-2; if the icon change scenario is not stored, the change scenario is stored from the sub-RAM 130c. Step E550-6 assumes that a command abnormality has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the pre-read information storage area due to the power supply being cleared or the winning command (special drawing reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) not being received normally. Transfer processing.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether it is time for the icon to change. If it is the icon change timing, the process moves to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is ended.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp effect command is sent to the lamp control unit 150, and a lamp change effect is executed by changing the lighting mode (emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning slot lamp NR in accordance with the color change of the icon. It turns out.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a lamp changing flag indicating that a lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp change performance execution process ends; if the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set, and the current lamp change performance is executed. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process moves to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current lamp changing effect execution process is ended.

In step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, and in step E550-8, sets a lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current lamp change effect execution process. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control section 150, and the lamp change effect that was being executed is ended.

In this way, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 45, the lamp change is performed by changing the light emitting mode (light emitting color, lighting/blinking) of the winning opening lamp NR in response to the change of the icon in the icon change effect. It is designed to perform a performance. Therefore, the presentation effect can be enhanced by the synergistic effect with the icon change presentation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 45, unlike the icon change effect or the continuous notice effect, even if power is restored while the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect is executed again. It is designed not to. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the lamp change performance while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 45, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is executed in the normal gaming state, the icon change effect is not executed, Change effects are also not executed. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to encourage the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 45, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. Change effects are also not executed. Therefore, in a specific game state, it is possible to encourage the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that when power is restored, such as in the icon change performance, the lamp change performance may be executed again in the variable performance that is started after the power is restored. In this case, it is preferable to perform the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that is started after the power is restored.

In addition, instead of executing the lamp change effect in response to the icon change effect, the final lighting mode of the prize opening lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the preliminary change to the relevant change, etc. are determined by lottery and the lamp change effect is executed. You can do it like this.

In addition, when a variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is executed in the normal gaming state, or when a variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed in the specific gaming state, If a lamp change effect (a lamp change effect for a suspended memory that will be executed later) has already been executed, the lamp change effect may be ended and not restarted, or the lamp change effect may be interrupted and the corresponding It may be restarted after the variable display of the special symbols is finished.

(Production control unit's winning lighting effect decision process)
With reference to FIG. 46, the winning light emission effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a winning light emission effect determination process in the effect control section 130m, and this process is executed in the above-described special figure special electric effect process.

In step E560-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E560-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current prize winning light emission effect determination process is ended.

In step E560-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E560-3, determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the winning light emission effect. If it is the executable period for the winning light emitting effect, the process moves to step E560-4, and if it is not the winning time emitting light effect executable period, the winning emitting light effect is executed based on the prefetch designation command received this time. Assuming that it will not be executed, the process for determining the light emitting effect at the time of winning this time is terminated.

"Period during which the light emission effect can be executed at the time of winning" means that the jackpot game is not in progress, that when a prefetch designation command based on winning at the first starting port 45 is received, the normal gaming state is present, and that the second starting For example, when a prefetch designation command based on winning in the mouth 47 is received, the game is in a time-saving gaming state.

In step E560-4, the sub CPU 130a acquires a random value for determining a winning light emitting effect pattern to determine a winning light emitting effect pattern to be executed in the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and in step E560-4. 5, a winning light emitting effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 47) for determining a winning light emitting effect pattern is selected. The details of the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E560-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a winning light emission effect pattern. Specifically, with reference to the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, the type of special symbol, the type of prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), and the selection rate (%) of each winning light emitting effect pattern are determined. Based on this, one winning light emitting effect pattern is determined from among a plurality of winning light emitting effect patterns.

In step E560-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined winning light emitting effect pattern is a pattern for executing the winning light emitting effect. If the pattern is to execute the light-emitting effect when winning, the process moves to step E560-8, and if the pattern is not to execute the light-emitting effect when winning, the current light-emitting effect determining process is terminated.

In step E560-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a winning light emitting effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light emitting effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current winning light emitting effect determining process. As a result, the winning light emitting effect execution command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the winning light emitting effect is executed in the presentation mode corresponding to the winning light emitting effect execution command.

(Light emission pattern determination table when winning a prize)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a winning light emitting effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a winning light emitting effect pattern.

The winning lighting effect pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol, the type of prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each winning lighting effect pattern, and the selected winning lighting effect pattern. For reference, the performance mode for each winning light emission performance pattern is described.

The winning light emitting effect pattern includes a winning light emitting effect pattern 00 in which the winning light emitting effect is not executed, and winning light emitting effects patterns 01 and 02 in which the winning light emitting effect is executed. In the winning light emission patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10 emits white or yellow light, and the audio output device 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect.

The first feature of the winning light emission effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) with a high jackpot expectation level is better than the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) with a low jackpot expectation level. However, one point is that the light-emitting effect when winning a prize is easier to execute. By doing so, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectations for the execution of a variable performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the winning light emitting effect is easier to execute in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the winning lighting pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that, unlike the icon final display mode shown in FIG. Can be mentioned. By doing so, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained from the time the game ball enters the starting slot until the result of the variable performance is derived, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is also possible to provide a light emission effect pattern (for example, the top lamp 10b emits light in rainbow colors and a confirmation sound is output from the audio output device 9) when a jackpot is confirmed, and in this case, a full rotation reach It is preferable that a winning light emitting effect pattern is determined that will ensure a jackpot at the lowest rate when the above is executed.

(Fluctuating performance pattern determination processing of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described using FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process is executed in the above-described special figure special electric performance process.

First, in step E610-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E610-2, selects a variation effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 49 to 51) according to the current effect mode. do. The details of the variable effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E610-3, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from among the plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E610-4, the sub CPU 130a sets a variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, a variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Fluctuating performance pattern judgment table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C that is referred to in order to determine a variable performance pattern in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states) that is referred to in order to determine a variable performance pattern in performance mode H. It is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance mode H (specific game state) that is referred to for determination.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the variable effect pattern determination table associates the special figure variable pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable effect pattern, and the selected variable effect pattern. The performance configuration for each variable performance pattern is described as follows.

"Variation" in the production structure column indicates that a normal variation display in which a ready-to-win state is not formed due to the production symbol 70a is executed.
"Short variation" indicates that a shortened variation display in which a reach state is not formed is executed for a shorter time than a normal variation display.

"Pseudo-failure" refers to a pseudo-successful performance after the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the fluctuating display of one special symbol, and then a pseudo-sequential performance is performed to determine whether or not a pseudo-sequential performance will be executed. This indicates that a pseudo consecutive failure effect is executed, which results in the failure of the sequence.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that, after performing a performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed, a pseudo-successful performance that results in the pseudo-successful performance is performed.
"(Fluctuation → Pseudo Success) x 2" means a performance in which a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance is performed after an inciting performance that incites whether or not the pseudo consecutive performance will be executed. This shows that two sets of effects will be performed, with 1 set being 1 set.
"(Fluctuation → pseudo-success) x 3" is a performance in which a pseudo-successful performance that results in a pseudo-successful performance is performed after an inciting performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed. This shows that three sets of performances will be performed, with 1 set being 1 set.

"Variation (Episode 1)" refers to the first stage of a stage production (story production) that can be performed in a variable production that includes pseudo-failure and pseudo-success, and that can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the first episode of the story will be performed.
"Fluctuation (Episode 2)" refers to the second stage of a stage production (story production) that can be performed in a variable production including pseudo-failure and pseudo-success, and can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the second episode of the story following the first episode will be performed.
"Fluctuation (Episode 3)" refers to the third stage of the stage production (story production) that can be performed in a variable production including pseudo-failure and pseudo-success, and the production can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the third episode of the story that follows the second episode will be performed.

"N reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed.
"N '7'reach" indicates that the normal reach effect described above is executed in a state where the reach state is formed by the effect pattern 70a of "7".
"SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SP reach effect is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP reach effect is executed.
"SPSP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach effect is executed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the above-mentioned full rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that a full rotation reach is executed is executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in performances with different jackpot expectation levels will be executed in accordance with the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Decision" indicates that a determination performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot game will be executed is executed in accordance with the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Failure" indicates that as a result of the deciding performance, a deciding failure performance indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed.
"Success" indicates that as a result of the winning performance, a successful winning performance that suggests that a jackpot game will be executed is executed.

"Loss" means a temporary stop after forming a losing number (a losing display mode such as "358" or "948" which is different from the initial number described later) by the performance pattern 70a that does not include a character but only numbers. It shows.
"c pattern loss" means to form a loss result (a loss display form such as ``358'' or ``948'' which is different from the initial appearance described later) by the performance pattern 70a of the display form including the character and temporarily stop. It is shown that.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is displayed on the image display device.
"Symbol alignment" indicates that a jackpot is formed (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a that does not include characters and includes only numbers, and the game is temporarily stopped.
"C symbols aligned" indicates that a jackpot is formed (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") by the production symbol 70a in a display mode including characters, and the game is temporarily stopped.

"Re-lottery" refers to whether or not the performance symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped at a jackpot (jackpot display mode) will become a jackpot that is advantageous for the player (from an even-numbered performance symbol that normally results in a jackpot, it will become a probability-variable jackpot). (Whether it will be an odd-numbered production symbol or not, or whether it will be a "7" production symbol where the most advantageous jackpot game will be executed), a promotion success production will be performed that will result in an advantageous jackpot. , indicates that a re-lottery performance is executed, such as a promotion failure performance that does not result in an advantageous jackpot.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmed vibration performance) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second.

"Special symbol fluctuation (end notification performance continuation)" means that the fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a is not executed while the end notification performance executed during the last fluctuation performance in the special time-saving gaming state described later is continued. This shows that only the variable display of the symbol TZ is performed.
The "resurrection performance" indicates that a resurrection performance is performed to falsely notify the player of a jackpot after the special time-saving game state ends.
"Special symbol alignment" indicates that the special symbol TZ forms a jackpot (jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") and is stopped and displayed in a state where the production symbol 70a is not displayed.

The "chance performance" indicates that the above-mentioned chance performance (a performance in which a text image of "chance approaching" is displayed on the first image display device 70) is performed.
"Acquisition effect (role object strong descending motion)" is a jackpot acquisition effect (effect in which the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum movement position and the success effect image SEF is displayed) that suggests that a jackpot has been won. indicates that it will be done.

"Result display" indicates that the above-mentioned result display is performed.
The "resurrection performance (strong descending motion of the role object)" is a resurrection performance (the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operation position and the success effect image SEF This indicates that a performance (in which a is displayed) will be performed.

"Fluctuation (short entry performance)" means that the above-mentioned short entry performance is performed when it is the first fluctuation of the special time-saving gaming state, and the above-mentioned short entry performance is not performed when it is not the first fluctuation of the special time-saving gaming state. It is shown that.
"Variation + long entry effect" indicates that the above-mentioned long entry effect is performed in the first variation of the special time saving game state.

"Immediate win success" indicates that an effect is performed in which the player is notified of an advantageous result (big win) without going through reach.
"Immediate hit success (role object strong descending motion)" is an effect in which the player is notified of an advantageous result (jackpot) without going through reach (the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position) This indicates that an effect in which a success effect image SEF is displayed will be performed.

The "end notification performance (door closed)" indicates that the above-mentioned end notification performance (a performance in which the door image is closed and a text image is displayed to notify the end of the special time-saving game state) is performed.

The first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the eye catch effect that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is After execution, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel strange due to the change in the display mode of the performance symbols 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the performance symbols 70a will be stopped and displayed, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The second feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that in the case of a jackpot, there are variable effect patterns in which the winning effect is executed and the symbols are aligned, and variable effect patterns in which the symbols are aligned and the symbols are aligned and the winning effect is successful. One point is that there is a variable performance pattern in which the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the case of a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that in the variable effect pattern that results in a jackpot, when the effect patterns 70a that do not include characters line up, the effect button 17 is pressed for 4 seconds. One point is that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is performed in which the player vibrates strongly. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is the strong vibration that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate strongly for one second when the effect patterns 70a including characters are aligned (c patterns aligned). One point is that a performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the reach performance (normal reach The point is that the proportion of reach effects performed with even-numbered effect symbols 70a (the effect symbols that usually result in a jackpot when a jackpot roll is made) is higher than the proportion of effects that are performed (performance, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when a jackpot is achieved with an odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the rate at which reach performance is performed with even-numbered performance symbols 70a (production symbols that usually result in a jackpot when the result is a jackpot) is The point is that the percentage of reach effects (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) being performed is lower with the production pattern 70a of "7" (the production pattern that is the most advantageous probability variable jackpot by getting a jackpot). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when the player hits a jackpot with the performance symbol 70a of "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the reach performance (normal reach Direction, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) One point to note is that the ratio of "reach performance" and "SPSP reach performance" is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when the player hits a jackpot with the performance symbol 70a of "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that when the ready-to-win performance is executed with an even-numbered performance symbol 70a or an odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7", "7" When the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect pattern 70a, the expectation of a jackpot is higher. Therefore, it is possible for the player to increase his or her expectations as to which type of performance symbol will be used to perform the ready-to-win performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are the most advantageous than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). In the case of a probability variable jackpot, a reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is likely to be executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7" (the performance symbol which becomes the most advantageous probability variable jackpot when the jackpot roll is made). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effects in performance modes D to G (specific game states), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), even if the reach effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a of "7", the jackpot is guaranteed. However, in performance modes D to G (specific game states), if the ready-to-win performance is executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7", a jackpot is guaranteed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effects in performance modes D to G (specific game states), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the special time is shorter than when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation effect of loss) is executed in the normal gaming state. The point is that the same variable performance pattern is more easily executed when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation performance of loss) is executed in the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to vary the production effect when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed depending on the gaming state, and also to enter the game ball into the second starting port 47 in the special time-saving gaming state. It is possible to encourage the player to play the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the variation performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the variation performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 has a special The point is that the same variable performance pattern is more easily executed when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation performance of loss) is executed in the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the performance effect can be varied depending on the game state and the type of special symbol, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that when the loss variation display of the second special symbol (the second variation effect of loss) is executed in the special time reduction gaming state, and when the special time reduction In the gaming state, when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation effect of loss) is executed, the foreshadowing effect (reach stimulation effect) that suggests the possibility that the reach effect will be executed is executed. One point is that the execution rate of the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed is different (the execution rate is high when the second special symbol lose first variable performance is executed in the special time-saving game state). Therefore, the production effect of whether or not a reach is executed can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the special time-saving game state, the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol (the second fluctuation of loss) is executed in the special time-saving game state than when the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol (the first fluctuation performance of loss) is executed. However, when a reach effect (direction) is executed, the execution rate of a fluctuating effect in which a foreshadowing effect indicating the possibility of a reach effect (a reach promotion effect) is executed but a reach effect is not executed is higher. , and vice versa. In this case, in the special time-saving gaming state, when the first variation performance of losing is executed and when the second variation production of losing is executed, the reach promotion effect is executed, but the variation where the reach effect is not executed. After the performance is executed, the execution ratio of the first variable performance that is a loss may be increased.

The fourteenth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the first period in the normal gaming state (during the expiration period of the second reservation remaining after the end of the time-saving gaming state); In the second period (after the expiration period of the remaining second hold after the end of the time-saving gaming state), which is different, a foreshadowing performance (reach inciting performance) that suggests the possibility of a reach performance is executed, but the reach performance is The difference is that the execution rate of the loss variation effect that is not executed is different. Therefore, even in the normal gaming state, the effect of whether or not a reach is executed can be varied, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that when the loss variation display of the second special symbol (the second variation effect of loss) is executed in the normal time reduction gaming state, and when the special time reduction In the gaming state, when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation effect of loss) is executed, the foreshadowing effect (reach stimulation effect) that suggests the possibility that the reach effect will be executed is executed. One point that can be cited is that the execution rate of variable effects in which reach effects are not executed is different. Therefore, the performance effect of whether or not a reach is executed can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixteenth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that it is possible to execute a staged performance (story performance) that can progress step by step in a variable performance in which a pseudo continuous performance is executed, and the expectation level It is possible to perform the second stage of the stage performance (playing the movie of the second story episode) after executing the normal reach performance with a low level of reach, while the second stage of the stage performance (playing the movie of the second story episode) can be executed after the execution of the SP/SPSP reach performance with high expectations. Movie playback of the second episode) is not executed. Therefore, by varying whether or not the stage performance progresses depending on the type of reach performance, the performance effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance is always performed, but a variable performance pattern may be provided in which the ready-to-win performance is not performed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is performed.

In addition, if you stop temporarily due to a loss after a cut-in performance or a failed decision performance, it is guaranteed to be a loss, but a resurrection performance that is guaranteed to be a jackpot after a cut-in performance or a failed decision performance. may also be executed.

In addition, when a variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, a foreshadowing effect (reach inciting effect) indicating the possibility of a reach effect is executed, but the reach effect is Although the variable effect is not executed, it may be executed. In this case, it is preferable that the loss variation display (second variation performance) of the second special symbol is executed at a lower rate than when it is executed in the normal game state or the normal time-saving game state.

(Timer effect determination process in the effect control unit)
The timer performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a timer effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process includes a variable effect pattern determination process (a variable effect pattern is determined based on a special figure variable pattern designation command) in the above-mentioned special figure special electric effect effect process. (determining process).

In step E620-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the current variable performance pattern, and in step E620-2, performs a reach performance (including a chance performance) or higher (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance, It is determined whether special SP reach, chance performance) is executed. If a performance equal to or higher than the ready-to-reach performance is executed, the process moves to step E620-3, and if a performance equal to or higher than the SP ready-to-reach performance is not executed, the current timer performance determination process is ended.

In step E620-3, the sub CPU 130a uses the event timer frequency determination table (see FIG. 53) to determine the number of event timer effects ("0 times" to "2 times") to be executed during the current variable effect. do. Specifically, the jackpot lottery results, variable performance patterns, etc. are checked against the event timer count determination table. Note that details of the event timer count determination table will be described later.

An event timer effect indicates that any one of multiple suggestive events (excluding icon changes) will occur during the execution process of the variable effect, and indicates the timing at which the suggestive event will occur. However, when the event timer effect is executed, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of suggestion event, and it becomes possible for the player to determine the type of suggestion event at the time the suggestion event occurs. There is.

Suggestive events include normal reach performance, pseudo-continuation, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance, special SP reach performance, valid period, jackpot symbol stop, etc.

In step E620-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined number of event timer effects is one for executing the event timer effect. If the event timer effect is to be executed (the number of event timer effects is "once" or "twice"), the process moves to step E620-5, and if the event timer effect is not to be executed (the event timer effect is "once" or "twice"), the process moves to step E620-5. If the number of performances is "0"), the current timer performance determination process is ended.

In step E620-5, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined number of event timer effects is one. If it is once, the process moves to step E620-6, and if it is not once but twice, the process moves to step E620-9.

In step E620-6, the sub CPU 130a uses the one-time timer suggestion event determination table (see FIG. 54) to determine the suggestion event suggested by the event timer presentation and the timer type classified by the type and length of the timer. Determine. Specifically, the variable effect pattern, etc. is checked against the suggestion event determination table for one timer. Note that the details of the suggestion event determination table for one timer will be described later.

The timer types include short timer, which is a classification of short timer time, middle timer, which is a classification of long timer time, and long timer, which is a classification of long timer time. Note that the timer times set by the three timer types are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

In step E620-7, the sub CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) to determine the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the event timer effect. Specifically, the timer type, jackpot lottery results, etc. are checked against the update pattern determination table. Note that details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-8, the sub CPU 130a sets the timer effect pattern command indicating the suggested event and the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect pattern command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

In step E620-9, the sub CPU 130a uses the first suggestion event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 55(a)) to determine the suggestion event suggested by the first event timer presentation and the timer's suggestion event. Determine timer types classified by type and length. Specifically, the variable effect pattern, etc. is checked against the first suggestion event determination table for the two-timer. Note that the details of the first suggestion event determination table for the two-time timer will be described later.

In step E620-10, the sub CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) to determine the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the first event timer effect. Specifically, the timer type, jackpot lottery results, etc. are checked against the update pattern determination table. Note that details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a timer effect designation command indicating a suggested event and an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, a timer effect designation command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the first event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

In step E620-12, the sub CPU 130a uses the second suggestion event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 55(b)) to determine the suggestion event suggested by the second event timer presentation and the timer. Determine timer types classified by length. Specifically, the variable effect pattern, etc. is checked against the second suggestion event determination table for the two-timer. Note that the details of the second suggestion event determination table for the two-timer will be described later.

In step E620-13, the sub CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) to determine the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the second event timer effect. Specifically, the timer type, jackpot determination result, etc. are checked against the update pattern determination table. Note that details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a timer effect pattern command indicating a suggested event and an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current timer effect determination process. As a result, a timer effect designation command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the second event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

(Event timer count determination table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an event timer number determination table that is referred to when determining the number of event timer performances performed during a variable performance. The event timer number determination table includes the jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern, the distribution ratio (%) for each event timer performance in the normal setting and simple setting by customizing the performance, and the determined number of event timer performances. are associated.

The number of event timer effects includes "0 times" which means the event timer effect will not be executed, "1 time" which means the event timer effect will be executed once, and "1 time" which means the event timer effect will be executed twice. Three types of "twice" are set.

In addition, "(Special 1)" written in the variable performance pattern column means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the first variable performance that corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(Special 1)" 2) means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, in simple settings, the rate at which each number of times the event timer effect is executed (1 time, 2 times) is selected is the rate at which each number of times (1 time, 2 times) the event timer effect is executed is selected. Although it is designed to be 1/2, it may be more or less than 1/2.

The first feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the event timer performance is more likely to be executed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot than when it is a loss, and the reach with a low jackpot expectation One point is that the event timer performance is more likely to be executed when a reach-for-win performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed than when a performance is executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the number of times the event timer effect is executed is likely to be greater when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot than when it is a loss. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the number of executions of the event timer effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. An example of this is that the number of executions of the performance tends to increase. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the event timer frequency determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the execution rate of the timer effect changes depending on the effect customization setting (normal setting, simple setting) by the player. By doing so, it is possible to set the performance balance that suits the player's preference, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in production modes A to C, when the second variable production corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the special SP reach production pattern, the timer production is executed. The performance may not be performed (limited). In this case, when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed during the performance modes A to C, and when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed during the performance modes D to H, If the variable display) is executed, the timer effect will not be executed.

(Suggestive event determination table for one timer)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a suggestion event determination table for a single timer that is referred to when determining a timer type and a suggestion event when an event timer production is executed once during a variable production. The suggestion event determination table for one timer is associated with a variable performance pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestion event, a suggestion event to be determined, and a timer type.

Eight types of suggestion events are set: normal reach, pseudo-continuation, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, special SP reach, valid period, and jackpot symbol stop.

Furthermore, three types of timers are set: a short timer, which is a classification of short timer times, a middle timer, which is a classification of long timer times, and a long timer, which is a classification of long timer times. Note that the timer times set by the three timer types are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

The first feature of the one-time timer suggestion event determination table shown in FIG. 54 is that the types of suggestion events are set to differ depending on the variable performance pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variations of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the one-time timer suggestion event determination table shown in FIG. The higher the degree, the more likely it is that a long timer will be determined as the timer type. By doing this, the longer the timer time in the timer effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have a sense of expectation regarding the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Suggestion event determination table for two timers)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a suggestion event when the event timer effect is executed twice during the variable effect and a suggestion event determination table for the two-time timer that is referred to when determining the timer type. In the suggestion event determination table for two timers, a variable performance pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestion event, a suggestion event to be determined, and a timer type are associated with each other.

Note that FIG. 55(a) is a diagram showing a first suggestion event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the first suggestion event and the type of timer type, and FIG. ) is a diagram showing a second suggestion event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the second suggestion event and the type of timer type.

Seven types of suggestion events are set: normal reach, pseudo-continuation, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, valid period, full rotation reach effect, and jackpot symbol stop.

Furthermore, three types of timers are set: a short timer, which is a classification of short timer times, a middle timer, which is a classification of long timer times, and a long timer, which is a classification of long timer times. Note that the timer times set by the three timer types are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

The first feature of the suggestion event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 55 is that the types of suggestion events are set to differ depending on the variable performance pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variations of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second feature of the two-timer suggestion event determination table shown in FIG. One point is that both events that are executed late in the variation performance are likely to be determined as suggestion events. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation over a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the third feature of the two-timer suggestion event determination table shown in FIG. The higher the expectation of a jackpot, the more likely it is that a long timer will be determined as the timer type. By doing this, the longer the timer time in the timer effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have a sense of expectation regarding the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Update pattern determination table)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an update pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a timer update pattern (effect mode). The update pattern determination table is associated with the timer type, jackpot determination result, allocation ratio (%) for each update pattern, and update pattern to be determined.For reference, the timer time, timer display mode, and timer display mode for each update pattern are associated. The timer display position and whether or not a standby display indicating that execution of the timer effect is on standby are described.

The "normal pattern" is a normal update pattern in which the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 is decremented by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds.
A "special pattern" means that after the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 is decremented by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds, the timer (number of seconds) is rewound. This is a special update pattern in which the time is subtracted by 1 until it reaches 0 seconds again.

The jackpot expectation for each update pattern corresponding to the short timer is normal pattern 1<normal pattern 2<normal pattern 3.
The jackpot expectation for each update pattern corresponding to the middle timer is normal pattern 11<normal pattern 12<normal pattern 13.
The expected jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the long timer is normal pattern 21<normal pattern 22<normal pattern 23<normal pattern 24<normal pattern 25<special pattern 1<normal pattern 26<normal pattern 27<special pattern 2< The normal pattern is 28.

In this way, in the timer effect, multiple timer times (update patterns) are set, but by counting down to 0 seconds, the timer effect can be used for predetermined events (icon change effect, various reach effects, zone effect, count up). This is a performance that suggests the timing of a predetermined event, so no matter what timer time (update pattern) , the count value is counted up to the final arrival point (in this embodiment, 0 seconds).

The first feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that, regardless of the timer type, the update pattern has a longer timer time when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a loss. There are some points that are easy to determine. By doing this, the longer the timer time in the timer effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have a sense of expectation regarding the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

A second feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that even if the timer time is the same, the jackpot expectation level differs depending on the timer display mode (font color). By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the display mode of the timer, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Specifically, the jackpot expectation level according to the timer display mode (font color) is white < blue < red < rainbow (jackpot confirmed).

(Jackpot preview production decision process by production control department)
The jackpot preview performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the jackpot preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process includes the variable performance pattern determination process in the above-mentioned special figure special electric performance process (variable performance pattern based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command). (determining process).

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable effect pattern to be executed in the current variable effect, and in step E650-2, the sub CPU 130a creates an accessory that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed at the start of the change. The accessory advance notice determination table at the start of variation (see FIGS. 58 and 59) for determining the advance notice pattern is selected, and the accessory advance notice pattern is determined. Note that details of the change start accessory advance notice determination table will be described later.

The "fluctuating starting accessory advance notice performance" is a type of jackpot advance notice performance in which the accessory (first movable member 73) is operated in an operation mode according to the jackpot expectation level at the start of the fluctuation performance.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the accessory preview performance at the start of variation is one for executing the accessory preview performance at the start of variation. If the performance is not to execute the accessory notice at the start of the fluctuation, the process moves to step E650-5, and if the purpose is to execute the accessory notice at the start, in step E650-4, the accessory advance notice is executed. Set the accessory preview performance command according to the pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the accessory preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the accessory preview performance at the start of the variation according to the accessory preview pattern is executed at the start of the fluctuation performance.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a performs a pre-reach preview determination process to determine a preview pattern of a pre-reach preview performance that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed during the pre-reach performance period (high-speed fluctuation period). Select the table (see FIG. 60) and decide on the notice pattern. Note that the details of the pre-reach notice determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the ready-to-reach preview performance is one for executing a dialogue preview performance. If the dialogue preview performance is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-7, and if the dialogue preview performance is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-9.

"Speech preview performance" means that a valid period occurs during a variable performance (high-speed fluctuation period), and according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid time, the image display device indicates the expectation of a jackpot. This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which a dialogue image is displayed and a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 62) for determining a dialogue preview pattern for the dialogue preview performance, and determines a dialogue preview pattern. Set a dialogue preview production command according to the preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a line preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a line preview performance according to the line preview pattern is executed during the fluctuating performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Note that details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the ready-to-reach preview performance is one for executing a step-up preview performance. If the step-up preview effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-10, and if the step-up preview effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-12.

"Step-up notice performance" means multiple steps from the 1st step (first stage) to the 5th step (final stage) without causing the effective period of the performance button 17 during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which step performances are executed in a predetermined order until reaching one of the steps.

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice performance, determines the step-up notice pattern, and executes the step-up notice pattern in step E650-10. At step 11, a step-up notice performance command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a step-up notice performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a step-up notice performance according to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Note that details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect. If it is a variable performance pattern that performs a pseudo continuous performance, the process moves to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that does not perform a pseudo continuous performance, the process moves to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub CPU 130a selects the pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the pseudo continuous effect pattern of the pseudo continuous effect, and determines the pseudo continuous effect pattern, and in step E650-14. At , a pseudo continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a pseudo continuous performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pseudo continuous performance according to the pseudo continuous performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation performance pattern is a variation performance pattern for executing a development performance (SP development performance, SPSP development performance, full rotation development performance). If it is a variable effect pattern that executes an advanced effect, the process moves to step E650-16, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes an advanced effect, the process moves to step E650-18.

In step E650-16, the sub CPU 130a selects the development performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 65) for determining the development performance pattern of the development performance and determines the development performance pattern, and in step E650-17, the development performance pattern is determined. Set the advanced production command according to the pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the development effect according to the development effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Note that details of the advanced performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-18, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that executes a reach performance (post-reach performance). If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a ready-to-win performance, the process moves to step E650-19, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a ready-to-win performance, the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub CPU 130a selects the cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 66) for determining the cut-in effect pattern of the cut-in effect, and determines the cut-in effect pattern. At , a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a cut-in effect command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a cut-in effect according to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Note that details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for executing a fixed performance. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process moves to step E650-23, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process moves to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub CPU 130a selects the final performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 67) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance and determines the final performance pattern, and in step E650-24, the final performance pattern is determined. Set the determined production command according to the pattern in the sending buffer. As a result, a fixed performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a fixed performance according to the fixed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. Note that details of the fixed performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a re-lottery effect, the process moves to step E650-26, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a re-lottery effect, the process moves to step E650-28.

In step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 68) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern of the re-lottery effect, and determines the re-lottery effect pattern, and in step E650-27. At , a re-lottery performance command corresponding to the re-lottery performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a re-lottery performance command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a re-lottery performance according to the re-lottery performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the re-lottery performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-28, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that allows execution of a confirmed performance (results in a jackpot). If the variable performance pattern is such that a confirmed performance can be executed, the process moves to step E650-29, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that allows a confirmed performance to be executed, the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E650-29, the sub CPU 130a selects the final performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 69) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance, and determines the final performance pattern. A confirmed performance command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer, and the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended. As a result, a confirmed performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a confirmed performance according to the confirmed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the confirmed performance pattern determination table will be described later.

(Accessory notice determination table at the start of fluctuation)
FIG. 58 shows a fluctuation start accessory notice determination table for performance modes A to C (normal game state) that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for the fluctuation start accessory advance notice performance in performance modes A to C. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the accessory notice at the start of variation for performance modes D to H (specific game states), which is referred to when determining the notice pattern of the performance. It is a figure showing a decision table.

The variation start accessory notice determination table includes the production mode, jackpot judgment result, variation production pattern, selection rate (%) of each variation start accessory notice pattern, and selected variation start accessory notice pattern. are associated.

The accessory notice pattern at the start of the variation includes no notice, a rattling motion in which the first movable member 73 is moved up and down in the initial position (standby position) at the start of the variation production, and the start of the variation production. A weak lowering operation is set in which the first movable member 73 is lowered from the initial position to an intermediate position between the initial position and the presentation position and then returned to the initial position.

In addition, "(Special 1)" written in the variable performance pattern column means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the first variable performance that corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(Special 1)" 2) means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The first feature of the fluctuation start accessory notice determination table shown in FIGS. 58 to 59 is that when the second fluctuation performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state), The weak descending motion is not executed as the object notice pattern, that is, the execution of the accessory object notice effect at the start of fluctuation is restricted. By doing this, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state) in which it is advantageous for the player to play left-handed, the first variation is performed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45. It is possible to promote the execution of the performance and improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the variation starting accessory notice determination table shown in FIGS. 58 to 59, in production modes A to C (normal game state), the second variation performance corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is When executed, the weak descending motion is not executed as the fluctuation start accessory notice pattern, that is, the execution of the fluctuation start accessory advance notice effect is restricted. By doing this, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state) in which it is advantageous for the player to play left-handed, the first variation is performed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45. It is possible to promote the execution of the performance and improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the change start accessory notice determination table shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 is that in performance modes D to G (probability change game state, normal time-saving game state), it corresponds to the change display of the first special symbol. When the first variation performance is executed, the weak descending motion is not performed as the variation start accessory notice pattern, that is, the execution of the variation start accession notice performance is restricted. By doing this, in production modes D to G (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) in which it is advantageous for the player to play right-handed, the game ball enters the second starting port 47. It is possible to promote the execution of the second variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the variation starting accessory notice determination table shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, in production mode H (special time-saving game state), the first variation performance corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. In this case, the weak descending motion is not executed as the fluctuation start accessory object notice pattern, that is, the execution of the fluctuation start accessory object notice effect is restricted. By doing this, in performance mode H (special time-saving game state) in which it is advantageous for the player to hit right, the second variable performance is performed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47. The execution of the game can be promoted, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), when the second variation production corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the special SP reach production pattern, a role item notice (rattling movement) at the start of variation is ) is executed, however, the announcement of the accessory at the start of fluctuation may not be executed (limited).

In addition, in performance modes D to G (probable variable game state, normal time-saving game state), when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the chance performance pattern, a notice of the accessory at the start of the fluctuation is given. (rattling motion) is executed, however, the announcement of the accessory at the start of the fluctuation may not be executed (limited).

In addition, in production mode H (special time saving game state), when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a special SP reach production pattern, or when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, When the first variation effect is executed in the end-suggestion revival effect pattern, the accessory notice (rattling motion) at the start of the variation is set to be executed, but the accessory notice at the start of the variation is not executed (limited). ).

In addition, in production modes D to H (specific game states), when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the weak downward movement of the first movable member 73 is no longer executed. However, the first movable member 73 may be moved slightly downward. In this case, the weak downward movement of the first movable member 73 is performed at a lower rate than when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). It is recommended that it be executed.

Further, although the variable start role preview performance is not a customization target performance whose execution rate changes depending on the normal setting and simple setting, it may be a customization target performance. In this case, as with other customization target effects, the selection rate (execution rate) of "rattling motion" and "weak descending motion" in the simple setting will be lower than the selection rate (execution rate) in the normal setting (e.g. , 1/2, 1/3, etc.).

(Pre-reach notice determination table)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a pre-reach advance notice determination table for production modes A to C (normal gaming state) that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for pre-reach notice production in production modes A to C (normal gaming state). FIG. 61 is a pre-reach notice determination table for production modes D to H (specific gaming states) that is referred to when determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice performance in production modes D to H (specific gaming states). FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the pre-reach notice determination table is associated with the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern, selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and selected notice pattern. .

There are three pre-reach preview patterns: ``No notice'' in which the pre-reach preview is not executed, ``Speech preview'' in which the dialogue preview is executed, and ``Step-up notice'' in which the step-up notice is executed. The types are set, and the expectation level for the jackpot game to be executed (the rate at which the vibrating effects associated with the alignment of the symbols described above are executed) is as follows: no advance notice < dialogue advance notice performance < step-up advance notice performance.

In addition, "(Special 1)" written in the variable performance pattern column means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the first variable performance that corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(Special 1)" 2) means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The first feature of the pre-reach preview determination table shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is that the pre-reach preview performance is more likely to be executed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot than when the jackpot determination result is a loss, and when the jackpot determination result is The point is that the pre-reach preview performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance pattern with a high jackpot expectation level is determined than when a variable performance pattern with a low probability is determined. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is that there is a higher chance of losing in production modes D to G (specific gaming state) than in production modes A to C (normal gaming state). In this case, a pre-reach preview performance (both a line preview performance that allows a vibration performance to be executed with the validity period of the production button 17, and a step-up preview performance that allows a vibration performance to be executed without the validity period of the production button 17) The problem is that it is difficult to implement (execution rate is low). Therefore, in performance modes D to G (specific game states) in which the variable time tends to be short, wasteful pre-reach preview performances are less likely to be executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the reach pre-notice determination table shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is that the jackpot is higher in production modes D to G (specific gaming state) than in production modes A to C (normal gaming state). Even in this case, when the variable performance pattern is a pattern for performing a normal reach performance and a pattern for performing a SP ready-to-reach performance, the ready-to-reach advance notice performance is difficult to be executed (the execution rate is low). Therefore, in performance modes D to G (specific game states) in which the variable time tends to be short, wasteful pre-reach preview performances are less likely to be executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, a step-up without the effective period of the effect button 17 is more effective than when a dialogue preview effect with the effective period of the effect button 17 is executed. When a preview performance is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot (rate of execution of the vibration performance in conjunction with the above-mentioned pattern alignment, rate of execution of vibration performance in the deciding performance described later, etc.) is higher. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the step-up notice performance is executed, the jackpot expectation level (the rate at which the vibration performance associated with the alignment of symbols mentioned above is performed, and the success performance described later) is higher when the dialogue preview performance is executed. (e.g., the rate at which accompanying vibration effects are performed) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), when the second variable production corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the pre-reach preview production (line preview production) will be executed. However, the pre-reach preview effect may not be executed (limited).

In addition, in production modes D to G (probability variable gaming state, normal time saving gaming state), when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance) Although it is designed to be executed, the pre-reach preview performance may not be executed (limited).

In addition, in production mode H (special time-saving game state), when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the pre-reach preview production (line preview production) will now be executed. However, the pre-reach preview effect may not be executed (limited).

In addition, in production modes D to H (specific game states), when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the validity period of step-up notice production (pattern 5 etc. to be described later) occurs. However, a step-up preview effect may be executed. In this case, the step-up notice performance (such as pattern 5 described later) is performed at a lower rate than when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). It is preferable that a vibration effect (vibration effect that does not occur during the valid period) is executed.

Further, although the pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) is not a customization target performance whose execution rate changes depending on the normal setting and simple setting, it may be a customization target performance. In this case, as with other customization target effects, the selection rate (execution rate) of the "line preview effect" and/or "step-up preview effect" in the simple setting is higher than the selection rate (execution rate) in the normal setting. It is preferable to set it to a lower value (for example, 1/2 or 1/3).

(Serif notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a dialogue preview pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a preview pattern for a dialogue preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 62, the dialogue announcement pattern determination table associates the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each dialogue announcement pattern, and selected dialogue announcement pattern. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestive production, validity period, content of production) of each line preview pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the dialogue preview performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that encourages the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and The effect is to display a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, operation sound 1 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "Normal (white)" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the production button 17 emits white light with low expectations for a jackpot.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production that will be executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period, and "3 seconds dialogue display period" means that the dialogue image display period is 3 seconds. It shows that there is.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the dialogue production mode column indicates that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black letters, and that the normal dialogue is output as audio. It shows.
"Chance speech (black)" indicates that a chance speech that has a possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black letters, and that the chance speech is outputted as voice.
"Reach line (black)" indicates that the reach line that confirms the execution of the reach effect is displayed in black letters, and that the reach line is output as audio.
"Reach line (red)" indicates that the reach line that confirms the execution of the reach effect is displayed in red letters, and that the reach line is output as audio.

"Heat dialogue (red)" indicates that a heat dialogue that has a high possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in red letters, and that the heat dialogue is outputted as a voice.
The term "hot line (gold)" indicates that a line with a very high probability of winning a jackpot game is displayed in golden letters, and at the same time, the line is outputted as a voice.
The "confirmed line (rainbow)" indicates that the confirmed line that confirms the execution of the jackpot game is displayed in rainbow-colored characters, and that the confirmed line is outputted as voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 starts from the time the lines start to be displayed (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly for seconds is to be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is strong for 1 second from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the production button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). This indicates that a strong vibrating effect will be executed.

The expected jackpot for each dialogue production mode is: "Normal dialogue" < "Chance dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (red)" < "Heat dialogue (red)" < "Extreme heat" ``Serif (gold)'' < ``Confirmed line (rainbow)''. In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

The first feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that when a line with high expectation of jackpot (hot line or higher) is displayed, a vibration effect can be executed in which the effect button 17 is vibrated. There are several points. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the line preview performance of the super hot line, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the hot line, is executed, compared to the case where the line preview performance of the hot line is executed. In this case, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the dialogue preview effect of the heat dialogue is executed. One point is that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when it is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the dialogue preview effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a dialogue with a high probability of winning a jackpot (hot dialogue or higher) is displayed has a relatively short duration. Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are several types of points. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the period of vibration of the production button 17 (1 second) while the dialogue image is displayed is shorter than the display period of the dialogue image (3 seconds). can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation before the ready-to-win effect is executed, but not to have an excessive sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects performed during the dialogue preview production, but it is also possible to use only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects, or the vibration effects may be stronger than the vibration duration of the weak vibration effects. The vibration time may be increased.

Furthermore, the expected level of jackpot when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the dialogue preview effect is the same in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect mode D to G (specific game state). However, the expectation level of jackpot may be higher in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), or the expectation level of jackpot may be higher in production modes D to G (specific gaming state). You may also do so. In this way, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is also possible to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the player, and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the effective period ends and the dialogue preview performance is executed by operating the performance button 17 or by elapse of the effective time, but if the effective period ends due to the elapse of the effective time, the dialogue preview performance is executed. You may choose not to execute it.

In addition, although the dialogue preview performance is executed with a valid period, it is also possible to execute the dialogue preview performance without generating a valid period. It is also possible to perform only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or only a strong vibration effect for 1 second.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for a step-up notice performance.

As shown in FIG. 63, the step-up notice pattern determination table associates the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and selected step-up notice pattern. The performance contents (step-up (SU) performance mode, button vibration) of each step-up notice pattern are described for reference.

"1→2" in the step-up effect mode column indicates that the first to second step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the first to third step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the first to fourth step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the first to fifth step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the first to third step effects are executed in order, the fourth step effect is skipped and the fifth step effect is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the last step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the last step performance is 3 seconds.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at 5" in the button vibration column means that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the 5th step effect. It shows that it will be done.

"Button state" indicates the state of the production button 17 while the step-up preview production is being executed, and "Normal (off)" in the button state column is the normal state in which the production button 17 is not protruding. This shows that the production button 17 is turned off.

The jackpot expectation for each step-up production mode is "1 → 2" < "1 → 2 → 3" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 4" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 5".

The first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it is possible to perform a vibration effect that vibrates 17. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the vibration effect that is executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with high expectation of jackpot is displayed is for a relatively short time. There are several points that can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is the vibration mode (vibration intensity, vibration One point is that there is only one predetermined type of time (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up preview performance in which the player does not operate the performance button 17 and it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration performance, it is possible to suppress the performance form from becoming complicated, and improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

The fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , Step-up preview performances with low expectations are difficult to execute (execution rate is low). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the weak vibration effect is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the expectation of a jackpot is high when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 without a valid period (display of an operation promotion image) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the period (1 second) is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation before the ready-to-win effect is executed, but not to have an excessive sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than performance modes D to G (specific game state) when the performance button 17 does not have a valid period (display of an operation promotion image) in the step-up notice performance. The expectation level of a jackpot may be increased when the vibration effect is executed. Even in this case, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G that are advantageous to the players, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

(pseudo continuous performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a performance pattern for a pseudo-continuous performance.

As shown in FIG. 64, the pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, jackpot determination result, variable effect pattern type, selection rate (%) of each pseudo continuous effect pattern, and selected pseudo continuous effect pattern. The performance structure (effective suggestive performance, effective period, performance content) of each pseudo-continuous performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the pseudo continuous performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is a effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and specifically, displays an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 at a specific position, and The effect is to display a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 2 different from the operation sound 1 described above is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Protruding button white" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "Normal (white)" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the production button 17 emits white light with low expectations for a jackpot, and "protruding (red)" is a protruding state in which the production button 17 is protruding and the production button 17 has a low expectation of a jackpot. This indicates that it emits light in a high red color.

"Production content" refers to the content of the production related to the pseudo-continuous production, and "temporary suspension period of pseudo-continuation pattern 2 seconds" means that the period in which the pseudo-pattern, which will be described later, is temporarily stopped is 2 seconds. It shows.

"Pseudo-failure" in the pseudo-sequence production mode column means that the normal production pattern 70a temporarily stops without the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of a pseudo-sequence as the central production pattern 70a, and the failure sound effect is emitted. This indicates that the outputted pseudo consecutive failure performance will be executed.
"Pseudo success" means that the pseudo symbol 70a in the center that suggests the execution of a pseudo series temporarily stops, a success sound effect is output, the second movable member 74 moves weakly, and the pseudo series is executed. This indicates that a pseudo consecutive success performance will be executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 starts when the pseudo pattern temporarily stops (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly for one second will be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed.

The jackpot expectation level of each promotional performance is "normal button white" < "protruding button white". Moreover, the jackpot expectation level of each button state is "normal" < "prominent". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

The first feature of the pseudo consecutive effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a vibration effect that causes the button 17 to vibrate may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the vibration performance executed when the pseudo continuous success performance is performed is a variable performance pattern with high expectation of jackpot and is performed for a relatively short time. There are several points that can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on the situation. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the same performance device (performance button vibration Although it is possible to execute a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the motor, second movable member 74, etc., it is possible to execute a pseudo continuous performance using the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) rather than performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). ) has a higher expectation of a jackpot when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the pseudo-sequence performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are cases in which a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) is executed using a button vibration motor that vibrates. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the pseudo-sequence production pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the period (1 second) is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation before the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is executed, but to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the performance button 17 may be in a protruding state during the valid period when a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot, but it may not be in a protruding state.

Further, although there are a weak vibration performance and a strong vibration performance as the vibration performance executed in the pseudo consecutive success performance, only the weak vibration performance or only the strong vibration performance may be used.

In addition, although a valid period is generated to execute a pseudo consecutive success effect or a pseudo consecutive failure effect, it is also possible to execute a pseudo continuous success effect or a pseudo continuous failure effect without generating a valid period. The vibration performance that is often performed during the pseudo consecutive success performance may be only a 3-second weak vibration performance or only a 3-second strong vibration performance, or only a 1-second weak vibration performance or only a 1-second strong vibration performance. You may also do so.

Furthermore, performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than performance modes D to G (specific game state) because they are simulated using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). The expectation level of a jackpot when a consecutive performance (pseudo successive success performance) is executed may be set higher, and performance mode B or C may be higher than performance mode A using the same performance device (performance button vibration). The expectation level of a jackpot when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using a motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed may be made higher, and performance modes D~ than performance mode G may be set. Even if F is made to have a higher jackpot expectation when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. good.

Further, in the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous successful performance), the motion performance using the second movable member 74 is performed, but the motion performance using the first movable member 73 may be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the execution rate of the motion performance using the second movable member 74 is higher than that of the motion performance using the first movable member 73.

(Development performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an advanced performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a performance pattern for advanced performance.

As shown in FIG. 65, the advanced performance pattern determination table includes the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, advanced performance type for which the advanced performance pattern is determined, selection rate (%) of each advanced performance pattern, The selected advanced performance patterns are associated with each other, and the performance configuration (effective suggestive performance, effective period, and performance content) of each advanced performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
``None'' in the effective suggestion effect column indicates that the effective suggestion effect is not executed, and ``Yes (gase)'' indicates that the effective suggestion effect is executed but the validity period does not occur after that. This indicates that this is an effective suggestion effect, and "present" indicates that the effective suggestion effect will be executed and then a valid period will occur.

The "validity period (long press for 4 seconds)" indicates that the advanced performance progresses step by step by long pressing the performance button 17, and that the valid period of the advanced performance ends when 4 seconds have elapsed.
The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is a effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, as a result of a plurality of translucent effect button images gathering at a specific position, an opaque effect is created. The button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 3 different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 and 2 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Normal button red" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "Normal (white)" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Normal (red)" means the normal state in which the production button 17 does not protrude, and the production button 17 emits white light with low expectations for a jackpot. This indicates that it emits light in a high red color.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production related to the development production, and "Temporary stop period of development symbol 2 seconds" indicates that the period in which the development symbol is temporarily stopped is 2 seconds, which will be described later. ing.

"SP notification" in the development performance mode column refers to the SP development performance that derives and displays the SP development pattern that suggests development to the SP reach performance as a result of the development performance, and outputs the first development sound effect. Which indicates that.
"SPSP notification" indicates that as a result of the development performance, an SPSP development design that suggests development to the SPSP reach performance is derived and displayed, and an SPSP development performance that outputs a second development sound effect is executed. .
"Full rotation notification" means that as a result of the development performance, a full rotation development design that suggests development to a full rotation reach performance is derived and displayed, and a full rotation development performance that outputs a third development sound effect is executed. It shows.

The "weak motion" in the accessory motion column is a weak motion effect in which the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak motion with a small motion width when various symbols are displayed (at the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.
"Strong motion" means that a strong motion performance is executed in which the second movable member 74 emits red light and performs a strong motion with a large swing width when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). It shows.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is weak for 1 second from the time when various advanced symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). This indicates that a weak vibration effect will be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" is a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the time when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.

The jackpot expectation level of each action performance is "weak action" < "strong action". In addition, the jackpot expectation level of each vibration performance is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration".

In addition, "(Special 1)" written in the variable performance pattern column means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the first variable performance that corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(Special 1)" 2) means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The first feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a vibration effect may be executed in which the effect period of the button 17 is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the development performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and when the SPSP development effect is executed, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed. One point is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect is executed. Therefore, when the SPSP development effect is executed, the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed can be increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that it is a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot, and is executed when an advanced performance with a high expectation of a jackpot (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed. One of the points is that the vibration performance is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is the vibration of the vibration performance that is executed when the advanced performance (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed in a variable performance pattern with high expectation of jackpot. There are two types of strength depending on the degree of jackpot expectation. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the same performance device (performance button vibration motor , second movable member 74, etc.), but the performance modes D to G (specific game state) are more effective than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). On the other hand, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when an advanced performance is executed using a performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the temporary stop period (2 seconds) of the development pattern is the same as the vibration period (2 seconds) of the effect button 17 during the temporary stop of the development pattern. Or, the ratio of the difference between the temporary stop period (2 seconds) of the development symbol and the vibration period (3 seconds) of the performance button 17 is smaller than the pre-reach preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the players' sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects executed in the advanced effect, only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects may be used.

In addition, production modes A to C (normal gaming state) are more advanced than production modes D to G (specific gaming states) using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). The expectation level of a jackpot when a performance (SPSP advanced performance, etc.) is executed may be set higher, and performance mode B or C may be set higher than performance mode A using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, etc.). , the second movable member 74, etc.), the expectation level of a jackpot may be higher when an advanced effect is executed using the second movable member 74, etc. The expectation level of a jackpot may be increased when an advanced presentation is performed using the device (the presentation button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.).

(Cut-in production pattern determination table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 66, the cut-in effect pattern determination table associates the effect mode, jackpot determination result, variable effect pattern type, selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and selected cut-in effect pattern. The production structure (effective suggestive production, effective period, content of production) of each cut-in production pattern is listed for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the cut-in performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or when 4 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion performance without performing the effective suggestion performance, An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 4 different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 to 3 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the production button 17 during the validity period, and "normal (white)" is the normal state in which the production button 17 is not protruding. This shows that it emits white light, which is unlikely to be a big hit. "Protruding (red)" indicates a protruding state in which the production button 17 is protruding, and indicates that the production button 17 emits red light with high expectations for a jackpot. "Protruding (Rainbow)" indicates a protruding state in which the production button 17 protrudes, and indicates that the production button 17 emits light in a rainbow color to ensure a jackpot.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production that will be executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has passed. "Cut-in display period 3 seconds" means This indicates that the image display period is 3 seconds.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in effect mode column means that a blue cut-in effect is executed in which a blue frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a first cut-in sound effect is output. It shows that it will be done.
“Green cut-in” indicates that a green cut-in effect is executed in which a green frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a second cut-in sound effect is output. .
“Red cut-in” indicates that a red cut-in effect is executed in which a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a third cut-in sound effect is output. .

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the cut-in image (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the validity period ends) This indicates that a weak vibration performance in which weak vibrations are produced for 3 seconds is to be executed.
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates for 3 seconds from the start of displaying the cut-in image (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a strong vibration effect in which the camera vibrates strongly will be executed.

The expected jackpot for each cut-in is "Blue Cut-in" < "Green Cut-in" < "Red Cut-in". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

In addition, "(Special 1)" written in the variable performance pattern column means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the first variable performance that corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(Special 1)" 2) means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that when a cut-in image with high expectation of jackpot is displayed (cut-in effect is executed), the validity period of the effect button 17 is generated. One point is that a vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high expectation of jackpot is displayed (cut-in effect is executed) takes a relatively long time. There are some points that have been made. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on the degree. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that the display period (3 seconds) of the cut-in image is the same as the vibration period (3 seconds) of the effect button 17 while the cut-in image is displayed. (The ratio of the difference between the cut-in image display period (3 seconds) and the vibration period (3 seconds) of the presentation button 17 is smaller than the pre-reach preview presentation). Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the players' sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects executed in the cut-in effect, only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects may be used.

Also, although the cut-in effect is executed with a valid period, it is also possible to execute the cut-in effect without generating a valid period. It may be possible to have only a weak vibration performance for 3 seconds or only a strong vibration performance for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration performance for 1 second or only a strong vibration performance for 1 second.

(Decision production pattern determination table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a fixed effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the fixed effect.

As shown in FIG. 67, the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each determination performance pattern, and selected performance pattern are associated with the final performance pattern determination table. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestion production, validity period, production content) of each fixed production pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which button images are moved and displayed at 70, and button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the final performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or when 5 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion performance without performing the effective suggestion performance, An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 5 different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 to 4 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the production button 17 during the validity period, and "normal (white)" is the normal state in which the production button 17 is not protruding. This shows that it emits white light, which is unlikely to be a big hit. "Protruding (red)" indicates a protruding state in which the production button 17 is protruding, and indicates that the production button 17 emits red light with high expectations for a jackpot. "Protruding (Rainbow)" indicates a protruding state in which the production button 17 protrudes, and indicates that the production button 17 emits light in a rainbow color to ensure a jackpot.

The "performance content" indicates the content of the production that will be executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has passed, and includes "determined successful performance period 11 seconds (production mode H is 6 "Seconds)" means that the execution period of a performance related to a successful decision performance in production modes other than production mode H is 11 seconds, and that the execution period of a production related to a successful decision production in production mode H is 6 seconds. It shows.

"Failure" in the column of winning presentation mode refers to a failed presentation indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed because the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color. indicates that it will be executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and emits rainbow-colored light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. This indicates that a successful performance will be executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column is determined by the button vibration motor to vibrate the performance button 17 and is determined by the start of a successful performance (= when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period ends. This shows that a strong vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds from the time of 10 minutes, and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the button light emission column is determined by the effect button LED for causing the effect button 17 to emit light and starts from the start of a successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This shows that rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 17).

The jackpot expectation of each promotional performance is ``normal button white'' < ``protruding button red'' < ``protruding button rainbow.'' Moreover, the jackpot expectation level of each button state is "normal" < "prominent".

In addition, "(Special 1)" written in the variable performance pattern column means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the first variable performance that corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(Special 1)" 2) means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The first feature of the final effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that when a successful successful effect is executed, a vibration effect that generates a valid period and vibrates the effect button 17 is executed. . Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the valid period of the performance button 17 that occurs during the variable performance is the longest period. Therefore, inconveniences such as the player missing the operation of the performance button 17 can be suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the performance button 17 vibrates for the longest period as a strong vibration performance that occurs during a variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of successful performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17. Therefore, even after the vibration of the performance button 17 ends, the player's feeling of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the winning effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the ratio is smaller than the pre-reach preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the players' sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the decision performance (decision success performance), the motion performance using the first movable member 73 is performed, but the motion performance using the second movable member 74 may also be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the execution rate of the motion performance using the first movable member 73 is higher than that of the motion performance using the second movable member 74.

(Re-lottery performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 68, the re-lottery performance pattern determination table includes the performance mode, the presence or absence of promotion (promotion is planned), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery performance pattern, and the selected re-lottery performance pattern. They are associated with each other, and the performance structure (effective suggestion performance, validity period, performance content) of each re-lottery performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the re-lottery performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is a effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and specifically, displays an opaque effect button image at a specific position without executing the effective suggestion effect. At the same time, a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 6 different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 to 5 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Normal button red" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.
"Normal button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "Normal (white)" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the production button 17 emits white light with low expectations for promotion. "Normal (red)" indicates a normal state in which the production button 17 does not protrude, and indicates that the production button 17 emits red light with high expectations for promotion. "Normal (Rainbow)" indicates a normal state in which the production button 17 does not protrude, and indicates that the production button 17 emits a rainbow color indicating promotion.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production that will be executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has passed. This indicates that the performance period is 4 seconds.

"Promotion failure performance" in the re-lottery performance mode column refers to non-promoted symbols that do not result in a performance symbol that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery performance (for example, even number design → even number design, odd number design other than "7" → This indicates that an odd number symbol other than "7" is derived and displayed (temporarily stopped) and a non-promoted sound effect is output.
"Promotion success performance" means that promotion symbols that are advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery production (for example, even number symbols → odd number symbols, odd number symbols other than "7" → "7" symbols) are derived and displayed. (temporary stop) and a promotion sound effect is output.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time the promotion symbol is derived (= the end of the valid period). This indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed. "Strong vibration (2 seconds)" is a strong vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 2 seconds from the time the promotion symbol is derived (= at the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.

"Rainbow light emission (4 seconds)" in the button light emission column means that the production button LED for causing the production button 17 to emit light is activated for 4 seconds (when the production button 17 is activated) from the time when the promotion symbol is derived (= the end of the valid period). This shows that rainbow light is emitted over a period longer than the period of strong vibration. "Rainbow light emission (3 seconds)" means that the production button LED for making the production button 17 emit light is vibrating strongly for 3 seconds (the production button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the time when the promotion symbol is derived (= the end of the valid period). This shows that rainbow luminescence occurs over a longer period than the previous one.

The expected jackpot for each promotional performance is ``normal button white'' < ``normal button red'' < ``normal button rainbow.''

The first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that when a promotion success effect is executed, a vibration effect is executed that generates a valid period and vibrates the effect button 17. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the effect symbol has been promoted to an advantageous effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, even after the strong vibration effect ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the re-lottery performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is the execution period (4 seconds or 3 seconds) of the promotion success performance and the vibration period (3 seconds or 2 seconds) is smaller than the pre-reach preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the players' sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that although the re-lottery effect (promotion failure effect, promotion success effect) is executed by generating a valid period, the re-lottery effect may be executed without generating a valid term.

(Fixed performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a confirmed performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the performance pattern of the confirmed performance.

As shown in FIG. 69, the confirmed performance pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each confirmed performance pattern, and confirmed performance pattern to be selected. The performance structure (execution timing, performance content) of each confirmed performance pattern is described.

"-" in the execution timing column indicates that the confirmed performance is not executed, and "○" indicates that the confirmed performance is executed.
The "confirmation sound" in the audio column indicates that a confirmation sound indicating that a jackpot game will be executed is output.
"Handle rainbow light emission" in the light emission column means that the handle LED for making the firing handle 15 emit light will emit rainbow colors from the time the final sound is output until the variation stops (for more than 4 seconds until the production pattern stops displaying). It shows that.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time the final sound is output. It shows.

In addition, "(Special 1)" written in the variable performance pattern column means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the first variable performance that corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(Special 1)" 2) means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The first feature of the confirmed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that when a confirmed effect is executed, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 without generating a valid period is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the confirmed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 15 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, even after the strong vibration effect ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Summary of various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69)
Here, the first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second or strong vibration for 1 second) is executed in the dialogue preview effect with the validity period of the effect button 17. When the vibration performance (weak vibration 1 second) is executed as a step-up notice performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, the jackpot expectation level (vibration performance associated with pattern alignment (strong vibration 4) The high rate of performance (seconds) and the high rate of vibration performance (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) in the final performance, etc. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is more effective in a dialogue preview effect with a valid period of the effect button 17 than when the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed in a step-up preview effect without the effect period of the effect button 17. 2 seconds or strong vibration 1 second) is executed, the jackpot expectation level (rate of execution of the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the alignment of the symbols mentioned above, the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) with the deciding effect described later) 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration performance that is executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a first vibration performance that has a relatively short vibration period (during the dialogue preview performance, step-up Vibration performance (1 second) during preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, etc.) and second vibration performance (during cut-in performance, decisive success performance) with a longer vibration period (performance period) than the first vibration performance There is a vibration performance (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second, such as during the time and confirmed performance, and after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), there is a second performance period (normal reach performance). ) and a variable performance with a third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance), the first vibration performance is more likely to be executed during the first performance period (higher execution rate) than during the second performance period. There are several points. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player without making him or her mistake that he or she will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, regarding the look-ahead vibration performance, the first vibration performance has a relatively short vibration period, but even if the look-ahead vibration performance is included, the second performance will start after the first performance period (pre-reach performance). In a variable performance that has a period (normal reach performance) and a third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance), the first vibration performance is easier to be executed (performed) during the first performance period than during the second performance period. The ratio is high). Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player without making him or her mistake that he or she will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the second performance period (normal reach performance), and the third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance). In a fluctuating performance in which there is a vibration performance (direction), the first vibration performance (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, etc.) is more likely to occur during the first performance period than during the third performance period. An example of this is that the performance (1 second) is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player without making him or her mistake that he or she will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

A fourth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a first vibration performance with a short vibration period (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) , a vibration performance (1 second) during a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance with a longer vibration period than the first vibration performance (such as during a cut-in performance, a successful decision performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) There are vibration effects that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), there is a second effect period (normal reach effect) and a third effect period ( In a variable performance with SP/SPSP reach performance), the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) during the second performance period than during the first performance period. Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the second performance period (normal reach performance), and the third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance). In a variable performance that has a second vibration performance (vibration performance that is longer than 1 second, such as during cut-in performance, successful decision performance, confirmed performance, etc.), the third performance period is longer than the first performance period. (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) is easy to execute (has a high execution rate). Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the rate at which the first vibration performance (1 second) is executed with the performance button 17 in the normal state is This is higher than the rate of executing the first vibration performance with the performance button 17 in the protruding state. Therefore, the expectations of the players are not excessively aroused during the first performance period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the third performance period (during SP/SPSP reach performance), the performance button 17 is in the protruding state and the second vibration performance (for 3 seconds or more) is activated. The point is that the rate of execution is higher than the rate of execution of the second vibration performance with the performance button 17 in the normal state. Therefore, the expectations of the players are not excessively aroused during the first performance period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a first vibration performance with a short vibration period (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) , vibration effects (1 second) during pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, etc.), and second vibration effects (during cut-in effects, successful performance, etc.) that have a longer vibration period (effect period) than the first vibration effects. There are vibration performances that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and a continuous performance (pseudo continuous performance) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). In a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed, the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed when the first vibration performance is executed than when the first vibration performance is not executed (the rate of execution is high) ) points can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding whether or not the first vibration effect will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a second vibration performance (performance period) that has a longer vibration period (performance period) than the first vibration performance. There are vibration effects that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) during cut-in effects, successful decision effects, confirmation effects, etc., and during production modes A to C (normal gaming state). In the fluctuating performance, the reach performance using the second type of performance symbols (even numbered symbols) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than the reach performance using the first type of production symbols (odd numbered symbols other than "7"). ), the reach effect is more difficult to execute with the third type of effect symbol (the “7” effect symbol) than the reach effect with the second type of effect symbol (the rate of execution is lower), The point is that the second vibration performance is easier to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when the ready-to-reach effect is executed using the third type of effect pattern than when the ready-to-reach effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of effect symbols used to execute the ready-to-reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A tenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that in the jackpot fluctuation performance in which the reach performance is executed, the vibration performance (display of the operation promotion image) without the validity period (display of the operation promotion image) during the pre-reach performance ( Vibration effects without a valid period (display of operation promotion images) during post-reach effects (development effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation effect) are more effective than the number of executions of pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmed effects). ) is likely to be executed more often. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation during the post-reach performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that a specific reach performance (SP reach performance) is preferable to a jackpot variable performance in which a predetermined reach performance (normal reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is executed. , SPSP reach effect) is executed more frequently than the jackpot fluctuation effect in which vibration effects without a validity period (development effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, fixed effect) are more likely to be executed during the post-reach effect. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that in the loss variation performance in which the reach performance is executed, the vibration performance (development performance, pattern alignment, C The point is that the number of executions of vibration effects without a validity period (pre-read vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmed effect) during the pre-reach effect tends to be greater than the number of executions of patterns matching, confirmed effect). . Therefore, the expectation level of a jackpot can be suggested by the vibration performance without a validity period, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that when the pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) is executed in the variable performance, When a post-reach preview performance (cut-in performance) with high expectations for a jackpot is executed, the vibration performance of the production button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and a pre-reach preview performance When the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the vibrating effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the pre-reach preview effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the post-reach preview performance is better in performance modes D to G (specific game state) than in performance modes A to C (normal game state). In this case, the expectation level of a jackpot increases when a vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of an operation promotion image) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state) than in production modes D to G (specific gaming states), vibrations accompanying the validity period of the production button 17 (display of operation promotion image) in the post-reach preview production are more effective than in production modes D to G (specific gaming states). The expectation level of a jackpot when the performance is performed may be increased. Even in this case, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G that are advantageous to the players, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

A fifteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the first performance period (before reach) in the fluctuating performance, the vibration of the performance button 17 is lower than when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed. The jackpot expectation level is higher when the effect is executed, and in the jackpot variable effect, regardless of whether the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the pre-reach effect, the after-reach effect (decision success effect) In the later period), the vibration performance of the performance button 17 (vibration performance when the symbols are aligned or the C symbols are aligned) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of a jackpot through the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 16th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a vibration performance (during dialogue preview performance, pseudo One of the vibration performances such as continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) is executed in one of multiple types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different jackpot expectations, A vibration performance that does not involve the valid period of the performance button 17 (display of an operation promotion image) that is executed during a variable performance (one of the vibration performances during a step-up notice performance, when the symbols are aligned, when the C symbols are aligned, etc.) is executed in one predetermined vibration mode. Therefore, in the case where it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode because there is no validity period, it is possible to suppress the presentation mode of the vibration performance from becoming complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A seventeenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the pre-reach performance period in the jackpot fluctuating performance, the vibration performance (line preview performance) with the valid period of the performance button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) After that, ( Vibration performances (vibration performances for 3 seconds or more such as successful execution, when the symbols are aligned, when the C symbols are aligned, etc.) are executed at different rates during the post-reach performance period) and are not accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17. (Vibration performance during step-up notice performance) is easier to perform (execution rate is higher) during normal game states (performance modes A to C) than during specific game states (performance modes D to G). can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 18th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed, the types of jackpot effect symbols (even number symbols, "7") that match the symbols (including the C pattern) It is possible to change the execution mode of the vibration effect (execution or non-execution, execution timing, etc.) in the jackpot notice effect depending on odd number symbols other than "7" symbol, but depending on the execution of the winning effect or confirmed effect. When performing the vibration effect, the vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of jackpot effect symbols that match the symbols (including the C symbols). Therefore, while increasing the expectation of a jackpot through the vibration performance, it is possible to uniformly celebrate the jackpot, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that after a vibration effect (decision success effect, etc.) with a valid period (display of an operation promotion image) is executed in a jackpot fluctuating effect, the valid period ( It is possible to perform vibration effects (symbol alignment, C pattern alignment, etc.) that are not accompanied by operation promotion images (display of operation promotion images), and vibration effects (decision effects, etc.) that involve a valid period (display of operation promotion images) can be performed by operating the effect button 17. The point is that while the timing to start the vibration varies depending on the timing, the timing to start the vibration is predetermined for vibration performances (symbol alignment, C pattern alignment, etc.) that do not have a validity period (display of operation promotion images). It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to perform the vibration effect at an appropriate timing depending on whether or not the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) is involved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twentieth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the same movable member (second Although it is possible to perform specific performances (pseudo continuous performances, advanced performances, etc.) using the movable member 74), specific performances can be executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state). The difference is that the expected jackpot is different when executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 21st feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) have multiple tables with different jackpot expectations. It is possible to perform stage performances (step-up preview performances, pseudo-continuation performances, etc.) that progress to any of the stages, but in production modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state). If the stage effects (step-up preview effects, pseudo continuous effects, etc.) are the same stage (if the step-up preview effects are any of the 3rd step effects, 4th step effects, or 5th step effects; if the pseudo continuous effects are the same, One point is that the expected level of jackpot is different if the game progresses to 1 or 2 times. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) have different jackpot expectations. In addition to being able to execute any of the operation promotion effects, it is also possible to execute operation effects (any of the development effects, cut-in effects, and final effects) according to the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect modes A to C (normal The expected level of jackpot when the same operation promotion effect (for example, normal button white) is executed is different between production modes D to G (specific gaming states) and production modes A to C (normal gaming state). ) and performance modes D to G (specific game states), when the operation performance is executed, the effective suggestion performance is executed and the operation is promoted more than when the operation promotion performance is executed without the effective suggestion performance. One point to note is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the effective suggestion performance will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration performance with a relatively short vibration period (for example, 1 second) that is executed in conjunction with the jackpot preview performance is There are cases in which it is executed with a validity period and cases in which it is executed without a validity period, but vibration performances with a relatively long vibration period (more than 3 seconds) that are executed in conjunction with jackpot preview performances. is executed with a validity period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect for the operation of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-fourth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that in the special time-saving gaming state, the first special symbol loses variable display (first loses variable effect) is 2 When the special symbol loss variation display (the second loss variation display) is executed, the operation production that involves the operation of the validity period (line preview production, development production, deciding production, re-lottery production) is executed. It's getting easier. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of special symbol (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twenty-fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Execution of the first vibration performance when the first variation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state and when the second variation performance is performed in the specific game state. The ratios are different (the execution ratio when the second variable effect is executed is high). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance (special symbol), making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution of the first vibration performance is better when the second fluctuation performance is executed in a specific game state than when the first fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the specific game state. Although the ratio is high, the opposite may be possible.

A twenty-sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, repeat performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. (vibration effects related to lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmed effects, etc.) that are executed without an expiration period, and in a specific game state. When a first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in which a specific performance (various reach performances, chance performances, etc.) that makes players expect to execute a jackpot game is executed, and when a jackpot game is executed in a specific game state. In the case where the second variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed where a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that makes people expect The execution rate is different (the execution rate when the second variable effect is executed is high). Therefore, when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed in a specific game state is executed, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of the variable performance (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, in a specific game state, the specific performance is higher than when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in which a specific performance (various reach performances, chance performances, etc.) that makes you expect to execute a jackpot game is executed. When a second variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in which a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that makes players expect to execute a jackpot game in the gaming state is executed, the specific effect is better. Although the execution ratio of the first vibration effect during execution is high, the opposite may be true.

The twenty-seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including a case where the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific gaming state, and a case where a second variable production (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific gaming state. The execution rate of the second vibration effect is different between the two (the execution rate when the second variable effect is executed is high). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance (special symbol), making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the case where the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in a specific gaming state is better than the case where the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific gaming state. Although the execution rate of the second vibration effect is higher in this case, the opposite may be true.

The twenty-eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, repeat performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. A vibration performance related to a lottery performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a fixed performance, etc.) that is executed without an expiration period, and includes specific gaming states (variable probability gaming state, various time-saving gaming states) When a first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in which a specific performance (various reach performances, chance performances, etc.) that makes you expect the execution of a jackpot game is executed, and when a jackpot game is executed in a specific game state. A second vibration performance during execution of a specific performance is different from a case where a second variation performance (variable display of a second special symbol) is performed in which a specific performance (various reach performances, chance performances, etc.) that makes people expect execution is executed. The execution ratio is different (the execution ratio when the second variable effect is executed is high). Therefore, when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed in a specific game state is executed, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of the variable performance (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, in a specific game state, the specific performance is higher than when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in which a specific performance (various reach performances, chance performances, etc.) that makes you expect to execute a jackpot game is executed. When a second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in which a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that makes players expect to execute a jackpot game in the gaming state is executed, the specific effect is better. Although the execution ratio of the second vibration effect during execution is high, it may be made to be the opposite.

A twenty-ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a first motion performance (pre-reading motion performance, fluctuation start It is possible to execute a second action performance (such as a winning success performance) that operates in the second mode, and a first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) of a loss in the normal gaming state. ), the first motion performance can be executed, but in the first variable performance of loss in a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, various time-saving gaming states), the execution of the first motion performance is restricted, and the execution of the first motion performance is restricted in the normal gaming state. In the first variable performance of a jackpot and the first variable performance of a jackpot in a specific game state, a second action performance can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to change whether or not the action performance is executed depending on whether or not it is a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A thirtieth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that it is possible to perform a lamp change effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed by causing the winning hole lamp to emit light in a predetermined manner, An action performance that suggests the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed by operating the first movable member 73 (or second movable member 74) during the execution of the fluctuation performance (pre-reading action performance, role-playing preview performance at the start of fluctuation) It is possible to execute the light emission effect and the movement effect while the first variable effect of losing in the normal game state (variable display of the first special symbol), and the first variable effect of losing in the special time-saving gaming state is possible. While the 1-variation effect is being executed, it is possible to restrict the execution of the light emission effect and the movement effect. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A thirty-first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the modes of the lighting device (winning hole lamp NR, top lamp 10b, etc.) include the first mode (white blinking of the winning hole lamp) and the first mode (white blinking of the winning hole lamp). Including the 2nd mode (winning hole lamp blue emission), the 3rd mode (top lamp emission), and the 4th mode (winning hole lamp & top lamp off), when the lamp change effect is executed, the lighting device is turned off. It is possible to set the lighting device to the first mode and the second mode, and when executing the lighting effect at the time of winning, it is possible to set the lighting device to the third mode. The ratio of the illumination device being in the fourth mode is higher when the first variable performance is executed in the special time-saving game state than when the first variable display of special symbols) is executed. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 32nd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that operation effects (line preview effects, pseudo continuous effects, advanced effects) that suggest the degree of jackpot expectation according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period are as follows. , cut-in performance, decisive performance, etc.), and the first variation performance of a loss (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, compared to the case where the first variation performance of a loss (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state. The operation performance is more difficult to execute when the 1-variation performance is executed. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 33rd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state and when the first variable performance is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, the first vibration performance The execution ratio is different (higher when the first variable performance is executed in the normal gaming state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the first vibration performance is better when the first fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the normal gaming state than when the first fluctuation performance is performed in the special time-saving gaming state. Although the execution rate is high, the opposite may be true.

The 34th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state, and when the first variable performance is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, the second vibration performance The execution rate is different (the execution rate is high when the first variable performance is executed in the normal gaming state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second vibration performance is better when the first fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the regular game state than when the first fluctuation performance is performed in the special time-saving game state. Although the execution rate is high, the opposite may be true.

A thirty-fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including the case where the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, and the case where the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. The execution rate of the first vibration performance (the vibration performance mainly related to the fixed performance) is different depending on the case where the second variation performance is executed (the execution ratio is high when the second variation performance is executed). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state rather than the case where the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, the execution rate of the first vibration performance (the vibration performance mainly related to the final performance) is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The thirty-sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including a case where the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, and a case where the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. The execution rate of the second vibration performance (mainly the vibration performance related to the confirmed performance) is different depending on the case where the second vibration performance is performed (the execution ratio is high when the second variable performance is executed). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state rather than the case where the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, the execution rate of the second vibration performance (mainly the vibration performance related to the confirmed performance) is higher, but the opposite may be true.

A thirty-seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a first motion performance (pre-read motion performance, start of fluctuation) that causes the first movable member 73 (or second movable member 74) to operate in the first mode It is possible to execute a second movement performance (such as a winning success performance) that operates in the second mode, and a second variable performance of a jackpot in the normal time-saving gaming state (a second variation of the second special symbol). display) and the first variable performance of a jackpot in the special time-saving gaming state, the second movement performance can be executed, and in the second variable performance of a loss in the normal time-saving gaming state (variable display of the second special symbol), Although the first motion performance can be executed, in the first variable performance of losing in the special time saving game state, the execution of the first motion performance is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to change whether or not the action performance is executed depending on whether or not it is a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirty-eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including the case where the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state, and the case where the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving gaming state. The execution rate of the first vibration performance is different depending on the case (the execution rate is high when the second variable performance is executed in the normal time saving game state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state than when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state. In this case, the execution rate of the first vibration effect is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The 39th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including, when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state, and when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. The execution rate of the second vibration performance is different depending on the case (the execution rate is high when the second variable performance is executed in the normal time saving game state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state than when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, the execution rate of the second vibration effect is higher, but the opposite may be true.

A fortieth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is an operation performance that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut (Vibration performance related to in-performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) and vibration performance that vibrates the performance button 17 without causing the validity period (Vibration performance related to pre-reading vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmed performance, etc.) The execution ratio of the vibration performance during a predetermined period after the start of the fluctuating performance (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A forty-first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is an operation performance that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut (vibration effects related to in-performance effects, deciding effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and vibration effects that cause the effect button 17 to vibrate without expiring the validity period (vibration effects related to pre-read vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmed effects, etc.) Including, the execution rate of the vibration performance that does not generate the valid period during the predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation performance (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different between the normal game state and the special time-saving game state (normal game state The execution rate is high). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution rate of vibration effects that do not generate a valid period during the predetermined period after the start of the variable effect (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is higher in the normal game state than in the special time-saving game state. , and vice versa.

A forty-second feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is an operation performance that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut (vibration effects related to in-performance effects, deciding effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and vibration effects that cause the effect button 17 to vibrate without expiring the validity period (vibration effects related to pre-read vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmed effects, etc.) The effect button 17 can be vibrated in different manners between the initial vibration of the effect button 17 after the power is turned on and the vibration effect. Therefore, when the vibration effect is performed, the game clerk will not be mistaken that the initial vibration was performed (there was an illegal act such as turning the power of the game machine on and off), and the effect of the vibration effect Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A forty-third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is an operation performance that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut (vibration effects related to in-performance effects, deciding effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and vibration effects that cause the effect button 17 to vibrate without expiring the validity period (vibration effects related to pre-read vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmed effects, etc.) For example, when a vibration effect is executed while operating an operating means such as the cross key 19, vibrations related to the vibration effect are transmitted to the player via the operating means. Therefore, even if the vibration performance is executed without the validity period of the performance button 17 occurring, it is possible to suppress inconveniences that the player does not notice, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A forty-fourth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is an operation performance that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut (vibration effects related to in-game effects, deciding effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and vibration effects (pre-reading vibration effects) that vibrate the effect button 17 without generating an expiration period according to the pre-reading result, during normal gaming state. When a variable performance in which a ready-to-win performance is performed is executed, the rate at which the vibration performance is executed is higher before the ready-to-win performance than during the ready-to-win performance. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations even before the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The forty-fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including a case where the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed in the normal gaming state; The execution rate of the second vibration effect during the predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is different depending on when the first variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or the variable probability gaming state) (usually When the first variable performance is executed in the gaming state, the execution rate is high). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first variable performance is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) than when the first variable production is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state), the fluctuation Although the execution rate of the second vibration performance during the predetermined period after the start of the performance (until the first temporary stop) is high, the opposite may be true.

The forty-sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including a case where the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed in the normal gaming state; The execution rate of the second vibration effect during the predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is different depending on when the second variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or the variable probability gaming state). When the first variable performance is executed in the gaming state, the execution rate is high). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the case where the first variable effect (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state is better than the case where the second variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state). Although the execution rate of the second vibration performance is high during the predetermined period after the start of the variable performance (until the first temporary stop), the opposite may be true.

The 47th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including a case where the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the first game performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the normal gaming state; The execution rate of the second vibration performance during the predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the fluctuation performance differs depending on when the first fluctuation performance is executed in the special time-saving gaming state (when the first fluctuation performance is executed in the normal gaming state) (when the performance is executed, the execution rate is high). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first game performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state than when the first fluctuation performance is performed in the special time-saving gaming state, the time after the start of the variable performance is higher. Although the execution rate of the second vibration effect during the predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) is high, the opposite may be true.

The forty-eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including a case where the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed in the normal gaming state; In the case where the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, the execution rate of the second vibration performance during the predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable performance is (higher when the first variable performance is executed in the normal gaming state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state than when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving gaming state In this case, the execution rate of the second vibration effect during the predetermined period after the start of the variable effect (until the first temporary stop) is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The 49th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the second fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state). The execution rate of the second vibration performance in the predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation performance (until the first temporary stop) is different depending on when is executed and when the second fluctuation performance is executed in the special time-saving gaming state ( (It is higher when the second variable performance is executed in the normal time saving game state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance during the second variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the case where the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) is better than the case where the second variable performance is performed in the special time-saving gaming state. However, the execution rate of the second vibration performance during the predetermined period after the start of the variable performance (until the first temporary stop) is high, but the opposite may be true.

The fiftieth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time saving gaming state. , the execution rate of the second vibration performance in the predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation performance (until the first temporary stop) in the case where the second fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance during the second variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state rather than the case where the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, the execution rate of the second vibration effect during the predetermined period after the start of the variable effect (until the first temporary stop) is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The 51st feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the first fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state). is executed, and when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state), the predetermined period after the start of the variable performance (first (up to temporary stop), the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different (higher when the second fluctuation effect is executed). Therefore, in the normal time-saving game state (or variable probability game state), the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) than when the first variable production (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state). When the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the execution rate of the second vibration effect during the predetermined period after the start of the variable effect (until the first temporary stop) is higher, but the opposite is true. You may do so.

The 52nd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and when the first fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving game state. , the execution rate of the second vibration performance in the predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation performance (until the first temporary stop) in the case where the second fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state rather than the case where the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, the execution rate of the second vibration performance during the predetermined period after the start of the variable performance (until the first temporary stop) is high, but the opposite may be true.

The 53rd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the performance button 17 is moved in different manners between the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after the power is turned on and the second vibration performance. It is possible to make it vibrate. Therefore, the game clerk will not be mistaken as thinking that the initial vibration was performed when the second vibration performance was performed (there was an illegal act such as turning the power of the gaming machine on and off), and the vibration performance It is possible to improve the performance effect and increase the interest of the game.

The 54th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and it is possible to vibrate the performance button 17 in different manners for the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance. It has become. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 55th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and for example, when the second vibration performance is performed while operating the operation means such as the cross key 19, the second vibration performance is executed. Vibration related to the vibration performance is transmitted to the player via the operating means. Therefore, even if the second vibration performance in which the validity period of the performance button 17 does not occur is executed, inconveniences that the player does not notice can be suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 56th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, The first vibration performance includes a vibration performance related to cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance) that is executed without generating a valid period according to the pre-read result. It is possible to perform the second vibration effect so that the effect periods do not overlap, and when a variable effect in which a reach effect is performed during the normal gaming state is executed, the second vibration effect is more effective before the reach effect than during the reach effect. The rate at which vibration effects are executed is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations even before the execution of the reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 57th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the second vibration performance can be performed during the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) in the normal gaming state. The jackpot game is executed more when the second vibration effect is executed during the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) in the normal time-saving game state (or variable probability game state) than when it is executed. Expectations are high. Therefore, expectations for the second vibration performance can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 58th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance include a vibration performance that is executed without a valid period (vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, pattern alignment, etc.), and a second vibration performance that is executed without a valid period. It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that they do not overlap, and during the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) in the normal game state, the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed, and in the normal time-saving game state ( During the first fluctuating performance in (or fixed variable gaming state), the execution of the first vibration performance is restricted, but the second vibration performance can be executed, and the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after turning on the power and the first vibration performance are restricted. It is possible to vibrate the effect button 17 in different manners. Therefore, when the vibration effect is performed, the game clerk will not be mistaken that the initial vibration was performed (there was an illegal act such as turning the power of the game machine on and off), and the effect of the vibration effect Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 59th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance include a vibration performance that is executed without a valid period (vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, pattern alignment, etc.), and a second vibration performance that is executed without a valid period. It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that they do not overlap, and during the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) in the normal game state, the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed, and in the normal time-saving game state ( During the first fluctuating performance in (or fixed variable gaming state), the execution of the first vibration performance is restricted, but the second vibration performance can be executed, and the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after turning on the power and the second vibration performance It is possible to vibrate the effect button 17 in different manners. Therefore, when the vibration effect is performed, the game clerk will not be mistaken that the initial vibration was performed (there was an illegal act such as turning the power of the game machine on and off), and the effect of the vibration effect Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 60th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance) that is executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration performance. , when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state), and when the second variable production (second variable display) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state). The execution rate of the first vibration performance is different depending on the case where the variable display of special symbols is executed (it is higher when the second variable display is executed). Therefore, in the normal time-saving game state (or variable probability game state), the performance of the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) than when the first variable production (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state). Although the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is higher when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the opposite may be true.

The 61st feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, line preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). Including, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or the variable probability gaming state), and when the second variable production (the variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or the variable probability gaming state). The execution rate of the second vibration performance is different depending on the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (it is higher when the second variable display is executed). Therefore, in the normal time-saving game state (or variable probability game state), the performance of the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) than when the first variable production (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state). Although the execution rate of the second vibration performance is higher when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the opposite may be true.

The 62nd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). Including, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, and when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. The execution rate of the first vibration effect is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance of the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state more than when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, the execution rate of the first vibration effect is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The 63rd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the first vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). Including, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, and when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. The execution rate of the second vibration effect is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance of the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state rather than the case where the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, the execution rate of the second vibration effect is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The 64th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, line preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). Including, the execution rate of the first vibration performance is different between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state (or variable probability game state), and the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after turning on the power and the first vibration performance differ from the performance button 17. It is possible to vibrate in different ways. Therefore, when the first vibration performance is performed, the game clerk will not be mistaken as thinking that the initial vibration was performed (there was an illegal act such as turning the power of the game machine ON and OFF), and the first vibration It is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance and to improve the interest of the game.

The 65th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). Including, the execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state (or the variable probability game state), and the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after turning on the power and the second vibration performance differ when the performance button 17 is pressed. It is possible to vibrate in different ways. Therefore, when the second vibration effect is performed, the game clerk will not be mistaken that the initial vibration was performed (there was an illegal act such as turning on and off the power of the game machine), and the second vibration It is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 66th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance, line preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). Including, when the first vibration effect is executed than when the second vibration effect is executed in the jackpot variable effect, the effect button 17 is in the first light emission mode (white light emission, etc.) with low jackpot expectation. It is easier to emit light. Therefore, the lighting mode of the performance button 17 can be varied depending on the type of vibration performance and the degree of expectation of jackpot, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 67th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, line preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). Including, the execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different between the normal gaming state and the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state), and the first vibration performance is executed more than when the second vibration performance is executed in the jackpot variable performance. In this case, the production button 17 is more likely to emit light in the first light emission mode (white light emission, etc.) with low expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the lighting mode of the performance button 17 can be varied depending on the type of vibration performance and the degree of expectation of jackpot, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 68th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the valid period of the production button 17, the first valid period (line preview production, dialogue preview production, (validity period related to pseudo-continuous effects) and a second validity period (validity period related to cut-in effects, decisive effects, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period. 2. When the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period, the vibration performance of the performance button 17 can be executed, and the performance button 17 can be vibrated in different manners depending on the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after turning on the power and the vibration performance. It is possible to output different operation sounds depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the first valid period or when the effect button 17 is operated during the second valid period. Therefore, the presentation effect can be made different depending on whether the first validity period occurs or the second validity period occurs, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 69th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the valid period of the production button 17, the first valid period (line preview production, (validity period related to pseudo-continuous effects) and a second validity period (validity period related to cut-in effects, decisive effects, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period. 1 When the production button 17 is operated during the valid period, the vibration production of the production button 17 can be executed, and the production button 17 can be vibrated in different manners depending on the initial vibration of the production button 17 after power-on and the vibration production. It is possible to output different operation sounds depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the first valid period or when the effect button 17 is operated during the second valid period. Therefore, the presentation effect can be made different depending on whether the first validity period occurs or the second validity period occurs, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 70th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the effective period of the production button 17, there is a first effective period (line preview production, (validity period related to pseudo-continuous performance) and a second validity period (validity period related to development performance, decisive performance, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period; The execution rate of the vibration production according to the operation of the production button 17 during the first valid period is different between the normal time saving gaming state (or the variable probability gaming state) (higher in the normal gaming state), and The number of vibrations in the vibration performance according to the operation during the second validity period is different from the number of vibrations in the vibration performance according to the operation during the second validity period (the number of vibrations in the vibration performance according to the operation during the second validity period is large). It has become. Therefore, the performance effect can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of validity period, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution rate of the vibration production according to the operation of the production button 17 during the first validity period in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) is higher than the execution rate of the vibration production according to the operation of the production button 17 during the first validity period in the normal gaming state. Although the execution rate of the vibration effect according to the above is higher, the opposite may be possible. In addition, the number of vibrations in the vibration performance according to the operation during the second validity period is greater than the number of vibrations in the vibration performance according to the operation during the first validity period, but the opposite is true. You can.

The 71st feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the valid period of the production button 17, there is a first valid period (line preview production, (validity period related to pseudo-continuous performance) and a second validity period (validity period related to development performance, decisive performance, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period; The execution rate of the vibration performance according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the first valid period is different depending on the state and the special time saving game state (higher in the normal game state), and the vibration performance according to the operation during the first valid period is different. The number of vibrations in the presentation is different from the number of vibrations in the vibration presentation according to the operation during the second valid period (the number of vibrations according to the operation during the second valid period is greater). Therefore, the performance effect can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of validity period, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution rate of the vibration effect according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the first effective period in the normal gaming state is higher than the execution rate of the vibration effect according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the first effective period in the special time saving game state. Although the execution rate is higher, the opposite may be true. In addition, the number of vibrations in the vibration performance according to the operation during the second validity period is greater than the number of vibrations in the vibration performance according to the operation during the first validity period, but the opposite is true. You can.

A 72nd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a specific performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer It can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode), which have different execution ratios of effects, etc.), and the first variable effect (first special symbol) can be set in the normal gaming state after setting to the normal setting state. (variable display) is executed, the execution rate of the first specific effect (e.g. continuous preview effect) is the first rate (high) and the execution rate of the second specific effect (e.g. timer effect) is the second rate (high). High), and when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific performance is different from the first ratio. (low ratio), and the execution ratio of the second specific performance is different from the second ratio (low ratio). Therefore, even in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution rate of the first specific effect and the execution rate of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state, When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance and the execution rate of the second specific performance are higher. You may do so.

The 73rd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a specific performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer It can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode), which have different execution ratios of effects, etc.), and the first variable effect (first special symbol) can be set in the normal gaming state after setting to the normal setting state. (variable display) is executed, the execution rate of the first specific effect (e.g. continuous preview effect) is the first rate (high) and the execution rate of the second specific effect (e.g. timer effect) is the second rate (high). If the first variable performance is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) after setting to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific performance is different from the first ratio (low ratio ), and the execution ratio of the second specific performance is different from the second ratio (lower ratio). Therefore, even in the first variable performance after setting to the normal setting state, the performance effect can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance and the execution rate of the second specific performance are When the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance and the execution rate of the second specific performance are higher. You may do so.

The 74th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a specific performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer It can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode), which have different execution ratios (effects, etc.), and the second When a variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the execution rate of the first specific performance (for example, continuous notice performance) is the first ratio (high) and the execution rate of the second specific performance (for example, timer performance) is When the execution ratio becomes the second ratio (high) and the first variable performance is executed in the special time-saving game state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific performance is different from the first ratio (low ratio), and the execution ratio of the second specific performance is different from the second ratio (lower ratio). Therefore, even in the second variable performance after setting to the normal setting state, the performance effect can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution rate of the first specific effect and the execution rate of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state after setting to the normal setting state , when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the execution ratio of the second specific performance are higher. It may be made higher.

The 75th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a specific performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer It can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode), which have different execution ratios (effects, etc.), and the second When a variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the execution rate of the first specific performance (for example, continuous notice performance) is the first ratio (high) and the execution rate of the second specific performance (for example, timer performance) is When the execution rate becomes the second rate (high) and the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance becomes the second rate (high). The execution ratio of the second specific performance is different from the second ratio (low ratio). Therefore, even in a specific game state after setting to the normal setting state, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution ratio of the first specific effect and the second specific effect when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) after setting to the normal setting state Rather than the performance execution ratio, the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the second specific performance when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state. The execution rate may be higher.

The 76th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a specific performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer It is possible to set a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) in which the execution ratios of performances, etc.) are different, and the second variable performance (second special When a variable display of symbols) is executed, the execution rate of the first specific effect (for example, continuous preview effect) is the first rate (high), and the execution rate of the second specific effect (for example, timer effect) is the second rate. (High), and when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) after setting to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance is The execution ratio of the second specific performance is different from the first ratio (lower ratio) than the second ratio (lower ratio). Therefore, even in a specific game state after setting to the normal setting state, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance is higher than the execution rate of the second specific performance. , the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the second specific performance when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) after setting to the normal setting state The execution rate may be higher.

The 77th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a specific performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer It can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode), which have different execution ratios (effects, etc.), and the second When a variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the execution rate of the first specific performance (for example, continuous notice performance) is the first ratio (high) and the execution rate of the second specific performance (for example, timer performance) is When the execution rate becomes the second rate (high) and the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance is The execution ratio of the second specific performance is different from the first ratio (lower ratio) than the second ratio (lower ratio). Therefore, even in a specific game state after setting to the normal setting state, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) after setting to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance is the second specific performance. Rather than the performance execution ratio, the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the second specific performance when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after setting to the normal setting state The execution rate may be higher.

A 78th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that when the first variable performance is executed in a specific game state, a predetermined first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, The vibration performance related to the cut-in performance) is not executed, but the specific first vibration performance (vibration performance related to the development performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the performance effect when the first variable performance is executed in a specific gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 79th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that when the first variable performance is executed in a specific gaming state and when the second variable performance is executed in a specific gaming state, The execution ratio of the vibration performance related to the re-lottery performance (the execution ratio of the variable performance related to the re-lottery performance) is different. Therefore, in a specific game state, the performance related to the vibration performance related to the re-lottery performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 80th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a valid suggestion effect (display of a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17, etc.) that indicates the occurrence of the valid period of the effect button 17. ) is not carried out (line preview production, pseudo continuous production, etc.), and the second operation production (development production, cut-in preview production, etc.) in which an effective suggestion production indicating the occurrence of the effective period of the production button 17 is performed. . The first operation effect is easier to execute when the first operation effect is executed. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

An 81st feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that when a vibration effect is executed by operating the effect button 17 during the valid period, the vibration effect is performed by operating the effect button 17 during the valid period. The motion performance of the movable performance member 73 is easier to perform than when it is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a specific operation effect is provided in which a predetermined effect is executed in response to the operation during the valid period, but the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed, and the effect of the effect button 17 during the valid period is more effective than when the specific operation effect is executed. If the first vibration performance (vibration performance related to dialogue preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) is executed in response to the operation of It is preferable to make it easier to perform a validity suggestion effect (display of a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17, etc.) that indicates the occurrence of the valid period of the button 17. In this way, it is possible to improve the player's expectations for the first vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Percentage of advance notice restriction period)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the ratio of the advance notice restriction period related to the loss fluctuation performance in the performance modes A to C, and FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the ratio of the advance notice restriction period related to the loss fluctuation performance in the performance modes D to G. Yes, and FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the ratio of the advance notice restriction period related to the loss variation performance in the performance mode H.

The "notice restriction period" means that the fluctuating display of the production pattern 70a and/or the special symbol TZ and the dynamic display of the background image are executed, but the jackpot notice performance (the role part notice performance at the start of fluctuation, the dialogue notice performance, the step It is a period in which the execution of (up-notice performance, cut-in notice performance, final performance, etc.) is restricted (regulated), and the "notice period" refers to the fluctuation display of the above-mentioned performance symbol 70a and/or special symbol TZ, etc. The dynamic display of the background image is executed during the period in which there is a possibility that the jackpot preview performance will be executed.

For example, in variable performance pattern 3, the first half of the normal fluctuation is the notice period, the second half of the normal fluctuation and the normal reach performance are the restriction period, the ratio of the restriction period in the fluctuation performance is 70%, and the number of times the restriction period occurs will be once.

Although the loss fluctuation effect is illustrated here, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is basically the same as the only difference is the final result of the fluctuation effect and whether or not a re-lottery effect is executed. When compared with the loss fluctuation performance which is a performance composition, the ratio of the notice period and the limit period is the same.

The first feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the advance notice restriction period occupies more of the loss fluctuation performance pattern in which no reach effect is executed than the loss fluctuation performance pattern in which a reach effect is executed. One point is that the ratio tends to be high. Therefore, the period during which the jackpot preview performance can be executed changes according to the jackpot expectation level of the variable performance pattern, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the advance notice restriction period occurs more in the loss fluctuation performance pattern in which the reach effect is not executed than in the loss fluctuation performance pattern in which the reach effect is executed. One of the points is that the number of times is likely to decrease. Therefore, the number of times the jackpot preview performance can be executed changes depending on the jackpot expectation level of the variable performance pattern, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production modes A to C (normal game state), Another point is that the proportion occupied by the advance notice restriction period is likely to be larger when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production mode H (special time saving game state). Therefore, in performance mode H (special time-saving game state), it is possible to encourage execution of the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

The fourth feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production modes A to C (normal game state), Another point is that the number of occurrences of the advance notice restriction period is more likely to be reduced when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in performance mode H (special time saving game state). Therefore, in performance mode H (special time-saving game state), it is possible to encourage execution of the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

The fifth feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when a loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation performance) of the first special symbol is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state), , the execution rate of the variable performance that is a notice restriction period over the entire period is different depending on the case where the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production mode H (special time-saving game state) (special An example of this is that the execution rate is high when the first variable performance is executed in the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the performance effect when the first variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in performance mode H (special time-saving game state), the first special symbol is displayed more easily than in the case where the loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation performance) of the first special symbol is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). When the losing variable display (first variable effect) is executed, the execution rate of the variable effect that is the advance notice restriction period over the entire period is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The sixth feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when the first special symbol loss variation display (first variation production) is executed in production modes A to C (normal game state), Also, when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production mode H (special time-saving gaming state), it is easier to execute the variation production that has a notice restriction period for the entire period. can be mentioned. Therefore, the performance effect when the variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is when a loss fluctuation display (second fluctuation performance) of the second special symbol is executed in performance modes D to G (normal time-saving game state). Rather than that, the proportion of the advance notice restriction period is likely to be larger when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production mode H (special time-saving gaming state). . Therefore, the performance effect when the variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is when a loss variation display (second variation production) of the second special symbol is executed in production modes D to G (normal time-saving game state). The point is that the number of occurrences of the advance notice restriction period is more likely to be reduced when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production mode H (special time-saving game state). . Therefore, the performance effect when the variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is when a loss fluctuation display (second fluctuation performance) of the second special symbol is executed in performance modes D to G (normal time-saving game state). In the case where the first special symbol loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation performance) is executed in the performance mode H (special time saving game state), the execution rate of the fluctuation performance that is the advance notice restriction period over the entire period is different ( An example of this is that the execution rate is high when the second variable performance is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the performance effect when the variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the first special symbol is displayed in performance mode H (special time-saving game state) more than when the loss fluctuation display (second fluctuation performance) of the second special symbol is executed in performance modes D to G (normal time-saving game state). When the losing variable display (first variable effect) is executed, the execution rate of the variable effect that becomes the advance notice restriction period over the entire period is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The tenth feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when a loss variation display of the second special symbol (second variation production) is executed in production modes D to G (normal time-saving game state). Rather, when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production mode H (special time saving game state), the proportion occupied by the advance notice restriction period is likely to be larger. Therefore, the performance effect when the variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production mode H (special time-saving gaming state), when it is a normal variation production pattern (first pending number = 0), Although the length of the advance notice restriction period is different depending on the case of the ultra-shortened variable production pattern (first number of reservations = 1 to 3), the length of the advance notice restriction period may be the same. In this case, on the premise that both the normal variable performance pattern and the super shortened variable performance pattern will be executed, the length of the advance notice restriction period may be the same, or the normal variable performance pattern and the super shortened performance pattern may be the same regardless of the first reservation number. The length of the advance notice restriction period may be set to be the same, assuming that only one of the variable performance patterns is executed.

(Types of vibration effects for each production mode)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the types of vibration effects for each effect mode.

There are 6 types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), and which have valid periods. There are five types of vibration effects that do not expire.
In addition, the vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) in effect modes A to C (normal gaming state) are limited to the types of vibration effects that have a validity period of 1. There are three types of vibration effects that do not have a valid period.

Vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in production modes D to G (variable game state/normal time-saving game state) are limited to vibration effects that have an expiration period. There is only one type of vibration effect, and there is only one type of vibration effect that does not have a valid period.
In addition, vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) in effect modes D to G (variable game state/normal time saving game state) are vibrations that have an expiration period. There are six types of effects, and four types of vibration effects that do not have a valid period.

The vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in production mode H (special time-saving game state) have only one type of vibration effect that has a valid period. There is only one type of vibration effect that does not have a valid period.
In addition, there are four types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) in production mode H (special time-saving game state), which have valid periods. Therefore, there are three types of vibration effects that do not have a valid period.

In addition, in the initial operation of the performance button 17 that is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the vibration operation of the performance button 17 is a strong continuous vibration for 2.5 seconds or a strong intermittent vibration for 2.5 seconds, so during a variable performance The vibration mode (vibration time, vibration pattern, etc.) is different from the vibration operation of the production button 17 that has a valid period of execution (vibration performance) and the vibration operation of the production button 17 that does not have a valid period (vibration performance). It has become.

In this way, the types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in the effect modes D to G (variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) and which do not have an expiration period. The number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state) and which do not have an expiration period is greater than the number. ing. Therefore, the performance effect when the first variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in the effect mode H (special time-saving game state) and which do not have an expiration period, is higher than the number of types of vibration effects in the effect mode A. The number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in ~C (normal game state) and in which no valid period occurs is increasing. The performance effect when the first variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, from the number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) in effect modes D to G (variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state), and which do not have an expiration period. Also, the number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state) and which do not have a valid period are increasing. . The performance effect of the variable performance can be varied depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) in the effect mode H (special time-saving game state) and in which the validity period does not occur is greater than the number of types of vibration effects in the effect mode A. The number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in ~C (normal game state) and in which no valid period occurs is increasing. The performance effect of the variable performance can be varied depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the central CPU 141a.

First, the supervising CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, the initial settings of the CPU such as the settings of built-in registers, permission to access the general RAM 141c, initialization (clearing to 0) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, and CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupts are performed. ), and in step T3, all interrupts are permitted.

The supervising CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 70, Adjustment of the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display device 71), and adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and light intensity (whether the volume can be adjusted, whether the light amount can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any one from 0 to 5) ), the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5). I do.

Note that setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value using the changeover switch 22 can be performed at any time as long as the gaming machine 1 is in a power-on state (after activation of the general control unit 141).

The supervising CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, the sound is output from the audio output device 9 based on a detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Performs processing to adjust the volume (value) of the performance sound.

The supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, the display device (the first image display A process for adjusting the amount of light (value) of the backlight of the device 70 and the second image display device 71 is performed.

In addition, the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key 19 is regulated (limited) at the start of the variable effect and at the end of the variable effect (stopping of the effect pattern 70a). . In addition, during the period from power ON to the start of game progress control (specifically, during setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, initial operation of various drive sources of board unit 500, etc.) (until a timer interrupt is started on the main control board 110), important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power restoration, unauthorized prize winning) that should be notified with priority over tray full errors and payout abnormalities , abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) are also restricted (restricted) during notification (output of notification sound).

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various performance sounds output from the audio output device 9 When the volume of (BGM, etc.) is lowered than the previous volume and the abnormality notification sound output ends, the volume of various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the drop.

The overall CPU 141a performs eco-mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of an eco mode that reduces power consumption by reducing the amount of backlight of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71).

In step T8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the production instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m has been received. If the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process moves to step T11, and if the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process moves to step T9.

The supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, a process is performed in which an animation pattern is determined from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command, and is set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c.

The supervising CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process is performed in which a sound pattern is determined from the type of sound group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command, and is set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether a frame switching flag is set in the supervising RAM 141c, indicating that it is frame update timing to update the display image of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). Determine whether or not. If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is a V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 seconds (the scheduled time when drawing and displaying one frame's worth of effect images is completed) to the overall control unit 141. It is set in the V blank interrupt processing that is executed every time a blank is received. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The supervisory CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the supervisory RAM 141c in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, with reference to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter that are updated in the V blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9 above. , performs a process of updating the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a group of drawing control commands based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the anime scene at the updated address, according to the priority order (drawing order) of the anime group to which the anime scene belongs. It generates a display list, outputs this display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and performs a process of instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws a display image based on the display list on the drawing frame buffer, and also transfers the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn on the display frame buffer to the display device ( Processing for displaying on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71) will be performed. In other words, the frame update timing is the start timing of various effects performed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 (image display and sound output such as a pending display, a variable effect, a jackpot preview effect, a look-ahead effect, etc.) The timing has come to end.

In addition, performances that are directly controlled by the performance control unit 130m and the lamp control unit 150 (a reservation display by the sub-first reservation display 83 and the sub-second reservation display 84, performances by the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) (Operation) may match the frame update timing or may not match the frame update timing.

The overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process is performed in which a voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and this voice control command is output to the voice control unit 148 (audio LSI).

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs a process of outputting various performance sounds and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control command. When this process is finished, the process moves to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the fluctuating performance and at the end of the fluctuating performance (stopping of the performance symbol 70a), it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, but it is possible to adjust the volume and the light intensity by using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk. Volume adjustment and light amount adjustment using the cross key 19 are regulated (limited). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power restoration, unrecoverable error, unauthorized prize winning, abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During notification (output of notification sound) of a door opening error, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by a game store clerk, but it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. has come to be regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment on the game parlor side, while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light intensity does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various performance sounds output from the audio output device 9 When the volume of BGM (BGM, etc.) is lowered than the previous volume and the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the drop. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing abnormality notification sounds due to various performance sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

Note that during abnormality notification (output of notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the volume value and light intensity value may be disabled. may be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of accessories in the lamp control section)
Accessory initial processing by the lamp control unit 150 will be explained using FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the accessory initialization process of the lamp control unit 150, and this process is executed within the timer interrupt process executed in the lamp control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110. If the power-on command has been received, the process moves to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process moves to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes the return-to-origin process for the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) at the initial processing number updated in each process of the accessory initialization process. Set "1".

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial process number is not "1", it is assumed that the origin return process of the accessory is not executed and the process moves to step R105, and if the initial process number is "1", the origin return process is executed in step R104. and complete the initial processing of this accessory. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) is returned to its original position, and the initial processing number is Perform processing such as setting it to "2". Note that the details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial processing for the accessory is not performed and the current initial processing for the accessory is terminated, and if the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , this time the accessory initial processing ends. Specifically, processing is performed such as performing an initial operation and initial light emission to check whether the accessory works normally or not, and setting the initial processing number to "0". Note that details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the movement of returning various accessories to their origin positions and the initial movements and initial light emission of various objects do not coexist, and it becomes possible to separate and check the return movement, initial movement, and initial light emission. .

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 75, the origin return processing is executed before the initial movement processing. Therefore, the various accessory objects will initially move from the origin position, making it easier to understand whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessory objects.

(Lamp control unit return-to-origin processing)
The origin return process of the lamp control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control section 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the drive target to be returned to the origin is set to the first point. 1 movable member 73, and the process moves to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the drive target to be returned to the origin is The second movable member 74 is set, and the process moves to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the original position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, the movable member moves for a predetermined time. The board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the board does not return to the original position within a certain period of time is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9, and when the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the process is moved to step R105-9. , the process moves to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets return error information (first movable member return error information, second movable member return error information) indicating that a return error has occurred in the movable member to be driven, in the lamp RAM 150c. , In step R105-10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to make the second movable member 74 the drive target, and the board accessory processing number is changed to "1". If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

In step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (production button 17) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R105-13, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the production button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. When the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-14, and when the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives a button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-15, the effect button 17 is moved within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, and the process moves to step R105-17. If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the current The return-to-origin process ends.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18, clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (performance button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, sets the above-mentioned initial processing number to the initial operation processing of the accessory. Set "2" and end the current return-to-origin process.

As described above, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. (in the order of member 73→second movable member 74), the movable member 73 is returned to the original position. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether the various board accessories have returned to their original positions. Furthermore, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other in a manner that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent both movable members from applying loads to each other, and to prevent both movable members from being damaged at the same time. This makes it possible to suppress such inconveniences.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 76, the operation of returning the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (direction button 17) It is possible to perform the return operation at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the return operation of various accessories can be shortened, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 76, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory object to return to its origin position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories does not end forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the various accessories are performing return operations even during the variable performance and the performance operation is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 76, the operation of returning the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (direction button 17) When both of the return operations are completed, processing for transitioning to initial operation processing is performed. Therefore, the return movement of various accessories to their origin positions and the initial movements of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it becomes possible to separately check the return movements and initial movements of various accessories. .

Note that the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed to return to the origin position in a predetermined order (first movable member 73 → second movable member 74), but at the same time, the origin position It may also be possible to start an operation to return to . In this way, the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 can be shortened, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial motion of various accessories to be executed next. becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process of the lamp control section 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operating status of the board accessory is "0". If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether return abnormality information for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the process moves to step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2", assuming that the initial movement of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 78) for determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory. Note that details of the board accessory initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, one initial operation pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command and the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information by referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. do.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-8. The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether all the initial operations of the board accessories have been completed. If all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have not been completed, the process moves to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have been completed, in step R107-10, the process moves to step R107-11. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (production button 17) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether return abnormality information for the production button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-14 assuming that the initial movement of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, in step R107-13, the frame Assuming that the initial movement of the accessory is not performed, the frame accessory processing number is set to "2", and the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table (see FIG. 79) for determining the initial movement pattern of the frame accessory. Note that details of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (performance button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power-on command with reference to the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-18. The initial motion of the frame accessory is executed in accordance with the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether all steps of the initial motion of the frame accessory have been completed. If the initial motion of the frame accessory has not completed all steps, the process moves to step R107-21, and if the initial motion of the frame accessory has completed all steps, in step R107-20, the frame accessory Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing. .

In this way, according to the initial motion process shown in FIG. 77, the initial motion of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial motion of the frame accessory (production button 17) are controlled. They can be executed at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the initial movements of various accessories can be shortened, and it is possible to prevent the production operations of various accessories during the game from being inhibited.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessory, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movable member from completely failing or being damaged by forcing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred to undergo initial operation.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, if there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17 forming the frame accessory, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as complete malfunction or damage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which a return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, even if the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the return error has not occurred is executed, and the return error is performed. Even if the initial motion of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial motion of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the operation of the accessory object in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 77, both the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (production button 17) are completed. In this case, the initial operation process ends. Therefore, even though one of the board and frame accessories is performing an initial action, the other may perform a production action, where it is unclear whether it is an initial action or a production action. It disappears.

(Board accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of power-on command, the presence or absence of return error information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected.For reference, the operation mode at the initial operation and the initial operation The number of steps is listed.

Initial operation patterns include patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the device is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns determined when receiving patterns 04 to 06, the second power recovery designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, or the third power recovery designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the first movable member 73 moves in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin After operating, the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→return to the origin, and during this period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (light emit light) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73, in which the first movable member 73 does not operate and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin, During that period, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and during that period, the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) only in blue. This is the same as pattern 01.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and since the second movable member LED does not light up in blue, it is ultimately the same as initial operation pattern 03.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and except for the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED being turned off, This is the same as initial operation pattern 01 or initial operation pattern 04.
“Initial operation pattern 08” is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 02 or initial operation pattern 05 except that the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 03 or initial operation pattern 06 except that the first movable member 73 is turned off.

Note that in initial operation pattern 02, initial operation pattern 05, and initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because the component LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality.

In addition, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described, but this point is caused by the return abnormality of the second movable member 74. This is because the component LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the board accessory One point is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of (the first movable member, the second movable member) is the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

In addition, the movement mode of the initial movement is the same as long as at least the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is the same, the movement time in each process may be the same, or the movement time in each process is the same. May be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation modes (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operations of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be made different. In this way, it is possible to easily determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

In addition, when the initial operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is to be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, it is possible to An operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it is easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). It becomes possible.

A second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the board accessory (first movable member 73, second The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although they are the same, there is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

It should be noted that while the light emitting manner of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state, the light emitting manner of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. However, on the contrary, the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, while the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Furthermore, both the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the second movable member LED are made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state. Good too. In this way, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to the power being restored (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the board accessory The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, and when the power is restored when the special symbol is being displayed in fluctuation or during a jackpot game. The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power restoration to restore to a customer waiting state, or the initial operation is due to power restoration to restore during a special symbol fluctuation display, or during a jackpot game.

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols or when the power is restored during a jackpot game, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off, but the first movable member LED The member LED and the second movable member LED may be lit in the same light emitting manner as when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When there is no return abnormality in the movable member 74, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is performed without performing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73, the second movable member If there is a return abnormality in 74, the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a recovery abnormality.

(Frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (production button 17).

In the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, the type of power-on command and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and the operation mode at the initial operation and the number of steps for the initial operation are listed for reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin → intermittent vibration, and during that period, the production button LED is Lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power recovery designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is received, and the production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, During that period, the production button lights up (lights up) in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when a second power restoration designation command indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received; The production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and the production button LED turns off during this period.

Regarding the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the performance button 17, the vibration time of the vibration performance executed during the variable performance (the vibration time during the dialogue preview performance) Vibration performance, vibration performance during step-up preview performance, vibration performance during pseudo continuous performance, vibration performance during development performance, vibration performance during cut-in performance, vibration performance during decisive performance, vibration performance during re-lottery performance, The time is different from the vibration performance (vibration performance at the time of confirmed performance).

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the frame accessory The difference is in the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of (production button 17). Therefore, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the points is that it is designed to allow Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the production button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference lies in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the board accessory The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

In addition, the performance button LED is designed to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or during a jackpot game, but this is the same as when the power is restored to restore the performance button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be made to light up in a light emitting manner.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the number of colors emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted light colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it includes luminescent colors that are not present in other models. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include a light emitting color that is not included in the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. This differs from the time during which the performance button 17 vibrates during the operation performance performed when the button 17 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the vibration is caused by the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the process is executed over the initial operation of the effect button 17 in which the detection of the process is performed. Therefore, the operation of the production button 17 and the button vibration motor can be checked at the same time, and the time required for operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after power-on accompanied by initialization of main RAM 110c.

Note that power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process being performed. However, here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound elapses at timing T8, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T10, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality, and the initial The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without performing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is ended and the LED lights up while waiting for a customer (lights up in white).

At the timing T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T8, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When receiving the first reserved number of special drawings designation command based on winning (first reserved number of special drawings = 1), the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special drawings display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reserved icon is displayed. The first hold icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the first movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. The second movable member 74 starts blinking in red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED maintain a state in which the lights are turned off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed, and the initial light emission of the second movable member LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights up white).

At the timing T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T8, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When receiving the first reserved number of special drawings designation command based on winning (first reserved number of special drawings = 1), the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special drawings display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reserved icon is displayed. The first hold icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where there is a return error in the production button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed with a return error occurring in the production button 17, the production button LED flashes red ( abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in the off state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 ends at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 starts, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 ends at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the initial light emission ends in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the light is turned on while waiting for a customer (white light), and at the timing of T7, the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound starts. After the time has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

Note that in the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 83, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized when the power is turned on without the setting change processing being performed has been described; however, the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed. In the case of power-on, after the initial screen is displayed, the production control board 130 receives a setting change designation command, and the setting changing screen is displayed, and then the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command. By doing so, the first standby screen is displayed and the return operations and initial operations of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no abnormality in various accessories returning after power is restored)
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ).

At the timing of T8, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the second movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality, and the initial The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED ends and turns on (lights white) while waiting for a customer.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the first movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. The second movable member 74 starts blinking in red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED maintain a state in which the lights are turned off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed, and the initial light emission of the second movable member LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights up white).

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the production button returning after power is restored)
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed with a return error occurring in the production button 17, the production button LED flashes red ( abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in the off state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 ends at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 starts, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 ends at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn on (white light) while waiting for a customer.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the state after the power is restored is that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner and there is a pending memory)
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a specific example where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is a special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and with reservation memory.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays a recovery screen including the words "Please resume the game." , the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when the command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings = 3, number of second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the image display device displays the returning screen, so the A state is maintained in which the second reserved numbers are not displayed in the 1st special figure reserved number display area 70E and the 2nd special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the sub-second hold display 84 has a display mode showing "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain a state of being turned off.

At timing T5, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at timing T7, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started. When the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the extinguished state.

At timing T8, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the stop display of the "753" production symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ ( A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in a static state (static display) is displayed, and a stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, the three first pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "2".

In addition, if the state after the power is restored is in the special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and there is no hold memory, "0" is displayed on the sub-first hold display 83 at the timing of T2, and at the timing of T9. The basic flow of operations from the timing T1 to the timing T8 described above is the same, except that the variable performance is not started upon receipt of the customer waiting state designation command.

(Specific example of when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

A case where the power-on designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected ( A first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and the command Although there is a third case in which the communication line connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but power supply to the performance control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the words "Loading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the production control board 130 responds to the command. A control state is entered in which the performance can be executed.

At timing T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing is performed to initialize the control state of the game, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 , and the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen is displayed in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ). Thereafter, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the system becomes silent.

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the first standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately, a dark color display screen was displayed as a type of initial screen. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of displaying the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of displaying the first standby screen.

(Specific example of when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

A case where the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is disconnected ( A first case in which power (main power only) is not supplied due to a situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and a command communication line Although there is a third case in which the connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but power supply to the performance control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the words "Loading" is displayed, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the production control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the desired effect.

At timing T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing is performed to restore the control state of the game, and a power restoration designation command for waiting for a customer is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command, a return-to-origin process is started, and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen is displayed in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (still display). Furthermore, the audio output device 9 becomes silent.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ).

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, the second standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately, it displayed a dark color display screen as a type of initial screen. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of displaying the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of displaying the second standby screen.

In addition, the audio output device 9 was configured to be silent when receiving the power restoration designation command, but it now outputs a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power has been turned on (so that it can be understood). You can do it like this. In this case, the alarm may be the same as when the power-on designation command is received, or it may be a different alarm.

(Specific example of when the power-on command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

The case where the command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on is the first case where power is supplied to the production control board 130 but not to the main control board 110, and the production control is not performed from the main control board 110. Examples include a second case in which the command communication line to the board 130 is disconnected, and a third case in which the connector of the command communication line is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state). Case 3 will be explained.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed.

At the timing of T2, the production control board 130 does not receive the power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) sent from the main control board 110, and the command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first special drawing reservation) is sent from the main control board 110. number and the second pending number = 0), the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn off. maintain.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pon♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At timing T4, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the production symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. , and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable production (production symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon, or the icon concerned) , BGM output) starts.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example 1 when restarting after only power supply to the main control board is stopped)
FIG. 92 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a first specific example in which the system is restarted after being stopped.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact with it due to an external factor. , the case where the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes connected after being disconnected (including half-plugged). Can be mentioned.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) has stopped.

At the timing of T1, the various accessories have already finished their return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound, and are now waiting for customers, and the image display device shows the initial pattern when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable The member LED and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance that was executed after the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device In this case, a standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed in which the losing effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed (statically displayed).

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed. , sub-information display device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general figure fluctuation display 85, sub-general figure The hold display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the customer waiting state designation command can be executed while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the fluctuating effect has finished). If the demonstration standby time has elapsed after the reception (or after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays the power supply instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and "RAM An initialization notification sound consisting of a voice saying "It's clear" is output.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, if the return movement, initial movement, or initialization notification sound output of various characters has already been completed, a variable effect (loss variable effect) is in progress, or a jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is in progress. The timing of T4 also applies when restarting after only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during a control state in which the performance control board is able to execute a performance according to a command, such as during execution. The screens displayed on the image display device until the power-on designation command is received in ), except that the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped while waiting for a customer, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button The return operation and initialization operation described in step 17) are performed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 81, 82, or 83. will be held.

(Specific example 2 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 93 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which the system is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the main power supply is restarted after the main power supply has stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, the various accessories have already finished their return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound, and are now waiting for customers, and the image display device shows the initial pattern when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable The component LED and the production button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure pending indicator 86 ) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable performance, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration performance screen when the power is restored. A second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display), and the audio output device 9 becomes silent.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ).

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories or light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode is similar to the specific example shown in FIG. 85, FIG. 86, or FIG. 87. will be held.

(Specific example 3 where power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 94 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only supply is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during execution of a variable performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be described in which the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply continues.

At timing T1, a variable effect is being executed, a variable effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, a variable display is performed on the sub-first variable display 81, and a pending number “1” is displayed on the sub-first pending display 83.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power source) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the control state of the game. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, second sub variable display 82, first sub hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for the special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a recovery screen that includes the words "Please resume the game." The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, second sub variable display 82, first sub hold indicator 83, second sub hold indicator 84, The sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) maintain the display contents.

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the light is turned off. At the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable member 73 is turned off. Initial operation of member 74 begins.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn off.

At the timing of T10, when the production control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display for the loss of the variable production is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display). is displayed, and the stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 takes a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that it is a loss.

In addition, if the result of the current variable performance is a jackpot, when the special figure stop designation command is received by the performance control board 130, a confirmation display of the variable performance as a jackpot is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a finalization screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a such as "777" and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the sub-first variable display 81 Now, it becomes a jackpot display mode indicating that it is a jackpot.

At timing T11, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". ”, and the variable performance (variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

In addition, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED become the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are turned off or have special light emission that is different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. In this manner, it may be possible to understand that a power recovery designation command has been received during a variable performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 85, 86, or 87. will be held.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable production recognized by the production control board 130 has elapsed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display or stop display of the production pattern 70a is not performed. , the variable display on the sub-first variable display and the sub-second variable display will not end.

(Specific example 4 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 95 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the jackpot effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process have already been completed (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only supply is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during the execution of a jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the right hit effect is displayed at the top right of the screen. The suggestive right-hitting image MU is displayed, and at the bottom right of the screen, a jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is displayed in a stopped state (still display). Further, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second reserved number of special symbols display area 70F.

At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot display (lighting) is performed on the sub-first variable display 81.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for jackpots transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 return to their origin. A return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a jackpot that includes the words "Please restart the game (jackpot in progress)". The intermediate recovery screen is displayed, and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and sub-normal pattern pending display 86) maintain their display contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen for the jackpot, the same returning screen that is displayed when the power supply to the main control board 110 (only the main power supply) is stopped during the fluctuating performance shown in FIG. 94 is displayed. You can do it like this.

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the light is turned off. At the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable member 73 is turned off. Initial operation of member 74 begins.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn off.

At timing T10, when the performance control board 130 receives a round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot performance (round performance) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead of a normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second reserved number of special symbols display area 70F. Furthermore, jackpot performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED light up during the jackpot.

After that, when the production control board 130 receives a round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, a special jackpot production (round production) screen is displayed on the image display device. Then, the normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

Note that when the production control board 130 receives an ending specification command instead of when the production control board 130 receives a round number designation command while displaying a special jackpot production screen, the normal ending production is displayed. A screen will be displayed.

In addition, if a round number designation command is received while a special jackpot production screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot production screen, the special jackpot production will continue until the production control board 130 receives the ending specification command. The screen may be continued, or the special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a fluctuation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored, but the light is turned off or the special light emitting mode is different from the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored. It may also be possible to make it possible to recognize that a power restoration designation command has been received during a fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 85, 86, or 87. will be held.

In addition, in FIGS. 92 to 95, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command was received. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of performance symbols 70a are set to the first combination. When the first initial effect symbol ("135") is displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect symbol ("135") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination is displayed. 753'') is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of power supply is performed before displaying the effect pattern 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (initial screen display only), and the restoration to the state where the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and there is no pending memory/with pending memory. The display mode of the specific display later displayed on the image display device (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made to be different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of held memories on each of the sub-second hold display 84), and the power supply that was stopped while there is a held memory is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, when the image display device is displaying a specific display (resuming screen display) indicating that the power supply is to be resumed, the hold icon display area does not display the hold icon, but the sub hold display displays the hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to know the number of pending memories before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. becomes.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demonstration performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed again. Instead, a second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed in a stopped state (still display). Therefore, there is no need to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply was stopped was during a demonstration while waiting for customers, reducing the processing load related to display control when restoring the game control state after the power supply is resumed. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the power supply that was stopped during the fluctuation performance is restarted for the sub-variation display devices (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the special symbol is being fluctuated (returning screen is displayed), if the special symbol is being fluctuated, the fluctuating display ( (blinking display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the control state of the game is restored and the special symbol fluctuation display is executed (returning screen is displayed), the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, for the sub-hold display devices (the first sub-hold display device 83 and the second sub-hold display device 84), the resuming screen is displayed on the image display device. (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the command for specifying the number of reserved special figures is received), the display mode starts to show the number of reserved numbers. Therefore, the player can be made aware of the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when performing a variable display (blinking display) on the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) while the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device, Alternatively, the sub-hold indicators (first sub-hold indicator 83, second sub-hold indicator 84) may be configured to display the number of holds in accordance with the start of this variable display. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to easily understand that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reservations at that time.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The return operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as in the case, that is, from the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends). Therefore, the control related to the return operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17), the light emitting parts of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED) are turned off. ing. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial motion of various accessories, and it becomes possible to understand that it is in the process of returning to its original state.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, if any of the various accessories has a return abnormality, the light emitting part of the accessory that has the return error will blink red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, an abnormality is notified. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp the accessory that has had a return abnormality.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, if the abnormality is notified by flashing red on the light-emitting part of the accessory that has returned abnormally, until the next fluctuating effect is started. Abnormality notifications continue. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the user of the accessory that has experienced a return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation may be performed to return the accessory with the return abnormality to the original position at the timing when the next fluctuating performance is started. Further, in a case where the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting part of the accessory in which the recovery abnormality occurred in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. The initial motion of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) is started from the timing after the return operation is completed (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the production pattern 70a is displayed). However, if the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (the display of the recovery screen (Middle), the initial movements of various accessories are performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform initial operations of various accessories at appropriate timings depending on the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, for the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, and initialization of the main RAM 110c is performed. In the case of a power recovery without a power recovery, when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (during the special symbol fluctuation display and before the production symbol 70a is displayed), the sub-hold display (sub-first pending display 83 , the initial operation is performed after the sub-second hold display 84) changes to a display mode showing the number of holds. Therefore, the initial movement of the board accessory can be performed after the player grasps the number of reservations (the progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the frame accessory (effect button 17) is activated when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c. , When the returning screen is displayed on the image display device (during the special symbol fluctuation display and before the production symbol 70a is displayed), the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) ) is designed to perform the initial operation after the display format changes to indicate the number of reservations. Therefore, after the player is made aware of the number of reservations (the progress of the game in the future), the initial movement of the frame accessory can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as when the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (in case the return operation is completed immediately, the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed) to the initial stage of the various accessories It is designed to take action. Therefore, the control related to the initial movements of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial movements of various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even when the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when displaying the stop screen after displaying the returning screen, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a may not be output.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, if the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, various accessories can be restored by simply displaying the initial screen. The operation, initial operation, and initial light emission are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to know that an abnormality has occurred in which a command cannot be received when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the When the control board 130 is in a control state in which it is possible to execute the production according to the command, and receives a command for specifying the number of special drawings reserved based on the winning of game balls to the starting port from the main control board 110, it emits a winning sound. It is designed to be output. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that a game ball has entered the starting hole.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the If the control board 130 receives a variation start command from the main control board 110 while it is in a control state in which it can execute a production according to the command, the variation production will be executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. Therefore, the start of the fluctuating performance is executed without delay, and it becomes possible to perform the fluctuating performance from beginning to end within the range of the varying time of the special symbol.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the If the control board 130 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 110 when it is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, the fluctuation performance will start without performing the return movement or initial movement of various accessories. is designed to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform performances using various accessories without being hindered by the return action or the initial action during the execution of the variable performance.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the production control board 130 is in a state of waiting for a customer after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in the control state where the corresponding performance can be executed, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the effect control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable effect after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply command or power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even during a jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed, the main control board 11 When the power supply to the main control board 110 is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting the power supply after stopping, the restoration operation of various accessories and the initial operation ( (including initial light emission). Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, it is possible for the performance control board 130 to execute a performance in response to a command, such as during a customer waiting state after the initialization notification sound has already been output. Even in the control state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, control allows the performance control board 130 to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in this state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It looks like this. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the performance control board 130 responds to the command during a jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even if the main control board 110 is in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110. , the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Note that when a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of performing the return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission) of various accessories. You can just output .

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the production control board 130 is in a state of waiting for a customer after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even if the controller is in a control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It looks like this. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has finished or during a jackpot game, the main control board 130 When the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, the first standby screen is displayed instead of the initial screen. ing. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the effect control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable effect after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the performance control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a jackpot performance after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen for jackpots is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the performance control board 130 may execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance or during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in a control state where power is enabled, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the initial screen will be displayed. If the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen and a power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player is not made to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed after the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can be continuously displayed. . Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

(Modification 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 96 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 when restarting after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute production according to commands, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is turned off. A case will be described in which the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped.

At the timing of T1, the various accessories have already finished their return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound, and are now waiting for customers, and the image display device shows the initial pattern when the power is restored. A second standby screen is displayed in which a certain "753" production symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are displayed. The lights are on while waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance that was executed after the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device In this case, a standby screen is displayed in which the loss effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed).

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen and displays the sub Information display device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general fluctuation display 85, sub-general reservation display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable effect, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the completion of the customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen containing the words "Loading" instead of the second standby screen, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are turned off. do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub regular fluctuation display 85, sub The general figure holding display 86) is hidden.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off, and instead of the initial screen, "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, is displayed on the image display device. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the audio output device 9 issues an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Sound is output.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance after the return operation of various characters, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, or during the execution of variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect), or jackpot Even in the case where the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is 93 to 95 except for the customer waiting demonstration production screen, variable production screen (loss variation production screen, jackpot variation production screen), and jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). This is basically the same as the example shown.

(Modification 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 97 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 when restarting after stopping.

Here, during a customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned off. A case will be described in which the main power supply is restarted while the supply continues.

At the timing of T1, if the various accessories are already waiting for customers after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound have finished, the image display device will display the initial symbol when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure pending indicator 86 ) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable effect, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the completion of the customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the control state of the game. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the words "Reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub regular fluctuation display 85, sub The general figure holding display 86) is hidden.

At timing T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off, and instead of the initial screen, "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed on the image display device. A second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ).

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance after the return operation of various characters, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, or during the execution of variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect), or jackpot Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding backup power supply) is stopped and restarted during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is 93 to 95 except for the customer waiting demonstration production screen, variable production screen (loss variation production screen, jackpot variation production screen), and jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). This is basically the same as the example shown.

In addition, in FIGS. 96 and 97, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command was received. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, the standby screen on which the effect pattern 70a is displayed is different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are , and turn off the performance button LED. Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, the initial movements of various accessories do not start from the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen, but from the timing when the initial screen switches to the initial screen, or from the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial operation may be started.

In addition, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen is switched to the initial screen when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is received. It may also be possible to switch to a screen. In this case, the initial movements of various accessories may be started at the timing when the standby screen switches to the initial screen, or at the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial movements of various accessories may be started at the switched timing.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial movements of various accessories may be started from the timing when the hidden state is switched to the initial screen, or from the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial motion of various accessories may be started at the timing when the switch is made.

(Modified example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating a modification in a case where there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flash red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality. (abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the performance button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the lighting is turned on while waiting for a customer (white lighting), and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is completed. The initial operation process ends without any operation being performed.

At the timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T7, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When receiving the first reserved number of special drawings designation command based on winning (first reserved number of special drawings = 1), the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special drawings display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reserved icon is displayed. The first hold icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the performance button LED light up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

Note that even if there is a return error in the first movable member 73 when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will blink red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return error. , the first movable member 73, and the second movable member 74 are configured to complete the initial motion processing without performing the initial motion.

Furthermore, even when the power is restored, if there is a return error in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will notify the occurrence of the return error. In order to do so, it flashes in red (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, when there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the return abnormality is detected not only in the movable member with the return abnormality. Initial operations are also not performed for movable members that are not present. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable members (especially the movable member in which the return abnormality has not occurred) from ceasing to operate during the execution of the game (variable performance, jackpot game), thereby reducing the interest in the game. This makes it possible to prevent

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, when there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will flash red to notify you of a recovery error. Therefore, compared to the case where only the movable member LED provided on one of the movable members having the return abnormality blinks red, it becomes easier to understand that there is an abnormality in the movable member.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 The initial operation is performed for the effect buttons 17 that have no risk of colliding with the member 74. Therefore, the operation of the performance button 17 can be confirmed, and it becomes possible to grasp an abnormality of the performance button 17.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, even if there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the production button LED provided in the production button 17 is restored. It is designed to emit an initial light without flashing red to notify of an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that there is no return abnormality in the production button 17.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial operation process may be completed without performing the initial operation for the production button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED may blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17, the initial operation process may be completed without performing the initial operation for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED may blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(Variation example of initial processing of accessories in lamp control unit)
A modification of the accessory initial processing performed by the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a modification of the accessory initial processing performed by the lamp control unit 150.
In addition, here, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same process as the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 75, description is abbreviate|omitted, and a different process is demonstrated.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether there is a power ON flag set in the lamp RAM 150c at the time of starting power supply. If there is no power ON flag, the process moves to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received. Then, the process moves to step R102B, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process moves to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 60 seconds after the last power ON, when the return operation and initial operation should have been completed), the process moves to step R103, and if the predetermined time has not elapsed. If so, the process moves to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a executes the origin return process of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) at the initial processing number updated in each process of accessory initial processing. Set "1".

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99, when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories are started. Therefore, there is no need to be aware of whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, and the processing load associated with the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation after the start of power supply. It becomes possible to reduce the

Furthermore, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99, a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration command, When a specified command is received, the various accessories return operations and initial operations are performed again. Therefore, the main control board 110 did not start up normally and the power-on command was sent later than usual (an abnormality occurred regarding the power line from the power board 160 to the main control board 110). It becomes possible to understand the

In addition, when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, the return operation of various accessories and , the initial operation may be performed. In this way, the player does not need to be aware of the period of time that has elapsed since power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, and it becomes possible to simplify the process when the power-on command is received.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 100 shows various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no recovery abnormality.

Note that power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process being performed. However, here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. Then, the lighting mode of the production button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit while waiting for a customer (lights white). Become. At timing T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return to origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. . Further, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white, and the production button LED changes from red to white. Lights up in the order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. finish.

At timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state occurs.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the first movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. , the lighting mode of the production button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed. finish.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where there is a return error in the production button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the performance button 17 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the performance button LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. do.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit (white) while waiting for a customer. At timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state occurs.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

Note that in the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized when the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing has been described. In the case of power-on, after a dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, the production control board 130 receives a setting change designation command, and a setting changing screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is sent to production control. When the board 130 receives the signal, a first standby screen is displayed and the return operations and initial operations of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) are started. . Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no abnormality in various accessories returning after power is restored)
FIG. 104 shows various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17 ) is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no recovery abnormality.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. At the same time, the light emitting manner of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit while waiting for a customer (lights white). Become.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the second movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99. .

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. . At this time, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white, and the performance The light emission mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. When the process is finished, the first movable member LED and the performance button LED are lit (white) while waiting for the customer.

At the timing of T6, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the first movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99. .

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.
In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the second movable member LED and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting manner of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED changes and lights up in blue. .

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed. When the process is finished, the first movable member LED and the performance button LED are lit (white) while waiting for the customer.

At the timing of T6, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the production button returning after power is restored)
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the production button LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED maintain the off state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. 2 The light emitting mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit (white) while waiting for a customer.

At the timing of T6, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the state after the power is restored is that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner and there is a pending memory)
FIG. 108 shows that, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99, the state after the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the special symbol fluctuation display (losing fluctuation display) and with pending memory. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a specific example of the case.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white, The light emitting manner of the second movable member LED and the production button LED changes and lights up in blue. At this time, the image display device displays a returning screen including the words "Please resume the game," and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when the command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings = 3, number of second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the image display device displays the returning screen, so the A state is maintained in which the second reserved numbers are not displayed in the 1st special figure reserved number display area 70E and the 2nd special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-holding display 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the second sub-holding display 84 and the sub-universal drawing holding display 86 have a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off.

At timing T7, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the stop display of the "753" production symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ ( A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in a static state (static display) is displayed, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, the three first pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "2".

(Specific example of when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99.

A case where the power-on designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected ( A first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and the command Although there is a third case in which the communication line connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but when power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73, Then, the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, a sub-first fluctuation indicator 81, a sub-second fluctuation indicator 82, a sub-first hold indicator 83, a sub-second hold indicator 84, a sub-normal figure fluctuation indicator 85, and a sub-normal figure hold indicator. 86 is in a non-display state.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started, and then the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. At the timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, at the timing T5, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the second movable member 74 is started. When the initial operation of the member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which it is possible to execute the effect according to the command.

At timing T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 , and the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Thereafter, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit alternately in red and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T9, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T10, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED ends, and the system is waiting for customers. When the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the first standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately, a dark color display screen was displayed as a type of initial screen. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of displaying the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of displaying the first standby screen.

(Specific example of when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where the power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99.

A case where the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is disconnected ( A first case in which power (main power only) is not supplied due to a situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and a command communication line Although there is a third case in which the connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

Note that since the timing from T1 to T7 is the same as the timing from T1 to T7 in FIG. 109, the explanation here will be omitted, and the timing after T7 will be explained.

At timing T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 , and the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 maintains a silent state.

Thereafter, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and the production button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T9, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T10, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED ends, and the system is waiting for customers. It lights up (white light).

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, the second standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately, it displayed a dark color display screen as a type of initial screen. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, the audio output device 9 was set to be silent when receiving the power restoration designation command, but a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power has been turned on (so that it can be understood) is emitted for a predetermined period of time. (For example, it may be output for 30 seconds). In this case, the alarm may be the same as when the power-on designation command is received, or it may be a different alarm.

In addition, in FIGS. 109 to 110, the various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command was received. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

(Specific example of when the power-on command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
Figure 111 shows a specific example of the case where the power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received normally when the power is turned on, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in Figure 99. FIG.

Cases in which the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally include cases in which power is not supplied to the main control board 110, cases in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and cases in which the command communication line Examples include cases where the connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state).

Note that since the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 109, the explanation here will be omitted, and the timing after T5 will be explained.

At the timing of T5, the production control board 130 does not receive the first power recovery designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the special drawing reservation number designation command (the first special drawing reservation number and , second pending number=0), the image display device maintains the initial screen displayed.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the display modes of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED change and are turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pon♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. , and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable production (production symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon, or the icon concerned) , BGM output) starts.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example 1 when restarting after only power supply to the main control board is stopped)
FIG. 112 shows a customer waiting state (main control board 110 and performance control board 130 FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a first example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the power supply to the main control board 110.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact with it due to an external factor. , the case where the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes connected after being disconnected (including half-plugged). Can be mentioned.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) has stopped.

At the timing of T1, various accessories are already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation and initial operation are completed, and the image display device shows the production symbol "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. 70a, and a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration performance screen with the special design TZ being stopped and displayed (stationary display), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button are displayed. The LED lights up while waiting for customers.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub 1 fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general fluctuation display 85, sub-general reservation display 86) also display contents. maintain.

At timing T3, when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit alternately in red and white as initial light emission, the production button LED is lit in white as initial light emission, and the image display device is powered on. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and "RAM An initialization notification sound consisting of a voice saying "It's clear" is output.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is finished. Then, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, if the return movement, initial movement, or initialization notification sound output of various characters has already been completed, a variable effect (loss variable effect) is in progress, or a jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is in progress. The timing of T4 also applies when restarting after only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during a control state in which the performance control board is able to execute a performance according to a command, such as during execution. The screens displayed on the image display device until the power-on designation command is received in ), except that the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped while waiting for a customer, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button The return operation and initialization operation described in step 17) are performed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in Figures 101, 102, or 103. It will be done.

(Specific example 2 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 113 shows a customer waiting state (main control board 110 and production control board 130 FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the power supply to the main control board 110.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the main power supply is restarted after the main power supply has stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, if the various accessories are already waiting for customers after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound have finished, the image display device will display the initial symbol when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure pending indicator 86 ) also maintains the displayed content.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

Note that even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable performance, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen, the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). A second standby screen of the status is displayed.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is performed. After the process is finished, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED, and the system is waiting for customers. It lights up (white light).

In addition, in the case where various accessory objects have a return abnormality, the initial operation and initial light emission of the various accessory objects will be performed in the same way as the specific example shown in FIG. 105, FIG. 106, or FIG. 107.

(Specific example 3 where power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 114 is based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a third specific example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the power supply to the board 130). FIG.

Here, during execution of a variable performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At timing T1, a variable effect is being executed, a variable effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, a variable display is performed on the sub-first variable display 81, and a pending number “1” is displayed on the sub-first pending display 83.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power source) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82, sub-first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for the special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, The image display device displays a return screen including the words "Please resume the game," and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub The second fluctuation display 82, the first sub-pending display 83, the second sub-pending display 84, the sub-privilege fluctuation display 85, and the sub-pending pending display 86) maintain their display contents.

At the timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is finished. Then, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED end the initial light emission and turn off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the production control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display for the loss of the variable production is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the production symbol 70a of “753”, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the audio output device 9 A stop sound is output. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 takes a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that it is a loss.

In addition, if the result of the current variable performance is a jackpot, when the special figure stop designation command is received by the performance control board 130, a confirmation display of the variable performance as a jackpot is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a such as "777" and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the sub-first variable display 81 In this case, the jackpot display mode shows that it is a jackpot, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At timing T11, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". ”, and the variable performance (variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

Note that at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored, but they must be turned off or have a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored. It may also be possible to make it possible to recognize that a power restoration designation command has been received during a fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 105, 106, or 107. It will be done.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable production recognized by the production control board 130 has elapsed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display or stop display of the production pattern 70a is not performed. , the variable display on the sub-first variable display and the sub-second variable display will not end.

(Specific example 4 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
115 is based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99, and shows that the main control board 110 and the effect control 13 is a diagram illustrating a fourth specific example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the power supply to the board 130). FIG.

Here, during the execution of a jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is displayed in a stopped state (static display). Further, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second reserved number of special symbols display area 70F.

At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot display (lighting) is performed on the sub-first variable display 81.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for jackpots transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 return to their origin. A return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, The image display device displays a returning screen for jackpots that includes the words "Please restart the game (during jackpots)", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub general figure fluctuation display 85, sub ordinary The figure pending display 86) maintains the displayed content.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen for jackpots, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (only the main power supply) is stopped during the fluctuating performance shown in FIG. 114 is displayed. You can do it like this.

At the timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is finished. Then, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED end the initial light emission and turn off. becomes.

At timing T10, when the performance control board 130 receives a round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot performance (round performance) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead of a normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second reserved number of special symbols display area 70F. Furthermore, jackpot performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED light up during the jackpot.

After that, when the production control board 130 receives a round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, a special jackpot production (round production) screen is displayed on the image display device. Then, the normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

Note that when the production control board 130 receives an ending specification command instead of when the production control board 130 receives a round number designation command while displaying a special jackpot production screen, the normal ending production is displayed. A screen will be displayed.

In addition, if a round number designation command is received while a special jackpot production screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot production screen, the special jackpot production will continue until the production control board 130 receives the ending specification command. The screen may be continued, or the special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a fluctuation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored, but they are turned off or have a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored. It may also be possible to make it possible to recognize that a power restoration designation command has been received during a fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 105, 106, or 107. It will be done.

In addition, in FIGS. 112 to 115, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command was received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of performance symbols 70a are set to the first combination. When the first initial effect symbol ("135") is displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect symbol ("135") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination is displayed. 753'') is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display indicating that the power supply should be restarted is performed before displaying the effect pattern 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (initial screen display only), and the restoration to the state where the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and there is no pending memory/with pending memory. The display mode of the specific display later displayed on the image display device (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made to be different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of held memories on each of the sub-second hold display 84), and the power supply that was stopped while there is a held memory is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, when the image display device is displaying a specific display (resuming screen display) indicating that the power supply is to be resumed, the hold icon display area does not display the hold icon, but the sub hold display displays the hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to know the number of pending memories before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. becomes.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demonstration performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed again. Instead, a second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed in a stopped state (still display). Therefore, there is no need to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply was stopped was during a demonstration while waiting for customers, reducing the processing load related to display control when restoring the game control state after the power supply is resumed. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the power supply that was stopped during the fluctuation performance is restarted for the sub fluctuation display devices (sub first fluctuation display device 81, sub second fluctuation display device 82). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (returning screen is displayed), the variable display ( (blinking display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the control state of the game is restored and the special symbol fluctuation display is executed (returning screen is displayed), the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, for the sub-hold display (the first sub-hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84), the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the command for specifying the number of reserved special figures is received), the display mode starts to show the number of reserved numbers. Therefore, the player can be made aware of the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when performing a variable display (blinking display) on the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) while the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device, Alternatively, the sub-hold indicators (first sub-hold indicator 83, second sub-hold indicator 84) may be configured to display the number of holds in accordance with the start of this variable display. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to easily understand that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reservations at that time.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The return operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as in the previous case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed). Therefore, the control related to the return operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various accessories.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17), the light emitting parts of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED) are turned off. ing. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial motion of various accessories, and it becomes possible to understand that it is in the process of returning to its original state.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, if any of the various ornaments has a return abnormality, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the return error flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, an abnormality is notified. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp the accessory that has had a return abnormality.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, if the abnormality is notified by flashing red on the light-emitting part of the accessory that has returned abnormally, until the next fluctuating effect is started. Abnormality notifications continue. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the user of the accessory that has experienced a return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation may be performed to return the accessory with the return abnormality to the original position at the timing when the next fluctuating performance is started. Further, in a case where the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting part of the accessory in which the recovery abnormality occurred in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The initial operations of various accessories are performed at the same timing as in the previous case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing at which the initial screen is displayed). Therefore, the control related to the initial movements of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial movements of various accessories.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, for the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the main RAM 110c is initialized. In the case of power restoration without a power recovery, the sub-hold display (the first sub-hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84) changes to the display mode showing the number of holds (the image display device does not display the recovery screen). Initial operations are performed before Therefore, it becomes easier to avoid inconveniences such as the progress of the performance being hindered by the initial movements of the board accessories. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the frame accessory (effect button 17) is activated when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c. , performs an initial operation before the sub-hold display (first sub-hold display 83, second sub-hold display 84) changes to the display mode indicating the number of holds (returning screen is displayed on the image display device). It looks like this. Therefore, it becomes easier to avoid inconveniences such as the progress of the performance being hindered by the initial movements of the frame accessories. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even if the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the production symbol 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when displaying the stop screen after displaying the returning screen, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a may not be output.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even if the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the return operation, initial operation, etc. of various accessories, Then, while performing initial light emission, the initial screen continues to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to know that an abnormality has occurred in which a command cannot be received when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even if the initial screen continues to be displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, , When the production control board 130 is in a control state in which it is possible to execute the production according to the command, and receives a command for specifying the number of special drawings reserved based on the winning of the game ball to the starting hole from the main control board 110, the prize is won. It is designed to output sound. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that a game ball has entered the starting hole.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the When the control board 130 receives a variation start command from the main control board 110 after it is in a control state in which it can execute a production according to the command, the variation production is executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. Therefore, the start of the fluctuating performance is executed without delay, and it becomes possible to perform the fluctuating performance from beginning to end within the range of the varying time of the special symbol.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the production control board 130 responds to commands while in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. Even in the control state where the corresponding performance can be executed, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the performance control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable performance after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply command or power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the performance control board 130 responds to commands during a jackpot game after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply command or power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. becomes possible

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, it is possible for the performance control board 130 to execute a performance in response to a command, such as during a customer waiting state after the initialization notification sound has already been output. Even in the control state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, control allows the performance control board 130 to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in this state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It looks like this. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, control allows the performance control board 130 to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in the state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Note that when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various accessories. You can just do it.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the production control board 130 responds to commands while in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. Even if the controller is in a control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It looks like this. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

In addition, the performance control board 130 is capable of executing a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance or a jackpot performance after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have ended. Even in this state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the performance control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable performance after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the performance control board 130 responds to commands such as during a jackpot performance after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen for jackpots is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the performance control board 130 may execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance or during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in a control state where power is enabled, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the initial screen will be displayed. If the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen and a power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player is not made to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed after the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can be continuously displayed. . Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Note that the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performances according to commands are a customer waiting state, a fluctuating performance, and a jackpot performance. The state of waiting for a command (for example, while the initial screen is being displayed) may also be included in the control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to the command.

(Specific example when the connection status of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 116(a) and 116(b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection states of various detection means change during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wiring from the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. shall be.

First, FIG. 116(a) will be explained.
FIG. 116(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at timing T1. At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). .

At timing T2, for example, if the connector connected to the main control board 110 becomes half-plugged and only the first starting port detection switch 45a becomes unconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. Then, connection error notification is executed by the production control board 130.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including the words "Connection error detected" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and a message "Connection error detected." A connection error notification sound consisting of the voice is output.

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first starting port detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been released. However, the connection error notification continues until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Next, FIG. 116(b) will be explained.
FIG. 116(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, and radio wave detection sensor 54a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at timing T1. At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). .

At timing T2, for example, if the connector connected to the main control board 110 is in a half-plugged state and the first starting port detection switch 45a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, and radio wave detection sensor 54a are in an unconnected state, The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, a radio wave error, and a connection error, and the production control board 130 executes a magnetic error notification, a radio wave error notification, and a connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays the words "Magnetic error detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the words "Radio wave error detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the words "Connection error detected" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error notification image EG including the words ``Detection'' is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a magnetic error notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying ``Magnetic error.''

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first starting port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board 110, it is detected that the magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error have been canceled, but various error notifications continue until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Note that if the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, the main control board 110 will not detect the occurrence of a connection error and will not issue an error. Notification is not executed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 116, specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from a connected state to a disconnected state, an error notification is performed. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality (partially inserted connector, wire breakage, fraudulent activity) can be detected, and prompt response can be taken.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 116, specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) is non-operating. Even when the connected state is restored from the connected state, error notification of magnetic errors and radio wave errors continues until the gaming machine 1 is powered off. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts against the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 116, even if the payout control board 120 changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, no error notification is performed. Therefore, in cases where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, the game can be continued as is, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

Note that this also applies when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, in the same notification mode as in FIG. Radio wave error notification) may also be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues, but the first starting port detection switch 45a The connection error notification may be canceled when the state changes from the unconnected state to the connected state. In this way, the game can be continued as is in cases where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, the radio wave error notification sound related to a radio wave error that has a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error, and the connection error notification sound related to a connection error that has a lower priority (importance) than a radio wave error, are considered to be magnetic errors. Although the notification sounds are not output when they occur simultaneously, the notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred may be output in order.

Furthermore, in magnetic error notification, radio error notification, and connection error notification, an error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or an error notification sound may be output while the error notification image EG is displayed. You may also choose not to output it.

In addition, when the first starting port detection switch 45a changes from the unconnected state to the connected state, it is assumed that a starting winning has occurred and special symbol determination information is acquired, and the first special symbol pending number (U1) is increased, thereby causing the special symbol A variable display or a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol) may be executed.

(Specific example of operating the operation panel while waiting for a customer)
A specific example of the case where the operation unit (production button 17, cross key 18) is operated while waiting for a customer will be explained using FIG. 117.

As shown in FIG. 117(a), when the state shifts to a customer waiting state in which variable effects and jackpot effects are not executed, effective suggestion effects (introductory effects) indicating that a valid period may occur are not executed. Valid period while waiting for a customer during which the operations of the production button 17 and cross key 18 are valid (since the valid period while waiting for a customer is maintained until the fluctuating performance starts, it is longer than the various valid periods that occur during the fluctuating performance. (which can occur over a long period of time) is initiated.

At this time, a guide image AG (operation promotion image) is displayed on the lower right side of the first image display device 70 to guide the game assistance function started by operating the effect button 17 and the cross key 18. Specifically, a first image (an image imitating the effect button 17) suggesting that a menu is displayed by operating the effect button 17, and a volume adjustment possible by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 18. A second image suggesting that the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 18 (an image that imitates the cross key 18 with bright up and down buttons) and a third image (an image that imitates the cross key 18 with bright colored up and down buttons) and a third image that suggests that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the A light-colored image imitating the cross key 18) is displayed.

When the production button 17 is operated in this state, the menu image MG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the production pattern 70a without the production button 17 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 117(b), and the menu image MG The display sound is output.

The menu image MG includes an "end" item for ending the menu display, a "model explanation" item for explaining the model, a "performance customization" item for setting the appearance rate of a predetermined effect (for example, confirmed effect, etc.), A "Pachilog" item has been set up to manage gaming history in conjunction with a mobile device (smartphone, etc.), and currently selected items are displayed in bright colors, while currently unselected items are displayed in dark colors. It is now displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated with the "end" item selected, the menu image MG is erased without the effect button 17 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 117(c). Further, a sound for erasing the menu image MG is output, and the guide image AG is displayed again.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated in this state, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed without the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 117(d). At the same time, a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 vibrating. Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

If a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) passes without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the volume value image OG is erased and the guide image AG is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 117(f). .

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, the production buttons 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo continuous production, development production, cut-in production, final production, etc.) that occur during the variable production are Even if the effect button 17 or cross key 18 is operated during the customer waiting period, which can occur for a period longer than the valid period, a vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate (because the effect button 17 vibrates) (including indirect vibrations of the cross key 18 that are transmitted) are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the production button 17 or cross key 18 is operated while waiting for a customer, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player. becomes.

In addition, the valid period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occur during the fluctuating performance (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot performance (jackpot game) also differs depending on the various preview performances (speech lines) that occur during the fluctuating performance. This can occur over a period longer than the validity period of the preview performance, pseudo-sequence performance, development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, etc.), but during the validity period of the cross key 18 related to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment. Even if the cross key 18 is operated, the vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 18 transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 17) is not executed. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised during the variable performance or the jackpot performance, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, regarding the validity period while waiting for a customer, the validity suggestion effect (introduction performance) that suggests that the validity period may occur before the validity period occurs is not executed. It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though information useful to the player (effects that make the player expect a jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as

In addition, regarding the valid period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occur during variable effects (variable display of special symbols) and jackpot effects (jackpot games), effective suggestion effects (introduced) before the effective period occurs. (direction) will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though information useful to the player (effects that make the player expect a jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, during the customer waiting period that can occur for a period longer than the period of validity of the performance button 17 (the display period of the operation promotion image) that occurs during the variable performance. The effective period (operation) of the production button 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo-continuation production, development production, cut-in production, final production, etc.) that occur during variable production is more important than when the production button 17 is operated. When the effect button 17 is operated during the display of the promotion image, the vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate is more likely to be executed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, the effective period of the effect button 17 related to various preview effects that occur during the variable effect includes a relatively short first effective period (operation promotion related to dialogue preview effects, etc.). There is a relatively long second validity period (validity period accompanied by the display of images) and a relatively long second validity period (validity period accompanied by the display of operation promotion images related to fixed performances, etc.), but the validity period of the production button 17 that occurs during variable production When the performance button 17 is operated during the second valid period, the performance button 17 will be It is easier to perform a vibrating effect. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period while waiting for a customer, a vibration effect may be executed in which the effect button 17 vibrates at a predetermined rate. At a lower rate than when the production button 17 is operated during the effective period of the production button 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo-continuation production, development production, cut-in production, decisive production, etc.) that occur during the period. It is best to perform a vibration effect.

(Specific example of customizing the performance while waiting for a customer)
With reference to FIG. 118, a specific example will be described in which performance customization (setting to normal setting or simple setting) is performed by operating the operation unit (performance button 17, cross key 18) while waiting for a customer.

As shown in FIG. 118(a), when the production button 17 is operated while waiting for a customer, the menu image MG is displayed on the first image display device 70 so as to be superimposed in front of the production pattern 70a. In the menu image MG, the menu items "Exit", "Model Description", "Customize Performance", and "Pachilog" are set, and the currently selected item is displayed in bright color, indicating the currently selected item. Items that have not been selected are displayed in a dark color and can be selected using the cross key 19.

After that, when the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated twice, the "Customize effect" item becomes selected, as shown in FIG. 118(b), and when the effect button 17 is operated in this state, the As shown in 118(c), effect customization is determined and menu image MG changes to effect customization image KG. The production customization image KG has two settings: "Normal setting" in which the appearance frequency of various productions (continuous preview production, icon change production, timer production, role material notice at the start of fluctuation, etc.) is normal, and a "normal setting" in which the frequency of appearance of various productions is low. The "simple setting" item is set, the currently selected item is displayed in bright color, the currently unselected item is displayed in dark color, and the item can be selected using the cross key 19.

Then, when the production button 17 is operated with the "Normal Setting" item selected, the confirmation text "Normal Setting (Normal Mode) has been set" appears as shown in Figure 118(d). Is displayed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, the menu image MG is redisplayed as shown in FIG. 118(e).

In this way, it is possible to set the frequency of appearance of various effects (continuous notice effect, icon change effect, timer effect, role material notice at the start of change, etc.) by operating the effect button 17 or cross key 19 while waiting for a customer. (customizable). Therefore, the player can make his or her favorite settings, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Specific example when variable performance starts from customer waiting state)
A specific example of when a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state will be explained using FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG. 119 is a timing chart in which the variable performance is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 120(a) to (f) and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance corresponding to.

First, the timing T0 is the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(a), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are in a stopped display state. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the reservation icon and the icon TI are not displayed. .

The timing of T1 is the timing when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (4th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, a non-animated increase display of the first special figure reservation number and a non-animation increase display of the first reservation icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first occurrence, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, is performed. The output of the notification sound starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". ", and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display section 70B1. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a first occurrence notification sound (picot).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved special symbols (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) based on the normal variable pattern starts (start of customer waiting state). 5th frame). At this timing, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, and the first pending icon is displayed as an animated change (decrease display). Begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". ”, and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display section 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Moreover, the special symbol TZ starts scrolling at the same time that the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) in a state where it is not scrolled (updated to another performance symbol).

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the output of the first notification sound starts (the 14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 continues to be moved (shifted) to the icon display area 70C, and the effect is The reduced display (preparation operation) of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame after the change display (decreasing display) of the first hold icon starts (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 that has been moved from the first display section 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and When the icon becomes TI, the reduced display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the center variable display Scroll (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the center variable display area, the right variable display Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started, and the effect pattern 70a is in a scrolling state in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the 225th frame from the start of the variable effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(h), in the first image display device 70, the "3" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the left variable display area, and The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the center and right side variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(i), in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the right variable display area, and The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(j), in the first image display device 70, the "6" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and the result is a loss. A state is reached in which a combination of effect patterns 70a indicating a certain thing is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been temporarily stopped in the left center right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is displayed as a effect. It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special drawings increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the number of reserved numbers and the non-animated increase of the reserved icon will be displayed for the shortest time, 1 frame. Since it ends in a period (hour) of minutes, it is possible to immediately shift to a variable effect (displaying a decrease in the pending number and displaying a change in the pending icon) to avoid delays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending digits and the pending icon is a frame after the timing (frame update) at which the increasing display of the pending digits and the pending icon ends (frame update). Since this continues until the update timing, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special drawings decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), a non-animated reduction display of the reserved number and an animated change display of the reserved icon to the corresponding icon are performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the display of the decrease in the number of pending numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed (frame update), the special figure is pending. While presenting the effect that the number changes, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased due to the reserved numbers, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed, the effect pattern will not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern will be changed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling (updating to the next effect symbol) starts, it becomes easier to understand the progress of the game, in which the variable effect starts after the pending memory decreases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of special drawings on hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, instead of displaying an increase in the number of hold icons without animation, it is displayed instead of increasing the number on hold. The animation may be executed over multiple frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand the increase in the number of reserved special drawings, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the display of a decrease in the pending number and the display of the change of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (decrease display) at the same timing (frame update), the display of the decrease in the pending number is completed (frame update). You can start either one first, if it's faster. By doing this, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has decreased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the scrolling of the effect symbols (updating to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), the change display of the pending icon is It may be possible to start scrolling (updating to the next effect pattern) of the effect pattern at a timing slightly before completion (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during variable performance)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during a variable performance will be explained using FIGS. 122 and 123. FIG. 122 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance, and FIGS. 123(a) to 123(c) are diagrams showing performance examples corresponding to (a) to (c) in FIG. 122.

First, the timing T1 is the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the corresponding icon (white icon) TI is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number and the animated increasing display of the first pending icon are started, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, is started. Ru.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". '', and the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display section 70B1, and enlarged display starts. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a first occurrence notification sound (picot).

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (70th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 is finished, and the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special drawings on hold increases, the number on hold is displayed non-animated and the number on hold is displayed as an animation. This makes it possible to make the game more interesting.

In addition, the number of reserved special drawings changes because the timing at which the increase in the number of pending numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase in the number of pending icons is completed (frame update). While presenting this effect, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has increased based on the reserved numbers, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Additionally, if the number of special drawings on hold increases during the execution of a variable effect, the increased display of the holding icon will be executed for a longer period of time compared to the case where the number of special drawings on hold increases while waiting for a customer. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special figures has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon ends in synchronization with the timing when the increasing display of the pending icon ends (frame update), the special figure pending It is possible to effectively represent the increase in the number of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons (10 frames) is shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons (20 frames), so it is easy to know that the variable effect will start. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending digits and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing for the increasing display of the pending digits to complete (frame updating) is earlier, which one? may be started first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special drawings has increased, while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, instead of making the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons, the period for displaying an increasing number of pending icons may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special drawings has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, instead of making the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons, both periods may be made to have the same length.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be explained using FIGS. 124 and 125. FIG. 124 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 125(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 124.

First, the timing T0 is the fifth frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(a), on the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of "4", "6", "8" indicating a loss, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state. It becomes. Further, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, a first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display section 70B2, and the icon TI is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) based on the normal variation pattern is started (the 20th frame after the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, the first pending icon is displayed as an animated change to the corresponding icon, and the first pending icon is displayed as a non-animated change. Animated display of decrease starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". ”. Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display section 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 that was displayed on the second display section 70B2 1 hold icon (white icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display section 70B1. Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the production symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the first pending icon is changing and decreasing, the first pending icon is increasing and the icon The output of the occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound at the time of occurrence, is put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the reduced display (preparatory action) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 20th frame after the change display of the first pending icon and the start of the decrease display (40th frame after the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first pending icon end. Further, the animation of the first pending icon that has been on standby starts to be displayed in increasing numbers, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 that has moved from the first display section 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and the first pending icon H11 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. When the icon becomes TI, the first pending icon H12 that has moved from the second display section 70B2 is located at the center of the first display section 70B1, and the reduced display (preparation operation) of the performance symbol 70a stops. Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display section 70B2 and starts to be enlarged, and at the same time, the output of the first occurrence notification sound (picot) from the audio output device 9 is started. Ru.

The timing of T4 is the 5th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (45th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increasing number of the first hold icons and the output of the first occurrence notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display section 70B2, and the enlarged display continues. At the same time, the output of the first occurrence notification sound (pico) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the 10th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (50th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 is finished, and the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special drawings on hold increases while displaying a change in the pending icon to the corresponding icon and displaying a decrease in the number of pending icons, this change display and decrease display will be completed. (Frame update) Even before the timing, the number on hold will start to increase, so even if the number on hold icon is changing and displaying a decrease, the player will be able to see that the number on hold has increased. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special drawings on hold increases while displaying a change in the hold icon to the corresponding icon and displaying a decrease in the number of hold icons, the display of an increase in the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound will be on standby ( (restriction), and at the timing when the change display and decrease display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started, so the change in the number of special drawings held It is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to grasp, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon that is executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. Good too.

In addition, instead of starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons and outputting the occurrence notification sound at the timing when the display of the pending icon changes and decreasing display is completed (frame update), (the start is delayed from normal), The increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started at a timing (frame update) slightly before the changing display of the pending icon and the decreasing display are completed (frame update). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the change in the number of reserved special drawings from becoming difficult to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special drawings on hold increases while the number of hold icons is increasing, the display of the number of hold icons will increase and the output of the occurrence notification sound will be on standby in the same way as when the number of hold icons is changing or decreasing. On the other hand, it is sufficient to start displaying an increasing number of pending digits, and to start displaying an increasing number of pending icons and outputting an occurrence notification sound at the timing when displaying an increasing number of pending icons is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect will be explained using FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect, and FIGS. 127(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 126. .

First, the timing T1 is the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the center variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Furthermore, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, and the icon (white icon) TI is also displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development performance for developing into the SP reach performance is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect pattern 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed on the screen. The movement to the upper left and the reduced display are started, and the effect pattern 70a changes to a simple display mode in which only the numbers are enlarged.

The timing of T3 is the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development performance for developing into the SP reach performance is continuing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(b), in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the "5" effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and The scrolling performance pattern 70a is displayed at a position close to the upper left of the screen, and is also displayed in a smaller size than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, while the development performance ends, the SP reach performance starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a in the variable display area at the center left is displayed in a reduced size at the top left of the screen, and at the center of the screen A confrontation performance in which an ally character C2 and an enemy character C3 confront each other begins. In addition, the pending icons (here, (only the first hold icon) is hidden together with the hold icon display area.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (820th frame after the start of the variable production). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the SP reach effect (showdown effect) is being executed, the first pending icon increases and the icon occurs at this timing. The output of the occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound of the time, will not be performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(d), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the final performance of the showdown performance (a decisive performance to notify whether or not it is a jackpot) is executed.

The timing of T6 is the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final performance (decisive performance) of the confrontation performance is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(e), on the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 defeats the enemy character C3, and the effect pattern 70a that is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is displayed. The game will temporarily stop (it will be in an oscillating state) at the combination ("555") that indicates a jackpot.

The timing of T7 is the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the first pending icon is returned to the non-animated state and is displayed in an increased manner.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (in a swaying state). become). Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display section 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in normal size on the second display section 70B2.

Then, the effect pattern 70a, which had been temporarily stopped in the left-center right variable display area, returns to the display mode consisting of characters and numbers, and finally, the effect pattern 70a stops displaying, and the special pattern TZ It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "555" as the production pattern 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of a specific production (SP reach production), even before the timing when this specific production ends (frame update), the number of pending numbers will increase. Since the increase display starts, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special drawings increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), the execution of the increase display of the pending icon is put on standby (restricted), and the specific performance ends (the display is reduced). Since the number of pending icons starts to be displayed at the same time as the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (frame updated), it is possible to prevent the change in the number of reserved special symbols from becoming difficult to grasp, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, when starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons at the timing when a specific performance (SP reach performance) ends, the number of pending icons is increased by non-animation that can be completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of reserved special drawings increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of displaying an increased number of pending icons and the timing of displaying an increased number of pending icons, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of pending icons at the timing when a specific performance (SP reach performance) ends, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbols on hold increases at the timing when the specific performance ends due to the occurrence notification sound. This makes it difficult for players to misunderstand that they have played the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special drawings on hold increases multiple times during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), while displaying an increase in the number of reservations, the system waits for the display of an increase on the reservation icon to be executed (restriction). It is preferable to display the increased number of pending icons in one frame at the timing when the specific effect is finished (frame update).

In addition, if the number of special symbols on hold increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), instead of not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the number of reservations. Good too.

Moreover, although the SP reach-to-reach performance has been illustrated as the specific performance, the specific performance may include the SPSP reach-to-reach performance or may include the full-rotation reach-to-reach performance.

(Specific example of when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state will be explained using FIGS. 128 to 130. FIG. 128 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state, and FIGS. 129(a) to (f) and FIGS. 130(g) to (i) are shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance corresponding to (i).

First, the timing T1 is the 400th frame after the last (100th) variable performance in the specific gaming state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(a), "1" is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. ing. In addition, the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, and second pending icons (white icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively. and the icon TI is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable effects that can be performed in a specific gaming state (here, "0 times remaining") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, the game ball is displayed toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU is displayed that encourages firing.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (415th frame after the start of the variable production). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the notification sound when the icon occurs Therefore, the output of the occurrence notification sound will not be performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 430th frame after the start of the variable effect. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left-center-right variable display area temporarily stop at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area at the center left, and A state is reached in which a combination of performance symbols 70a indicating a loss is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the 15th frame after the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops (445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display is started showing the results of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG becomes dark, and "Special Time End" indicating the end of the specific gaming state and a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. The characters "Jackpot x 1" are displayed, indicating the number of jackpot games played during the game. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the 15th frame after the start of the result display (460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(e), the first image display device 70 displays the words "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period. Additional information will be displayed.

The timing of T6 is the 30th frame after the start of the result display (475th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is stopped, and the special pattern TZ It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing when the last (100th) variable performance in the specific gaming state ends and the first variable performance in the normal gaming state starts (490th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the second pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, the first pending icon is returned to a non-animated display, and the first pending icon is increased in a non-animated manner. Display starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reservation number in the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3", and the second reservation number changes from "4" to "3". The second pending icon display area 70D is hidden together with the pending icon, and the first pending icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the pending icon.

Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. Further, a left-handed hitting image HU is displayed at the upper left of the screen, which prompts the user to shoot the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon (510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, as shown in FIG. 130(h), in the first image display device 70, the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect pattern 70a is stopped.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame after the end of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon (520th frame from the start of the previous fluctuating effect). At this timing, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in the center variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

In this way, when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during a specific gaming state, while waiting (restricting) the increasing display of the first pending icon, the increasing display of the first special figure pending number is Therefore, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of a specific performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during a specific gaming state, an increase in the first pending icon will be displayed at the timing when the specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends (frame update). Even if you miss the display of an increase in the number of reserved first special drawings that was executed before, you can recognize that the number of reserved first special drawings has increased, increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of first pending icons at the timing when a specific gaming state (the last variable effect in) ends, the number of pending icons is increased by non-animation that can be completed in one frame, so the special figure pending Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing at which the number increases and the timing at which the display of an increased number of pending icons is executed, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of pending icons at the timing when a specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the special image is displayed at the timing when the specific gaming state ends due to the occurrence notification sound. It becomes difficult to mislead the player into thinking that the number of reservations has increased, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed, the effect pattern will not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern will be changed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling (updating to the next performance symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the performance during the variable performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of first special figures on hold increases by multiple numbers during a specific gaming state, while displaying an increase in the number of pending numbers, the display of an increase in the number of pending icons is on standby (restricted). It is only necessary to display an increase in the number of pending icons in one frame at the timing when the specific game state (the last variable effect) ends (frame update).

Further, when the number of first special symbols on hold increases during a specific gaming state, instead of not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound may be output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the number on hold.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the first pending icon display area 70B is set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, the second pending icon display area 70D is not set (displayed), and in the specific gaming state, the first pending icon display area 70B is set (displayed). While the hold icon display area 70B was not set (displayed), the second hold icon display area 70B was set (displayed), but now the second hold icon display area 70D is set (displayed) in the normal gaming state. Alternatively, the first pending icon display area 70B may be set (displayed) in a specific gaming state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is being executed during the variable performance. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of a specific effect, or the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of a specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reserved number display area 70E and the second special figure reserved number display area 70F were set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but the second image display device 71 It may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display different from the image display device (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.). If a dedicated LED is used, the number of reserved special symbols may be displayed by the lighting color and lighting/blinking mode of the LED.

(Example of performance when the player changes the performance element during the first variable performance in a specific game state)
With reference to FIG. 131, an example of a performance in which a player changes a performance element (here, a volume value) during the first variable performance in a specific game state will be described.
In addition, here, an example is shown in which the specific game state is a variable probability game state, but the same is basically true in the case of a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state).

First, as shown in FIG. 131(a), on the first image display device 70, the production symbol 70a of "285" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped display state. When a game ball enters the first start opening 45 in this state, the first special figure reservation number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific gaming state, the first pending icon is not displayed, and any generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9. Never.

When the first variable performance is started from this state with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to " 0", but the shift display (decreasing display) of the hold icon is not performed, the production symbol 70a starts to display a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the current volume value "4" is changed to "0". BGM is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to "."

Further, in the specific game state, a left-handed hit error notification based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 is carried out over a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed hitting error image HUE that suggests firing a game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a larger size than the right-handed hitting image MU, and the audio output device From 9, a left-handed hitting error voice saying "Please hit right-handed" is output.

Note that in a specific gaming state, the left-handed hit error is not notified when one game ball enters the first starting port 45, but when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls enter the first starting port 45. A left-handed hitting error may be notified based on this.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the second special figure reservation number (U2) becomes "1", a generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9, and the second special figure is reserved. The number display area 70F becomes "1". Further, a hold icon H21 (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the second hold icon display area 70B.

Note that the left-handed hit error notification may be terminated at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 47, and in this case, the left-handed hit error image HUE is erased before the left-handed hit error sound. Alternatively, the left-handed player error sound may be deleted before the left-handed player error image HUE.

After that, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 131(c), the volume value image OG shows the current volume value "4" without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating. is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value of the effect sound increases by +1 without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 131(d). The BGM that is updated and currently being output is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and a stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. 131(e), the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a losing number of "379". At the same time, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the loss of "379". Further, the volume value image OG is erased in response to the stop display of the effect pattern 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first variable effect ends, and the second variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 131(f) As shown in , the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and the second reservation icon (white The icon) H21 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the production pattern 70a starts to display a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the volume ( BGM continues to be output in the performance element).

Here, an example was shown in which the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume value during the first variation performance in a specific game state, but the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value. The same is basically true for cases as well.

Also, when the left button or right button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase or decrease the light amount value during the first variation performance in a specific game state, the light amount value is not displayed as the volume value image OG by the operation of the cross key 19. It is basically the same except that an image is displayed and the light amount of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76, image display device, etc.) changes in accordance with the increase/decrease in the light amount value.

In addition, if the second variable performance is executed after the first variable performance in a specific game state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the first variable performance to change the performance mode, the background The image is changed to a background image according to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM according to the changed performance mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the first variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed from the start of the next second variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Furthermore, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in a specific game state, even if the performance mode is changed, the display manner of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is not changed, but the display manner of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ may not be changed.

Also, in the case where the second variable performance is executed after the first variable performance in the normal gaming state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the first variable performance and the performance mode is changed, The background image is changed to a background image according to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM according to the changed performance mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the first variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed from the start of the next second variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Furthermore, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in the normal game state, when the performance mode is changed, the display mode of the performance symbol 70a is changed, but the display mode of the special symbol TZ is not changed.

As described above, according to the production example shown in FIG. 131, by operating various operation sections (production button 17, cross key 19) during execution of the first variable production in a specific game state, the second variable production to be executed next It is possible to change the performance elements (volume value, light amount value, performance mode, etc.) used in the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player and to increase the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 131, even if a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 during a specific game state in which the first hold icon is not displayed, the occurrence notification sound (winning sound) is not output. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is confused due to only the occurrence notification sound being output even though the first hold icon is not displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 131, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the specific game state, if the normal icon (white icon) is displayed, the generation notification sound ( If a special icon is displayed without a winning sound (winning sound) being output, a notification sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is fed up with the generated notification sound in a specific game state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that at the start of the first variation performance, the pending icon is not shifted and displayed, but the icon is not displayed, but the pending icon may be displayed instead of being shifted. .

(Example of performance when the player changes the performance element during the second variable performance in a specific game state)
With reference to FIG. 132, an example of a performance when the player changes the performance element during the second variable performance in a specific game state will be described.
Here, an example is shown in which the specific game state is a variable probability game state, but the same is basically true for the time-saving game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 132(a), on the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped display state. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in this state, the second special figure reservation number (U2) becomes "1", the second special figure reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", and the second reservation icon A hold icon H21 (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the display area 70B. Note that even if a game ball wins in the second starting port 47 during the specific gaming state, a white icon is displayed, so no notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9 (a special icon is displayed) (If this occurs, an alarm sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output.)

When the second variable performance is started from this state with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to " 0'', and the second pending icon (white icon) H21 displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the second pending icon display area 70D starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), the special pattern TZ starts to scroll, and BGM is outputted from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to the current volume value "4".

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45, the first special figure reservation number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific gaming state, the first pending icon is not displayed, and any generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9. Never.

Further, in the specific game state, a left-handed hit error notification based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 is carried out over a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed hitting error image HUE that suggests firing a game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a larger size than the right-handed hitting image MU, and the audio output device From 9, a left-handed hitting error voice saying "Please hit right-handed" is output.

Note that in a specific gaming state, the left-handed hit error is not notified when one game ball enters the first starting port 45, but when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls enter the first starting port 45. A left-handed hitting error may be notified based on this. Furthermore, the left-handed hitting error notification may be terminated at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 47. In this case, the left-handed hitting error image HUE is erased before the left-handed hitting error sound. Alternatively, the left-handed player error sound may be deleted before the left-handed player error image HUE.

After that, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 132(c), the volume value image OG shows the current volume value "4" without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating. is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value of the effect sound increases by +1 without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 132(d). The BGM that is updated and currently being output is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the variable time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. 132(e), the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a losing number of "379". At the same time, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the loss of "379". Further, the volume value image OG is erased in response to the stop display of the effect pattern 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the second variable effect ends, and the first variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 132(f) As shown in , the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", but the shift display (decrease display) of the reservation icon is not performed, and the production symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation). At the same time, the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the BGM continues to be output at the volume (performance element) according to the volume value "5" that was adjusted (changed) during the previous second variation performance. .

Here, an example was shown in which the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume value during the first variation performance in a specific game state, but the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value. The same is basically true for cases as well.

Also, when the left button or right button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase or decrease the light amount value during the first variation performance in a specific game state, the light amount value is not displayed as the volume value image OG by the operation of the cross key 19. It is basically the same except that an image is displayed and the light amount of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76, image display device, etc.) changes in accordance with the increase/decrease in the light amount value.

In addition, if the first variable performance is executed after the second variable performance in a specific game state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the second variable performance to change the performance mode, the background The image is changed to a background image according to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM according to the changed performance mode. However, the period during which the performance mode can be changed during the second variable performance (only during the pre-reach performance) is shorter than the period during which the volume value and the light amount value can be changed (other than when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops).

In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the second variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed from the start of the next first variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Furthermore, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in a specific game state, even if the performance mode is changed, the display manner of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is not changed, but the display manner of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ may not be changed.

Also, in the case where the first variable performance is executed after the second variable performance in the normal gaming state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the second variable performance and the performance mode is changed, The background image is changed to a background image according to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM according to the changed performance mode. However, the period during which the performance mode can be changed during the second variable performance (only during the pre-reach performance) is shorter than the period during which the volume value and the light amount value can be changed (other than when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops).

In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the second variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed from the start of the next first variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Furthermore, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in the normal game state, when the performance mode is changed, the display mode of the performance symbol 70a is changed, but the display mode of the special symbol TZ is not changed.

As described above, according to the production example shown in FIG. 132, the operation of the various operation parts (production button 17, cross key 19) during the execution of the second variable production in a specific game state causes the first variable production to be executed next. It is possible to change the performance elements (volume value, light amount value, performance mode, etc.) used in the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player and to increase the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 132, even if a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 during a specific game state in which the first hold icon is not displayed, the occurrence notification sound (winning sound) is not output. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is confused due to only the occurrence notification sound being output even though the first hold icon is not displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 132, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the specific game state, if the normal icon (white icon) is displayed, the generation notification sound ( If a special icon is displayed without a winning sound (winning sound) being output, a notification sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is fed up with the generated notification sound in a specific game state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that at the start of the first variation performance, the pending icon is not shifted and displayed, but the icon is not displayed, but the pending icon may be displayed instead of being shifted. .

(Example of performance when pre-reading action performance and step-up notice performance are executed)
An example of a performance when a prefetch action performance and a step-up notice performance are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134.

First, as shown in FIG. 133(a), on the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "468" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped state. Further, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the variation effect (corresponding to advance variation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 133(b), the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2", The two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the first performance of the look-ahead motion performance that spans three variable performances is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion sound effect. be done.

Thereafter, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon (the left end in the figure) that is the target of the prefetch action effect changes to a blue icon, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 133(c). (Preparation operation) is completed, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position and the first performance of the pre-reading action performance is completed. In addition, the prize opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and a lamp change effect is started.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 133(d), the production pattern 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "365", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production symbol has elapsed and the next variable production (corresponding to the preliminary variation) is started, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is set to "2" as shown in FIG. 133(e). to "1", and the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the second performance of the look-ahead motion performance is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the look-ahead motion performance, the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion sound effect. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon that is the preview target of the look-ahead motion performance changes to a red icon, the reduced display (preparation motion) of the performance symbol 70a is displayed as shown in FIG. 133(f). After finishing, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the second performance of the look-ahead motion performance is completed. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect continues.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 134(g), the production pattern 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "635", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance symbol has elapsed and the fluctuation performance (corresponding to the fluctuation) that is the subject of advance notice of the look-ahead motion performance is started, as shown in FIG. 134(h), the number of reserved special symbols is displayed. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the third performance of the look-ahead motion performance is started. Specifically, as a strong preview of the look-ahead motion performance, the second movable member 74 emits red light, performs a strong motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a strong motion sound effect. be done.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 134(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a ends, the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size starts, and then The second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the third performance of the pre-reading motion performance is completed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the performance symbol 70a, the first step performance of the step-up preview performance is started, as shown in FIG. 134(j). Specifically, the first step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the first step sound effect is output. After that, the second to fourth step effects are sequentially executed.

Furthermore, when the fourth step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 134(k), the fifth step effect is started, the fifth step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the fifth step sound effect is is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second while the effect button 17 remains off. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) at the time of the game is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

When one second passes, as shown in FIG. 134(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends, and two seconds after that, the fifth step effect ends. After that, according to the variable performance pattern, the SP ready-to-reach performance is executed after the normal ready-to-reach performance is performed, or the SPSP ready-to-reach performance is performed after the normal reach performance is performed.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, after the number of reserved special symbols displayed in the special symbol reserved number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (the production pattern 70a starts the preparation operation). The pre-reading operation effect (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started before the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 70a is started. Therefore, while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the pre-read motion performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable effect, but before the movement of the pending icon is completed, the look-ahead motion effect is performed. (Light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the pre-read motion performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, the vibration production is not performed during the first to fourth step production of the step-up notice production, but the vibration production is performed during the fifth step production, which has the highest expectation level. It is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production performed during the 5th step production is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the 5th step production of the step-up notice production. seconds) is shorter. Therefore, the vibration effect does not surpass the appearance of the fifth step effect, and it is possible to improve the effect of the step-up notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, since the vibration production executed during the fifth step production does not involve the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image ( The sound effect when displaying the opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effect, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) are no longer output. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, even during the vibration effect of the effect button 17, the effect light emission and lamp change effects by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue. Therefore, by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the effect light emission or lamp change effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect can be maintained and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the fifth step production in the step-up notice production, but the production button 17 can be held in a predetermined mode (for confirmation of jackpot) during the execution period of the vibration production. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the rainbow color that is the emitted light color, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.). In this way, it becomes easier to understand that the vibration effect is being executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during a vibration effect that does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, it is possible to draw attention to the effect button 17 by the lighting mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emitting light toward the effect button 17, etc.). It may also be possible to emit light for a dramatic effect.

(Example of production when pre-reading vibration production and dialogue preview production are executed)
An example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

First, as shown in FIG. 135(a), on the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "468" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped state. Further, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the fluctuation performance (corresponding to advance fluctuation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 135(b), the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2", The two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the first performance of the pre-reading vibration performance that spans three variable performances is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the pre-read vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the effect button 17 flashes white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues.

Thereafter, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon (left end in the figure) that is the preview target of the pre-read vibration effect changes to a blue icon, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 135(c). (Preparation operation) is completed, a scroll display in normal size (high-speed fluctuation) is started, and then the weak vibration and white blinking of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the first performance of the pre-read vibration performance is completed. In addition, the prize opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and a lamp change effect is started.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 135(d), the effect pattern 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "365", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production symbol has elapsed and the next variable production (corresponding to advance variation) is started, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is set to "2" as shown in FIG. 135(e). to "1", and the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the second performance of the pre-read vibration performance is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the pre-read vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the effect button 17 flashes white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon that is the preview target of the pre-reading vibration effect changes to a red icon, the reduced display (preparatory action) of the effect pattern 70a is displayed as shown in FIG. 135(f). After the end, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, and then the weak vibration and white blinking of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the second performance of the pre-reading vibration performance is completed. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect continues.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 136(g), the production pattern 70a stops displaying at the losing number of "635", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying at the losing number of "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance symbol has elapsed and the fluctuation performance (corresponding to the fluctuation) that is the subject of advance notice of the pre-read vibration performance is started, as shown in FIG. 136(h), the number of reserved special symbols is displayed. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the third performance of the pre-reading vibration performance is started. Specifically, as a strong preview of the pre-read vibration performance, the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds, and the performance button 17 flashes in red for 3 seconds. However, since the execution of this strong vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the sound effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 136(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a ends and the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) starts, but the pre-reading vibration effect The strong warning will remain in place. Thereafter, the strong vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the third performance of the pre-read vibration performance is completed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the third performance of the pre-reading vibration performance is completed, as shown in FIG. 136(j), the valid period of the performance button 17 (single press 3 seconds) occurs and the dialogue preview performance starts. be done. Specifically, an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed in the dialogue window image SW, and the operation promotion image SG is At the same time as the display sound effect is output, the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the heat line "What is this!? It's hot!!" is displayed in red letters, as shown in FIG. 136(k). , a sound (direction sound) corresponding to the heated dialogue is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second while the effect button 17 is turned off, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and The lamp change performance continues.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 136(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, a pseudo continuous effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, a normal reach effect is executed, an SP reach effect is executed after a normal reach effect, or an SP SP reach effect is executed after a normal reach effect. It will be executed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, after the number of reserved symbols displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (the production pattern 70a performs the preparation operation). The pre-reading vibration effect (vibration of the effect button 17, flashing white) is started before the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation). Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the pre-reading vibration production is performed after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production, but before the movement of the pending icon is completed. (Vibration of production button 17, flashing white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, when the pre-reading vibration effect is executed, the effect button 17 is made to flash white, although the effect period of the effect button 17 is not accompanied. Therefore, even when the performance button 17 is not operated, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the lighting mode of the production button 17 in the pre-reading vibration production is different from that of the preview production (line preview production, pseudo continuous production, development production, cut-in production) with the occurrence of the validity period. This is different from the lighting mode of the performance button 17 during the valid period in (performance, fixed performance, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of causing the player to misunderstand that the effective period of the performance button 17 has expired in the pre-read vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) is not executed until the pre-read vibration performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to notice due to the pre-ready notice performance that a pre-read vibration performance that is difficult to judge visually is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed until the pre-reading vibration effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to notice that a pre-reading vibration performance that is difficult to judge visually is being executed due to the pseudo-continuous performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration performance executed during the dialogue preview performance is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue preview performance. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the dialogue preview performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the dialogue preview performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the vibration effect executed during the pre-reading vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque The display sound effect when displaying the production button image, gauge image) and the production sound when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effect, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) are no longer output. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the vibration production performed during the speech preview production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque production) A display sound effect when displaying a button image, a gauge image) and a production sound (operation sound effect, dialogue voice, etc.) when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the dialogue preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the speech preview production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the timing of the operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, even during the vibration production accompanied by the validity period of the production button 17, the production light emission and lamp change production by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue. There is. Therefore, by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the effect light emission or lamp change effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect can be maintained and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production that is executed during the dialogue preview production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) for the duration of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

Furthermore, regarding the vibration performance that is executed during the dialogue preview performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 0.5 seconds after (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, during a vibration effect that does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, it is possible to draw attention to the effect button 17 by the lighting mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emitting light toward the effect button 17, etc.). It may also be possible to emit light for a dramatic effect.

(Example of performance when pseudo continuous performance is executed before reach performance)
With reference to FIG. 137, an example of a performance in a case where a pseudo-continuous performance (a staged performance accompanying a pseudo-continuous performance without straddling the ready-to-reach performance) is executed before a ready-to-reach performance will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 137(a), in the first image display device 70, a "6" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area, a "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the right area, In the middle area, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues. At this time, the pseudo consecutive success performance is started without the validity period of the performance button 17 occurring. Specifically, an inciting effect is executed in the middle region to incite whether or not a pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo continuous effect will be temporarily stopped. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when the inciting effect ends, the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area and a success sound effect is output, as shown in FIG. 137(b). Further, as shown in FIG. 137(c), the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak movement of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again. “×2” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations (the progress of the production stage) is displayed in blue. Furthermore, the first stage performance (movie of the first episode of the story) of the stage performances executed in conjunction with the pseudo continuous performance is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 137(d), in the first image display device 70, the "6" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the "5" effect pattern is temporarily stopped in the right area. 70a is temporarily stopped, the fluctuating display of the performance pattern 70a continues in the middle area, and a pseudo-inciting performance is executed in the medium area to incite whether or not the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo series is temporarily stopped. At this time, the validity period of the production button 17 occurs, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and the operation promotion image SG is displayed. The display sound effect of the promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 137(e), the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle area as a pseudo continuous success effect, and a success sound effect is output. . In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 137(f), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light and makes a strong movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo changes (the stage of the effect progresses). "x3" indicating the action) is displayed in red. Furthermore, the second stage performance (movie of the second episode of the story) of the stage performances performed in conjunction with the pseudo-continuous performance is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

After that, when the strong operation time (1 second) of the second movable member 74 has elapsed, the pseudo consecutive success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. is temporarily stopped and a normal reach effect is executed, and then, depending on the variable effect pattern, a normal reach effect is executed and then an SP reach effect is executed, or a normal reach effect is executed and then an SP SP reach effect is executed. It turns out.

(Example of a performance when a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a reach performance)
With reference to FIG. 138, an example of a performance in a case where a pseudo-continuous performance (a staged performance accompanying the pseudo-continuous performance across the ready-to-reach performance) is executed after the ready-to-reach performance will be described. Note that FIGS. 138(a) to 138(c) are the same as FIGS. 137(a) to 137(c), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 138(c), as shown in FIG. 138(d), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138(e), when the pseudo-continuation effect is started, a pseudo-inciting effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo-symbols suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuation will temporarily stop in the middle area. At this time, the validity period of the production button 17 occurs, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and the production promotion image SG is displayed. Button 17 emits white light. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 138(f), the pseudo symbols are temporarily stopped in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success sound effect is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends, as shown in FIG. 138(g). In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light and makes a strong movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo changes (the stage of the effect progresses). ``x3'' indicating what has been done) is displayed in red. Furthermore, the second stage performance (movie of the second episode of the story) of the stage performances performed in conjunction with the pseudo-continuous performance is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 138(h), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed, and thereafter, according to the variable effect pattern. After the normal reach effect is executed, the SP reach effect is executed, or after the normal reach effect is executed, the SPSP reach effect is executed.

As described above, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the vibration effect can be executed when the pseudo continuous effect is executed when the effective period of the effect button 17 occurs in the pseudo continuous effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production performed during the pseudo consecutive success production is longer than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo consecutive success production. It's shorter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive success performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the pseudo consecutive success performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, since the vibration production executed during the pseudo-continuous production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production Display sound effects when displaying a button image, gauge image) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, success sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo continuous performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the execution period of the vibration production executed in the pseudo-sequence production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the timing of the operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, in the case where the pseudo-continuous production is executed after the ready-to-reach production, the type of production symbol that forms the ready-to-win state after the execution of the pseudo-continuous production is the pseudo-continuous production. Downgrade from the type of production symbol that formed the reach state before execution (downgrade from reach with odd numbered symbols to reach with even numbered symbols, reach from reach with "7" symbol to reach with even numbered symbols or odd numbered symbols other than "7") (downgrade to 1). Therefore, the player will not feel dissatisfied with the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance, and the interest in the game will not be improved.

Further, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, in a fluctuating production in which a pseudo-continuous production is executed, the production can progress in stages according to the pseudo-continuation (temporary stop and re-variation of the production pattern 70a). It is possible to perform stage effects (playback of story episodes 1 to 3 movies). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect when the pseudo continuous performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, there are cases in which the stage production starts before the pseudo series is performed, and cases in which the stage production starts after the pseudo series is performed. It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation where a pseudo consecutive performance is performed after a staged performance has been started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the pseudo continuous production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

In addition, regarding the vibration performance executed during the pseudo continuous performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 0.5 seconds after (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, although the effective period of the effect button 17 is generated during the pseudo continuous effect and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the effective period of the effect button 17 is not generated during the pseudo continuous effect. The vibration effect may be executed, or the effect period of the effect button 17 may be made to occur, but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 139, an example of a performance in a case where the development performance is executed and the SP ready-to-reach performance is executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 139(a), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139(b), when the SP development effect is started, the SPSP development pattern that suggests the development to the SPSP reach effect, the SP development pattern that suggests the development to the SP reach effect, the pseudo continuous effect A roulette performance is performed in which a plurality of special performance symbols, such as a pseudo symbol that suggests the execution of the ``game'' and a waste symbol that suggests that the performance will not develop (a loss), are displayed in a diagonal direction at low speed. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

After that, as shown in FIG. 139(c), an effect is performed in which SPSP development symbols, SP development symbols, pseudo symbols, and waste symbols are displayed in a high-speed variable manner. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 139(d), it is reported that the SP development symbol temporarily stops in the middle area and develops into an SP ready-to-reach effect. In addition, in the roulette performance, the type of special performance symbols that are variably displayed changes depending on the fluctuation performance pattern, so the special performance symbols that are variably displayed (special performance symbols that are not ultimately temporarily stopped and special performance symbols that are temporarily stopped) Depending on the type of performance, it suggests whether or not it will develop into a production with high expectations for jackpots (expectation level for jackpots).

After that, the screen becomes white out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. It will be displayed in a reduced size in the corner and the SP reach effect will start. It should be noted that the icon becomes hidden with the start of the SP reach effect.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SPSP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 140, an example of a performance in a case where the development performance is executed and the SPSP reach performance is executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 140(a), the performance symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach performance is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139(b), when the SPSP development effect is started, the SP development symbol suggests development to SP reach effect, the SPSP development symbol suggests development to SPSP reach effect, and the full rotation reach effect. A roulette performance is performed in which a plurality of special performance symbols, such as full rotation symbols that suggest the development of a performance, are displayed diagonally and at low speed. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

After that, as shown in FIG. 140(c), an effect is performed in which the SP development symbol, the SPSP development symbol, and the full rotation symbol are displayed in a high-speed variable manner, and the operation of the production button 17 may become effective. An effective suggestive performance that suggests that is started. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position at the lower right of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position at the bottom right of the screen, the effective period of the effect button 17 (long press for 4 seconds) occurs, as shown in FIG. An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. , the production button 17 emits red light. Note that the words "long press" are displayed on the opaque effect button image.

After that, when the production button 17 is pressed and held for a long time, a production is performed in which the speed of the variable display of various development symbols is gradually slowed down, and the time of the long press reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or the valid period has passed. Then, as shown in FIG. 140(e), the SPSP development pattern temporarily stops in the middle area, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and moves. be done. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, the screen whites out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 140(f), the effect pattern 70a in the middle area changes again, and the three effect patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen. SPSP reach performance starts. It should be noted that with the start of the SPSP reach effect, the pending icon and the icon are hidden.

In this way, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, depending on the type of special performance symbols (special performance symbols that are not finally temporarily stopped, special performance symbols that are temporarily stopped) that are variably displayed in the roulette performance, , suggests whether or not the performance will develop into a production with high expectations for jackpots (jackpot expectations). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the types of special effect symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, an effective suggestion production may be executed in the development production, thereby increasing the player's expectations for the development of a reach production with high expectations for a jackpot. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the development production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development production. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the development performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the development performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the vibration production performed during the advanced production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). Display sound effects when displaying images (images, gauge images) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, temporary stop sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the development performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the advanced production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. There is. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the advanced production, but the production button 17 can be set in a predetermined mode (other than rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. The light may be emitted in a different color from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.

In addition, the vibration performance that is executed during the development performance will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, from the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated). The vibration effect may be executed until after 0.5 seconds (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, during the development performance, the valid period of the performance button 17 is generated and the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed, but during the development performance, the vibration performance is performed without generating the validity period of the performance button 17. Alternatively, the vibration effect may be generated during the effective period of the effect button 17, but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of performance when cut-in performance is executed during SP reach performance and becomes a jackpot)
With reference to FIGS. 141 and 142, an example of a performance in which a cut-in performance is executed during the SP ready-to-win performance in variable performance pattern 13 and results in a jackpot will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 141(a), the effect symbols 70a in the left and right areas are reduced and displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the SP ready-to-reach effect is being executed. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the SP reach effect reaches its final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. 141(b), an effective suggestion effect appears indicating that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the cut-in effect. Begins. Specifically, an effect is performed in which two translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are brought together from the left and right lower portions of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, the effective period of the effect button 17 (single click 4 seconds) occurs, and the projecting state occurs at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 141(c). An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. At the same time, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the red cut-in effect is started as shown in FIG. 141(d). Specifically, a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a third cut-in sound effect is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for 3 seconds, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After that, when one second passes after the output of the third cut-in sound effect ends, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect end, and as shown in FIG. 141(e), the effect of "5" in the middle area is An effect is performed in which the symbol 70a stops or the effect symbol 70a of "6" stops.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 141(f), it is temporarily stopped with three "5" production symbols 70a aligned (symbols aligned), and the production button 17 is pressed strongly for 4 seconds. At the same time as a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is started, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

After 4 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 142(g), the strong vibration performance ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 continue to emit light in rainbow colors. Further, when one second has elapsed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume emitting light for effect, and the effect button 17 turns off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 142(h), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, when three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the back direction and displayed in a reduced size, and the validity period of the production button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) occurs, An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is displayed. is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a promotion failure effect is started as shown in FIG. 142(i). Specifically, when three of the "5" production symbols 70a, which had been displayed in a reduced size, are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the front of the screen and enlarged, and a non-promoted sound effect is output, but multiple The effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the game board decoration LED continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 142(j), the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the normal size, and the promotion failure performance ends. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 142(k), an eye-catching effect indicating that the effect pattern 70a will be stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Thereafter, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 142(l), and the first special image If there is a pending number, the pending icon will be redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 142(m), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. A right-handed image MU suggesting a right-handed hit is displayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, in the case of a variable performance pattern in which the re-lottery performance is not executed, the process moves to FIG. 142(k) after FIG. 142(g), and the eye-catching performance is executed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, effective suggestion production may be executed in the cut-in production, so in addition to the occurrence of the validity period, there is a high expectation of jackpot. This can be suggested to the player, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in production is the same as the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration production performed during the cut-in production. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the cut-in production. In addition, the vibration effect can suggest to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the vibration production performed during the cut-in production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque production Display sound effects when displaying a button image, gauge image) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, cut-in sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, the effect of the cut-in performance can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, when the production patterns 70a in a display mode that does not include characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (designs aligned), the vibration during the cut-in production Since the strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed for a longer period of time than the performance, it is possible to effectively inform the player that a jackpot has been won, increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, when the production patterns 70a in the display mode including characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (C symbols aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation (vibration effect) is now executed. Therefore, the player can reconfirm that he or she has won the jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration production, jackpot confirmation vibration production, jackpot confirmation vibration production, Vibration effects, opening vibration effects) do not involve the validity period of the production button 17 (display of operation promotion images), so the display sound effects and validity period when displaying operation promotion images (opaque production button images, gauge images) During the operation, the effect sound (operation sound effect, other sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the cut-in production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, when a jackpot occurs as a result of the SP reach production, while the vibration production is executed while the production symbol 70a that becomes the jackpot is temporarily stopped, The vibration effect is not executed during the main stop. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the fluctuating performance is still continuing due to the vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light during the vibration production executed during the cut-in production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the luminous color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

In addition, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the cut-in performance, but if the performance button 17 is operated immediately before or from the start of the validity period, the validity period will expire. Until the elapse of time, some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs may be turned off, and then the effect light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be restarted. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when executing the promotion success effect, multiple game board decoration LEDs and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first, and then the multiple game board decoration LEDs were started simultaneously. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

In addition, when the SP reach effect is executed, the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, and then the effect pattern 70a is stopped. If the SP reach effect results in a loss, perform an eye-catching effect or a effect that returns the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character, and then stop the effect pattern 70a, and if it becomes a jackpot. In this case, the performance pattern 70a may be permanently stopped in the display mode of only numbers without performing an eye-catching performance or a performance of returning the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including characters.

In addition, the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period expires when the effect button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 2 seconds after the start (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, although the vibration effect is executed during the cut-in effect or promotion success effect, it is also possible to execute the vibration effect during the cut-in effect, but not to perform the vibration effect during the promotion success effect. The reverse may be done, or the vibration effect may not be performed during the cut-in effect and promotion success effect.

In addition, the vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a containing only numbers, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character. While the vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped, the vibration effect may not be executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character, or vice versa, or only numbers The vibration effect may not be executed when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped for a jackpot and when the effect pattern 70a including a character is temporarily stopped for a jackpot effect.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect symbol 70a stops displaying (even during the cut-in effect, the winning opening lamp NR corresponds to the display mode of the icon) However, the light may be emitted and turned off in conjunction with the light emitting mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Example 1 of the effect when the decisive effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect and results in a jackpot)
With reference to FIGS. 143 and 144, performance example 1 in which a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance in the variable performance pattern 20 and results in a jackpot will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 143(a), three performance symbols 70a form a ready-to-win state and are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, thereby executing the SPSP ready-to-reach performance. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the SPSP reach performance reaches its final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. Begins. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, the effective period of the effect button 17 (single click 5 seconds) occurs, and a protruding state occurs at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 143(c). An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. At the same time, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a success performance is started as shown in FIG. 143(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after strongly vibrating the production button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between, and at the top left of the screen. It temporarily stops when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the winning success effect and strong vibration effect are completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect buttons 17 are displayed in rainbow colors, as shown in FIG. A celebration performance will begin to celebrate the jackpot while the light continues to emit light. Then, when the blessing performance ends, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restarts the performance light emission, and the performance button 17 turns off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 143(f), a temporary stop is made when the three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned (designs are aligned), and a strong vibration production (which makes the production button 17 vibrate strongly for 4 seconds) is performed. At the same time as the jackpot confirmation vibration performance is started, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

After 4 seconds have elapsed, the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit light in rainbow colors. Further, when one second has elapsed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume emitting light for effect, and the effect button 17 turns off.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144(g), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, when three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the back direction and displayed in a reduced size, and the validity period of the production button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) occurs, An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is displayed. is output, and the production button emits red light.

Thereafter, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a promotion success performance is started as shown in FIG. 144(h). Specifically, the "7" production symbol 70a, which has been switched from the "5" production symbol 70a that had been displayed in a reduced size, is moved to the front of the screen in a state where three of the "7" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs are aligned) and is enlarged and displayed. , a promotion sound effect is output. Further, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors, and a strong vibration performance (promotion vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for 3 seconds is started.

Then, when the strong vibration effect ends and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at the normal size, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs will emit effect light (other than rainbow light). At the same time, the effect button 17 turns off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed, as shown in FIG. 144(j). Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Thereafter, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 144(k), and the icon is displayed again. At the same time, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 144(l), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "777", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "777".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without any accompanying movement is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the first round game is started.

(Example 2 of the performance when the decisive performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and it becomes a jackpot)
With reference to FIGS. 145 and 146, performance example 2 will be described in which a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance in the variable performance pattern 16 and a jackpot is achieved. Note that FIGS. 145(a) to 145(c) are the same as FIGS. 143(a) to 143(c), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

When the production button 17 is operated from the state shown in FIG. 145(c) or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 145(d), a state where three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (symbols aligned) A temporary stop is performed at , and a jackpot is notified by the performance symbol 70a, but no strong vibration performance is performed at this point. At this time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board illumination device) continue to emit light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, a success effect is started as shown in FIG. 145(e). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after strongly vibrating the production button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between. It temporarily stops when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the winning success effect and strong vibration effect are completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are displayed in rainbow colors, as shown in FIG. A celebration performance will begin to celebrate the jackpot while the light continues to emit light. Then, when the blessing performance ends, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restarts the performance light emission, and the performance button 17 turns off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 146(g), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Then, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect ends, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 146(h), and the icon is displayed again. At the same time, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 146(i), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without any accompanying movement is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, if the performance button 17 is operated during the validity period related to the winning performance, or if the validity period has elapsed and a failure performance is performed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate. A failure effect image is displayed on the single-image display device 70, and a failure sound effect is output. Furthermore, part or all of the performance button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off, and then the three performance symbols are temporarily stopped when the number of reach misses (for example, "565") is rolled. After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an eye-catching effect that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is to be displayed in a stopped state is executed, and when the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and is temporarily stopped. Then, the icon is re-displayed, and if there is a number of reserved first special symbols, the reserved icon is re-displayed. When one second has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is permanently stopped when the reach is missed, and the special symbol TZ is also permanently stopped when the reach is missed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the effective suggestion production may be executed in the deciding production, so in addition to the occurrence of the validity period, there is a high expectation of jackpot. It is possible to suggest this to the player, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, there is a determined success production in which the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned, and a successful production in which the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. Since there is a winning success performance, it is possible to effectively improve the performance effect of the winning performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, there is a determined success production in which the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned, and a successful production in which the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. The period from when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period to when the vibration effect (successful vibration effect) is executed is different between the success effect and effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of elation from the beginning, or to give the player a feeling of elation after stirring up the player's anxiety, and the contrasting effect can effectively improve the interest in the game. .

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the operation period (10 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the successful decision production and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration production executed at the successful decision production. are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the performance effect of the success performance. In addition, the vibration effect can indicate to the player that he has won a jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the vibration production (decision success vibration production) executed at the time of the final production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of an operation promotion image), Display sound effects when displaying promotion images (opaque effect button images, gauge images) and effect sounds when the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period (operation sound effects, success sound effects, operation sound effects of movable members, etc.) ) is now output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the winning success performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, when the production patterns 70a in the display mode that does not include characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (designs aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration) Since the player can effectively notify the player that he or she has won a jackpot, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, when the production symbols 70a of the display mode including characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (C symbols aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration) performance) is now executed. Therefore, the player can reconfirm that he or she has won the jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the vibration production (opening vibration production) that is executed at the time of a temporary stop when three production symbols 70a are aligned or at the opening of a jackpot game can be performed by pressing the production button 17 does not have a valid period (display of operation promotion image), so the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. Sounds (operation sound effects, other sound effects, etc.) are not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the execution period of the vibration production that is executed at the time of a successful decision production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs were configured to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the fixed performance, but if the performance button 17 is operated immediately before the validity period occurs or from the start of the occurrence, or the validity period changes. Until the time elapses, some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off, and when a successful performance is determined by operating the performance button 17 or by elapse of the valid time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. It may also be made to emit light. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 were configured to emit rainbow light when the game board was successfully executed. Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light, while the production button 17 and some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off. You can.

Furthermore, when executing the success effect, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 started emitting the rainbow light at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start emitting rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start emitting rainbow light, and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs start emitting rainbow light. And the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first, and then the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs is started. You can.

In addition, after the blessing performance ended, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resumed their light emission and the performance button 17 turned off, but even after the blessing performance ended, the game board decoration LEDs continued to emit rainbow light. The effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the re-lottery effect, or the effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the eye-catching effect, or the rainbow emission may be restarted until the main stop of the effect pattern 70a. may be continued.

In addition, when executing the promotion success effect, multiple game board decoration LEDs and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first, and then the multiple game board decoration LEDs were started simultaneously. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

In addition, when the SPSP reach effect is executed, the eye-catching effect and the effect that returns the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character are executed, and then the effect pattern 70a is stopped. If the SPSP reach effect results in a loss, perform an eye-catching effect or a effect that returns the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character, and then stop the effect pattern 70a. In this case, the performance pattern 70a may be permanently stopped in the display mode of only numbers without performing an eye-catching performance or a performance of returning the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including characters.

In addition, regarding the vibration performance that is executed at the time of successful decision performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) (The execution period of the vibration effect may be varied) until 3 seconds later.

In addition, although the vibration effect is executed when a successful decision is made or when a promotion is successful, the vibration effect may be executed when a successful decision is made, but not when the promotion is successful. The reverse may be done, or the vibration presentation may not be performed during the successful decision presentation and the promotion successful presentation.

Further, a vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a containing only numbers after a blessing effect, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character after an eye-catching effect. However, when a jackpot roll is temporarily stopped by the number-only performance pattern 70a after the blessing performance, a vibration performance is executed, while a vibration performance is executed when a jackpot roll is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including a character after an eye-catching performance. You may choose not to do so, or vice versa, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the number-only performance pattern 70a after the blessing performance, and a jackpot by the performance pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching performance. The vibration effect may not be performed during the temporary stop.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a stops displaying (even during the deciding effect, the icon before the winning opening lamp NR is hidden) Although the light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display mode, the light may be emitted and turned off in conjunction with the light emission mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Timer effect and execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the timer effect for each variable effect pattern will be explained using FIG. 147.

The timer effects include event timer effects such as ``pseudo continuous occurrence timer effect'' that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo continuous effect, ``normal reach occurrence timer effect'' that suggests the start of a normal reach effect, and ``SP reach effect'' that suggests the start of a SP reach effect. ``SPSP reach occurrence timer effect'' that suggests the start of the SPSP reach effect, ``Full rotation reach occurrence timer effect'' that suggests the start of the full rotation reach effect, indicating the occurrence of the effective period of the effect button 17 There is a ``validity period occurrence timer effect'' and a ``jackpot symbol stop timer effect'' that suggests that the jackpot symbol will be stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 147(a), in the case of variable performance patterns 7, 15, and 20, there is a possibility that three of the pseudo continuous occurrence timer performance, normal reach occurrence timer performance, and SP reach occurrence timer performance may be executed.

In this case, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Further, the normal reach occurrence timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the SP reach occurrence timer effect starts between T5 and T6 and ends at T6.

As shown in FIG. 147(b), in the case of variable performance patterns 8, 16, and 21, four of the normal reach occurrence timer performance, SP reach occurrence timer performance, SPSP reach occurrence timer performance, and valid period occurrence timer performance are executed. There is a possibility that

In this case, the normal reach occurrence timer performance starts between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Further, the SP reach generation timer effect starts between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the SPSP reach occurrence timer effect is started between T5 and T6 and ends at T6. Further, the valid period generation timer effect is started between T5 and T7 and ends at T7.

As shown in FIG. 147(c), in the case of variable effect patterns 11 and 22, four types can be executed: a pseudo continuous occurrence timer effect, a normal reach occurrence timer effect, an SPSP reach occurrence timer effect, and a valid period occurrence timer effect. There is sex.

In this case, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Further, the normal reach occurrence timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the SPSP reach occurrence timer effect is started between T5 and T8 and ends at T8. Further, the valid period occurrence timer effect is started between T7 and T9 and ends at T9.

(Example of timer performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 148, a presentation example in which two timer presentations are executed during a variable presentation will be described. Here, in the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the execution of the variable performance pattern 22, the pseudo continuous timer performance (normal pattern 7), and the valid period occurrence timer performance (normal pattern 21) has been decided.

First, as shown in FIG. 148(a), when the white character timer STW is displayed and the timer effect is being executed (the timer time is subtracted), the same "7" as the left and right effect symbols is temporarily stopped. When the reach state is formed, the normal reach effect will start.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(b), after the white character timer STW reaches "0 seconds left", the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle area as a pseudo continuous success effect, and a success sound effect is output. , the pseudo 2 fluctuation period ends (the red flame effect accompanying the pseudo continuous effect is omitted from the illustration).

Then, as shown in FIG. 148(c), the effect pattern 70a changes again and "x3" indicating the number of pseudo changes (that the stage of the effect has progressed) is displayed in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 148(d), the SPSP development pattern temporarily stops in the middle area, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and moves. be done. At this time, when the effective period generation timer effect is started, a white character timer YTW of "35 seconds remaining" which is a normal display is displayed on the image display device 70, and subtraction of the timer time is started.

After that, the screen whites out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 148(e), the effect pattern 70a in the middle area changes again, and the three effect patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen. SPSP reach performance starts. It should be noted that with the start of the SPSP reach effect, the pending icon and the icon are hidden. At this time, the white text timer YTW indicates "33 seconds left", which is the timer time being subtracted.

Then, when the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage, as shown in FIG. 148(f), a valid suggestion effect that suggests that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the decisive effect starts. be done. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen. At this time, the white character timer YTW indicates "2 seconds left", which is the timer time being subtracted.

Then, after the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen and the white text timer YTW reaches "0 seconds remaining", the effective period of the effect button 17 (single press 5 seconds), an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that protrudes from a specific position in the center of the screen and emits red light, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period. is displayed, the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a successful decision effect is started as shown in FIG. 148(h). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after strongly vibrating the production button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between, and at the top left of the screen. It temporarily stops when three performance symbols 70a of "7" are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

(Example of performance when a special SP reach performance is executed in the second variable performance in performance mode A (normal gaming state) and a jackpot is achieved)
With reference to FIG. 149, an example of a performance in which a special SP ready-to-win performance is executed in the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) in performance mode A (normal gaming state) and results in a jackpot will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 149(a), on the image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "635" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped display state. Further, "2" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. At this time, since the mode is production mode A (normal gaming state), the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed.

When the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is started from this state, the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F changes from "2" to "1" as shown in FIG. 149(b). Change. Note that although the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the icon may be displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149(c), a development effect that suggests development into a special SP ready-to-reach effect is executed, and a special SP ready-to-reach effect is executed.

Then, when the special SP reach effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 149(d), the effect symbol 70a is fully stopped at "555", and the special symbol TZ is also fully stopped at "555", and the second variation The performance ends.

In addition, when a game ball passes through the normal game gate 44 and enters the first starting port 45, a right-handed hit error notification based on the right-handed hit in the normal gaming state is sent for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). carried out over a period of time. Specifically, a right-handed hitting error image MUE indicating that the game ball should be fired towards the left side area of the gaming area 5a is displayed near the center of the screen, and the audio output device 9 says "Please hit left-handed." The right-handed error sound is output.

After the second variable performance ends, as shown in FIG. 149(e), the opening performance of the jackpot game starts during the execution period of the right-handed error notification, and the right-handed hit image MU that suggests right-handed hit is displayed at the top right of the screen. is displayed, a right hit notification is performed, and jackpot effect 1 is executed. At this time, the right-handed player error image MUE is erased due to the start of the right-handed player notification, but the output of the right-handed player error sound continues, and the output ends after a period shorter than the normal output period has elapsed. Note that when the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variable effect, the jackpot effect 2 will be executed.

(Example of performance when a chance performance is executed and a jackpot occurs in the first variable performance in performance mode G (specific game state))
With reference to FIG. 150, an example of a performance will be described in which a chance performance is executed in the first variable performance in performance mode G (specific game state) and a jackpot is achieved.

First, as shown in FIG. 150(a), on the image display device 70, the production symbol 70a of "285" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped state. Further, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E. At this time, since it is the performance mode G (specific game state), the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed.

When the first variable performance is started from this state, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" as shown in FIG. 150(b). Note that although the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the icon may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 150(c), a text image saying "Chance approaching" is displayed, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that it is a chance to play a jackpot game. A chance performance that suggests this is executed.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the chance performance was started, a jackpot acquisition performance is started as shown in FIG. 150(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. Further, some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

Then, when the jackpot acquisition effect ends and the first movable member 73 returns to the initial position, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555" as shown in FIG. 150(e), and the special symbol TZ also changes to "555". 555'', the main stop is made, and the first variation effect ends.

After the first variable performance ends, as shown in FIG. 150(f), the opening performance of the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot performance 1 is executed. Note that when the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variable effect, the jackpot effect 2 will be executed.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, in a specific game state, there is a case where the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, and a case where the second variation production (the second variation display) is executed. Variable display of special symbols) is executed in different manners (whether or not a look-ahead effect is executed, whether or not various preview effects are executed, whether or not a specific reach effect is executed, whether or not the relevant icon is displayed, the type of background image) However, the jackpot effect after the first variable effect in a specific gaming state and the jackpot effect after the second variable effect in a specific gaming state have the same aspects (background image, BGM type, etc.). , round effect images, etc.). Therefore, during the jackpot performance, the player does not have to be aware of whether the first variable performance is the trigger or the second variable performance is the trigger, so the player can enjoy the jackpot performance without having to think about it. , it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, if a right-handed player is hit during the normal gaming state, a right-handed player error notification (display of a right-handed player error image HUE indicating a left-handed player), "Please play left-handed. '') is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds), but if a jackpot game is started while the right-handed error notification is being executed, the right-handed error notification is continued while the right-handed error notification is continued. is designed to be executed. Therefore, while making the player aware that hitting the right hand during the normal gaming state is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to notify the player that hitting the right hand so that the player does not suffer any loss due to the start of the jackpot game. It becomes possible to improve interest.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, if a jackpot game is started while the right-handed hit error notification is being executed, the display of the right-handed hit error image HUE is ended, but the message "Please hit left '' left-handed error audio continues to be output. Therefore, it is not necessary to excessively inhibit right-handed hitting notification, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, when a jackpot game is started while the right-handed error notification is being executed for a predetermined period, the left-handed error message "Please hit left" is heard. The output continues, but it ends in a shorter time than usual (before the predetermined period has elapsed). Therefore, it is not necessary to excessively inhibit right-handed hitting notification, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, there are different aspects between the case where the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed and the case where the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. (Whether or not a look-ahead effect is executed, whether or not various preview effects are executed, whether or not there is a specific reach effect, whether or not the relevant icon is displayed, the type of background image, the type of BGM, etc.), and the normal game state The jackpot performance after the first variable performance in the normal game state and the jackpot performance after the second variable performance in the normal game state may be executed in a common manner (background image, BGM, round performance image, etc.). In this way, during the jackpot performance, the player does not have to be aware of whether the first variable performance is the trigger or the second variable performance is the trigger, so the player can enjoy the jackpot performance without having to worry about unnecessary thoughts. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production when a fixed mission production is executed during a jackpot)
With reference to FIG. 151, an example of a performance in a case where a variable probability mission effect is executed to determine whether or not a variable probability game state will be entered during a jackpot (round game) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 151(a), when the opening performance of the jackpot game starts, a strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started. ) is started, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration performance ends, the opening performance of the jackpot game ends, and the first round game starts.

After that, when the interval period after the first round game ends and the second round game starts, as shown in FIG. is started, and the words ``You are guaranteed to defeat the enemy'' are displayed until the second round game ends.

Then, when the interval period after the second round game ends and the third round game starts, the effective period of the production button 17 (single press for 5 seconds) occurs, as shown in FIG. 151(c). The mission performance will begin. Specifically, the words "Destroy" are displayed, along with an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the validity period. , the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 emits white light. At this time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) continue to emit light (light emission mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the mission success effect is started as shown in FIG. 151(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. Further, a strong vibration performance (promotional vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds is started, and a part or all of the performance button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

After that, when the mission success effect is completed, as shown in FIG. The effect light emission of the decorative LED is restarted, and when the third round game ends, the word "defeat" is erased and the round effect is restarted.

Then, when the ninth round game is started, as shown in FIG. A time period of at least 11 seconds (from the start until 5 seconds has elapsed) occurs, and mode selection performance for selecting the performance mode in the variable probability game state is started. Specifically, the option image for production mode D and the option image for production mode E are displayed, and the text "Please select the mode that is currently changing with the cross key and confirm with the button!" is displayed as an operation promotion image, and the white text is displayed. An opaque effect button image imitating the light emitting effect button 17 is displayed.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 18 is operated, as shown in FIG. 151(g), the option image of production mode D is selected (the option image of production mode E is displayed in dark color). A state is reached in which the option image of presentation mode E is selected (the option image of presentation mode D is displayed in dark color).

Then, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the selection image of the performance mode E is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. E is notified and the mode selection performance ends. Thereafter, when the 10th round game ends, an ending performance is executed, and when the ending performance ends, a variable probability game state is started.

Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, a left-handed hit error notification based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 45 during the jackpot game is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed hitting error image HUE that suggests firing a game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a larger size than the right-handed hitting image MU, and the audio output device From 9, a left-handed hitting error voice saying "Please hit right-handed" is output.

Note that when the mission failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the first image display device 70 displays a failure effect image and outputs a failure sound effect. . Furthermore, the mode selection effect is not executed and the ending effect is shifted to.

As described above, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, the operation period (5 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the mission success production and the execution period of the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed during the mission success production. (5 seconds) are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the presentation effect of the mission success presentation. Further, the vibration effect can suggest to the player that the result is advantageous to the player, that is, that a probability change state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is accompanied by the validity period of the production button 17, so the operation promotion images (opaque production button image, gauge image ) when displaying the display sound effect and the effect sound (success sound effect) when the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the winning success performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, the execution period of the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, even if the production button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the mode selection production, the vibration production is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences in which players are misled into thinking that the jackpot expectation is higher in the selected presentation mode than in the unselected presentation mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, it is possible to execute a right-handed hit notification (display of a right-handed hit image MU) that suggests a right-handed hit during a jackpot game, but it is possible to execute a right-handed hit notification (display of a right-handed hit image MU) during a jackpot game. When a game ball enters the starting hole 45, the right-handed hitting notification (display of the right-handed hitting image MU) continues, and the left-handed hitting error notification (the display of the left-handed hitting error image HUE that suggests right-handed hitting, "Please hit right. '') is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 seconds). Therefore, by encouraging players who hit left-handed despite the right-handed hitting notification to play right-handed, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, the right-handed hit image MU that was displayed during the jackpot game and the left-handed hit error image HUE (right-handed hit notification image) are displayed so as not to overlap. There is. Therefore, it is possible to accurately encourage the player to play right-handed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, multiple game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the variable mission production, but if the production button 17 is operated immediately before or from the start of the validity period, the validity period will change. Until the elapse of time, some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off, and when performing a mission success effect by operating the effect button 17 or by elapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. It may be possible to emit rainbow light. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Furthermore, during the mission success presentation, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the presentation button 17 were configured to emit rainbow light; Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light, while the production button 17 and some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off. You can.

In addition, when executing the mission success effect, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start emitting rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start emitting rainbow light, and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs start emitting rainbow light. And the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first, and then the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs is started. You can.

In addition, the vibration effect that is executed during the mission success effect will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period expires if the effect button 17 is not operated) (The execution period of the vibration effect may be varied) until 3 seconds later.

Further, although the vibration effect is executed when the mission is successful, the vibration effect may not be executed when the mission is successful.

In addition, although the right-handed player image MU and the left-handed player error image (right-handed player notification image) are not designed to be dynamically displayed, for example, it is possible to have a dynamic display that swings left and right at a predetermined period. You can. In this case, it is preferable not to synchronize the periods of dynamic display of the right-handed player image MU and the left-handed player error image (right-handed player notification image).

(Examples of opening and ending performances for jackpot games for each game state)
Examples of the opening performance and ending performance of the jackpot game for each game state will be explained using FIG. 152.

First, as shown in FIG. 152(a), in production mode A (normal game state), a variable display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed, and the first image display device 70 displays the production The symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are being scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the first reservation icon display area A first pending icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of 70B, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ come to a final stop with the jackpot number "444" and the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 152(b), the jackpot game (so-called first win) from the normal game state When the opening performance is started, a right-handed hit image MU indicating a right-handed hit is displayed at the upper right of the screen, and a first right-handed hit notification is executed.

After that, when the first half of the opening performance ends and the second half begins, as shown in FIG. 152(c), a large right-handed hit image MUD is displayed, and a right-handed hit voice says "Aim to the right." is output and the second right hit notification is executed. Specifically, an image simulating the upper part of the game board surface (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting right-handed play is displayed, and furthermore, a text image saying "Aim to the right" is displayed.

Then, when the round game of the jackpot game (so-called first win) from the normal game state is finished and the ending effect is started, as shown in FIG. 152(d), the " A text image reading ``Chance time has begun'' is displayed, and an alert alert is started to alert the player. Specifically, the "Forgot to take out a card" message is used to warn players about forgetting to take out the card (storage medium) that stores the value owned by the player, which is inserted into the gaming media lending machine attached to the gaming machine 1. A first caution image KG1 includes the words ``Please be careful about this.'' and a second caution image KG2 includes the words ``Please be careful not to get too absorbed in the game.'' is displayed.

After that, when the ending performance is finished and the jackpot game ends, the normal time-saving game state is controlled and the performance mode F is set, and the first pending icon display area 70B is not set on the first image display device 70, and the icon This is the screen where the display area 70C and the second pending icon display area 70D are set, but the display of the right-handed image MU continues, and a new variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 152(e), in production mode G (normal time saving game state), when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is started when the remaining time saving number (J2) is the 49th time. In the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are scrolled (moved downward).

After that, when the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ come to a final stop with the jackpot number "444" and the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. ) starts, a right-handed hit image MU indicating a right-handed hit is displayed at the top right of the screen, and a first right-handed hit notification is executed.

After that, when the first half of the opening performance ends and the second half begins, a large right-handed hitting image MUD is displayed, and a right-handed hitting voice saying "Aim to the right" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 152(g). is output and the second right hit notification is executed. Specifically, an image simulating the upper part of the game board surface (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting right-handed play is displayed, and furthermore, a character image saying "Aim to the right" is displayed.

Then, when the round game of the jackpot game (so-called consecutive winnings) from the normal time-saving game state ends and the ending effect starts, it is suggested that the normal time-saving game state will be entered, as shown in FIG. 152(h). Although a character image saying "Chance time has entered" is displayed, the ending performance continues without any warning notification to call the player's attention.

After that, when the ending performance is finished and the jackpot game ends, the normal time-saving game state is controlled and the performance mode F is set, and the first pending icon display area 70B is not set on the first image display device 70, and the icon This is the screen where the display area 70C and the second pending icon display area 70D are set, but the display of the right-handed image MU continues, and a new variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol is started.

(Example of opening and ending effects of jackpot game during special time saving game state)
An example of the opening performance and ending performance of the jackpot game during the special time saving game state will be explained using FIG. 153.

First, as shown in FIG. 153(a), in production mode H (special time-saving game state), a variable display of the second special symbol (second variable production) is executed, and on the first image display device 70, The effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are being scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, "1" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and "1" is displayed in the second reservation icon display area 70B. , four second hold icons (white icons) are displayed, and the icons (white icons) are displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ come to a final stop with the jackpot result of "444" and the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. When the opening effect starts, a right-handed hit image MU indicating a right-handed hit is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a first right-handed hit notification is executed.

After that, when the first half of the opening performance ends and the second half begins, as shown in FIG. 153(c), a large right-handed hit image MUD is displayed and a right-handed hit voice says "Aim to the right." is output and the second right hit notification is executed. Specifically, an image simulating the upper part of the game board surface (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting right-handed play is displayed, and furthermore, a character image saying "Aim to the right" is displayed.

Then, when the round game of the jackpot game (so-called first win) from the special time-saving game state ends and the ending effect starts, it is suggested that the normal time-saving game state will be entered, as shown in FIG. 153(d). A text image reading "Chance Time Enters" is displayed, and an alert alert is started to call the player's attention. Specifically, the "Forgot to take out a card" message is used to warn players about forgetting to take out the card (storage medium) that stores the value owned by the player, which is inserted into the gaming media lending machine attached to the gaming machine 1. A first caution image KG1 includes the words ``Please be careful about this.'' and a second caution image KG2 includes the words ``Please be careful not to get too absorbed in the game.'' is displayed.

At this time, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, a left-handed error notification based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 45 in a specific gaming state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed hitting error image HUE that suggests firing a game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a larger size than the right-handed hitting image MU, and the audio output device From 9, a left-handed hitting error voice saying "Please hit right-handed" is output.

On the other hand, if it is determined in advance that there is a jackpot game to be executed in the second suspension memory, and the conditions for executing the pre-read suspension continuous performance to notify that fact are satisfied, as shown in FIG. 153(e) As shown in the figure, the prefetch pending continuous effect is executed. Specifically, in parallel with the warning notification, the consecutive game character RC is displayed on the first image display device 70, and it is notified that there is a jackpot game in the second pending memory. Ru.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when a jackpot game (so-called first win) is executed during the normal gaming state, specific information regarding the game is It is possible to carry out notifications (alert notifications), and if a jackpot game (so-called consecutive winnings) is executed during the normal time-saving gaming state, a specific notification (alert notification) related to the game can be issued in connection with the end of the jackpot game. If a jackpot game (so-called first win) is executed during a special time-saving game state in which the execution of the jackpot game is restricted (not executed) and is executed without going through the jackpot game, the termination of the jackpot game It is possible to execute specific notifications (alert notifications) related to games. Therefore, it is possible to notify the players of the game to the necessary and sufficient extent, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, variable mission production (which generates a valid period and responds to the operation of the production button 17 during the valid period) determines whether or not a variable game state will occur during a jackpot game. It is possible to execute a fixed-variable promotion performance in which movable parts are moved, but the execution of a fixed-variable mission production (a fixed-variable promotion production) is restricted (not executed) while an alert alert is being executed. . Therefore, it is possible to appropriately alert the players and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, it is possible to execute a warning notification regarding the game in connection with the end of the jackpot game, but even while the warning notification is in progress, it is possible to execute the warning notification regarding the game. It is possible to carry out a look-ahead holding sequence effect that informs (suggests) that there is something that will become a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to keep the players calm and give them a sense of expectation through the alert notification, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, it is possible to issue an alert notification regarding the game in connection with the end of the jackpot game, but even while the alert alert is being executed, it is not possible for the player to If a disadvantageous left-handed hit is performed, a left-handed hit error notification indicating a right-handed hit can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering unnecessary losses, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a jackpot game is executed during the normal game state or the special time-saving game state, an alert alert is issued, but if the prize ball (balls put out) exceeds the specified amount (for example, 300 balls), When a jackpot game in which players can obtain prize balls is executed, a warning notification may be executed, and in a case where a jackpot game in which a prize ball exceeding a prescribed amount cannot be obtained is executed, a warning notification may not be executed.

(Example of production when a special time-saving game state occurs)
An example of a performance when a special time-saving game state occurs will be explained using FIG. 154.

Here, the number of times the special symbol lose fluctuation display is executed after the predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0) is 800 times (remaining time until the occurrence of the special time-saving game state). It is assumed that from the time when the number of fluctuations reaches 100 times, an activation counter display indicating the timing of occurrence of the special time-saving game state is performed. Specifically, a notification logo LG including the words "Help Time" which means a special time-saving game state and a character image "Remaining ○○" which shows the number of remaining fluctuations are displayed.

Further, it is assumed that a countdown effect indicating that the special time-saving game state will occur is performed from the time when the number of fluctuations remaining until the special time-saving game state occurs reaches three times. Specifically, each time a variable effect is started, a character image indicating the remaining number of times is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second).

As shown in FIG. 154(a), when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in which the remaining number of variations until the special time saving game state occurs is started (first variable effect), the effect symbol 70a and the special The variable display of the symbol TZ starts, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B change to the corresponding icon. One of the icons is shifted toward the display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a character image of "1" is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a loss, as shown in FIG. The icon disappears and the remaining number of fluctuations displayed on the activation counter becomes "1".

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in which the number of remaining variations until the occurrence of the special time saving game state is one is started, as shown in FIG. 154(c), the effect symbol 70a And the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are One of the icons is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a character image of "0" is displayed as a countdown effect.

Next, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a loss, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed as the loss number "635", as shown in FIG. , the icon disappears and the remaining number of fluctuations displayed on the activation counter becomes "0".

When the game ball passes through the regular figure gate 44 at this timing, a right-handed hit error notification based on the fact that the right-handed hit was performed in the normal game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a right-handed hitting error image MUE indicating that the game ball should be fired towards the left side area of the gaming area 5a is displayed near the center of the screen, and the audio output device 9 says "Please hit left-handed." The right-handed error sound is output.

After that, when the special time saving game state occurs and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 154(e), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, and accordingly A blackout effect is performed to restrict the visibility of the image, and a right-handed hit image MU indicating a right-handed hit is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a right-handed hit is notified. At this time, the right-handed player error image MUE is erased due to the start of the right-handed player notification, but the output of the right-handed player error sound continues, and the output ends after a period shorter than the normal output period has elapsed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 154(f), a character image saying "Help time has entered" is displayed, indicating that a special time-saving game state will be entered, and the entry effect will be displayed. (Long entry performance or short entry performance) is executed. Further, right-handed hitting image MU2 indicating right-handed hitting is displayed, and a sound saying "right-handed hitting" is output to notify that right-handed hitting is performed.

Further, when the execution time of the entry effect has elapsed, the character image "Enter help time" is erased, and the background image of the effect mode H becomes visible. In addition, a band image saying "Help time" is displayed at the top left of the screen, and a remaining time saving number image KG indicating the remaining number of times of the second time saving number (J2) is displayed at the bottom left of the screen as "799 remaining times". .

Next, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ become a losing number "416" as shown in FIG. 154(g). ” The display will stop and display.

Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a left-handed hit error notification based on the left-handed hit in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed hitting error image HUE indicating that the game ball should be fired toward the right side of the gaming area 5a is displayed near the center of the screen, and the audio output device 9 says "Please hit right." The right-handed error sound is output.

Note that in a specific gaming state, the left-handed hit error is not notified when one game ball enters the first starting port 45, but when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls enter the first starting port 45. A left-handed hitting error may be notified based on this. Furthermore, the left-handed hitting error notification may be terminated at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 47. In this case, the left-handed hitting error image HUE is erased before the left-handed hitting error sound. Alternatively, the left-handed player error sound may be deleted before the left-handed player error image HUE.

In this way, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the special time-saving game state occurs reaches a predetermined number (here, 100 times), the activation counter display starts. . Therefore, the player can grasp the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (variable performance) until the state shifts to the special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, the character image indicating the remaining number of fluctuations as an activation counter display is made up of only numbers and does not include unit display such as times or number of times. As a result, players are more likely to look up what this number means, and by increasing their chances of seeing machine information, they can deepen their understanding of gaming machines and increase their interest in gaming. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, the character image indicating the remaining number of fluctuations as an activation counter display is displayed at the start of the fluctuation, rather than at the start of the fluctuation performance when the jackpot preview performance or look-ahead performance is likely to be executed (started). It is updated when the performance symbol is stopped and displayed, which makes it difficult to execute (start) the jackpot preview performance or the pre-read performance compared to the time. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, it is suggested that the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (three times in this case) before the transition to the special time-saving game state (variable performance). A countdown effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly understand when the special time-saving gaming state occurs, and it is also possible to improve the player's expectations for the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Become.

Further, according to the example of performance shown in FIG. 154, when the special time saving game state is entered, a rush performance (long rush performance or short rush performance) can be executed. Therefore, the player can be made to accurately recognize that the special time-saving game state has entered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the performance example shown in FIG. 154, right hit notification is performed in conjunction with the start of the first variable display of special symbols in the special time saving game state. Therefore, even a player who does not have knowledge about the special time-saving gaming state can understand that the player is hitting right, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the performance example shown in FIG. 154, the entry performance of the special time-saving game state is executed in a performance mode different from that when shifting to the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that a time-saving gaming state that is different from the normal time-saving gaming state has occurred, and also to inform the player that a special time-saving gaming state has occurred in a novel manner, thereby increasing the interest in the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, if a right-handed player is hit during the normal gaming state, a right-handed player error notification (display of a right-handed player error image MUE indicating a left-handed player, a left-hand player with a message "Please hit left") Output of hitting error sound) is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds), but if the special time saving game state is started while the right hitting error notification is being executed, the right hitting error notification is continued while the right hitting error notification is being executed. It is executable. Therefore, while making the player aware that hitting right during the normal gaming state is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to notify the player of hitting right so that the player does not suffer losses due to the start of the special time-saving gaming state. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, if the special time-saving gaming state is started while the right-handed hitting error notification is being executed, the display of the right-handed hitting error image MUE is ended, but the message "Please hit left-handed" is displayed. The left-handed hit error audio continues to be output. Therefore, it is not necessary to excessively inhibit right-handed hitting notification, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, the number of images suggesting right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting image MU, right-handed hitting image MU2) is greater than the number of images suggesting left-handed hitting (right-handed hitting error image MUE). There are more people. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the right-handed game appropriately, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, if the special time-saving game state is started while the right-handed player error notification is being executed, the display of the right-handed player image MU2 ends after the display of the right-handed player error image MUE ends. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the right-handed game appropriately, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, it is possible to execute right-handed hitting notification (display of right-handed hitting image MU) that suggests right-handed hitting during the special time-saving game state; When the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the right-handed hitting notification (display of the right-handed hitting image MU) continues, and the left-handed hitting error notification (the display of the left-handed hitting error image HUE that suggests right-handed hitting, the “right-handed hitting error image HUE”) continues. "Please hit left-handed error voice output)" is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 seconds). Therefore, by encouraging players who hit left-handed despite the right-handed hitting notification to play right-handed, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, the right-handed hitting image MU that was displayed during the special time-saving game state and the left-handed hitting error image HUE (right-handed hitting notification image) are displayed so as not to overlap. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to accurately encourage the player to play right-handed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the special time-saving game state is generated in the same performance mode regardless of the presence or absence of a jackpot history, but when the special time-saving game state is generated with a jackpot history, the special time-saving game state is The production mode may be shifted to the countdown mode from a predetermined period before the occurrence (for example, when the 800th variable display is executed after the predetermined condition is satisfied). In this way, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations for the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, regarding the countdown mode, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state before the special time-saving gaming state occurs between jackpot games, but it is not possible to shift to the normal gaming state after the special time-saving gaming state occurs. good. In this way, it is possible to determine whether the special time-saving gaming state is before or after the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state depending on whether or not the countdown mode occurs, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the countdown mode can be generated, the rate of change in the performance mode will be different between the normal gaming state before the special time-saving gaming state and the normal gaming state after the special time-saving gaming state occurs ( It is possible to make it easier for the performance mode to change in the normal game state before the special time-saving game state occurs, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of effect when a special time-saving gaming state that occurs without a jackpot history ends)
With reference to FIG. 155, an example of performance will be described when a special time-saving game state that occurs without a jackpot history ends.

Here, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed in which the remaining second time saving number (J2) of the special time saving game state is "1", and the remaining time saving number image KG displayed at the bottom left of the screen is " It is assumed that the message ``1 session remaining'' is displayed.

After that, when the variation time of the second special symbol has passed and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the losing number "416", as shown in FIG. The icon is displayed disappearing.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) that ends the special time saving game state is started, as shown in FIG. 155(b), the variation of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The display starts, the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are moved to the icon display area 70C. One of the icons is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. At this time, the character image "LAST" is displayed as a countdown performance started from the second variable performance five times before the end of the special time saving game state, and the remaining time saving number image KG becomes "0 times remaining".

Next, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a loss, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed as the loss number "285", as shown in FIG. , the icon will disappear.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 45 at this timing, a left-handed hit error notification based on the left-handed hit in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed hitting error image HUE indicating that the game ball should be fired toward the right side of the gaming area 5a is displayed near the center of the screen, and the audio output device 9 says "Please hit right." The left-handed hit error sound is output.

After that, when the special time-saving game state ends, as shown in FIG. 155(d), the display of the right-handed player image MU ends and the left-handed player notification (display of the left-handed player image HU, voice of "please play left-handed") output) is started. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, the variable display of the special symbol TZ starts, and the performance image (background image, performance symbol 70a, the icon display area 70C, the A shielding image SY that shields the second hold icon display area 70D, second hold icon, etc.) is displayed, and by retreating to the left side of the screen, the effect image (background image, effect pattern image, etc.) corresponding to the effect mode A is displayed. etc.) become visible. At this time, the left-handed player error image HUE is erased due to the start of the left-handed player notification, but the output of the left-handed player error sound continues, and the output ends after a period shorter than the normal output period has elapsed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 155(e), the shielding image SY is completely retracted to the left side of the screen, and the effect image (background image, effect pattern 70a, first hold icon) corresponding to the effect mode A is The display area 70B and the first hold icon, etc.) become completely visible, the reduced display of the performance symbol 70a (preparation action) becomes visible, and the words "Help Time", which means a special time-saving game state, become visible. The notification logo LG including ``Remaining ???'' indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations is unknown becomes visible.

Thereafter, when the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a is completed, the scroll display of the effect pattern 70a is started, as shown in FIG. 155(f). Further, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed, the left-handed hit notification ends.

In addition, there are different performances between the normal gaming state before the special time-saving gaming state and the normal gaming state after the special time-saving gaming state ends (remaining number of fluctuations "○○" and remaining number of fluctuations "???") However, the rate of change of the production mode according to the progress of the game is made to be the same.

In this way, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, the transition to the normal gaming state from the variable display of special symbols (variable production) a predetermined number of times (in this case, 5 times) before the end of the special time-saving gaming state is performed. A suggested countdown effect is now executed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly understand when the special time-saving gaming state ends, and it is also possible to arouse the player's sense of impatience regarding the end of the special time-saving gaming state, making it possible to improve the interest in the game. .

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, if a left-handed hit is made during the special time-saving game state, a left-handed hit error notification (display of a left-handed hit error image HUE indicating a right-handed hit, a message saying "Please hit right") The output of the left-handed hitting error sound is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds), but if the normal gaming state is started while the left-handed hitting error notification is being executed, the left-handed hitting error notification is continued while the left-handed hitting error notification is being executed. It is set to run. Therefore, while making the player aware that hitting left during the special time-saving gaming state is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to notify the player of hitting left so as not to cause a loss to the player due to the start of the normal gaming state. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, if the normal game state is started while the left-handed hitting error notification is being executed, the display of the left-handed hitting error image HUE is ended, but the message "Please hit right" is terminated. The right-handed hit error audio continues to be output. Therefore, it is not necessary to excessively impede left-handed player notification, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, if the normal gaming state is started while the left-handed hitting error notification is being executed, the display of the left-handed hitting image HU ends after the display of the left-handed hitting error image HUE ends. It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the left-handed game appropriately, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, when the special time-saving game state ends and shifts to the normal game state, the notification logo LG containing the words "Help Time", which means the special time-saving game state, and the remaining The character image "Remaining???" indicating that the number of changes is unknown becomes visible, suggesting that the special time-saving game state has already occurred. Therefore, useful information can be suggested to the player, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, when a special time-saving gaming state that occurs without a jackpot history ends, an end notification production (described later) that notifies the end of the special time-saving gaming state ( When the game enters the normal gaming state (display of the character image "Time is over") is not executed, and the game enters the normal gaming state, a production (display of the background image of production mode A, etc.) indicating that the game is in the normal gaming state is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the special time-saving game state to the end, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of effect when a special time-saving gaming state that occurs while there is a jackpot history ends)
With reference to FIG. 156, a presentation example will be described in which a special time-saving game state that occurs without a jackpot history ends.

Here, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed in which the remaining second time saving number (J2) of the special time saving game state is "1", and the remaining time saving number image KG displayed at the bottom left of the screen is " It is assumed that the message ``1 session remaining'' is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has passed and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the losing number "416", as shown in FIG. The icon is displayed disappearing.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) that ends the special time saving game state is started, as shown in FIG. 156(b), the variation of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The display starts, the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are moved to the icon display area 70C. One of the icons is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. At this time, the character image "LAST" is displayed as a countdown performance started from the second variable performance five times before the end of the special time saving game state, and the remaining time saving number image KG becomes "0 times remaining". Further, an end notification effect is executed to notify that the special time saving game state ends. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the door image TB that blocks the background image, the effect pattern 70a, etc. is closed, and a text image saying "Help time is over" is displayed in front of the door image TB.

Next, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has passed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a loss, as shown in FIG. Stop and display.

After that, when the special time saving game state ends, as shown in FIG. 156(d), the display of the right-handed hitting image MU ends while the end notification effect continues, and the left-handed hitting notification (display of the left-handed hitting image HU) starts. will be started. Also, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, the second special symbol pending number display area changes from "3" to "2", and only the variable display of the special symbol TZ remains in the closed state of the door image TB. The variable performance to be performed begins.

Then, when the variation time of the second special symbol has passed and the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol TZ is displayed as a loss number "471" while the end notification effect continues, as shown in FIG. 156(e). Stop display. Thereafter, a variable effect is executed in which only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed while the end notification effect continues until the second hold is exhausted.

Next, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol based on the last second hold has elapsed and the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 156(f), the special symbol TZ remains hidden with the production symbol 70a The display stops when the number of failures is "569".

After that, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the door image TB opens and the end notification effect ends, as shown in FIG. 156(g), and the effect image (background image, (effect design images, etc.) become visible. In addition, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is started, and the variable display of the special pattern TZ is started, and the two pending icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are moved to the corresponding icon display area 70C. , and one is displayed as the corresponding icon.

In addition, if there is a jackpot among the remaining second holds when the special time-saving gaming state ends, a revival performance will be executed while the end notification performance continues, and a notification will be given that the jackpot will be achieved. It looks like this.

In this way, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, there are two cases: a case in which a special time-saving gaming state that occurred in a state where there is no jackpot history ends, and a case in which a special time-saving gaming state that occurred in a state in which there is a jackpot history ends. The performance modes (start timing, end timing, content of the end notification performance, etc. of the end notification performance) when the special time saving game state ends are different. Therefore, depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history, it is possible to improve the production effect when the special time-saving game state ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to infer whether there is a jackpot history (whether or not RWM has been cleared) from the performance mode when the special time-saving game state ends, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 156, when the special time-saving game state ends while the end notification production continues, the variable production (variation display of the special symbol TZ) corresponding to the remaining second hold is made inconspicuous. It is supposed to run like this. Therefore, when the end notification performance ends, the display starts with the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable display), allowing the game to be played with a new feeling and improving the interest of the game. becomes.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 156, if there is a jackpot in the remaining second hold when the special time-saving game state ends, the jackpot will be played as a revival production while the end notification production continues. It has been announced that this will happen. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear as if a jackpot has been won during the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the special time-saving gaming state ends, the left-handed hit notification (left-handed hit image HU) is started immediately regardless of the presence or absence of the second hold. Instead of starting left-handed notification, if there is no second hold when the special time-saving gaming state ends, start left-handed notification to the immediate material, and if there is second hold, respond to the second hold. The left-handed hit notification may be started after the variable performance is completed.

(Example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during the execution of the icon change performance and lamp change performance)
An example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change performance and the lamp change performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158.

As shown in FIG. 157(a), when the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, "728 ” is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the section 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, thereby starting the icon change effect, and accordingly, the winning opening lamp NR changes from the off state to blinking red. When the state changes, the lamp change effect starts.

After that, as shown in FIG. 157(c), the effect pattern 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, and the center variable display area is A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed variably is executed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 157(d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased together with the pending icon.

Thereafter, when the SPSP reaches, as shown in FIG. 157(e), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C in which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning a prize opening lamp NR does not turn off as the icon disappears, and the lamp change performance in the winning a prize opening lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, as shown in FIG. 157(f), the image display device becomes non-displayed and the prize opening lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 158(g), an initial screen including the words "Loading" is displayed on the image display device, but the winning slot lamp NR is turned off. maintain the condition.

Then, when the production control board 130 receives the second power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. The returning screen including is displayed for the duration of the SPSP reach effect (including the execution period of the re-lottery effect to determine whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect symbol will be promoted to a jackpot effect symbol with higher value for the player). However, the winning opening lamp NR remains in the off state here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that results in a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special pattern stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. 158(i), a temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a ( A stop screen (second standby screen) is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display) without any shaking fluctuation). , the variable effect ends without restarting the lamp change effect.

At this time, the same white icon as before the power supply was stopped is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but a rectangular icon is displayed. By displaying the area image, a display space (display area) for the icon is secured in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 158(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started and is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2. The first pending icon (white icon) shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special pattern stop designation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 158(k), a temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a ( The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "777" (which formed the reach state before the power cutoff) indicates the type of the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing any swing fluctuation/swing display). A combination of performance symbols different from the reach combination according to the production symbol "3↓3") and a stop screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) will be displayed, and a lamp change effect will be displayed with the winning opening lamp NR. The variable performance ends without restarting.

In addition to the variation production in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variation productions (variation production in which a normal variation is executed, variation production in which a shortened variation is executed, variation production in which a normal reach production is executed, SP reach production) Regarding the fluctuating performance), when the power supply that was stopped during the execution is restarted and the execution period of the performance ends, the temporary stop display (swinging fluctuation/swinging display) of the performance pattern 70a is not performed and " 753'' loss effect pattern 70a, or a jackpot effect pattern that is the same combination of effect patterns or a combination of different effect patterns as the reach combination based on the effect patterns that formed the reach state before the power cut-off is displayed in a stopped state (static display). will be done.

In addition, regarding the special symbol TZ, it depends on whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, whether the subsequent state is the normal gaming state, or the specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state). Regardless of whether there is a special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ has the same display mode (shape, design) and is statically displayed (statically displayed) with numbers in the same combination as the performance symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 158(l), the image display device displays information indicating the type of jackpot game ("MAX jackpot" indicating that it is the first jackpot game). The opening performance including the first pending icon display area 70B, the second pending icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

Although the winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or returning screen is displayed, the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot) ) may turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating production in which the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking variation) and then stopped is restarted. After the control state of the game is restored, the special symbol stop designation command is issued after the special symbol fluctuation time has passed (if the special symbol stop designation command is missed and the state then shifts to the customer waiting state, the customer waiting state When a state designation command) is received, the performance pattern 70a is not temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation/swinging display) but is displayed stopped (still display). Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the production symbols 70a are displayed in a stopped state (static display) after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the combination of performance symbols that are the initial symbols when the power is restored is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) instead of the normal loss performance symbols. Therefore, there is no need to perform complicated processing such as determining by lottery the performance symbols to be displayed statically, and the power restoration restores the control state of the game, and is executed when the power supply stops. It becomes possible to understand that the fluctuating performance that was being performed has ended.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the production symbols are stopped and displayed (stationary display) after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the jackpot effect symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state (static display). Therefore, it is possible to understand that the control state of the game is restored due to the power supply restoration, and that the fluctuating performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped was a jackpot fluctuating performance.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, when the combination of jackpot production symbols is displayed in a stopped state (static display) after the control state of the game is restored, a reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (still display) a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is different from the reach combination based on the effect patterns that were previously used. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of the jackpot effect symbols that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, if the fluctuation production that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped includes the execution period of the promotion production described above, the power supply is resumed and the control is performed. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect symbols are stopped and displayed (stationary display) without executing the promotion effect. Therefore, since no unnecessary effects are performed before the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (statically displayed), the player is immediately informed that the variable effect that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped was a jackpot variable effect. It becomes possible to understand the

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, there are two cases in which the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and a case in which the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is restored, and a case in which the power supply is stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation production. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after power supply is restarted is the same as when power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it is possible to perform simple display control without being aware of whether a loss fluctuation effect or a jackpot fluctuation effect is being executed, and the processing load associated with display control after power supply is resumed. It becomes possible to reduce the

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the special symbol TZ will be displayed in the same manner as before the power supply was stopped after the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Then, numbers that are in the same combination as the effect pattern 70a are displayed in a stopped state (statically displayed). Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that the fluctuating performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, if the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next Until the fluctuation effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that the display space (display area) of the icon becomes larger than the background image, etc. The effect image is secured in a state where it can be displayed, but the icon is not displayed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, if the power supply that was stopped while the pending icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next Until the fluctuation effect starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the hold icon display area, so that the display space (display area) of the hold icon is in a state where it is possible to display a effect image such as a background image. It is now reserved and a pending icon is displayed. Therefore, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to know that the suspended variable performance has not disappeared, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the variable production (winning opening lamp NR) corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production is changed to the lighting color (blue, red, etc.) with high expectation of winning the jackpot. If the power supply that was stopped during the memorization of the special figure judgment information that will change to , rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR will be hit as a jackpot without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (lights off or lit in white) does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as the lamp change performance being restarted even though the fluctuating performance has not been executed.

In addition, after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect ends, a stop screen with the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ stopped is displayed, but as in the case of a loss, when the power is restored, A second standby screen may be displayed in which the initial symbol "753" production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

In addition, after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuating effect ends, a stop screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed, but the jackpot effect pattern 70a is displayed without displaying the stop screen. It is also possible to start an opening performance of a jackpot game in which the is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening performance, a jackpot special symbol TZ of "777" may be displayed, or a special symbol "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. TZ may also be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the loss fluctuation performance ends, the performance symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation performance ends, the jackpot The opening performance of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the performance symbols 70a and the special symbols TZ are stopped and displayed.

In addition, if it is possible to perform a specific performance that incites whether or not a jackpot game will be executed without displaying the performance symbol 70a in a reach state in a variable performance (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed), the specific performance can be executed. After the power supply that was stopped during execution of the performance is resumed and the control state is restored, if it is a loss, the performance symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed in a stopped state (static display), and if it is a jackpot, the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a stopped state. The jackpot effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display).

In addition, when the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) after the control state of the game is restored, one of the combinations of jackpot effect symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot game to be executed thereafter. may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is "222" and " 444'', ``666'', and ``888'', and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is ``111'', ``555'', and ``999''.

If the reach combination before the power supply is stopped is "1↓1" which constitutes a part of the jackpot effect symbol combination that suggests the execution of the third jackpot game, then the jackpot game to be executed after that is the first jackpot game. In the case of a jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is different from the reach combination based on the effect symbols that formed the reach state) is stopped and displayed, and then the game is executed. If the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, any one of "111", "555", and "999" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is the same as or different from the reach combination of the effect symbols that formed the reach state) It is a good idea to stop and display the .

In addition, regarding the special symbol TZ, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, instead of being displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) with numbers that are the same combination as the production symbol 70a, it becomes a combination different from the production symbol 70a. The display may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) using numbers.

In addition, if the normal gaming state and the customer waiting state occur after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (stationary display), while the power supply is stopped. After restarting and restoring the control state, if the specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state) and customer waiting state, the production pattern 70a is not displayed in a stopped state (static display), The special symbol TZ may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display).

(Example of effects when restarting after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during execution of look-ahead effect effect, pending icon change effect, and lamp change effect)
FIGS. 159 and 160 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the prefetch effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1, second display section 70B2, and third display section 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the loss effect pattern 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed when the player is in the game.

After that, when the pre-variation variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 159(b), the variation display of the production pattern 70a is started, and the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and The first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the third display section 70B3 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C, the first display section 70B1, and the second display section 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, thereby starting the first effect of the look-ahead effect, and the first pending icon ( When the display mode of the final icon display mode (red icon) changes to a blue icon, the pending icon change effect starts, and accordingly, the winning slot lamp NR changes from an off state to a blinking blue state, and the lamp changes to a blue icon. The change production begins.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 159(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect image 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 159(d), after the performance symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss performance symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. .

After that, when the pre-variation variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 159(e), the variation display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first display part 70B1 and the second display part 70B2 The displayed first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, by displaying the effect image EF around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, the second look-ahead effect effect is started, and the pending icon change effect and lamp change effect continue. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 159(f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect image 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, as shown in FIG. 159(g), the image display device becomes non-display and the winning slot lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. To maintain a state where the lights are turned off without restarting the change performance.

Then, when the production control board 130 receives the second power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. A returning screen including the above is displayed during the execution period of the advance variation, but the winning a prize opening lamp NR remains in the off state here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the advance variation ends (the production control board 130 receives a special symbol stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. Without doing so, a stop screen with the initial symbol 753, the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (statically displayed), and the lamp change effect is restarted beforehand. The fluctuation ends.

At this time, the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B displays a white icon instead of the blue icon before the power supply is stopped, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. By displaying a rectangular area image, a display space (display area) for the icon is secured in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 160(k), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the 1 pending icon (white icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 160(l), the lines uttered by ally A are displayed in the lines window displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 emits a voice corresponding to the lines, "Your chance has arrived!" When the is displayed, the dialogue preview performance is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 160(m), the effect pattern 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, and the center variable display area is A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed variably is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. The pending icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when the SPSP reaches reach, as shown in FIG. 160(o), the SPSP reach effect is started and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 160(p), the current jackpot game (here, the first The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "333" indicating the type of one jackpot game (1 jackpot game) and the special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (fluctuation fluctuation) and then stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation performance ends.

Although the winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or returning screen is displayed, the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot) ) may turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

In addition, if the special figure stop designation command cannot be received during the fluctuation performance (temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) of the performance pattern 70a), the performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped displaying (shaking fluctuation) will not be displayed stop. , the temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) will continue.

In addition, for icons that have changed from pending icons to new icons after power supply is resumed, a lottery will be held regarding the icon change effect at the start of the change, and if a winner is selected, the display mode of the icon will be changed according to the result. However, the lottery related to the lamp change effect may not be executed anew, and the winning slot lamp NR may be maintained in a turned off state so that the lamp change effect is not restarted.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 to 160, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the look-ahead effect production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure that was stored at the time of restoration is restored. The continuous preview performance is not restarted in the variable performance corresponding to the judgment information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continuous preview presentation from being restarted in an incomplete state due to the stoppage of power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The same applies to the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of another continuous notice performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 to 160, when the icon is displayed as a special icon (including cases where the final display mode has not changed and cases where the final display mode has changed) When the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the pending icon that was displayed as a special icon is displayed as a normal icon. Therefore, the user does not need to be aware of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 to 160, the variable production (winning opening lamp NR) corresponding to the pending icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production is changed to the lighting color (blue, red, etc.) with high expectation of winning the jackpot. Even if the power supply that was stopped during the memorization of the special figure judgment information that will cause the lamp to change to a rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the winning slot will not restart without restarting the lamp change effect. The lamp NR is set in a notification mode (unlit or lit white) that does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as the lamp change performance being restarted even though the fluctuating performance has not been executed.

(Specific example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 1 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG. 161 is a timing chart 1 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 162(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 1 of FIG. 161. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "2" with one frame of non-animation. becomes "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. will be displayed as . In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Incidentally, the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ is performed by blinking the LED of the sub-first variable display 81, but since blinking cannot be expressed in the drawing, the variable display is expressed by double circles. It shall be. Further, the LED of the sub-first hold display 83 is also indicated by a double circle to indicate that it is blinking.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m receives the commands stored (understood). The number of reserved special drawings changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed in the pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 162(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 162(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 162(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 162(d)). .

Thereafter, at timing T5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons was completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 162(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 162(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation accordingly (see FIG. 162(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start a variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 162(g)).

Then, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 162) g)).

Then, at timing T9, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotating motion (performance motion) (see FIG. 162(h)).

Next, at timing T10, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("962"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the icon TI continues to rotate (actual effect) (see FIG. 162(i)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. (See FIG. 162(i)).

Then, at timing T12, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is "0", so the state is set to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). to move to. When the performance control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the variable performance.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (actual stop), and the special symbols TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ comes to a real stop in a losing mode (extinguished) (see FIG. 162(j)).

In addition, at the timing of T7, although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The case where the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the command is the same as the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. processing will be performed.

Here, specific example 1 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state has been described, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), the basic The flow is similar to the explanation above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

In addition, if the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed, but the main control In the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the connector of the command line for communication between the board 110 and the production control board 130, no abnormality notification is performed.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A second specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164. FIG. 163 is timing chart 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands, and FIGS. 164(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in timing chart 2 of FIG. 163. This is example 1 of the performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbols starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m receives the commands stored (understood). The number of reserved special drawings will be changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed in the pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 164(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 164(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 164(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 164(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the icon shift display is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 164(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 164(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Further, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect continues (see FIG. 164(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 164(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 164(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The surplus hold icon HI displayed third in the hold icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (past fluctuations) including the effect pattern 70a that is shifted from the stop position are erased. The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 164(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). (See Figure 164(h)).

Note that when the surplus reservation icons are deleted and the necessary reservation icons are displayed in a shifted manner, the surplus reservation icons may be left as they are and the necessary reservation icons are displayed in a shifted manner.

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 164(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is able to normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production is executed while the special symbol is displayed with the first special symbol pending number being “0”. Also in (target of expectation suggestion by look-ahead zone effect), normal zone effects (display of look-ahead zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are executed according to the preview scenario, and the effect pattern 70a is the main one. The look-ahead zone effect ends when it stops.

Note that at timings T7 to T9, the production control unit 130m successfully received the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received.

Here, at the timing of T10, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "1". 4" to "2", and when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number grasped by the production control unit 130m. If the deviation from the current number of reservations is "2", the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In addition, here, we have explained the second specific example where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A third specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 and 165. FIG. 163 is timing chart 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands, and FIGS. 165(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in timing chart 2 of FIG. 163. This is a second example of a performance.

Note that FIG. 164 and FIG. 165 differ in that a look-ahead effect performance is performed instead of a look-ahead zone performance as a continuous preview performance, and an icon change performance is also performed, so a description of the common parts will be omitted here. However, only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols begins. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI (FIG. 165). d)).

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 165(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is started. Specifically, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 165(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI continue (see FIG. 165(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Further, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 165(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 165(g) is maintained without performing the prefetch effect production (displaying the effect image EF, outputting the effect sound effect).

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 165(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The surplus hold icon HI displayed second in the hold icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and the third hold icon HI displayed is erased with one frame of non-animation. Displayed second. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 165(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Moreover, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the pre-read effect production is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a according to the preview scenario, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 165(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the completion of the shift display of the icon, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, the icon change production is executed, and the production pattern 70a is moved at high speed. will be in a scrolled state. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a red icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 165(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation that is executed during the variation display of the special symbol where the first special symbol pending number becomes “0” Also in the performance (the object of which the expectation level is suggested by the pre-read preview performance), the pre-read effect performance (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change performance (the icon change performance) are executed. Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops displaying, and the icon change performance ends.

Note that at timings T7 to T9, the production control unit 130m successfully received the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received.

Here, at the timing of T10, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "1". 4" to "2", and when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number grasped by the production control unit 130m. If the deviation from the current number of reservations is "2", the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In addition, here, we have explained the third specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 163 to 165, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first hold icon) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) are If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number while displaying the reserved number of special figures (information), the surplus reserved icon of the specific number of reserved icons (for example, the third The required number of pending icons (for example, the first and second pending icons) are displayed in a shifted manner, without shifting display of pending icons. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 163 to 165, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) (first hold information) If the production control unit 130m receives a command to start a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number while the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number, the number of reserved icons that are one less than the specific number is displayed, and then the predetermined number of reserved symbols are displayed. The icon is now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 163 to 165, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, one) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. For example, if the performance control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number while displaying the number of reservations (for example, 3), the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number will be displayed. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending items without having to do so. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 4 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A fourth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. FIG. 166 is a timing chart 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 167(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. 166. This is example 1 of the performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbols starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m receives the commands stored (understood). The number of reserved special drawings will be changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed in the pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 167(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 167(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 167(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 167(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the icon shift display is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 167(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 167(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Further, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect continues (see FIG. 167(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The surplus hold icons HI displayed in the second and third positions of the hold icon display area 70B are erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (including the effect pattern 70a that is shifted from the stop position) are erased. The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 167(h)).

Then, one necessary hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). (See Figure 167(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T13, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 167(i)).

Thereafter, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the look-ahead zone performance ends when the performance symbol 70a comes to a final stop.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received.

Here, at the timing of T12, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". If the difference between the number of reservations known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations known by the production control unit 130m is ``3'', the basic flow changes from ``4'' to ``1''. is the same as the explanation above.

In addition, here, we have explained the specific example 4 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 5 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 166 and 168. FIG. 166 is timing chart 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands, and FIGS. 168 (a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in timing chart 3 of FIG. 166. This is a second example of a performance.

Note that FIG. 167 and FIG. 168 differ in that a prefetching effect performance is performed instead of the prefetching zone performance as a continuous preview performance, and an icon change performance is also performed, so a description of the common parts will be omitted here. However, only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 168(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is started. Specifically, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 168(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 168(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Further, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 168(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start commands (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 168(g) is maintained without performing the prefetch effect production (displaying the effect image EF, outputting the effect sound effect).

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 168(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 168(g) is maintained without performing the prefetch effect production (displaying the effect image EF, outputting the effect sound effect).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period is extended (see Figure 168(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The surplus hold icons HI displayed first and second in the hold icon display area 70B are erased with one frame of non-animation, and the third hold icon HI is erased with one frame of non-animation. Displayed first in non-animated form. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantly derived and displayed).

Then, one necessary hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Moreover, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the pre-read effect production is executed. Specifically, a red effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 168(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T13, the icon change performance is executed at the same time as the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect performance is completed, and the performance pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotation operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 168(i)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received.

Here, at the timing of T12, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". If the difference between the number of reservations known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations known by the production control unit 130m is ``3'', the basic flow changes from ``4'' to ``1''. is the same as the explanation above.

In addition, here, we have explained the specific example 5 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (first hold icon) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) in the hold icon display area information), if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number, the predetermined number of reserved icons will be displayed without displaying a number of reserved icons that are one less than the specific number. The hold icon is now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (first hold information) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a predetermined number, the number of reserved special drawings will be one less than the specific number without displaying the reserved icon that is one less than the specific number. Two fewer hold icons are displayed, followed by a predetermined number of hold icons. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, one) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. For example, if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number while displaying the number of reservations (for example, 4), the number of reservations that are one and two fewer than the specific number is A predetermined number of pending items is displayed without displaying the number. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 6 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 169 and 170. FIG. 169 is timing chart 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands, and FIGS. 170(a) to (h) correspond to timing charts 4 (a) to (h) in FIG. 169. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbols starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m receives the commands stored (understood). The number of reserved special drawings will be changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed in the pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 170(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 170(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 170(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 170(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the shift display of the icons is completed, the pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Additionally, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 170(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 170(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, and output of the zone BGM) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (Fig. 170 ( g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Thereafter, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start commands (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T13, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Thereafter, at timing T14, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0". ” and a process is performed to set a waiting timer until the customer waiting demonstration performance starts.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The surplus pending icons HI displayed in the first to third positions of the pending icon display area 70B and the icons displayed in the icon display area 70C are erased with one frame of non-animation, and the icon change effect and The look-ahead zone performance ends. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived and displayed), and , the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ comes to a final stop in a loss mode (extinguished) (see FIG. 170(h)).

Note that at timings T7 to T13, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received.

Here, a case has been described in which the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command in a state where the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) is "3" at timing T14. Even when the customer waiting state designation command is received when the number of reservations is ``4'', ``2'', or ``1'', the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, we have explained the specific example 6 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 169 to 170, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the predetermined All the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production), including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position that has been set, are now displayed at the stop position (actual stop). ing. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the variable performance has ended (transition to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 7 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172. FIG. 171 is timing chart 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands, and FIGS. 172(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in timing chart 5 of FIG. 171. This is an example of a performance.

Note that FIG. 169 and FIG. 171 differ only in that the command received at timing T14 is a customer waiting designation command or an opening designation command, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and the differences will be omitted here. Only parts will be explained.

At timing T14, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains “3”, and it is a jackpot. Processing for starting the opening performance of the game is performed.

At this time, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E remains "3", and is displayed on the production pattern 70a and the icon display area. The pending icon HI and the corresponding icon are deleted, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are completed. In addition, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), the first lamp symbol LZ comes to a final stop in a loss mode (extinguished), and the opening effect image is displayed (Fig. 172 ( (see h)).

After that, during the jackpot game or after the end of the jackpot game (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), if the production control unit 130m can normally receive the first special figure reservation number designation command from the main control unit 110m. , the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is updated to the number according to the command with one frame of non-animation.

Note that at timings T7 to T13, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received.

Here, a case has been described in which the opening designation command is received at the timing of T14 when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "3". Even when the opening designation command is received when the number is "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, we have explained the specific example 7 in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production symbol 70a, the predetermined All of the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance), including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position where they are, are not displayed at the stop position (actual stop), and the jackpot game is The opening performance image is displayed. Therefore, the opening performance is not hindered by the performance symbols, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 8 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 8 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 173 and 174. FIG. 173 is a timing chart 6 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 174 (a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. 173. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, when the shift display of the icons is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and an icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 174(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning commands (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m will memorize (understand) The process for updating the first special figure pending number remains at "1" (see FIG. 174(b)).

Thereafter, at timing T3, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 174(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the pre-read zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, the pre-read zone effect continues, the blue icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (Fig. 174 ( d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the number of pending special symbols decreases from "2" to "1". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit Processing is performed to change the first special figure reservation number stored (kept) by 130m from "1" to "1", that is, to start the variable production without changing the first special figure reservation number.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first A hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed as a non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning) second in the hold icon display area 70B. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 174(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 174) (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (see FIG. 174). f)).

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance (SP ready-to-win performance ends), the left middle right performance symbol 70a temporarily stops in a reach-missing mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI continue (see FIG. 174(g)).

Then, at timing T8, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 174(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T9, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start a variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 174(i)).

Next, at timing T10, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon, and A changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 174(j) )reference).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

Note that at timings T2 to T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (commands at the time of winning, commands at the time of stopping) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (winning command, stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received.

Here, at the timing of T5, a case has been described in which the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1", but the first special figure pending number is "1". 0" to "0", when the number of reserved 1st special drawings changes from "2" to "2", when the number of 1st reserved special drawings changes from "3" to "3", in other words, the main control If the number of reservations stored (understood) by the section 110m and the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control section 130m are the same, the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In addition, although specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state has been described here, even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of reservation icons (first reservation information) are displayed in the reservation icon display area, the number of reserved special drawings is set to a predetermined number. When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is a number, display one more (for example, two) pending icons than a predetermined number, and then shift-display those pending icons. A predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, when a predetermined number (for example, one) of reserved numbers is displayed on the sub-first reserved display 83 or the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E, When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of pending figures becomes a predetermined number, the predetermined number of pending figures is displayed without displaying the number of pending figures that is one more (for example, two) than the predetermined number. It is designed to display the number. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, although the reservation icon (first reservation information) is not displayed in the reservation icon display area, while the icon is displayed, the number of reserved special drawings is "0". When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display, it displays a number of hold icons that are one more than "0" (for example, 1), and then shifts and displays the hold icons. The hold icon is no longer displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, while the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is displaying the reservation number of "0", the special symbol reservation number is When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that becomes "0", the number of pending items is "0" without displaying the number of pending items that is one more than "0" (for example, one). is designed to be displayed (maintained). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 9 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176. FIG. 175 is a timing chart 7 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 176(a) to (f) correspond to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. 175. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, when the shift display of the icons is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and an icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 176(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning commands (first special drawing reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m will memorize (understand) The process for updating the first special figure pending number remains at "1" (see FIG. 176(b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of first special symbols reserved that is stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning commands (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m will memorize (understand) The process for updating the first special figure pending number remains at "1" (see FIG. 176(b)).

Next, at timing T4, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning commands (first special drawing reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m will memorize (understand) The process for updating the first special figure pending number remains at "1" (see FIG. 176(b)).

Then, at timing T5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 176(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the pre-read zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, the pre-read zone effect continues, the blue icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (Fig. 176 ( d)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the number of reserved special symbols decreases from "4" to "3". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first special figure pending number stored (understood) by 130m changes from "1" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first A hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in the second to fourth positions of the hold icon display area 70B as one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 176(e)).

Then, the necessary four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an expansion/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 176) (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (effect movement) (Fig. 176 ( f)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

It should be noted that at timings T2 to T6, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the commands (winning command, stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m, the commands (winning command, stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m ) is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, the same process will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T7, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "3". When the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "1" to "2", when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "2", when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1", in other words, the main control If the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control section 110m is greater than the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control section 130m, the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation. .

In addition, although specific example 9 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state has been described here, even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special symbol reservation number, the second special symbol reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the second special symbol It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of reservation icons (first reservation information) are displayed in the reservation icon display area, the number of reserved special drawings is set to a predetermined number. If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than the specific number, it displays a hold icon that is one more than the specific number (for example, three), and then , a specific number of pending icons are displayed by shifting and displaying those pending icons. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, when a predetermined number (for example, one) of reserved numbers is displayed on the sub-first reserved display 83 or the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E, When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of pending figures becomes a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than a predetermined number, the number of pending figures is one more than the specific number (for example, three). It is designed to display a specific number of pending numbers without displaying the . Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, although the reservation icon (first reservation information) is not displayed in the reservation icon display area, when the number of reserved special drawings is the predetermined number ( For example, if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is one (for example, one), it displays one more (for example, two) pending icons than the predetermined number, and then shifts those pending icons. By displaying, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 175 to 176, while the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is displaying the reservation number of "0", the special symbol reservation number is When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is a predetermined number (for example, one), the predetermined number of changes is displayed without displaying a pending number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). The number of pending items is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Summary of specific examples shown in Figures 161 to 176)
As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command while the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. The period, the period of variation of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ, and the output period of the BGM during variation are extended (continued) compared to the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period in which no performance is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, while the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a is extended (continued), the scrolling of the background image, the pending icon, and the rotation of the icon continue. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming extremely static and boring during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern 70a, the pre-reading notice presentation (icon change presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) is continued (executed). It looks like this. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the pre-read preview performance will not end, and the game can be improved by avoiding inconveniences that may cause player dissatisfaction. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, when the pre-reading notice presentation (icon change presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern 70a, Even if there is, the preview mode (type of icon, type of zone performance) of the pre-read preview performance does not change during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a. Therefore, there is no abnormality in the progress of the pre-read preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by avoiding inconveniences that may increase player dissatisfaction.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the predetermined stop The variable display starts after all the effect symbols 70a including the effect image 70a that is out of position (the effect symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) are displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived and displayed). It is supposed to be done. Therefore, the appearance at the start of the variable performance can be made better than when the variable display is started with the performance symbols 70a deviated from the stop position, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ does not stop and display, but continues to be displayed in a fluctuating manner. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ, and it is possible to reduce the control load. Furthermore, even if the performance symbol 70a is displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived and displayed), the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ can inform the player that a variable performance is being performed, which increases the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the icon changes to normal time. It is designed to be erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than (10 frames of animation when a stop command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make the newly executed variable performance less likely to be hindered by the deletion of the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a in which the prefetch notice performance (icon change performance, prefetch zone performance) is continued (executed), the performance control unit 130m If the start command is normally received, the pre-read preview performance can be executed even in the newly executed variable performance. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the pre-read preview performance will not end, and the game can be improved by avoiding inconveniences that may cause player dissatisfaction. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a in which the prefetch notice performance (icon change performance, prefetch zone performance) is continued (executed), the performance control unit 130m If the starting command is normally received, in the newly executed variable performance, it is possible to execute a performance with contents corresponding to the scenario of the pre-read preview performance. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the progress of the pre-read preview performance will not be abnormal, thereby avoiding inconveniences that may increase player dissatisfaction. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A tenth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178. FIG. 177 is a timing chart 8 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 178(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG. 177. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continuing and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning commands (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m will memorize (understand) No processing is performed to update the number of reserved first special drawings, which remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command for which the first special figure reservation number is "2" has not been received, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved figures remains "1", and the reserved icon HI is not displayed in the second position corresponding to the first reserved number of special figures "2" in the first reserved icon display area 70B (FIG. 178(a)) reference).

Thereafter, at timing T3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (understands) the winning command. The number of reserved special drawings will be changed from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first In the second part of the hold icon display area 70B, which corresponds to the first special figure hold number "2" for which the winning command could not be received, the hold icon HI is not displayed and the first special figure hold number "3" is displayed. The third hold icon HI corresponding to `` is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 178(b)).

Next, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 178(c)).

Then, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 178(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the number of pending special symbols decreases from "3" to "2". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) first special figure pending number changes from "3" to "2" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation, and the first In the pending icon display area 70B, the second pending icon HI corresponding to the first special figure pending number "2" for which the winning command could not be received is additionally displayed as one frame of non-animation (in the normal size from the beginning). The three currently displayed pending icons HI are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 178(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 178(f)).

Next, at timing T8, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Furthermore, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 178(g)).

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 178(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 178(i)).

Next, at timing T11, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon, and A changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 178(j) )reference).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

Note that at timing T2, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (winning command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on reception of this command Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the command, the same processing as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. You will be killed.

Here, at timing T3, when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "1", a winning command is received that makes the first special figure pending number "3". As explained above, when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "1", a winning command is received that causes the first special figure pending number to be "4". In this case, when the first number of reserved special symbols stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m is "0", the winning number becomes one of "2", "3", or "4". Even when a time command is received, the basic flow is the same as that described above.

In addition, here, we have described specific example 10 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the hold icon (first hold information) is displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. is not displayed, if the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings is one more than the predetermined number (for example, three), a predetermined number of reserved icons in the reserved icon display area is displayed. Instead of displaying the hold icon in the area corresponding to the number (for example, the second), the hold icon is displayed in the area (for example, the third) that corresponds to a specific number of the hold icon display areas. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less interested in the game by avoiding the inconvenience of having the player recognize the incorrect number of reservations.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the number (for example, one If the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number while displaying the number of reserved It is designed to display a specific number of pending numbers without displaying them. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the hold icon (first hold information) is displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. is not displayed, if the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings is a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than a predetermined number, a predetermined number of reserved icons in the reserved icon display area are displayed. (for example, the area corresponding to the specific number of the pending icon display areas) without displaying the pending icon in the area corresponding to the number one less than the specific number (eg, the third) from the area corresponding to the specific number (for example, the second) For example, the hold icon is displayed at the fourth position. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less interested in the game by avoiding the inconvenience of having the player recognize the incorrect number of reservations.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the number (for example, one If the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than a predetermined number while displaying the number of pending special drawings (4), A specific number of pending numbers is displayed without displaying a pending number that is one less. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the hold icon is not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas, and If the production control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a predetermined number while displaying a reservation icon in an area (for example, the third) corresponding to a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than that, After displaying a specific number of pending icons by additionally displaying a pending icon in an area corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, the second) of the pending icon display areas, by shifting and displaying those pending icons, a predetermined number of pending icons can be displayed. A hold icon is now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, an area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas and a number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, If the number of special drawings on hold is When the production control unit 130m receives a start command that is one less than the specific number, an area corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, the second) of the pending icon display areas and a number one more than the predetermined number are displayed. (for example, 3) to display a specific number of pending icons, and then shift and display those pending icons to display one less than the specific number of pending icons. It is designed to be displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, regarding the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command, while it is displayed as a pending icon, Although the icon change effect is not executed, the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to failure to receive the winning command normally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 2 described in FIGS. 163 and 164 (modification 1 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 and 179. 179(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in timing chart 2 of FIG. 163.

Note that since FIG. 164 and FIG. 179 are the same up to the timings T0 to T9, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained here.

At timing T10, when the stop time of the special symbol passes, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the main control There is an inconsistency caused by a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the section 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control section 130m (ordinarily there is a discrepancy of 1). However, since an abnormality (deviation of 2 or more) has occurred, the look-ahead zone performance is terminated.

Specifically, the pre-reading zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the fluctuating BGM is output (see FIG. 179(h)).

In addition, the surplus hold icon HI displayed second in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased as a non-animation for one frame, and the hold icon HI displayed third is erased for one frame. It is displayed second in non-animation. All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (FIG. 179) (see (h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 179(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 179(i)).

(Modification 2 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification example (modification example 2 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) of the specific example 3 described in FIGS. 163 and 165 will be described using FIGS. 163 and 180. FIGS. 180(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to timing charts 2 of FIG. 163 (a) to (i).

Note that since FIG. 165 and FIG. 180 are the same up to the timings T0 to T9, a description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described.

At timing T10, when the stop time of the special symbol passes, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the main control There is an inconsistency caused by a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the section 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control section 130m (ordinarily there is a discrepancy of 1). However, since an abnormality (deviation of 2 or more) has occurred, the icon change performance and the look-ahead effect performance are terminated.

Specifically, the surplus hold icon HI (blue icon) displayed third in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 180(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 180(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 180(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, a variable production is executed to display a variable display of a special symbol whose first special symbol reservation number becomes “0”. (The target of the expectation level suggestion by the pre-read preview presentation) also, the pre-read effect presentation and the icon change presentation will not be executed.

In this way, according to the modified examples shown in FIGS. 179 to 180, the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the production control unit 130m are If an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality (normally a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction, but an error of 2 or more in the decreasing direction), a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect) , icon change performance, look-ahead effect performance). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the execution of a pre-read preview effect during the execution of a variable effect that is not normally subject to execution of the pre-read preview effect, and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. It becomes possible to suppress this.

(Variation 3 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 8 described in FIGS. 173 and 174 (modification 3 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 181. 181(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in timing chart 6 of FIG. 173.

Note that since FIG. 174 and FIG. 181 are the same up to the timings T0 to T4, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained here.

At timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit Processing is performed to change the first special figure reservation number stored (kept) by 130m from "1" to "1", that is, to start the variable production without changing the first special figure reservation number.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the main control There is an inconsistency caused by a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the section 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the production control section 130m (ordinarily, the number of reserved special symbols is in the decreasing direction). Since an abnormality in which the numbers are the same even though they are different from each other) has occurred, the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated.

Specifically, the pre-read zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Additionally, the first blue icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to a white icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed with one frame of non-animation ( (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 181(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 181) (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig. 181 ( f)).

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the left center right performance symbol 70a temporarily stops in a reach-miss mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 181(g)).

Then, at timing T8, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 181(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T9, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start a variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 181(i)).

Next, at timing T10, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 181(j) )reference).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 181, a command is created between the first special figure reservation number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure reservation number stored in the production control unit 130m. If an inconsistency occurs due to an abnormality (normally a deviation of 1, but an abnormality where the number is the same), the pre-reading notice presentation (pre-reading zone presentation, icon change presentation, pre-reading effect presentation) will be terminated. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the execution of a pre-read preview effect during the execution of a variable effect that is not normally subject to execution of the pre-read preview effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress this.

(Variation 4 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 9 described in FIGS. 175 and 176 (modification 4 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described using FIGS. 175 and 182. 182(a) to (f) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. 175.

Note that since FIG. 176 and FIG. 182 are the same up to the timings T0 to T6, a description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described.

At timing T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first special figure pending number stored (understood) by 130m changes from "1" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the main control There is an inconsistency caused by a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the section 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control section 130m (original number is decreasing). Since an abnormality, which is a deviation of 1 or more in the increasing direction, occurs, the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated.

Specifically, the pre-read zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Additionally, the first blue icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to a white icon after one frame of non-animation, and the second to fourth pending icons HI (white icons) become one frame of non-animation. Additional display (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 182(e)).

Then, the necessary four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 182) (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (effect movement) (Fig. 182 ( f)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 182, a command is created between the first special figure reservation number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure reservation number stored in the production control unit 130m. If an inconsistency occurs due to an abnormality (an abnormality in which there is a deviation of 1 or more in the increasing direction instead of a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction), a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change) It is designed to end the performance (pre-read effect performance). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the execution of a pre-read preview effect during the execution of a variable effect that is not normally subject to execution of the pre-read preview effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress this.

(Variation 5 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 10 described in FIGS. 177 and 178 (modification 5 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 and 183. 183(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG. 177.

Note that since the timings from T6 to T11 in FIG. 178 and FIG. 183 are the same, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained here.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continuing and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (presentation operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning commands (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m will memorize (understand) The process for updating the first special figure pending number remains at "1" (see FIG. 183(a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of first special symbols reserved that is stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m receives the commands stored (understood). The number of reserved special drawings will be changed from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The second hold icon HI in the hold icon display area 70B is displayed as a non-animated frame of 1 frame, and the third hold icon HI is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (gradually increasing from a very small size). (see FIG. 183(b)).

Next, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 183(c)).

Then, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 183(d)).

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, the hold icon (first hold information) is displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. When the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number when the number of reserved special drawings is A hold icon is additionally displayed in an area corresponding to a specific number (for example, the second) and an area corresponding to a specific number (for example, the third). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less interested in the game by avoiding the inconvenience of having the player recognize the incorrect number of reservations.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, a number (for example, one) less than a predetermined number (for example, two) is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. When the presentation control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than a predetermined number while displaying the number of reserved numbers, display the predetermined number of reserved numbers. Instead, it displays a specific number of pending items. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, the hold icon (first hold information) is not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. In some cases, when the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings is a specific number (for example, four) that is more than a predetermined number, an area corresponding to the predetermined number of the reserved icon display areas ( For example, a hold icon is additionally displayed in an area corresponding to a specific number (for example, the 4th place) from the 2nd place. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less interested in the game by avoiding the inconvenience of having the player recognize the incorrect number of reservations.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, a number (for example, one) less than a predetermined number (for example, two) is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. While displaying the number of pending special drawings, if the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a specific number (for example, four) that is more than the predetermined number, the number will be one less than the specific number from the predetermined number. It is designed to display a specific number of pending numbers without displaying a number of pending numbers. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, for the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the presentation control unit 130m could not normally receive the command at the time of winning, the icon change presentation is performed while the icon is displayed as a pending icon. Although the icon is not executed, the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to failure to receive the winning command normally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 13 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 184. The upper diagram in FIG. 184 is a timing chart 9 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 184(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted (decreased) displayed as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). Further, the icon TI is in a state where it is performing a rotating action (acting action).

Next, at timing T1, an auxiliary game is executed by the player hitting right, or a second starting opening is performed in an auxiliary game executed during a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) before entering the normal gaming state. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47 due to reasons such as the ball biting occurring in the movable member 47 (movable member 48) being resolved, the second special figure hold stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is activated. The number increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning occurs because the winning is entered into the second starting port 47 during the normal gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 184(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 184(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 184(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 184(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Further, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped and displayed (turned off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 184(e)). It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until a demonstration effect is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 184(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, processing is performed to end the first variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the production control unit The number of reserved second special drawings stored (kept) by 130m changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ permanently stops at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of second special symbols on hold displayed in the display area 70F will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A tenth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIG. 185. The upper diagram in FIG. 185 is a timing chart 10 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 185(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted (decreased) displayed as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, an auxiliary game is executed by the player hitting right, or a second starting opening is performed in an auxiliary game executed during a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) before entering the normal gaming state. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47 due to reasons such as the ball biting occurring in the movable member 47 (movable member 48) being resolved, the second special figure hold stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is activated. The number increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning occurs because the winning is entered into the second starting port 47 during the normal gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 185(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 185(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 185(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 185(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81 stops displaying (turns off) in a losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-second variable display 82. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 185(e)). It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the second start opening 47. The command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (2nd special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the production control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 185(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the first start opening 45, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. The number of second special drawings reserved is maintained at "1".

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing is performed to end the first variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and start the opening production. .

Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol is received, the first variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the first variable performance ends at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the first fluctuation performance (fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, in the normal gaming state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the first special If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 will display the loss state (lights out) as a stop. In this way, the sub-second variable display 82 does not stop displaying the jackpot mode (lit) lamp symbol LZ. Therefore, it is not necessary to carry out processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, the first special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol changes while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. When a command to stop the display (stop signal) is received, and a command to stop the variable display of the second special symbol while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, in the normal gaming state, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-second holding display 84 and the second number of reserved special drawings display area 70F. The number of reserved 2nd special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the second special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that started in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol, the loss of the second special symbol that started after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the first variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 11 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 11 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 186. The upper diagram in FIG. 186 is a timing chart 11 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 186(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1" to "0". As the second special symbol decreases, a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 186(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 186(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. No termination processing will be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 186(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 186(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second variable display 82 stops being displayed (turns off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 186(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until a demonstration effect is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 186(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, a process is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit The number of reserved first special drawings stored (kept) by 130m changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

(Specific example 12 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A twelfth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIG. 187. The upper diagram in FIG. 187 is the timing chart 12 when the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1" to "0". As the second special symbol decreases, a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since the winning is in the first starting port 45 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 187(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the second variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 187(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 187(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 187(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second fluctuation display 82 stops displaying (turns off) in a loss mode, but the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-first fluctuation display 81. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 187(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the presentation control section 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control section 110m at this timing, the presentation control section 130m performs a process of starting the opening presentation.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the first start opening 45. The command (win signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 187(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the second starting port 47, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the production control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings that is "1" is maintained.

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol and start the opening production. .

Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) for the first special symbol variable display that is started after the end of the first special symbol variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the second variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the second fluctuation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, in the normal gaming state, during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the second special symbol, the second special When a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-second fluctuation display 82 will display a stop state of loss (lights out). However, the sub-first variable display 81 is configured not to stop displaying the jackpot mode (lit) lamp symbol LZ. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the second special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, in the normal gaming state, the second special symbol changes while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. When the stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the stop command for the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed while the corresponding icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, in the normal gaming state, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-first holding display 83 and the first number of special drawings on hold display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the second variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 13 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 13 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 188. The upper diagram in FIG. 188 is the timing chart 13 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in a specific game state, and FIGS. This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 by the player hitting left, or a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the normal gaming state before entering the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). As the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the number of reserved first special symbols decreases from "1" to "0". Loss fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the first pending icon display area 70B. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the second starting port 47, and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output because the winning is entered into the second starting port 47 during the specific gaming state. (See Figure 188(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 188(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 188(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 188(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped and displayed (turned off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 188(e)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until the demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of the special symbol starts (see FIG. 188(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, processing is performed to end the variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the production control unit 130m The stored number of reserved second special symbols changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ permanently stops at “814”, which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved second special symbols displayed in the display area 70F will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode.

(Specific example 14 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 14 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 189. The upper diagram in FIG. 189 is the timing chart 14 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in a specific game state, and FIGS. This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 by the player hitting left, or a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the normal gaming state before entering the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). As the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the number of reserved first special symbols decreases from "1" to "0". Loss fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the first pending icon display area 70B. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the second starting port 47, and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since the winning is in the second start opening 47 during the specific gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 189(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 189(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 189(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 189(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81 stops displaying (turns off) in a losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-second variable display 82. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 189(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the second start opening 47. The command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (2nd special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 189(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the first start opening 45, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. The number of second special drawings reserved is maintained at "1".

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the performance control unit 130m, processing is performed to end the variable performance started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and start the opening performance at this timing.

Then, the relevant icon TI (normal icon, special icon ) will be displayed as one frame of non-animation, and the opening image will be displayed (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in a specific game state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol is received, the first variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, since the first variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in a specific game state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the first fluctuation performance (fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in a specific game state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the first special When a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 are In any case, the lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot mode (lit) is not displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, it is not necessary to carry out processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in a specific game state, while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is being displayed, the first special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in a specific game state, the first special symbol changes while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the first special symbol changes. When a command to stop the display (stop signal) is received, and a command to stop the variable display of the second special symbol while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in the specific gaming state, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub-second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-second holding display 84 and the second number of reserved special drawings display area 70F. The number of reserved 2nd special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the second special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in a specific gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol, a loss of the second special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the first variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 15 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 19 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIG. 190. The upper diagram in FIG. 190 is a timing chart 15 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in a specific game state, and FIGS. 190(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Further, one pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed (reduced) as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). In addition, the icon TI is in a state where it is performing a rotating action (acting action).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 due to reasons such as the player hitting left-handed, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases. Increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the specific gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 190(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 190(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 190(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 190(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-second variable display 82 stops being displayed (turns off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 190(e)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until a demonstration effect is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 190(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, a process is performed to end the variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit 130m The stored number of reserved first special symbols changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

(Specific example 16 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 20 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 191. The upper diagram in FIG. 191 is a timing chart 16 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in a specific game state, and FIGS. 191(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, the pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed (reduced) as a 20-frame animation in the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 due to reasons such as the player hitting left-handed, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases. Increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the specific gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 191(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 191(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will end. The processing to do so is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 191(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process to start the variable production is not performed (Fig. 191 ( d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second fluctuation display 82 stops displaying (turns off) in a loss mode, but the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-first fluctuation display 81. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 191(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the first start opening 45. The command (win signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 191(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the second starting port 47, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the production control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings that is "1" is maintained.

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol and start the opening production. .

Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, in a specific game state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) for the first special symbol variable display that is started after the end of the first special symbol variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the second variable effect ends at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to end the second variable effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, in a specific game state, during the execution of the second variation performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the second fluctuation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, in a specific game state, during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the second special When a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 are In either case, the lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot mode (lit) is not displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, in a specific game state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the second special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the icon is deleted upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, in a specific game state, the second special symbol changes while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. When the stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the stop command for the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed while the corresponding icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, in the specific gaming state, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-first holding display 83 and the first number of special drawings on hold display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in a specific gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the second variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a production lever device 23 is provided in addition to the production button 17 as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment. Note that a description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 192, a production lever device 23 that functions as an input device is provided on the central bottom side of the upper plate 11 so as to face the production button device 16 on the front and back sides.
The production lever device 23 is provided on the center bottom side of the upper tray 11 so as to be on the opposite side of the production button device 16, and includes a production lever 24 that can be pulled toward the front by the player, and a production lever 24. A production lever detection switch (not shown) that detects an operation on the production lever 24 and a lever vibration motor (not shown) that vibrates the production lever 24 are provided. Predetermined information can be input to 1.

The effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11, so when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibrations cause the upper plate 11 to act as a transmission member. The signal is transmitted to the production lever 24 via. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the production lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the production button 17 via the upper plate 11. In other words, when the player is manually operating one operation part, the other operation part vibrates (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut). When a vibration performance with/without the validity period of the operation part related to an in-performance, final performance, re-lottery performance, confirmed performance, etc. is executed, the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand via the other operation part. It is supposed to be done.

In addition, since the production button device 16 and production lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11 attached to the glass frame 4, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the production button 17 is driven, the vibration acts as a transmission member. It is also transmitted to the firing handle via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4, which perform the function. Further, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4.

(Decision production pattern determination table)
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a fixed effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the fixed effect in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 193, the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each successive performance pattern, and selected performance pattern are associated with the final performance pattern determination table. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestion production, validity period, production content) of each fixed production pattern is described.

"Effective suggesting effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur. Specifically, it includes a semi-transparent effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a semi-transparent effect imitating the effect lever 24. This is an effect in which a transparent effect lever image is moved and displayed on the first image display device 70, and a translucent effect button image and a translucent effect lever image are gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the fixed performance ends when the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 is operated once or when 5 seconds elapse.

The "operation target" in the valid period column indicates the type of the operation part (effect button 17, effect lever 24) whose operation is valid during the valid period. The operation becomes valid, and if it is the "production lever", the operation of the production lever 24 becomes valid.

"Promotional performance" is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation unit (performance button 17, performance lever 24) during the valid period, and specifically, it is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, performance lever 24), and specifically, it is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, performance lever 24), and specifically, it is a performance that encourages the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, production lever 24). As a result, an opaque effect button image or an opaque effect lever image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 5 different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 to 4 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.
The "protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

The "normal lever" indicates that a production lever image imitating the production lever 24 of a predetermined size is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque production lever image.
"Large lever rainbow" indicates that a production lever image imitating the production lever 24 larger than a predetermined size is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque production lever image.

“Operation unit status” in the valid period column indicates the status of the operation unit (production button 17, production lever 24) during the validity period, and “normal (white)” means that the target operation unit is not in production. If it is the button 17, it is in a normal state where it does not protrude and the effect button 17 emits white light. "Normal (red)" indicates that if the target operation section is the effect button 17, it is in a normal state in which it does not protrude, and the effect button 17 emits red light. "Normal (Rainbow)" indicates that if the target operating section is the effect lever 24, it is in a normal state in which it does not protrude, and the effect lever 24 emits light in rainbow colors. "Protruding (red)" indicates that if the target operation section is the production button 17, it is in a protruding state and the production button 17 emits red light. "Protruding (Rainbow)" indicates that if the target operation section is the production button 17, it is in a protruding state, and the production button 17 emits a rainbow color that confirms a jackpot. In addition, since the production lever 24 does not have a protruding state, it is only in a normal state.

The "performance content" indicates the content of the production that will be executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has passed, and includes "determined successful performance period 11 seconds (production mode H is 6 "Seconds)" means that the execution period of a performance related to a successful decision performance in production modes other than production mode H is 11 seconds, and that the execution period of a production related to a successful decision production in production mode H is 6 seconds. It shows.

"Failure" in the column of winning presentation mode refers to a failed presentation indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed because the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color. indicates that it will be executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and emits rainbow-colored light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. This indicates that a successful performance will be executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column is determined by the vibrator to vibrate the performance button 17 and is determined by the start of a successful performance (= when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period ends) This shows that a strong vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) in which strong vibrations are performed for 4 seconds and then strong vibrations are performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between is executed.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the button light emission column is determined by the effect button LED for causing the effect button 17 to emit light and starts from the start of a successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This shows that rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 17). Note that even if the operation target is the effect lever 24, the effect button 17 emits a rainbow light.

The expected jackpot for each promotional effect is ``normal button white'' < ``protruding button red'' < ``normal lever'' < ``protruding button rainbow'' = ``large lever rainbow.'' Furthermore, the jackpot expectation level for each operation unit state is "normal" < "prominent".

The first feature of the deciding performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the performance (direction) is carried out. Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the valid period occurs over the longest period of time that occurs during the variable performance. Therefore, inconveniences such as the player missing the operation of the performance button 17 can be suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 vibrates for the longest period as a strong vibration performance that occurs during a variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of successful performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24. Therefore, even after the vibration of the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 ends, the player's sense of elation can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (production button 17, production lever 24) in the second embodiment.

In the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, the type of power-on command and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and the operation mode at the initial operation and the number of steps for the initial operation are listed for reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 rises greatly, and the production button 17 and production lever 24 continuously vibrate for 2.5 seconds, After that, the production button 17 returns to its origin, and then the production button 17 and the production lever 24 vibrate intermittently for 2.5 seconds (1.25 seconds of vibration → 1 second interval → 1.25 seconds of vibration). During that period, the effect button 17 lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue.

"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power recovery designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is received, and the production button 17 is raised greatly, and the production button 17 and production lever 24 are The effect button 17 vibrates continuously for 2 seconds, after which the effect button 17 returns to its origin, and during this period, the effect button 17 lights up (lights up) in blue.

"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when a second power restoration designation command indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received; As the performance button 17 rises greatly, the performance button 17 and the performance lever 24 vibrate continuously for 2 seconds, and then the performance button 17 returns to its original position, and during that period, the performance button 17 is turned off.

Note that the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the production button 17 and production lever 24 are based on the vibration duration (dialogue) of the vibration production performed during the variable production. Vibration performance during preview performance, vibration performance during step-up preview performance, vibration performance during pseudo-sequence performance, vibration performance during development performance, vibration performance during cut-in performance, vibration performance during decisive performance, vibration performance during re-lottery performance The time is different from the vibration performance (vibration performance at the time of confirmation performance).

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the frame accessory (Production button 17, production lever 24) are different in the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step). Therefore, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the initial movement of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on performs an operation that is not present in the initial movement of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. One of the points is that it is designed to allow Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the production button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference lies in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the board accessory The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

In addition, the performance button LED is designed to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or during a jackpot game, but this is the same as when the power is restored to restore the performance button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be made to light up in a light emitting manner.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is the number of colors of light emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on, and the color of light emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the number of colors emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted light colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it includes luminescent colors that are not present in other models. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include a light emitting color that is not included in the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. Vibration time (vibration performance during dialogue preview performance, vibration performance during step-up preview performance, vibration performance during pseudo-sequence performance, vibration performance during development performance, vibration performance during cut-in performance, vibration performance during decisive performance) , vibration performance during re-lottery performance, vibration performance during confirmed performance). Therefore, it is possible to understand that the vibration is caused by the initial operation of the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial operation of the effect button 17, in which the presence or absence of the effect is detected. Therefore, the operation of the production button 17 and the operation of the button vibration motor and lever vibration motor can be checked at the same time, and the time required for operation confirmation can be shortened.

Note that the production lever 24 may be movable between the normal position and the production position, and may be operated (moved, vibrated) at the same time as the production button 17 during the initial operation, or in a predetermined order (for example, the production button 17 →It may be operated (moved, vibrated) using the production lever 24 or vice versa. In this case, the performance lever 24 may be placed in the normal position when the "normal lever" is selected in the final performance, and the performance lever 24 may be moved to the performance position when the "large lever" is selected.

In addition, although the effective period of the production lever 24 was only 5 seconds for a single hit related to a determined production, the production lever 24 was made to be operated multiple times, for example, for 5 seconds in a row, and each time the production lever 24 was operated. As the performance progresses (for example, by increasing the level gauge), when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), a success performance or a failure performance may be executed. The production lever 24 is caused to continue to be operated, and while the production lever 24 continues to be operated, the production progresses (for example, by increasing the level gauge), and the duration is determined to be a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). A success performance or a determined failure performance may be executed.

In addition, during the validity period related to the advanced performance or the pseudo continuous performance, the performance lever 24 may be operated once when a performance with high expectation of jackpot is executed, or the performance lever 24 may be operated continuously. Alternatively, the production lever 24 may be held down for a long time (for example, 2 seconds). In the case of consecutive pulls, the performance advances each time the performance lever 24 is operated (for example, by increasing the level gauge), and when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), an SPSP development performance or a pseudo continuous success performance is executed. It is a good idea to do so. In addition, if the effect lasts for a long time, the effect is advanced while the effect lever 24 continues to be operated (for example, by increasing the level gauge), and when the duration reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the SPSP development effect is started. It is preferable that a pseudo continuous success effect be executed.

Furthermore, when the effect button 17 or effect lever 24 is extended or continuously pulled, the effect button 17 or effect lever 24 may be made to vibrate weakly each time the effect progresses (the level gauge increases to the next stage). good.

In addition, the vibration intensity of the production button 17 has weak vibrations and strong vibrations, and the vibration intensity of the production lever 24 has strong vibrations, but even with the same strong vibration, the production lever 24 has a higher vibration intensity than the production button 17. The stronger vibration may have a higher vibration intensity, or the stronger vibration of the effect button 17 may have a higher vibration intensity than that of the effect lever 24.

Further, the type of vibration (vibration time, vibration intensity) may be varied depending on the type of validity period (operation promotion image: single press, long press, repeated press, prolonged press, continuous press). For example, a single press of the production button 17 for 3 seconds during a dialogue preview production or a pseudo-continuous production will be treated as 1 second of weak vibration, and a long press of the production button 17 for 4 seconds during an advanced production will be treated as 1 second of weak vibration, and a cut will be made. A single press of the production button 17 for 4 seconds during the in-performance will result in a weak vibration of 3 seconds, a single press of the production button 17 for 5 seconds during the final production will result in a strong vibration of 4 seconds → 5 seconds, and a production during the advanced production. If you press and hold the lever 24 for 4 seconds, it will be considered a strong vibration for 1 second.

Further, when the pending icon or the icon changes to a display mode with high expectation of jackpot (for example, red or rainbow), the production button 17 or production lever 24 may be vibrated weakly or strongly for one second. .

(Third embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. In addition, in the third embodiment, a starting winning device 430 including a first starting port 450 and a second starting port 470 is provided at the position where the first starting port 45 in the first embodiment was located, and the first The variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order of winning the first starting hole 450 or the second starting hole 470, and the holding for displaying the first pending icon and the second pending icon. The feature is that the icon display area 70B is provided, and the preliminary determination of special figure determination information based on winnings in the first starting port 450 and the preliminary determination of special figure determining information based on winnings in the second starting port 470 in the normal gaming state. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a judgment is made and a pre-read preview effect is executed. Note that a description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

(Configuration of starting winning device)
First, the configuration of the starting prize winning device 430 in the third embodiment will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 195, the starting prize winning device 43 has an internal space S having a ball entrance 440 at the upper part. Openings 440c and 440d are provided on both left and right sides of the vertically central portion of the internal space S to allow the inflow of game balls from the gaming area 5a. A port 450 and a first starting port detection switch 450a are provided, and a second starting port 470 and a second starting port detection switch 470a are provided at a position on the right side of the internal space S.

Further, directly below the ball entry port 440 and above the first starting port 450 and the second starting port 470, the game balls flowing in from the ball entering port 440 are placed into the first starting port 450 and the second starting port 470. A distributing member 440a that alternately distributes and flows downward is provided, and an exhaust is provided at the lower part of the internal space S for discharging the game balls that have entered the first starting port 450 or the second starting port 470 to the outside of the starting winning device 43. An outlet 440d is provided.

The distribution member 440a has a substantially inverted T-shape with an upright part rising upward from the left-right center of a flat plate part extending in the left-right direction, and a left ball receiving part is formed on the left side of the upright part. A right ball receiving part is formed on the right side of the upright part, and can swing in the left-right direction with the intersection of the flat plate part and the upright part being pivotally supported. In the right-slanted state, the left ball receiving part is located below the ball entrance 440, and when a game ball is received in the left ball receiving part, the left ball receiving part changes to the left-slanted state due to the weight of the game ball. The game ball flows down toward the first starting port 450, while the right ball receiving part is located below the ball entry port 440 in the left tilted state, and when the game ball is received in the right ball receiving part, the game ball is By changing the state of tilting to the right due to the weight and causing the game ball in the right ball receiving part to flow down toward the second starting port 470, the game ball flowing in from the ball entry port 440 is connected to the first starting port 450 and the second starting port. The liquid is distributed alternately to the ports 470.

(Specific example when a game ball hit to the left enters the starting hole in the normal gaming state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 195, a specific example will be described in which a game ball hit to the left in the normal game state enters the starting hole.

As shown in FIG. 195(a), in the normal gaming state, the second special symbol changes while "0" is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The display (second variation effect) is being executed, and the icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the pending icon is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70B, and the distribution is It is assumed that the member 44a is tilted to the right. When a game ball enters the ball entrance 44 in this state, the game ball is received by the left ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a is tilted to the left by the weight of the game ball. move in the direction of

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(b), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the left-inclined state, the game balls received in the left ball receiving part flow down toward the first starting port 450, and the game balls are After the ball enters the first starting port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reservation number increases by 1, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", and a reservation icon corresponding to the first special symbol is additionally displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the ball entry port 440, as shown in FIG. 195(c), the game ball is received in the right ball receiving part of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entry port 440, and The ball moves in a direction tilting to the right due to the weight of the game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(d), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the right-inclined state, the game balls received in the right ball receiving part flow down toward the second starting port 470, and the game balls are After the ball enters the second starting port 470, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the second reservation number increases by 1, the second special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and a reservation icon corresponding to the second special symbol is additionally displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the ball entry port 440, as shown in FIG. 195(e), the game ball is received in the right ball receiving part of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entry port 440, and The game ball moves in a direction tilting to the left due to its own weight.

In addition, at this time, in response to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) being stopped and displayed, the variable effect ends (the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed), and the icon display area 70C is The displayed icon disappears. Furthermore, with the start of the next variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect), the first special symbol pending number display area 70F becomes "0", and the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 70B changes. The icons are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(f), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the left-inclined state, the game balls received in the left ball receiving part flow down toward the first starting port 450, and the game balls are After the ball enters the first starting port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reservation number increases by 1, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", and a reservation icon corresponding to the first special symbol is additionally displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B.

(Specific example when a game ball hit left-handed enters the starting hole in a specific game state)
Next, using FIG. 196, a specific example will be described in which a game ball hit to the left enters the starting slot in a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states).

As shown in FIG. 196(a), in a specific game state, the second special symbol changes when "0" is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The display (second variation effect) is being executed, and the icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the pending icon is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70B, and the distribution is It is assumed that the member 440a is tilted to the right. When a game ball enters the ball entrance 440 in this state, the game ball is received by the left ball receiving part of the distribution member 440a located directly under the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a is tilted to the left by the weight of the game ball. move in the direction of

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(b), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the left-inclined state, the game balls received in the left ball receiving part flow down toward the first starting port 450, and the game balls are After the ball enters the first starting port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reservation number increases by 1 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", but since it is a specific game state, the reservation icon display area 70B shows the reservation corresponding to the first special symbol. Icon is not displayed.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the ball entry port 440, as shown in FIG. The ball moves in a direction tilting to the right due to the weight of the game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(d), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the right-inclined state, the game balls received in the right ball receiving part flow down toward the second starting port 470, and the game balls are After the ball enters the second starting port 470, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the second reservation number increases by 1, the second special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and a reservation icon corresponding to the second special symbol is additionally displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the ball entrance 440, as shown in FIG. The game ball moves in a direction tilting to the left due to its own weight.

In addition, at this time, in response to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) being stopped and displayed, the variable effect ends (the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed), and the icon display area 70C is The displayed icon disappears. Furthermore, with the start of the next variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect), the first special symbol reservation number display area 70F becomes "0", but the reservation displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B The icon is not shifted and displayed, and the variation effect is executed in a state where the icon is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(f), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the left-inclined state, the game balls received in the left ball receiving part flow down toward the first starting port 450, and the game balls are After the ball enters the first starting port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reservation number increases by 1 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", but since it is a specific game state, the reservation icon display area 70B shows the reservation corresponding to the first special symbol. Icon is not displayed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, in the normal gaming state, the pending icon corresponding to the first special symbol and the pending icon corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed in the pending icon display area 70B. are displayed in the order in which they entered the first starting hole and the second starting hole, and in a specific gaming state, the pending icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70B, but the pending icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. The hold icon is now displayed. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to easily grasp the number of times the variable performance is executed, while in the specific gaming state, it is easier to prompt the user to hit the right hand to win the second starting hole 47, which improves the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, in a specific game state, the reservation icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B, but the reservation icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area. The display of the number of reservations on the sub-first reservation display 83 is updated. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole in a specific gaming state, the number of reservations can be known, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, in the normal gaming state, the icon corresponding to the first special symbol and the icon corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed in the icon display area 70B. In the specific game state, the icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the icon display area 70B, but the icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, you can play the game without worrying about the type of special symbol, while in the specific gaming state, it is easier to prompt you to hit the right hand and enter the second starting hole 47, which increases the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

In addition, in the specific gaming state, the pending icon corresponding to the first special symbol and the icon are not displayed, but the pending icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed and the icon is not displayed. The icon may be displayed. In this way, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity that the variable performance is executed without the icon being displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The special icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 197. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing special icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m. It should be noted that the special icon change effect determination process is executed after the above-mentioned winning light emission effect execution process of the pre-reading effect process of the effect control unit 130m.

In step E580-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E580-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current special icon change effect determination process ends.

In step E580-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of performance (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E580-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for a special icon change effect (MAX hold chance effect, puzzle hold chance effect to be described later). If it is the executable period for the special icon change effect, the process moves to step E580-4, and if it is not the executable period for the special icon change effect, the current special icon change effect determination process is ended.

The "executable period for special icon change performance" refers to a case where a jackpot game is not being executed, a normal icon change performance is not being executed, or an icon change performance is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided.

In step E580-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current total number of reservations is the upper limit of "8". If the total number of reservations is the upper limit "8", the process moves to step E580-5, and if the total number of reservations is not the upper limit "8" (1 to 7), MAX The process moves to step E580-8 assuming that the pending chance effect is not to be executed.

"MAX hold chance performance" is a performance that can be executed when the total number of holds reaches the upper limit of 8, and all hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are displayed in a special display mode. This is a kind of pre-read preview performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the icon to a normal display mode or a special display mode when the icon appears.

In step E580-5, the sub CPU 130a executes the icon final form determination table for MAX hold chance (FIG. 198 (a ). The details of the icon final mode determination table for the MAX hold chance will be described later.

In step E580-6, the sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode of each pending icon by referring to the icon final display mode determination table for MAX pending chances, and in step E580-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode for each pending icon according to the determined icon final display mode. A MAX pending chance performance execution command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current special icon change performance determination process is completed. As a result, a MAX pending chance performance execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and the MAX pending chance performance is executed.

In step E580-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current total number of reservations is 2 or more and less than 5 (2 to 4). If the total number of reservations is 2 or more and less than 5, the process moves to step E580-9, and if the total number of reservations is 2 or more and not less than 5, the puzzle reservation chance performance is not executed this time. The special icon change effect determination process ends.

"Puzzle hold chance performance" is a performance that can be executed when the total number of holds is 2 or more and less than 5 (2 to 4), and changes the target hold icon to a special display mode, This is a kind of pre-read preview performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a staged performance in response to the pending icon displayed in a special display mode becoming the relevant icon.

In step E580-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current pending memory (the latest pending memory according to the prefetch designation command) is one for which an SP ready-to-win effect or higher is to be executed. If the SP reach effect or higher is executed, the process moves to step E580-10, and if the SP reach effect is executed less than the SP reach effect (no reach, normal reach effect, etc.), the puzzle is executed. The current special icon change performance determination process is terminated by assuming that the pending chance performance is not to be executed.

In step E580-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is any jackpot or reach effect of the previous pending memory to be executed. If there is no jackpot or reach effect, the process moves to step E580-11, and if there is a jackpot or reach effect, it is assumed that the puzzle pending chance effect is not executed. The special icon change effect determination process ends.

In step E580-11, the sub CPU 130a selects a puzzle hold chance pattern determination table (see FIG. 198(b)) for determining a puzzle hold chance production pattern (progress scenario). The details of the puzzle hold chance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E580-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a puzzle holding chance performance pattern with reference to the puzzle holding chance pattern determination table, and in step E580-13, the determined puzzle holding chance performance pattern executes the puzzle holding chance performance. Determine whether it is a performance pattern. If the performance pattern is to execute the puzzle hold chance performance, the process moves to step E580-14, and if the performance pattern is not to execute the puzzle hold chance performance, the current special icon change performance process is ended.

In step E580-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a puzzle hold chance performance execution command corresponding to the determined performance pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current special icon change performance determination process. As a result, a puzzle hold chance performance execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and the puzzle hold chance performance is executed.

(Icon final display mode determination table for MAX hold chance)
FIG. 198(a) is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table for the MAX pending chance that is referred to when determining the final icon display mode in the MAX pending chance effect.

The icon final display mode determination table for the MAX pending chance is associated with the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected.

The final icon display mode includes a character A card icon, which is a normal card icon, a character B card icon, a character C card icon, and a character C card icon, which are special card icons that indicate that a special game may be executed. A D card icon is set.

The expectation of winning a jackpot related to special card icons is in the order of (Character A card icon <) Character B card icon < Character C card icon < Character D card icon, and the character D card icon is expected to be a jackpot. It is a card icon that confirms.

Here, the first feature of the icon final display mode determination table for the MAX hold chance shown in FIG. 198(a) is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied according to the schedule variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the planned variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the proportion of special card icons is higher than when the planned variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in reach. The following points are selected. Therefore, the performance effect of the MAX hold chance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the second feature of the icon final display mode determination table for the MAX holding chance shown in FIG. 198(a) is that the special card icon is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. One of the points is that it is selected based on the ratio. Therefore, the performance effect of the MAX hold chance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, as a third feature of the icon final display mode determination table for the MAX hold chance shown in FIG. However, there is no indication that the card holding icon is likely to cause the ready-to-win effect to be executed, and whether or not the ready-to-reach effect is executed varies depending on the special figure determination information corresponding to the card holding icon. Therefore, the player has a sense of expectation regarding any card holding icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the execution rate of the icon change performance in the MAX hold chance performance does not change depending on the player's performance customization settings, but the icon change in the MAX hold chance performance does not change depending on the performance customization settings (normal setting, simple setting). The execution rate of the performance may be changed.

(Puzzle hold chance performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 198(b) is a diagram showing a puzzle holding chance performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a puzzle holding chance performance pattern (progress scenario).

The puzzle hold chance performance pattern determination table is associated with the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of each puzzle hold chance performance performance pattern, the number of holds, and the selected puzzle hold chance performance performance pattern. For reference, the advance variation in each performance pattern and the progress mode of the progress performance executed in the variation are described.

The performance patterns include performance pattern 0 in which the puzzle hold chance performance is not executed, and performance patterns 1 to 6 in which the puzzle hold chance performance is executed.

For example, in production pattern 6, four pending icons are displayed as puzzle pending icons, including the three pending icons that were already displayed when the game ball entered the starting slot and the newly displayed pending icon, and the puzzle progresses. The effect is started, and when the puzzle pending icon changes to the relevant icon before 3 changes, a puzzle piece appears from the relevant icon and an effect is performed to cover the background of the first image display device 70, covering 1/4 of the screen. 2, when the puzzle pending icon changes to the icon, a puzzle piece appears from the icon and covers the background of the first image display device 70, covering 1/2 of the screen. Before the change, when the puzzle pending icon changes to the icon, a puzzle piece appears from the icon and covers the background of the first image display device 70, covering 3/4 of the screen, and in the change, the puzzle piece appears. When the pending icon changes to the icon, a puzzle piece appears from the icon to cover the background of the first image display device 70, thereby covering 4/4 of the screen.

Here, the first feature of the puzzle suspension chance effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the selection rate of each effect pattern is varied according to the scheduled variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the performance pattern in which the puzzle hold chance performance is executed is better when the planned fluctuation pattern is SPSP reach or full rotation reach than when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is SP reach. One point is that it is selected by a high percentage of respondents. Therefore, the performance effect of the puzzle hold chance performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The second feature of the puzzle hold chance performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the performance pattern in which the puzzle hold chance performance is executed is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. One of the points is that it is selected based on the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the puzzle hold chance performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the puzzle hold chance effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that, similar to the MAX hold chance effect, multiple hold icons are displayed with puzzle hold icons that are different from the normal display mode. , the reach effect is not executed with the variable effect corresponding to the preceding puzzle hold icon, but the reach effect is executed with the variable effect corresponding to the last puzzle hold icon. Therefore, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectations for the final puzzle pending icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the puzzle hold chance production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that when the background of the first image display device 70 is covered and 4/4 of the screen is covered as a result of the progress production, One point is that the reach effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectations through the progress effect executed while the puzzle pending icon is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the puzzle hold chance performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the normal display mode and The rate at which the reach effect is executed during the fluctuating effect corresponding to the specific pending icon (for example, the first one) before the last pending icon displayed in different display modes is different (MAX pending). Chance production has a higher score). Therefore, the timing at which the player feels anticipation can be made different between the MAX hold chance performance and the puzzle hold chance performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the puzzle hold chance performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the normal display mode and The difference is that the rate at which the reach effect is executed during the fluctuating effects corresponding to the last pending icon displayed in different display modes is different (higher for the puzzle pending chance effect). Therefore, the timing at which the player feels anticipation can be made different between the MAX hold chance performance and the puzzle hold chance performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the MAX hold chance effect is executed than when the puzzle hold chance effect is executed, the specific number before the last hold icon (which is displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode) For example, the rate at which the reach effect is executed is higher during the variation effect corresponding to the hold icon that is the first), but the chance effect for puzzle hold is higher than the change corresponding to the hold icon that is the specific position. You may make it so that the rate at which the reach performance is performed during the performance is increased.

In addition, depending on the player's performance customization settings, the execution rate of whether or not the puzzle hold chance performance is executed does not change, but depending on the performance customization settings (normal setting, simple setting), the puzzle hold chance performance The execution ratio of whether or not is executed may be changed.

(Example of effect when MAX hold chance effect is executed)
An example of a performance when the MAX hold chance performance is executed in the normal gaming state will be explained using FIG. 199.

First, as shown in FIG. 199(a), a variable display (first variable effect) of the first special symbol is being executed in the effect mode A (normal game state), and the first image display device 70 displays the effect symbol. 70a and the special symbol TZ are being scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, "4" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and 7 is displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B. Two pending icons (white icons) are displayed, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting port 450, as shown in FIG. 199(b), the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "4" and the total number of reservations reaches the upper limit "8". ”, the MAX hold chance effect starts. Specifically, a character is displayed near the icon display area 70C, and a character image saying "MAX Hold Chance" is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 199(c), all eight hold icons are displayed. The card icon changes to show the card turned over.

Then, when the variable time has elapsed and the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop display at the losing number "728" as shown in FIG. 199(d), and the corresponding icon is displayed disappearing.

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 199(e), the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F becomes "3" and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are started, the pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon.

After that, when the character displayed in the vicinity of the icon display area 70C performs an action of turning over the card icon that is the icon, the icon is turned over and displayed as the character A card icon as shown in FIG. 199(f). A performance that suggests the level of expectation for the fluctuation performance is performed.

Then, when the game ball enters the second starting port 470, as shown in FIG. 199(g), the second special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "4", and the eighth display part of the reservation icon display area 70B A hold icon is additionally displayed, but since it is a hold icon that was displayed after the start of the MAX hold chance effect, it is displayed as a normal white icon.

Next, when the variable time has elapsed and the variable display of the first special symbol ends, as shown in FIG. The icon will disappear. From then on, the effects shown in FIGS. 199(f) to (h) are performed until the variable effect corresponding to the hold icon displayed as a card icon ends, and finally the character is deleted and the MAX hold chance effect is performed. ends.

In this way, in the MAX hold chance performance, all eight hold icons are displayed as the same card hold icon, and when the icon becomes the same, the card is turned over, indicating the expectation of a jackpot. . Therefore, the player will have a sense of anticipation for each hold icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the hold icon that is additionally displayed after the start of the MAX hold chance effect is displayed as a normal hold icon instead of a card hold icon. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to grasp the extent of the hold icon that is the object of the MAX hold chance performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of performance when puzzle hold chance performance is executed)
With reference to FIG. 200, an example of a performance when a puzzle hold chance performance is executed in a normal game state will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 200(a), the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is executed in the effect mode A (normal game state), and the first image display device 70 displays the effect symbol. 70a and the special symbol TZ are being scrolled (downward movement). In addition, "1" is displayed in each of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and two reservation icons (white icons) are displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B. The icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting slot 450, as shown in FIG. Chance production begins. Specifically, a text image reading "Puzzle Hold Chance" is displayed, and all three hold icons change to puzzle icons shaped like puzzle pieces.

Then, when the variable time period has passed and the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop display at the losing number "728" as shown in FIG. 200(c), and the corresponding icon is displayed disappearing.

Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 200(d), the first special symbol pending number display area 70E becomes "1" and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are started, the puzzle pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon. In addition, a progress effect is started, a puzzle piece appears from the icon, and an effect is performed in which 1/2 of the screen is covered by covering the upper right and lower left of the background image of the first image display device 70. , the expectation that the final puzzle pending icon, which is the target of the preview, will be a jackpot is gradually suggested.

After that, when the variable time period passes and the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop display at the losing number "872" as shown in FIG. 200(e), and the corresponding icon is displayed disappearing.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the special symbols TZ is started, and the puzzle pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon. In addition, the progress effect continues, and a puzzle piece appears from the icon, and an effect is performed in which 3/4 of the screen is covered by covering the lower right part of the background image of the first image display device 70, The level of expectation that the final puzzle pending icon, which is the target of the preview, will be a jackpot is gradually indicated.

After that, when the variable time period passes and the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop display at the losing number "827" as shown in FIG. 200(g), and the corresponding icon is displayed disappearing. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 470, the second special figure reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", and a reservation icon is additionally displayed on the second display part of the reservation icon display area 70B. Since this is a pending icon that was displayed after the start of the puzzle pending chance effect, it is displayed as a normal white icon.

Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the pending icon display area The last puzzle hold icon and the normal hold icon displayed in 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and the last puzzle hold icon is displayed as the icon. In addition, the progress effect continues and a puzzle piece appears from the icon, and an effect is performed in which 4/4 of the screen is covered by covering the upper left part of the background image of the first image display device 70. The level of expectation that the target final puzzle pending icon will be a jackpot is gradually suggested.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variation, the normal reach effect is started, and then the SPSP reach effect is executed, and when the variation time has passed and the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon that was previously used as a puzzle icon will be deleted.

In this way, in the puzzle hold chance effect, all the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the same puzzle hold icon, and a progress effect is performed each time the icon is displayed. Therefore, the player will have a sense of anticipation for the last pending icon, which is the subject of the preview, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the final puzzle pending icon, which is the target of the preview, is gradually indicated by the progress effect. Therefore, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectations for the last pending icon, which is the subject of preview, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the puzzle hold chance performance, the puzzle pieces simply covered the screen, but we drew objects and text information on each piece that expected the execution of the SPSP reach performance, and the four pieces When the entire screen is covered, the object or character information suggesting the execution of the SPSP reach effect may be completed.

In addition, the puzzle hold chance effect suggested the degree of expectation (possibility) that the SPSP reach effect would be executed, but even if it was made to suggest the degree of expectation (possibility) that the SP reach effect would be executed. Alternatively, it may suggest the degree of expectation (possibility) of a chance performance that is not a reach performance, or it may simply indicate the degree of expectation (possibility) of a big hit.

In this embodiment, all three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop (shaking motion) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, but the left and right performance symbols 70a stop and the center performance Only the symbol 70a may be temporarily stopped (swinging motion). At this time, all three performance symbols 70a may perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion), or the left and right performance symbols 70a may not perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion), and only the center performance symbol 70a may perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion). ).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the decoration part are made to fluctuate (production movement). Only one of them may be made to perform a fluctuating motion (acting motion).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a numeric part (identification character) does not perform a fluctuating motion (performance motion). The texture (surface pattern, etc.) may be made to perform a fluctuation motion (presentation motion), or the identification portion may be caused to perform a fluctuation motion (presentation motion) by adding a light emitting effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may be expanded/contracted. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the production pattern 70a is deviated from the stop position in the direction of shrinking (smaller than the normal size) or in the direction of expanding (smaller than the normal size). (large), it is recommended that it be displayed in the normal size at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a does not swing and the decorative part and number part protrude from the base image. It may also be made to fluctuate as shown in FIG. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the decorative part or number part is out of the base image, it will fit within the base image and be displayed at the stop position. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), since the effect pattern 70a is composed of only a number part (identification character), the decoration part fluctuates when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. Although the movement (performance movement) is not performed, the performance pattern 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decoration part consisting of a pattern effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. It may also be made to perform a fluctuating motion (acting motion).

Further, in this embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are not mentioned during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, but the frame lighting device 76 is not mentioned during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. At least one of the plurality of light emitting parts configuring 10 may be set in the same mode as during the temporary stop before the extension (light emission mode with lower brightness than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change or movement than during fluctuation). , at least one of the plurality of light emitting parts constituting the board lighting device 76 is set in the same light emission mode as during temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower brightness than during fluctuation, light emission with less change or movement than during fluctuation) mode, lights out). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 change (switch) to a light emission mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the production control unit transmits the start commands (special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m while the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. When 130m is received, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ continues, but even if the variable display is started after being instantaneously derived and displayed as in the production symbol 70a. good. In this case, regarding the special symbol TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbol TZ that is shifted from the predetermined stopping position at the stopping position.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a start command or a customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TI is displayed, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation, but when the icon TI is stopped It only needs to be shorter than 10 frames required for erasing the icon TI based on reception of a command, 20 frames required for shift display of the pending icon HI, and 10 frames required for additional display of the pending icon. You may also do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a start command is received while displaying a number of pending icons greater than the number of reserved special drawings, the excess pending icons HI are erased with one frame of non-animation. However, the number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames required for erasing the icon TI based on reception of the stop command, 20 frames required for shift display of the pending icon HI, and 10 frames required for additional display of the pending icon, for example. The data may be erased after 5 frames of animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of reserved special figures becomes a predetermined number, the number of reserved special figures and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is an inconsistency due to a command abnormality (an abnormality where the number is the same, an abnormality where there is a deviation in the increasing direction) between the number of reserved special drawings that was known (understood), one more than the predetermined number. After displaying a large number of pending icons, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed, but instead of displaying one more pending icon than the predetermined number, the predetermined number of pending icons are displayed as they are. You may also do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of reserved special symbols becomes a predetermined number, the production control unit 130m stores the number of reserved special symbols and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m ( If there is an inconsistency due to a command abnormality (an abnormality where the number is the same, an abnormality where there is a deviation in the increasing direction) between the number of reserved special drawings that was known (understood), the reception of this starting command Although the icon is displayed during the variable performance executed in response to the start command, the icon may not be displayed during the variable performance executed in response to the reception of the start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal icon is a white icon regardless of the type of performance mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be changed depending on the type of performance mode or gaming state. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of performance mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed depending on the type of performance mode or game state.

In addition, when changing the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon depending on the type of production mode or game state, the operation mode (performance movement mode) during the variable production should be changed depending on the form of the normal icon. Good too. Furthermore, even when changing the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon depending on the type of performance mode or game state, the operation mode (performance operation mode) during the variable performance can be changed depending on the form of the special icon. Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but special icons that suggest a change to a special icon (displayed in the process of changing to a special icon) and specific A specific icon indicating that a reach effect (for example, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect) will be executed may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to make the form and presentation operation of the special icon or specific icon different from the form and presentation operation of the normal icon or special icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hold icon is displayed when both the command for specifying the number of special drawings on hold and the pre-reading specifying command as the winning command are successfully received, but when the command for specifying the number of special drawings on hold is received. If the pre-reading designation command is not received normally, a pending icon is displayed, while the pending icon is displayed if the pre-reading designation command is normally received without receiving the special figure reservation number designation command. You may choose not to do so, or vice versa. In addition, when displaying a pending icon by receiving only one of the special figure pending number designation command and the prefetch designation command, the icon change performance for this pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance mode cannot be changed by operating the performance button 17 by the player, but the performance mode may be changed by operating the performance button 17. In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a based on a command abnormality in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, no operation for changing the production mode is accepted, that is, the production button 17 It is preferable to restrict changes in the production mode based on the operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the hold icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the hold icon is displayed as a button icon that prompts the operation of the effect button 17, and In response to the operation of the effect button 17 while the button icon is displayed, an operation change effect may be executed in which the button icon is changed to any one of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon. . In this case, in the operation change production, the production button 17 is changed from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, protrusion state in the production position) at a predetermined rate. You can do it like this. In this case, the rate at which the production button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change production is higher than the rate at which the production button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-mentioned dialogue preview production or decision production. It is better to make the rate of change higher.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the effect button image executed in the effective suggestion effect is semi-transparent, but it may also be a effect button image that is not translucent but only an outline, or a effect button image that is only a silhouette. good.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) or a development performance is executed, it is possible to perform a vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor). However, a movable frame member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and an action performance that moves the frame movable member may be performed when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed in the pre-reach preview performance or development performance. Instead of the vibration effect, an action effect that moves the frame movable member may be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to perform a vibration effect of the effect button 17 when performing a post-reach preview effect (pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decisive effect, confirmed effect) or when the symbols are aligned. , a frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the symbols are aligned, an action effect may be executed in which the frame movable member is operated, or instead of the vibration effect. It may also be possible to perform an action effect that moves the frame movable member.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is being executed, the title is not displayed to indicate that the reach effect is being performed, but the display format with different jackpot expectations (white characters, The title may be displayed using either red text, which has a higher jackpot expectation than white text, or rainbow text, which guarantees a jackpot, etc. After the title is displayed in white text, it changes to red text or rainbow text. You may also do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cut-in performance was performed at the end of the SP reach performance, but it is now performed in the middle (first period) or the end (second period) of the SP reach performance. Even if the production button 17 is more likely to be in the protruding state (the ratio of the protruding state is higher) when the cut-in production is performed at the end of the SP reach production than when the cut-in production is performed in the middle. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, a valid period is generated in which the performance button 17 is held down for a long time in the development performance, but a validity period is generated in which the performance button 17 is held pressed as a jackpot preview performance other than the development performance. At the same time, it may be possible to execute an operation progress effect that progresses the effect according to the long press period during the valid period. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the long press continues at a plurality of determination timings during the validity period, and determine to which stage the performance should be advanced based on the determination result.

<Contents 1 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, determination information acquired when acquisition conditions are met is stored as a reserved memory, and based on the determination information, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result. It is common to perform variable effects based on this. Some of these gaming machines display an increase or decrease in the number of pending images corresponding to each pending memory, or display an execution image corresponding to a pending memory in which a variable performance has been executed. There are some that allow players to grasp the progress of the game (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem in that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of pending games when the number of pending games changes.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and controls the performance of the game based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first pending information and a decreasing display of the second pending information. The display of the first pending information is decreased (subtracted by 1) before the frame update timing at which the decreased display of the second pending information (movement to the center of the adjacent display section in the pending icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the update (to the pending number) is completed is earlier. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decrease in the first pending information and displays the second pending information on which the fluctuating effect has started. It is possible to display a change to the execution information (the icon), and the change display of the second pending information to the execution information (movement from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the reduction display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the corresponding frame update timing. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first pending information and a decreasing display of the second pending information when the number of pending memories decreases. When the number of pending memories increases, it is possible to display an increase in the first pending information and an increase in the second pending information, and when the number of pending memories increases, the number of pending memories increases while the second pending information is decreased. If the number increases, even before the frame update timing at which the reduction display of the second pending information (movement to the center of the adjacent display section in the pending icon display area) is completed, the first pending information Incremental display of information (updating to the pending number by adding 1) is started. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decreasing display of the first pending information and displays the second pending information for which the variable display has started. It is possible to display a change in execution information (the icon), and when the number of pending memories increases, it is possible to display an increase in the first pending information and to display an increase in the second pending information. Yes, and if the number of pending memories increases during the change display of the second pending information, the reduction display of the second pending information (movement from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the frame update timing becomes, the display of an increase in the first reservation information (updating to a reservation number incremented by 1) is started. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means is capable of displaying an increasing number of the first pending information and an increasing display of the second pending information when the number of pending memories increases. Yes, and if the number of pending memories increases during execution of the fluctuating performance, the increasing display of the second pending information (enlargement of the pending icon additionally displayed in the pending icon display area to a normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increment display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number added by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame updating timing at which the first pending information is displayed. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold memories, and the fluctuating effect execution means is configured to It is possible to execute a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) that makes the execution of the special game expected, and when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means displays the first pending information. It is possible to display an increase in the number of pending memories and to display an increase in the second pending information, and when the number of pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, an increased display of the first pending information (one added (updating to the pending number) is executed, but the increasing display of the second pending information is executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the specific effect is completed, the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that was displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner) It is designed so that it will not happen. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the slave control means controls an image of a variable performance according to the result of the determination. A variable performance execution means executable by a display means (image display device), first reservation information (reservation number) indicating the number of said reservation memories, and second reservation information (representing an identifier corresponding to each of said reservation memories). and information display means capable of displaying a hold icon), and when the number of hold memories increases, the information display means displays an increase in the first hold information and an increase in the second hold information. The storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting port) as a first pending memory, and the storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting port), and The judgment information based on (entering the game ball into the second starting port) is stored as a second pending memory, and when the number of the first pending memories increases in the specific gaming state, the first pending memory The increase display (update to the pending number added by 1) is executed, but the predetermined condition is satisfied for the increase display of the second pending information (the last variable performance in the specific gaming state is completed, and the normal gaming state is returned) It will not be executed until By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2>
Conventional gaming machines are generally capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and executing the special game according to the result of the determination. Among these gaming machines, there were gaming machines that initialized the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restored it to the state before the power supply was stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that it is difficult to determine whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73, second movable member 73, member 74, production button 17), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , an effect control capable of performing an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing an effect operation (presentation operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means controls the operation mode (operation) of the initial operation in the case where the control state of the game is initialized and the case where the control state of the game is restored. mode, light emission mode, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, an operating means (effect button 17) that can be operated by the player and can emit light in a predetermined manner, and a power source are provided. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the stop of power supply, and the operation means after the start of power supply. and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission and effect light emission of the operating means during execution of the game, and the effect control means is configured to initialize the control state of the game. The light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission is made different depending on when the control state of the game is restored and when the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, a movable effect means (first movable member 73 , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation and effect light emission of the movable effect means during the execution of the game; ), and the performance control means is configured to control the initial operation mode (number of steps and Although the operation mode, etc. of each step is the same, the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable presentation means is made different. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, a movable effect means (first movable member 73 , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply and effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of a game, The performance means includes a first movable performance means (first movable member 73) and a second movable performance means (second movable member 74), and the performance control means is configured to control the performance when the control state of the game is initialized. and when the control state of the game is restored, at least a part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means are designed to differ. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after starting power supply, or stopping power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring to the previous state, and a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating performance accompanied by the performance; each of the plurality of performance patterns includes identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that enable each to be identified; When the control state of the game is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means to a first combination (for example, "135"), and adjusts the control state of the game. is restored, the identification characters in the plurality of effect patterns displayed on the display means are set to a second combination (for example, "753"). Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3>
Conventional gaming machines generally initialize the control state of the game after the power supply starts, or restore it to the state before the power supply was stopped. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that caused the movable performance means to perform an initial operation after the start of power supply (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the movable presentation means may not be able to perform a suitable initial operation.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the effect control means is such that the movable effect means is in the second position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) in which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the initial operation is performed after the movable presentation means returns to the first position. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the effect control means is such that the movable effect means is in the second position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) in which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, an operation is performed to return the movable presentation means to the first position, and when the movable presentation means returns to the first position, the initial operation is performed, but when the movable presentation means does not return to the first position, The above-mentioned initial operation is not performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect element is in the first position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable presentation means is Instead, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect element is in the first position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, perform the initial operation of the second movable presentation means. It is designed not to do this. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position at the time of start of power supply (power-on) at which the control state of the game is initialized. position, the first movable presentation means performs a return operation to the first position, and when the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, the first movable presentation means initializes. The initial operation of the second movable presentation means is performed without performing the above. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. A control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means has a first movable effect means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable effect means, and a second position of the first movable effect means. and a second movable presentation means (second movable member 74) which has an overlapping portion, and the presentation control means is configured to perform the above operation at the time of start of power supply (power-on) to initialize the control state of the game. When the first movable presentation means is at the second position and the second movable presentation means is at the first position, the first movable presentation means performs a return operation to the first position, and If the presentation means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable presentation means is not performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 4>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there were gaming machines that initialized the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restored it to the state before the power supply was stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply that was stopped during the variable performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest in the game decreases. The problem was that it could happen.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when acquisition conditions are satisfied, A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after starting power supply, or stopping power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring to the previous state, and a fluctuation accompanied by a fluctuating display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a performance is provided, and in the fluctuating performance, the performance symbol being displayed in a fluctuating manner is oscillatedly displayed (temporarily stopped display) and then statically displayed ( When the power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating performance in which the performance symbols are oscillatedly displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the performance control means performs a predetermined display. At the timing of (when receiving a special figure stop designation command, when receiving a customer waiting command), the effect pattern can be displayed statically on the display means without being oscillatedly displayed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information), and a determining means (main control board 110) that can determine the control state of the game after starting power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of displayed performance symbols; It includes a reach variation effect that executes a reach effect by forming a formation display, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the reach effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means controls the control at a predetermined timing ( When the special pattern stop designation command is received, when the customer wait command is received), it is possible to display on the display means in a static state a combination of the production symbols that is different from the ready-to-reach combination based on the production symbols that were forming and displaying the ready-to-reach state. There is. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 5>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there were gaming machines that initialized the control state of the game after the power supply started, or restored it to the state before the power supply stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game will decrease. There was a problem that there was.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a determination by the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result, are a customer waiting state in which the fluctuating performance is not executed, a first state that is an execution period of the fluctuating performance without the pending memory, and an execution period of the fluctuating performance in a state with the pending memory. and a second state, and the performance control means is capable of performing a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the performance symbols on the display means when the control state of the game is restored. and the mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply that was stopped in the customer waiting state is restarted and the power supply is restored to the customer waiting state, and the power supply stops in the first state or the second state. The display mode of the specific display (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made different when the power supply is restarted and the first state or the second state is restored. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 6>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect on a display unit when a player is not playing a game (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time depending on the state of the gaming machine.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information), and a determining means (main control board 110) that can determine the control state of the game after starting power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the displayed performance design; When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to execute a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) on the display means, and the case where the performance pattern is displayed statically after the elapse of the variable time of the variable performance, and the case where the control state It is possible to make the period until the customer waiting performance is executed different depending on the case where the performance pattern is statically displayed after the initialization or after the recovery of the control state. Therefore, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the state of the gaming machine, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

<Contents 7 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information on a display means corresponding to determination information on whether a variable performance is being executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game will decrease. There was a problem that there was.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information), and a determining means (main control board 110) that can determine the control state of the game after starting power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped, and an effect displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of symbols, and when the control state of the game is restored, the performance control means displays the performance on the display means. It is possible to perform a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying a symbol, and to display the determination information during execution of the variable effect in a predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. It is possible to display the corresponding execution information (the relevant icon), and if the power supply that was stopped while the execution information was displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next Until the variable display starts, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), but the execution information is not stored in the predetermined display area. It is not displayed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 8>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a pre-read preview performance that spans multiple variable performances based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-143904 reference). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply that was stopped during the pre-read preview performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. there were.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display; It is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading notice performance (continuous notice performance) over a period of time, and if the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the above-mentioned pre-reading notice performance It is possible to execute a preview performance (for example, an alternative preview performance) different from the pre-read preview performance in the variable performance that is executed next to the fluctuating performance in which the power supply is stopped without restarting the power supply. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player caused by the termination of the continuous notice performance due to the stoppage of power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 9>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executed a specific performance that gradually indicated the degree of expectation that the special game would be executed over multiple variable performances (for example, (Refer to Publication No.-143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that when the power supply that was stopped during a specific performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the interest in the game may decrease. Ta.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display; It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) suggested by Although the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance that is executed next to the stopped variable performance, it is not executed from the continuation of the stage that was suggested before the power supply was stopped. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change performance that matches the content of the current variation performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents 10 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually changes the display mode of identification information that is displayed corresponding to each piece of judgment information for which execution of the variable effect has not been completed. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the power supply that was stopped during a change performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted is high. There was a possibility that something would happen.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display; It is possible to display identification information (the icon, the pending icon) corresponding to each piece of the judgment information that has not been started, and the special game can be executed by changing the display mode of the identification information in stages. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that suggests the level of expectation for icon) and a third stage mode (red icon), and the power supply that was stopped during the display of the identification information in the second stage mode that changes up to the third stage mode is restarted and the gaming control state is restored, the identification information that was displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. Therefore, the user does not need to be aware of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

<Contents 11 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that displayed the number of pending memories, which is determination information that has not yet been determined, in a display area (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of suspended memories, which reduces the interest in the game. There was a problem that there was a possibility that the

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a determination by the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result, and the control state of the game is controlled. In the case of restoration, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect design on the display means, and the first display area (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second A hold display indicating the number of hold memories is displayed in each of a hold indicator 84) and a second display area different from the first display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D). If the power supply that was stopped while the suspended memory exists is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the suspended display may be executed in the second display area while the specific display is being executed. However, the suspended display can be executed in the first display area. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. It becomes possible.

<Contents 12 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored after being stopped during a performance that indicates the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed, the interest in the game is lost. There was a problem that there was a possibility of a decline.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; The performance control means includes a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display, and a light emitting means (winning hole lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, The means is capable of executing a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and during execution of the change effect. When the power supply that has been stopped is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishment) different from the specific notification mode. Therefore, while reducing the control load after the power supply is resumed, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as when the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variable effect has not been executed. It becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

<Contents 13 of the invention described in this embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines are equipped with a main control means that can control the progress of the game, and a performance control means that can control performances according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance means that can operate in a predetermined manner (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, such a gaming machine does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate from each other.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, a performance button 17), and the performance control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable performance means and a performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means. is possible, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command etc.), it is possible to perform said initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the gap between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to perform a customer waiting effect in a standby state (a customer waiting state) in which no game is in progress, and during the execution of the customer waiting effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to execute a variable effect for informing the player whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and during execution of the variable effect, the main control means When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, a performance button 17), and the performance control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable performance means and a performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means. It is possible to perform a special game performance (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance) during execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to execute special game performance (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance), If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the gap between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , the effect control means is capable of performing an initial operation and an initial light emission of the movable effect means, and is also capable of executing a effect operation and an effect light emission of the movable effect means. , The operation mode of the initial operation of the movable presentation means (operation mode such as the number of steps and the movement of each step) is the same when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. However, by changing the light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means, a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot If a predetermined signal (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the production (presentation), it is possible to execute the initial operation of the movable production means. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (game ball winning in the starting hole). ), a determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; (initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and production operation of the movable production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display), and the judgment of the judgment means Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the fluctuating performance, the fluctuating performance symbol is shaken. It is possible to perform a static display (stop display) after a dynamic display (temporary stop display), and the production control means is capable of restarting power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating production in which the production symbols are displayed in a oscillating manner. When the control state of the game is restored, the performance symbols may be statically displayed on the display means without being oscillated and displayed at a predetermined timing (when receiving a special symbol stop designation command, when receiving a customer waiting command). A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to perform a performance according to the signal. ), it is possible to carry out said initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the judgment result of the judgment means, it is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and the The states include a customer waiting state in which the fluctuating performance is not executed, a first state that is an execution period of the fluctuating performance without the pending memory, and an execution period of the fluctuating performance in a state with the pending memory. and a second state in which the performance control means performs a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the performance symbols on the display means when the control state of the game is restored. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the customer waiting state is restored, and the first state or the first state When the power supply that was stopped during the second state is resumed and the first state or the second state is restored, the display mode of the specific display (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made different, and according to the signal. If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance can be executed, the initial It is possible to perform the actuation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and the display means When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after statically displaying the performance design, it is possible to perform a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) on the display means, and after the variable time of the variable performance has elapsed, the performance design can be displayed. The period until the customer waiting performance is executed can be made different between when the performance pattern is statically displayed and when the performance pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored; A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which a performance can be executed in accordance with the signal. In this case, it is possible to carry out the initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance design displayed on the display means (image display device), and the above-mentioned advance Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a predetermined prefetched preview performance (continuous preview performance) over a plurality of the variable performances, and the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the prefetched preview performance is not restarted, and a different preview performance from the prefetched preview performance (for example, When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command , power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the judgment result of the judgment means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that gradually indicates the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over the variable effect, and the power supply that was stopped during execution of the specific effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to execute the specific performance in the variable performance that is executed next to the variable performance for which the power supply has stopped, but the specific performance has been suggested before the power supply was stopped. A predetermined signal (a power-on designation command, When a power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling (Operation, light emission, sound output, image display) Possible production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and fulfillment of acquisition conditions A storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing the judgment information (special figure judgment information) obtained by (entering the game ball into the starting hole) as a reserved memory, and A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or before the power supply is stopped. initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the state of It is possible to execute the production operation of the means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display), and it is expected that the special game will be executed by changing the light emission means to a specific notification mode. It is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of change, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is The main control is performed during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to control a notification mode (white lighting or turning off) different from a specific notification mode and execute a performance according to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the means, it is possible to execute the initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the gap between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) from the sound output device, and If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state in which the performance can be executed (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance), the predetermined signal It is possible to output notification sound. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound indicating the start of power supply, such as a power-on notification sound, a power restoration notification sound, etc., when the game is in progress. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state (a customer waiting state) where there is no customer waiting, and a predetermined signal (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means while the customer waiting performance is being executed. In this case, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance to notify whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and during execution of the fluctuating performance, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration command, etc.) is sent from the main control means. When a specified command, etc.) is received, the predetermined notification sound can be output. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a special game performance (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance) while a special game (jackpot game) is being executed, and a predetermined signal is sent from the main control means during execution of the special game performance. When receiving a command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

<Contents 14 of the invention described in this embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying an effect image (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, such gaming machines do not take into consideration the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the performance control means continues.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. The gaming machine is equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, and is equipped with display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying performance images (variable performance, jackpot performance, etc.). , the performance control means is capable of displaying a game standby screen (a static display screen of performance symbols) on the display means in a standby state (a customer waiting state) in which a game is not in progress; If the power supply to the main control means is stopped during display, it is possible to continue displaying the game standby screen. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player is not made to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Contents 15 of the invention described in this embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there are those that execute an abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a possibility that an abnormality notification may not be properly performed.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or performance control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on input signals from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality alarm (wire breakage alarm, magnetic wire breakage alarm, etc.) is provided. abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, wire breakage, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (wire disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification) is issued. , radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and if the control means and the detection means are in a connected state during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, for a predetermined period (30 seconds elapsed, until the power is turned off, etc.) The execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnected, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification) will be issued. notification, etc.) was made possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (wire disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification) is issued. notification, etc.), and if the control means and the detection means are connected while the predetermined abnormality notification is being executed, the predetermined notification will continue for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds elapse, until the power is turned off, etc.). Continue to perform abnormality notification. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

<Contents 16 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and the game performance is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common. Some of these gaming machines were equipped with a main control means that controlled the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controlled the effect according to commands (signals) from the main control means (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. The first pending information (first pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) in response to an increase in the first pending memory, and the first pending information (first pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) as the first pending memory decreases. Each of the pending information can be reduced by shifting display, and when the plurality of presentation symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating presentation, the first pending information is subjected to a presentation operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.). It is possible that the first suspension information indicates that the plurality of performance symbols that are performing a performance operation are temporarily stopped, and a specific number (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). During the display of the first reservation information, when the first reservation memory receives a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (a reservation number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) in which the first reservation memory becomes the predetermined number; , without starting the fluctuation effect and shifting displaying the first pending information (the third pending icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of first pending information, The first hold information (at least the first hold icon from the icon display area) corresponding to the predetermined number is displayed in a shift manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in front of a background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first pending information (first pending icon) corresponding to each of the first pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and When a plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped, it is possible to perform a performance operation (scrolling, changing, etc.) on the background image, and it is possible to temporarily stop the plurality of performance symbols for which the background image is performing a performance operation. start of the fluctuating display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the first pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (eg, one); When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation performance is started, and the first After displaying the hold information, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first hold information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to the signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. A first pending number indicating the number of the first pending memories can be displayed in the first display area (sub-first pending display 83), and a first pending number corresponding to each of the first pending memories can be displayed. 1 hold information (first hold icon) can be displayed in a second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating effect, the effect symbols It is possible to make a predetermined element (a tactile image of a character, a pattern effect image) making a presentation movement (fluctuation movement, etc.), and the predetermined element is temporarily stopping the plurality of presentation patterns in which the predetermined element is performing a presentation movement. a signal at the start of the variable display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the first pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one); (Pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the execution of the fluctuation effect is started, and the first reservation, which is one less than the specific number, is received in the first display area. Displaying the predetermined number of the first reservation number (for example, one) without displaying a number (for example, two), and displaying a number one less than the specific number (for example, two) in the second display area. The present invention is characterized in that after the first suspension information is displayed, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first suspension information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. It is possible to display first reservation information (first reservation icon) corresponding to each of the first reservation memories in the display area (image display device 70), and in the variable performance, the plurality of performance symbols are displayed. It is possible to cause the first hold information to perform a performance operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.) while temporarily stopping, and during the temporary stop of the plurality of performance symbols for which the first hold information is performing a performance operation. and while displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the first hold information that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one), at the start of the variable display when the first hold memory becomes the predetermined number. When a signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation performance is started, and the first reservation is performed in a number one (for example, three) less than the specific number. The predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information is displayed without displaying any information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in front of a background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first pending information (first pending icon) corresponding to each of the first pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and When a plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped, it is possible to perform a performance operation (scrolling, changing, etc.) on the background image, and the temporary stop of the plurality of performance symbols on which the background image is performing a performance operation is possible. start of the fluctuating display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the first pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one); When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation performance is started, and the first Displaying the first pending information in a number two (for example, two) less than the specific number without displaying any pending information, and then displaying the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information. . Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. A first pending number indicating the number of the first pending memories can be displayed in the first display area (sub-first pending display 83), and a first pending number corresponding to each of the first pending memories can be displayed. 1 hold information (first hold icon) can be displayed in a second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating effect, the effect symbols It is possible to make a predetermined element (a tactile image of a character, a pattern effect image) making a presentation movement (fluctuation movement, etc.), and the predetermined element is temporarily stopping the plurality of presentation patterns in which the predetermined element is performing a presentation movement. a signal at the start of the variable display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the first pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one); (Pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the fluctuation effect is started, and the first storage number (which is two less than the specific number) in the first display area is received. The predetermined number of the first memory numbers (for example, one) are displayed without displaying the first memory number (for example, two), and the first memory number (for example, three) that is one less than the specific number is displayed in the second display area. Displaying the first pending information in a number two (for example, two) less than the specific number without displaying one pending information, and then displaying the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information. do. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting hole). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means that executes a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and controls between a normal game state and a specific game state advantageous to the player (variable probability game state, time-saving game state). and a state control means, wherein the performance control means performs a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. When the plurality of production symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating production, the predetermined elements (tactile image of the character, pattern effect image) constituting the production pattern are subjected to production motion (fluctuation motion). etc.), and based on the determination result of the first determination information when the predetermined element is in the performance operation in the variable performance and the temporarily stopped performance symbol is deviated from the stop position. When a signal at the start of the fluctuating display (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the production symbols are displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuating production, and then Display fluctuations. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) as the second pending memory increases, and the second pending information is displayed as the second pending memory decreases. can be shifted and displayed to decrease by one, and while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the second hold information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the second hold information is displayed in the second hold memory. When a signal at the start of the fluctuating display (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuating display is started, and the second display of the specific number is received. Without shifting and displaying the second hold information (the third hold icon from the icon display area side) that corresponds to the specific number of hold information, the second hold information (the icon display that corresponds to the predetermined number) Shift-display the first and second hold icons from the area side. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70). During the display of a number (for example, three) of the second reservation information, a signal at the start of the fluctuation display when the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number (reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern When a specified command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and after displaying the second pending information one less than the specific number (for example, two), the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second pending information is displayed. Display the second pending information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. It is possible to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage memories in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage storages, and a second storage number corresponding to each of the second storage storages. 2 pending information (second pending icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and a specific number (for example, three) of the above information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) During the display of the second reservation information, when the second reservation memory receives a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (a reservation number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number; The variable performance is started, and the second memory number (for example, one) is the predetermined number without displaying the second memory number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number in the first display area. , display a number (for example, two) of the second reservation information that is one less than the specific number in the second display area, and then display the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second reservation information. indicate. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70). During the display of a specific number (for example, four) of the second pending information, the second pending memory becomes the predetermined number. If a figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and the predetermined number (for example, one ) is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70). During the display of a specific number (for example, four) of the second pending information, the second pending memory becomes the predetermined number. If a figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and the second hold information is one less than the specific number (for example, three) without displaying the second pending information, and the number is two than the specific number. A small number (for example, two) of the second reservation information is displayed, and then a predetermined number (for example, one) of the second reservation information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls the effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. It is possible to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage memories in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage storages, and a second storage number corresponding to each of the second storage storages. 2 hold information (second hold icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and a specific number (for example, four) of the During the display of the second reservation information, when the second reservation memory receives a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (a reservation number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number; The variable effect is started, and the second memory number (for example, one) is the predetermined number without displaying the second memory number (for example, two) that is two fewer than the specific number in the first display area. is displayed, and the second pending information that is one less than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed in the second display area, and the second pending information that is two less than the specific number (for example, two) is displayed. The second hold information is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second hold information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means that executes a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and controls between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. and a state control means, wherein the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols in the specific gaming state so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information. When the performance symbol temporarily stopped in the fluctuation performance is shifted from the stop position, a signal at the start of the fluctuation display based on the determination result of the second determination information (pending number designation command, When a special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the performance symbols are displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuation performance, and then the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. The production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the determination information, In accordance with the increase in the pending memory, additional pending information (pending icon) is displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and in accordance with the decrease in the pending memory, the pending information is shifted and displayed, and one of the pending information is displayed as execution information. (the icon), and while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the pending memory becomes the predetermined number. When a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted, the fluctuation display is started, and the specified number of the suspension Without shifting and displaying the pending information corresponding to the specific number of information (the third pending icon from the icon display area side), the necessary amount of the pending information (the first to second pending icons from the icon display area side) (hold icons) are shifted and displayed, and one of them is displayed as the execution information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls a performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. and a storage means for performing a variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means It is possible to display the pending information (pending icon) in the display area (image display device 70), and to display the pending information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon), During the display of a specific number (for example, 3) of the pending information that is two more than 1), a signal at the start of the fluctuating display when the pending memory becomes the predetermined number (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command , special figure variation pattern designation command), erases the execution information, starts the variation effect, and displays the pending information of the number one (for example, two) less than the specific number. The predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls a performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. storage means for indicating the number of pending memories, and the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) to correspond to the variable display, and a storage unit that indicates the number of pending memories. It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, first special figure reservation number display area 70E, second special figure reservation number display area 70F). Displaying the pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories in a second display area (holding icon display area), and displaying the holding information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon) and the start of the fluctuating display in which the pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (eg, one). When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the fluctuation performance is started, and the specific number is displayed in the first display area. The predetermined number of pending numbers (for example, 1) is displayed without displaying the pending number (for example, 2) that is one less than the specific number, and a number that is one less than the specific number (for example, 1) is displayed in the second display area. After the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. and a storage means for performing a variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means It is possible to display the pending information (pending icon) in the display area (image display device 70), and to display the pending information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon), While displaying a specific number (for example, 4) of the pending information that is 3 more than 1), a signal at the start of the fluctuating display when the pending memory becomes the predetermined number (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command , special figure variation pattern designation command), erase the execution information, start the variation production, and display the pending information of the number one less than the specific number (for example, three). Instead, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. and a storage means for performing a variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means It is possible to display the pending information (pending icon) in the display area (image display device 70), and to display the pending information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon), While displaying a specific number (for example, 4) of the pending information that is 3 more than 1), a signal at the start of the fluctuating display when the pending memory becomes the predetermined number (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command , special figure variation pattern designation command), erase the execution information, start the variation production, and display the pending information of the number one less than the specific number (for example, three). Instead, two fewer (for example, two) pieces of the hold information than the specific number are displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one piece) of the hold information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. storage means for indicating the number of pending memories, and the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) to correspond to the variable display, and a storage unit that indicates the number of pending memories. It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, first special figure reservation number display area 70E, second special figure reservation number display area 70F). Displaying the pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories in a second display area (holding icon display area), and displaying the holding information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon) and the start of the fluctuating display in which the pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (eg, 4) of the pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (eg, 1). When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the fluctuation performance is started, and the specific number is displayed in the first display area. The predetermined number of pending numbers (for example, 1) is displayed without displaying the pending number (for example, 2) that is two fewer than the specified number, and the second display area displays a number that is one less than the specific number (for example, 1). 3) of the pending information is displayed, and then the predetermined number (eg, 1) of the pending information and the Display execution information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine, the main control means executes a special game (jackpot) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game); and a fluctuation display means for performing a fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of performance symbols in accordance with the display, and the fluctuating display can be started when the temporarily stopped performance symbol in the fluctuating performance is deviated from the stop position. When a time signal (retention number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the performance symbols are displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuation performance, and then are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

<Contents 17 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, a gaming machine determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executes a game performance according to the result of the determination. is common. Among such gaming machines, there is also known a game machine that executes a performance using a predetermined performance device (performance button, movable member, etc.) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-033816). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the game is not very interesting.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the game performance includes a first performance (pre-reach performance). The vibration performance includes a specific game performance (reach variation performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed later, and the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (during a line preview performance, a step-up preview performance, and a pseudo continuous performance). , a 1-second vibration performance such as during a development performance), and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (a vibration performance of 3 seconds or more during a cut-in performance, a successful decision performance, a confirmed performance, when the symbols are aligned, etc.) In the specific game performance, the first vibration performance is easier to execute during the first performance than during the second performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the game performance is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). The vibration performance includes a specific game performance (reach variation performance) in which a specific performance (reach performance) that makes the execution of the special game expected is executed after a predetermined performance (pseudo continuous performance) is executed, and the vibration performance includes a first A vibration performance (a 1-second vibration performance during a dialogue preview performance, a step-up preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (when a cut-in performance is performed, (vibration performance for 3 seconds or more at the time of a successful decision performance, at the time of a confirmed performance, when the symbols are aligned, etc.), and in the specific game performance, the first vibration performance is performed more than when the first vibration performance is not performed. In this case, the second vibration effect is more easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), and the performance control means includes a suggestive performance (a look-ahead effect performance, a look-ahead motion performance) that suggests that the special game may be executed during the execution of the game performance; It is possible to perform a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means (a pre-reading vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.), and the vibration effect includes a vibration effect in response to an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. A first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.) that is executed with the above operation promotion display, and a second vibration performance (a pre-read vibration performance, etc.) that is performed without the operation promotion display, During a predetermined period after the start of the game performance (until the first high-speed fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a ends), the second vibration performance is more effective than the case where the suggestion performance is performed. The level of expectation that the special game will be executed is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. a game state control means (main control board 110) that controls the gaming state), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance that variably displays a plurality of types of performance symbols according to the judgment result of the judgment means. ), the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the variable performance, and the fluctuation performance includes a first type of performance pattern (an even number pattern). A first specific variation performance in which a reach effect is executed, a second specific variation effect in which a reach effect is executed by a second type of effect pattern (an odd numbered pattern other than "7"), and a third type of effect pattern ("7"). 7" pattern), in which a reach effect is executed, and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (at the time of a dialogue preview performance, during a step-up preview performance, during a pseudo-continuous performance, and during a development performance). 1 second vibration performance such as) and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (vibration performance for 3 seconds or more such as at the time of cut-in performance, at the time of successful decision performance, at the time of confirmation performance, etc.), In the normal gaming state, the first specific variation performance is more likely to be executed than the second specific variation effect, the third specific variation effect is more difficult to execute than the first specific variation effect, and the first specific variation effect is more difficult to execute than the first specific variation effect. The second vibration effect is easier to execute when the third specific variation effect is executed than when it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.) that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.) that is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during the operation promotion display, and the operation promotion display. When the first vibration effect is executed, a predetermined effect sound (display sound effect of an operation promotion image) corresponding to the operation of the operating means is included. , effect sounds corresponding to the operation of the effect buttons, and sound effects of the operation of the accessories), while the predetermined effect sounds are not output when the second vibration effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the game performance includes a specific performance that makes the user expect to execute the special game. The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance) that is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation promotion display. (cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) and a second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, etc.) that is executed without the operation promotion display, and when the first vibration effect is executed, the operation means While a predetermined effect image (operation promotion image, effect image corresponding to the operation of the effect button) related to the operation of is displayed, when the second vibration effect is executed, the predetermined effect image is not displayed. , in the specific game performance (jackpot reach variation performance) in which the special game is executed, the number of times the second vibration performance is executed (up to 3 times) before the start of the specific performance is greater than the number of times the second vibration performance is executed before the start of the specific performance. The number of times the second vibration effect is executed (maximum 7 times) is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means includes: It is possible to perform a vibration effect (a pre-reading vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) that vibrates the first operating means during the execution of the game effect, and during the operation of the second operating means. When the vibration effect is executed, vibrations related to the vibration effect are transmitted to the player via the second operating means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to players, a gaming frame (a frame body consisting of a gaming board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided. The frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of the an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to control the performance during execution of the game performance. It is possible to execute a suggestion performance (jackpot notice performance) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and an operation performance (vibration performance) that activates (moves, vibrates) the frame performance section while the suggestion performance is being executed. , action presentation, etc.), and the suggestion presentation includes a first suggestion presentation (weak notice, pre-reach notice presentation) and a second suggestion presentation (strong When the second suggestion effect is executed, the operation effect is more likely to be executed than when the first suggestion effect is executed, and the first suggestion effect is easier to execute than when the first suggestion effect is executed. The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the operation effect is executed during execution of the first suggestion effect than when the operation effect is not executed during execution of the effect. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), and the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), A vibration effect that vibrates the operating means can be executed, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (when a line preview is displayed, a cut-in effect) that is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. a second vibration performance (a vibration performance such as a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, etc.) that is executed without the operation promotion display; The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the second vibration performance is executed is different between the performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), and the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), A vibration effect that vibrates the operating means can be executed, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (when a line preview is displayed, a cut-in effect) that is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. a second vibration performance (a vibration performance such as a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, etc.) that is executed without the operation promotion display; The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the first vibration performance is executed is different between the performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to players, a gaming frame (a frame body consisting of a gaming board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided. The frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of the an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to control the performance during execution of the game performance. , execute a change effect (vibration effect, action effect, light emission effect, etc.) that changes the frame effect part from a first state (standby state, extinguished state) to a second state (vibration state, operating state, predetermined light emitting state). It is possible, and the variable performance includes a specific game performance (reach variable performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed after the first performance (pre-reach performance), and the execution of the first performance The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the change effect is executed than when the change effect is not executed during the game, and the specific game effect (jackpot) in which the special game is executed is higher. In the reach variation effect), the change effect is executed during execution of the second effect regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed during execution of the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. The first vibration performance (one of the vibration performances such as a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo-continuation performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, etc.) is performed in accordance with the operation promotion display, and a first vibration performance is performed without accompanying the operation promotion display. The first vibration performance includes a second vibration performance (one of the vibration performances at the time of step-up notice performance, when the symbols are aligned, and when the C symbols are aligned), and the first vibration performance has a different degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. Multiple vibration modes (weak vibration or strong vibration for 1 second for vibration performances during dialogue previews, pseudo continuous performances, or advanced performances, weak vibrations or strong vibrations for 3 seconds for vibration performances during cut-in performances) The second vibration performance is performed in one of the predetermined vibration modes (vibration during step-up notice performance) when performing a predetermined performance (step-up notice performance, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment). A vibration performance is performed with a weak vibration for 1 second, a vibration performance when the symbols are aligned, a strong vibration for 4 seconds, and a strong vibration for 1 second when the C symbols are aligned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A game state control means (main control board 110) that controls the gaming state), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. , the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the vibration performance includes a predetermined vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up notice). The predetermined vibration performance includes a vibration performance for 1 second (at the time of performance, etc.) and a specific vibration performance different from the predetermined vibration performance (vibration performance for 3 seconds or more at the time of a successful decision performance, when the symbols are aligned, etc.). , a first vibration performance (vibration performance during dialogue preview performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation promotion display, and a second vibration performance (pre-reading vibration) that is performed without the operation promotion display. In the game performance in which the special game is performed, the first vibration performance is executed, and the second vibration performance is The rate at which the specific vibration effect is subsequently executed differs depending on when it is executed, and the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the normal gaming state than during the specific gaming state. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and performance control that executes a variable performance that displays a plurality of types of performance symbols in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination means. means (performance control board 130), the performance control means, during execution of the variable performance, a special performance (successful performance, confirmed performance, etc.) that suggests execution of the special game, and the operation means. A vibration performance that vibrates in one of several vibration modes (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, successful decision performance, confirmed performance) When the special game is executed, the type of the performance symbol that suggests the execution of the special game ( The execution mode of the vibration performance (execution or nonexecution, execution timing, etc.) differs depending on the even number design, odd number design other than "7", and "7" design, and the vibration performance is performed in conjunction with the execution of the special performance. In this case, the vibration mode of the vibration performance is the same regardless of the type of performance symbol that suggests execution of the special game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means includes: It is possible to perform a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.) that vibrates the first operating means during execution of the game performance, and the vibration performance includes an operation promotion display. A first vibration performance (vibration performance such as a dialogue preview performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the middle, and a vibration performance that is executed without the operation promotion display. The first vibration performance includes a second vibration performance (a pre-read vibration performance, a vibration performance at the time of a step-up notice performance, etc.), and the first vibration performance has a vibration start timing that differs depending on the operation timing of the first operating means. In the two-vibration effect, the start timing of the vibration is determined in advance, and when the vibration effect is executed during operation of the second operating means, the vibration related to the vibration effect is transmitted to the game via the second operating means. The information is now communicated to the public. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means, and the effective period of the operating means includes a first effective period (a line preview effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a development effect). during the second validity period (validity period related to performance, cut-in performance, fixed performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) and a second validity period (validity period while waiting for customers) different from the first validity period. The vibration effect is more easily executed when the operating means is operated during the first valid period than when the operating means is operated during the first valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and the validity period of the operation means includes a first validity period (validity period related to dialogue preview performance, etc.). , a second validity period (validity period related to cut-in performances, fixed performances, etc.) different from the first validity period, and a third validity period (validity period related to customer waiting) different from the first validity period and the second validity period. (a middle effective period), and the vibration effect is executed more when the operating means is operated during the second effective period than when the operating means is operated during the third effective period. It is becoming easier to Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a production section (production button 17 (button vibration motor) that can be operated in a predetermined manner) is provided. , production lever 24 (lever vibration motor), second movable member 74), and judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). ); a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance), and the performance control means operates in a first performance mode (performance mode A to C) and a second performance mode (performance mode D). ~G), and changes the performance section from a first state (standby state, light-off state) to a second state (vibration state, operating state, predetermined light emitting state) during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a change performance (vibration performance, movement performance, light emission performance, etc.), and the expectation is that the special game will be executed when the change performance is executed in the first performance mode and the second performance mode. The degrees are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). mode A to C) and a second performance mode (performance mode D to G), and can be controlled to any one of a plurality of stages with different expectations for the special game to be executed during the execution of the game performance. It is possible to execute a progressive stage performance (step-up preview performance, pseudo continuous performance), and in the first performance mode and the second performance mode, the stage performance is at a predetermined stage (in the case of a step-up preview performance, The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the game progresses to 3-step performance, 4th-step performance, 5th-step performance, or 1 time or 2 times in the case of pseudo-continuous performance is different. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). modes A to C) and second production modes (production modes D to G), and continuous productions (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading (vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance, etc.), and in the game performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (ready-to-reach performance) that makes you expect the execution of the special game, and a predetermined number of times (once) in the first performance mode. In the case where the continuous performance is executed the predetermined number of times in the second performance mode, the specific performance in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance is better than when the continuous performance is executed. is becoming more difficult to implement. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). modes A to C) and second production modes (production modes D to G), and continuous productions (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading vibration effects, look-ahead zone effects, etc.), and in the game effects, it is possible to execute a specific effect (ready-to-reach effect) that makes people expect to execute the special game, and in the second effect mode, it is possible to execute a specific effect (reach effect) for a predetermined number of times (two or The case where the continuous performance is executed the predetermined number of times in the first performance mode is better than the case where the continuous performance is performed three times) in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance. The specific performance is easier to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). modes A to C) and second production modes (production modes D to G), and continuous productions (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading vibration presentation, look-ahead zone presentation, etc.), and in the game presentation, it is possible to execute a specific presentation (ready-to-reach presentation) that makes one expect the execution of the special game, and the specific presentation includes a first specific presentation (normal reach presentation, etc.). performance) and a second specific performance (SP/SPSP reach performance) in which the degree of expectation for the special game to be executed is higher than that of the first specific performance, and the first performance mode is higher than the second performance mode. In this case, when the continuous performance is executed the first number of times, the specific performance is more likely to be executed in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance, and the specific performance is more likely to be executed in the second performance mode than in the first performance mode. In the performance mode, when the continuous performance is performed a second number of times greater than the first number of times, the second specific performance is more likely to be executed in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , a display means (image display device) capable of displaying a production image, and judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires the information; a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance), and the performance control means displays an operation promotion display (an opaque button image) that prompts the operation of the operation means during the execution of the game performance. ) at the same time, it is possible to execute an operation effect (development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) according to the operation of the operation means, and before performing the operation promotion display, the operation promotion display is displayed on the display means. It is possible to perform a suggestion display (semi-transparent button image) indicating that the operation may be performed, and the operation promotion display includes a first operation promotion display (white button image in normal state) and the operation promotion display (a white button image in a normal state). The first operation promotion display includes a second operation promotion display (a red button image in a normal state, a red button image in a protruding state, a rainbow button image in a protrusion state) having a different degree of expectation that the special game will be executed; The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the first operation promotion display is performed is different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode, and in the first performance mode, the suggestion display is not performed. The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the operation promotion display is performed after the suggestion display is performed than when the operation promotion display is performed at the time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents 18 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information obtained based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the game performance (variable performance) is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common. Among such gaming machines, some are known that perform effects using predetermined effect devices (effect buttons, movable members, lamps, image display devices, etc.) (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-033816 reference). However, conventional gaming machines such as those described in the above-mentioned patent documents have a problem in that the interest in playing the games is low.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, judgment information ( an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires special figure determination information); a storage means (main control board 110) that stores the determination information acquired by the acquisition means as a reserved memory; A determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute a game, and a game performance (a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols, a variable performance with only a variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. , a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance of only flashing lamps), the performance control unit is capable of displaying pending information according to the number of the pending memories, and is capable of displaying pending information according to the number of the pending memories, A first display effect (MAX8 tarot card change) that displays the pending information in a predetermined manner different from the normal mode, and a second display effect (Puzzle Reach) that displays the plurality of pending information in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode. (puzzle change), and it is possible to execute a specific performance (a predetermined preview performance, various reach performances, etc.) that makes people expect that the special game will be executed during the execution of the game performance, and When the first display effect is executed and when the second display effect is executed, the pending information corresponds to a specific number (for example, the first) before a predetermined number (for example, the fourth). The rate at which the specific performance is executed during the game performance is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and the determination based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. storage means (main control board 110) for storing information as a first pending memory and storing the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition as a second pending memory; and executing the special game based on the determination information. determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to play, and state control that can be controlled to a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, various time-saving gaming states) in which the second acquisition condition is more likely to be met than in the normal gaming state. means (main control board 110), and executes a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps) according to the result of the determination. production control means (production control board 130), and the determination means includes the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition and the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The performance control means can display a number of pending information (pending icons) according to the pending memory, and in the normal gaming state, the first pending information and the and second pending information in the order in which the determination information was acquired, and in the specific gaming state, the first pending information is not displayed and the second pending information is displayed in the order in which the determination information was acquired. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, judgment information ( an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires the special game determination information); a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A variable display execution means (main control board 110) that executes a variable display of symbols (special symbols) according to the above, and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the state (special time-saving game state), initialization means capable of initializing the control state of the game at the start of power supply, and according to the result of the determination. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps), The state control means terminates the specific game state when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, and the variable display execution means terminates the specified game state controlled in a state where the special game has not been executed after the initialization. The fluctuation pattern table is different between the fluctuation display which is the final round in the gaming state and the fluctuation display which is the final round in the specific gaming state controlled in a state where the special game has been executed after the initialization. It is now possible to determine the fluctuation pattern using Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, judgment information ( an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires the special game determination information); a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A variable display execution means (main control board 110) that executes a variable display of symbols (special symbols) according to the above, and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the state (special time-saving game state), initialization means capable of initializing the control state of the game at the start of power supply, and according to the result of the determination. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps), The state control means terminates the specific game state when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, and the performance control means terminates the specific game state controlled in a state where the special game has not been executed after the initialization. The performance mode (end notification performance) when the specific game state ends, and when the specific game state controlled in a state where the special game was executed after the initialization ends. It is possible to vary the start timing, end timing, content of the end notification effect, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is executed; a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the determination that the execution is not executed; A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (a variable performance with a variable display of performance symbols, a variable performance with only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable performance with only flashing lamps); The performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information, and the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the specific game state is executed. The number of types of game performance patterns when the second game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game is executed in the specific game state is greater than the number of types of game performance patterns when the special game is executed. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , a normal time-saving game state), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. The performance control means (performance control board 130) executes a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance with only blinking lamps), and the performance control unit executes a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration) that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. performance, step-up preview performance, line preview performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.), and the vibration performance includes a valid operation period, and the operation of the operating means during the valid operation period. The first vibration performance (vibration performance related to dialogue preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation, and the vibration performance that is executed without the expiry of the above-mentioned validity period. The game performance includes a second vibration performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.), and the game performance includes a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result, and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. (corresponding variable performance), and the first vibration performance is different from when the first game performance is performed in the specific game state and when the second game performance is performed in the specific game state. The execution rate is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , a normal time-saving game state), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance of only blinking lamps); (vibration performance, step-up notice performance, dialogue notice performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.), and specific performances (various reach performances, chance performances, etc.) that make the player expect to execute the special game, The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, as well as generating an operation validity period. (vibration performance related to) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, and the game performance includes: , a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the determination, and the first game performance is executed in which the specific performance is performed in the specific game state; The execution ratio of the first vibration performance during execution of the specific performance is different depending on the case where the second game performance in which the specific performance is performed in a specific game state is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (special time-saving game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the state), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game production according to the result of the judgment (a variation production with a variation display of production symbols, a variation production with only a variation display of the fourth symbol, a blinking lamp) a performance control means (performance control board 130) that performs a vibration performance (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up vibration performance) that vibrates the operating means during the execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a preview performance, a dialogue preview performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.), and the vibration performance includes an operation valid period, and an operation of the operating means during the operation valid period. The first vibration performance (vibration performance related to dialogue preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed according to a second vibration performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.), and the game performance includes a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) and a second game performance (corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. of the second vibration performance in the case where the first game performance is performed in the specific game state and the case where the second game performance is performed in the specific game state. The execution rates are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , a normal time-saving game state, a special time-saving game state), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, change of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. vibrating effects (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up preview effects, line preview effects, cut-in effects, winning success effects, etc.), and specific effects (various reach effects, special effects, etc.) that make people expect to execute the special game. The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, final performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, and the vibration performance includes a valid operation period. , a vibration performance related to a re-lottery performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without causing the validity period, and the game performance includes the first vibration performance. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance corresponding to the second special symbol (a variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol), a case where the first game performance is executed in which the specific performance is performed in the specific game state; The execution ratio of the second vibration performance during execution of the specific performance is different depending on the case where the second game performance in which the specific performance is performed is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to players, movable performance members (a first movable member, a second movable member) that can operate in a predetermined manner movable member), and the determination information (special figure determination information) is acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the ball enters the first starting port) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (the ball enters the second starting port). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state, special time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the determination; and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps), The effect control means is configured to perform a first operation effect (a look-ahead movement effect, an accessory notice effect at the time of start of fluctuation, etc.) for operating the movable effect means in a first mode during execution of the game effect, and a second operation effect for causing the movable effect means to operate in a first manner. A second action performance (such as a successful decision performance) that is operated in a certain manner, and the game performance includes a first game based on the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. a performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol); and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition; In the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the normal gaming state, the first action performance can be executed, but notifies non-execution of the special game in the specific gaming state. In the first game performance, the execution of the first action performance is restricted, and the first game performance notifies the execution of the special game in the normal game state, and the first game performance notifies the execution of the special game in the specific game state. In the first game performance, the second motion performance can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to players, a light emitting means (winning hole lamp) capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner, and a predetermined manner movable production members (first movable member, second movable member) that can operate in an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the ball entering), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. ), a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed; Performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps) according to the result of the determination. The effect control means is capable of executing a light emission effect (lamp change effect based on pre-reading) that indicates the possibility that the special game will be executed by causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner; By operating the movable presentation means in a predetermined manner during the execution of the game presentation, it is possible to perform an action presentation (a look-ahead motion presentation, a role-playing notice presentation at the start of variation) that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed. , the game performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to a second special symbol) according to a determination result of the determination information based on the first game, the first game notifying non-execution of the special game in the normal game state. During execution of the performance, the light emission performance can be executed, and the action performance can be executed, and during the execution of the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the specific game state, the It is possible to restrict the execution of the light emission effect, and also to restrict the execution of the motion effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to players, a performance means for performing a predetermined performance (winning hole lamp NR, top lamp 10b, etc.) and determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting port) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port). an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring, a determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the above, and a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the game production (variation of production symbols) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with a display, a variable performance with only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp; It is possible to perform a suggestive effect (a lamp change effect based on prereading, a light emitting effect upon winning, etc.) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed using a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the determination information; and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. A presentation (variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol), and the mode of the presentation means includes a first mode (winning slot lamp flashing white) and a second mode (winning mode different from the first suggestion mode). A third aspect (top lamp emission) different from the second aspect (mouth lamp blue emission), and a fourth aspect different from the third aspect (winning opening lamp & top lamp off), includes a first suggestion effect (lamp change effect based on pre-reading) and a second suggestion effect (light emission effect upon winning) that is different from the first suggestion effect, and when the first suggestion effect is executed, , the presentation means may be in the first mode and the second mode, and when the second suggestion presentation is executed, the presentation means may be in the third mode. , the presentation means is in the fourth aspect more when the first game presentation is executed in the specific gaming state than when the first game presentation is executed in the normal gaming state. The percentage is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. a determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is executed, and control to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A possible state control means (main control board 110) and a game effect (a variable effect with a variable display of effect symbols, a variable effect only with a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect only with flashing lamps) according to the result of the above-mentioned determination. ); the performance control means is capable of executing the game performance in any of a plurality of game performance patterns (variable performance patterns); includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the determination based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the information determination, and the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the normal game state is executed. The same game performance pattern is more likely to be executed when the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game is executed in the specific game state than when the first game performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit is configured to perform an operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to execute an operation performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a decisive performance, etc.) that indicates the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the validity period. The game performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to a determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the game, and the first game performance notifies non-execution of the special game in the normal game state. The operation performance is more difficult to execute when the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game is executed in the specific game state than when the game performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. a determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is executed, and control to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A possible state control means (main control board 110) and a game effect (a variable effect with a variable display of effect symbols, a variable effect only with a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect only with flashing lamps) according to the result of the above-mentioned determination. ), the performance control means is capable of controlling any one of a plurality of performance modes (including a look-ahead mode), and the game performance includes A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to Changes in the production mode are less likely to occur when the production is executed (SP/SPSP reach production that results in a loss is difficult to execute, mode update lottery is more likely to be won, and look-ahead zone production is difficult to execute) , fewer production modes, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a vibration performance that vibrates the means (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a dialogue notice performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.), and the vibration performance includes an operation validity period and the above-mentioned. A first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a dialogue preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period; The game performance includes a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, and the game performance includes a second vibration performance that is executed without causing the validity period to occur, and the game performance includes A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2 game performances (variable performances corresponding to the second special symbols), the first game performance is executed in the normal gaming state, and the first game performance is executed in the specific gaming state. The execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different depending on the case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a vibration performance that vibrates the means (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a dialogue notice performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.), and the vibration performance includes an operation validity period and the above-mentioned. A first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a dialogue preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period; The game performance includes a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, and the game performance includes a second vibration performance that is executed without causing the validity period to occur, and the game performance includes A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2 game performances (variable performances corresponding to the second special symbols), the first game performance is executed in the normal gaming state, and the first game performance is executed in the specific gaming state. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different depending on the case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. a determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is executed, and control to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols on the display means according to the result of the determination, The effect control means is capable of dynamically displaying a background image of the display means and a plurality of preview effects indicating the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed while the variable effect is being executed; Although the dynamic display of the background image is executed, it is possible to generate a notice restriction period in which execution of the plurality of notice effects is restricted, and the variable effects include the above-mentioned change based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first variable performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information, and a second variable performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. (a variable performance corresponding to a second special symbol), which notifies non-execution of the special game in the specific gaming state rather than the first variable performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the normal gaming state. In the first variable performance, the proportion occupied by the advance notice restriction period is likely to be larger. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. a determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is executed, and control to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols on the display means according to the result of the determination, The effect control means is capable of dynamically displaying a background image of the display means and a plurality of preview effects indicating the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed while the variable effect is being executed; Although the dynamic display of the background image is executed, it is possible to generate a notice restriction period in which execution of the plurality of notice effects is restricted, and the variable effects include the above-mentioned change based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first variable performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information, and a second variable performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. (variable performance corresponding to a second special symbol), in a case where the first variable performance is executed in the normal gaming state and a case where the first variable performance is executed in the specific gaming state, The proportion of the entire performance period falling within the notice restriction period is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 20th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. a determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is executed, and control to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols on the display means according to the result of the determination, The performance control means is capable of executing a predictive performance (such as a reach promotion performance) that indicates the possibility that a reach performance will be performed during execution of the fluctuation performance, and the fluctuation performance requires the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition. A first variable performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the above, and a second fluctuation performance according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a variable presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a second special symbol), and a case where the second variable presentation is executed to notify non-execution of the special game in the specific gaming state; The rate at which a performance in which the predictive performance is performed but the ready-to-win performance is not performed is different from when the first variable performance for notifying non-execution of the special game is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a vibration performance that vibrates the means (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a dialogue notice performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.), and the vibration performance includes an operation validity period and the above-mentioned. A first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a dialogue preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period; The game performance includes a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, and the game performance includes a second vibration performance that is executed without causing the validity period to occur, and the game performance includes A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2 game effects (variable effects corresponding to a second special symbol), where the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, and the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different depending on the case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a vibration performance that vibrates the means (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a dialogue notice performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.), and the vibration performance includes an operation validity period and the above-mentioned. A first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a dialogue preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period; The game performance includes a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, and the game performance includes a second vibration performance that is executed without causing the validity period to occur, and the game performance includes A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2 game effects (variable effects corresponding to a second special symbol), where the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, and the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different depending on the case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not the game is the same, and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control specific gaming states (variable probability gaming states, various time-saving gaming states) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. 110), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols on the display means according to the result of the determination, and the specific game state is the special game state. A first specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled in accordance with the end of the game, and a second specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. ), and the performance control means dynamically displays a background image on the display means and a plurality of preview performances suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed during execution of the variable performance. It is possible to execute the dynamic display of the background image, but it is possible to generate a notice restriction period during which the execution of the plurality of notice effects is restricted, and the variable effects include the first A first variable performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol (variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol), the second specific variation presentation is more effective than the second variation presentation that notifies non-execution of the special game in the first specific game state. The proportion of the advance notice restriction period is likely to be larger in the first variable performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not the game is the same, and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control specific gaming states (variable probability gaming states, various time-saving gaming states) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. 110), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance according to the result of the determination, wherein the specific game state is a first specific state that is controlled according to the end of the special game. a gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state), and a second specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed, and the effect control means is capable of dynamically displaying a background image on the display means and a plurality of preview performances that suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed while the variable performance is being executed; Although the dynamic display is executed, it is possible to generate a notice restriction period in which the execution of the plurality of notice effects is restricted, and the game effect includes the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination, and a second game performance (second special (a variable performance corresponding to a symbol), in a case where the second game performance is performed in the first specific game state, and a case where the first game performance is performed in the second specific game state. , the proportion of all of the performance periods falling within the advance notice restriction period is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to players, movable performance members (a first movable member, a second movable member) that can operate in a predetermined manner are provided. movable member), and the determination information (special figure determination information) is acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the ball enters the first starting port) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (the ball enters the second starting port). a determining unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; and a determining unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) that can control the state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance according to the result of the determination. The specific gaming state is controlled based on a first specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and that the special game is determined not to be executed. a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) in which the performance is performed, and the performance control means is configured to control a first motion performance (pre-reading motion performance) for operating the movable performance means in the first mode during the execution of the game performance. , a role advance notice performance at the start of fluctuation, etc.) and a second action performance (decision success performance, etc.) in which the movable performance means is operated in a second mode, and the game performance includes the first A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance corresponding to the second special symbol (a variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol), the first game performance notifying execution of the special game in the first specific game state, and the second specific game state. In the first game performance that notifies execution of the special game in , the second action performance can be executed, and in the second game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the first specific game state. , the first motion performance can be executed, but in the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the second specific game state, execution of the first motion performance is restricted. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to players, movable performance members (a first movable member, a second movable member) that can operate in a predetermined manner movable member), and the determination information (special figure determination information) is acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the ball enters the first starting port) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (the ball enters the second starting port). a determining unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; and a determining unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) that can control the state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance according to the result of the determination. The specific gaming state is controlled based on a first specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and that the special game is determined not to be executed. a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) in which the game performance is executed, and the performance control means is capable of executing the game performance in any of a plurality of game performance patterns (variable performance patterns); includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the determination based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance (a variable performance corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the information determination, the second game performance notifying non-execution of the special game in the first specific game state; The same game performance pattern is more likely to be executed when the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game is executed in the second specific game state than when it is executed. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time saving), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance according to the result of the determination, and the specific game state is , a first specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific gaming state that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. (special time-saving game state), and the performance control means includes a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, step-up preview performance, line preview performance, cut-in performance, A first vibration performance (speech preview performance, etc.) can be executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, and a vibration performance can be performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. , pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance that is executed without the expiry of the validity period (pre-reading vibration performance, step-up preview performance) , a vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, etc.), and the game performance includes a first game performance (corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, the first specific game The execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different between when the second game performance is executed in the state and when the first game performance is performed in the second specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance according to the result of the determination, The states include a first specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific gaming state that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. a game state (special time-saving game state), and the performance control means is configured to perform a vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance, step-up preview performance, dialogue preview performance, cut-in performance) that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. The vibration performance includes a valid operation period, and a first vibration performance (speech) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid operation period. Vibration performances related to preview performances, pseudo continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances (pre-read vibration performances, step-up performances, etc.) that are executed without the expiration of the validity period. (a vibration performance related to a preview performance, a confirmed performance, etc.), and the game performance includes a first game performance (a first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol); and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition; The execution ratio of the second vibration performance is different between when the second game performance is executed in a specific gaming state and when the first game performance is executed in the second specific gaming state. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, determination information ( an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires special figure determination information), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state advantageous to the player (variable probability gaming state, various time-saving gaming states), and an effect control means (main control board 110) that executes a gaming effect according to the result of the determination. an effect control board 130), wherein the specific gaming state is a first specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and a state in which the special game is not executed. a second specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is controlled based on the determination that , card forgetting prevention display, etc.), and if the special game (so-called consecutive game winning) is executed during the first specific game state, execution of the specific notification is restricted, and the first specific notification is executed. 2. If the special game (so-called first win) is executed during the specific game state, the specific notification can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 30th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, determination information ( an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires special figure determination information), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, various time-saving gaming states) advantageous to the player, and an effect control means (presentation control means) that executes a game effect according to the result of the determination. a control board 130), and the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and a non-execution of the special game. and a second specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is controlled based on the determination, and the effect control means is configured to provide a specific notification (an addictive prevention display, If the special game (so-called first win) is executed during the normal gaming state, the specific notification can be executed, and the first specific gaming state If the special game (so-called consecutive win) is executed during the second specific game state, execution of the specific notification is restricted, and if the special game (so-called first win) is executed during the second specific game state. is capable of executing the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, it is possible to introduce gaming media into a starting area (starting port) provided in the gaming area. Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on winnings, Judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information. , a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the determination that the special game is not executed; a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance according to the result of the game, and the performance control means is configured to fire a game medium into a second area of the game area during the normal game state. A first notification effect (right hit error notification) that urges the firing of game media into a first area of the game area can be executed for a predetermined period of time, and when the specific game state is started, It is possible to execute a second notification effect (right-handed notification) that prompts the firing of game media into a second area, and when the specific gaming state is started while the first notification effect is being executed, the first notification effect is executed. The second notification effect can be executed while continuing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp; A first setting state (normal setting) in which it is possible to execute a specific performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer performance, etc.) that makes people look forward to its execution, and the execution rate of the specific performance varies depending on the operation of the operating means. and a second setting state (simple setting), and the game performance includes a first game performance (first special symbol (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol); and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition; includes a first specific performance (for example, a continuous preview performance) and a second specific performance (for example, a timer performance) different from the first specific performance, and the normal game after the first setting state is set. When the first game performance is executed in the state, the execution rate of the first specific performance is a first rate (high appearance rate) and the execution rate of the second specific performance is a second rate (high appearance rate). When the second game effect is executed in the specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific effect is different from the first rate (low appearance rate). The execution rate of the second specific effect is different from the second rate (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance of only blinking lamps), and the performance control means executes a specific performance (continuous notice) that makes the execution of the special game expected during the game performance. a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) in which execution ratios of the specific effects differ depending on the operation of the operating means. The game performance may include a first game performance (a variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; A second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the specific performance includes a first specific performance (e.g. a continuous preview performance) and a second specific performance (for example, a timer performance) different from the first specific performance, and the first game performance is executed in the normal game state after the first setting state is set. When the execution rate of the first specific effect is a first rate (high appearance rate), the execution rate of the second specific effect is a second rate (high appearance rate), and the first setting state is set. When the first game performance is executed in the specific game state after the first specific performance is executed, the execution rate of the first specific performance is different from the first ratio (low appearance rate) and the second specific performance is The execution rate is different from the second rate (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance, a variable performance of only flashing lamps), and the specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable performance) that is controlled according to the end of the special game. a second specific game state (a special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed; A first setting state (1) in which a specific effect (such as an icon change effect, a timer effect, etc.) that makes the execution of the special game expected to be performed during the effect can be performed, and the execution rate of the specific effect varies depending on the operation of the operating means. Normal setting) and a second setting state (Simple setting). a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition; The specific performance includes a first specific performance (for example, a continuous preview performance) and a second specific performance (for example, a timer performance) that is different from the first specific performance, and after the first setting state is set. When the second game effect is executed in the first specific game state, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a first rate (high appearance rate) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is a second rate. (high appearance rate), and when the first game effect is executed in the second specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific effect is the first rate. The execution ratio of the second specific effect is different from the second ratio (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance of only blinking lamps), and the performance control means executes a specific performance (continuous notice) that makes the execution of the special game expected during the game performance. a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) in which execution ratios of the specific effects differ depending on the operation of the operating means. The game performance may include a first game performance (a variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; A second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the specific performance includes a first specific performance (e.g. a continuous preview performance) and a second specific performance (for example, a timer performance) different from the first specific performance, and the second game performance is executed in the specific game state after the first setting state is set. When the execution rate of the first specific effect is a first rate (high appearance rate), the execution rate of the second specific effect is a second rate (high appearance rate), and the first setting state is set. When the first game performance is executed in the specific game state after the first specific performance is executed, the execution rate of the first specific performance is different from the first ratio (low appearance rate) and the second specific performance is The execution rate is different from the second rate (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance, a variable performance of only flashing lamps), and the specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable performance) that is controlled according to the end of the special game. a second specific game state (a special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed; It is possible to perform a specific performance (continuous notice performance, icon change performance, timer performance, etc.) that makes the execution of the special game expected during the performance, and the execution rate of the specific performance varies depending on the operation of the operating means. The first setting state (normal setting) and the second setting state (simple setting) can be set. a game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol); and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. , the specific performance includes a first specific performance (for example, a continuous preview performance) and a second specific performance (for example, a timer performance) different from the first specific performance, and the first setting state is set. When the second game effect is executed in the second specific game state after the second specific effect is executed, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a first rate (high appearance rate) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is becomes a second ratio (high appearance rate), and when the first game performance is executed in the first specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific performance becomes the second ratio (high appearance rate). The ratio of execution of the second specific performance is different from the second ratio (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance, a variable performance of only flashing lamps), and the specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable performance) that is controlled according to the end of the special game. a second specific game state (a special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed; It is possible to perform a specific performance (continuous notice performance, icon change performance, timer performance, etc.) that makes the execution of the special game expected during the performance, and the execution rate of the specific performance varies depending on the operation of the operating means. The first setting state (normal setting) and the second setting state (simple setting) can be set. a game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol); and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. , the specific performance includes a first specific performance (for example, a continuous preview performance) and a second specific performance (for example, a timer performance) different from the first specific performance, and the first setting state is set. When the second game effect is executed in the first specific game state after the execution of the first specific effect, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a first rate (high appearance rate) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is becomes a second ratio (high appearance rate), and when the first game performance is executed in the second specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific performance becomes the second ratio (high appearance rate). The ratio of execution of the second specific performance is different from the second ratio (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents 19 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information obtained based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the game performance (variable performance) is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common. Among such gaming machines, some are known that perform effects using predetermined effect devices (effect buttons, movable members, lamps, image display devices, etc.) (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-033816 reference). However, conventional gaming machines such as those described in the above-mentioned patent documents have a problem in that the interest in playing the games is low.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, A light emitting means (winning hole lamp) that can change to any one of multiple notification modes, and an acquisition means (main control) that acquires judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole). a board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game ends. A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols, a fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control means corresponds to the determination information indicating that the game performance has been started. Execution information (the icon) can be displayed, and by displaying the execution information in a special mode (special icon) different from the normal mode (normal icon), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. possible, and by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode (blue light emission, red light emission, rainbow light emission, etc.) corresponding to the execution information being displayed in the special mode, a change effect that suggests the degree of expectation ( During a predetermined period after the start of the game performance (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation), an operation valid period is generated, and the above operation during the operation valid period is executed. An operation performance that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the operating means (vibration performance related to a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.) and the operation validity period are generated. It is possible to perform a vibration performance (such as a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, etc.) that vibrates the operating means without any action, and both during the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. The execution rate of the vibration performance during the predetermined period after the start of the game performance (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different between the middle and the middle, and the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change performance is resumed and the game is started. When the control state is restored, the execution information is not performed and the light emitting means assumes a notification mode (white light emission, lights out) different from the specific notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for making a judgment, and state control capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. means (main control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a fluctuating performance that displays performance symbols in a variable manner according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means is configured to display the fluctuating performance. During a predetermined period after the start of (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation), an operation effect period is generated, and a predetermined effect is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation effect period (line preview). (Vibration performance related to performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) and vibration performance that vibrates the operating means without causing the operation validity period (pre-reading vibration performance, step It is possible to execute a vibration display related to an up notice display), and in a specific variable display (a variable display with a pseudo series) in which the fluctuating display of the above-mentioned performance symbol is simulated multiple times, the display can be performed in stages. It is possible to execute a stage production (story production) in which the game progresses, and a reach production that makes people expect that the special game will be executed, and the stage production includes a first stage production (story 1). and a second stage performance (story 2) that is executed after the first stage performance, and the reach performance includes a first reach performance (normal reach performance), and a second stage performance (story 2) that is executed after the first stage performance. It includes a second reach performance (SP/SPSP reach performance) in which a special game is highly expected to be executed, and in the specific variation performance, the second stage performance can be executed after the first reach performance is executed. However, after executing the second reach effect, the second stage effect is not executed, and the execution ratio of the vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect during the normal gaming state and during the specific gaming state. are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, A light emitting means (winning hole lamp) that can change to any one of multiple notification modes, and an acquisition means (main control) that acquires judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole). board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a game performance (variation accompanied by a fluctuating display of performance symbols) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a performance, a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit executes the operation after the start of power supply. It is possible to perform an initial vibration that vibrates the means, and it is possible to display execution information (the icon) corresponding to the determination information that the game production has started, and the execution information is displayed in a different form from the normal mode (normal icon). It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by displaying it in a special mode (special icon), and a specific notification mode corresponding to the execution information that is being displayed in the special mode with the light emitting means. It is possible to execute a change performance (lamp change performance) that suggests the level of expectation by changing the light emission (blue light emission, red light emission, rainbow light emission, etc.). At the same time, a vibration related to an operation performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.) that performs a predetermined performance according to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. It is possible to perform a vibration performance (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, etc.) in which the operating means is vibrated without causing the operation validity period to occur. , when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the execution information is not performed and the light emitting means emits a notification mode different from the specific notification mode (white light emission). , lights out), and the operating means can be vibrated in different manners between the initial vibration and the vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever, firing handle) that can be operated by the player are provided. ), an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting port), and whether to execute the special game based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the present invention has been determined, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a variable performance (variable performance) for displaying performance symbols in a variable manner according to the result of the determination. , the operation means includes a first operation means (a production button) and a second operation means (a production lever, a firing handle) different from the first operation means, and the production control means controls the execution of the variable production. The operation performance includes generating an operation validity period and performing a predetermined performance according to the operation of the first operation means during the operation validity period (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a final performance). A vibration performance related to a performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.) and a vibration performance that vibrates the first operating means without causing the operation validity period (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, etc.). In a specific variation performance (variation performance with pseudo series) in which the performance symbols are displayed in a simulated manner multiple times, a stage performance (story performance) in which the performance can progress step by step, and the special game It is possible to perform a reach effect that makes people expect that it will be executed, and when the vibration effect is executed during operation of the second operation means, the vibration related to the vibration effect is transmitted to the second operation means. The stage performance includes a first stage performance (Story 1) and a second stage performance (Story 2) executed after the first stage performance, The reach performance includes a first reach performance (normal reach performance) and a second reach performance (SP/SPSP reach performance) in which the degree of expectation for the special game to be executed is higher than that of the first reach performance, and the reach performance includes the specified reach performance. In the variable performance, the second stage performance can be executed after the first ready-to-reach performance is executed, but the second stage performance is not executed after the second ready-to-reach performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, A light emitting means (winning hole lamp) that can change to any one of multiple notification modes, and an acquisition means (main control) that acquires judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole). a storage unit (main control board 110) that stores the determination information acquired by the acquisition unit as a pending memory; and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. a main control board 110), a preliminary determination means (main control board 110) that determines in advance whether or not to execute the special game, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, various a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the time-saving gaming state), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the result of the determination. , the performance control means is capable of displaying execution information (the icon) corresponding to the determination information on which the variable performance has been started, and displays the execution information in a special mode (special icon) different from the normal mode (normal icon). ), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and the light emitting means can be displayed in a specific notification mode (blue light emission, red light emission, red light emission, etc.) corresponding to the execution information being displayed in the special mode. It is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the level of expectation by changing the display to a light emitting light, rainbow light emission, etc., and during the execution of the variable effect, an operation valid period is generated, and the above-mentioned An operation performance that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period (vibration performance related to a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.); It is possible to perform a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect) in which the operating means is vibrated without generating an operation validity period, and the vibration effect is executed according to the result of the preliminary determination, and the vibration effect is executed according to the result of the preliminary determination, When the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the execution information is not performed and the light emitting means is displayed in a notification mode different from the specific notification mode (white light emission, lights out). ), and when the fluctuating performance in which a ready-to-win performance is performed during the normal gaming state, the vibration performance is executed at a higher rate before the execution of the ready-to-win performance than during the ready-to-win performance. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), and the vibration performances include: A first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery) is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period while generating an operation validity period. (a vibration performance related to a performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without the expiration of the validity period, and the vibration performance related to the first vibration performance. It is possible to perform the vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes a vibration performance based on the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. ), and a predetermined period after the start of the game performance ( The execution ratio of the second vibration effect during the period (up to the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), and the vibration performances mentioned above In addition to generating a valid operation period, a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a final performance) is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a re-lottery performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, It is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) and a second game performance (corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. after the start of the game performance, in the case where the first game performance is performed in the normal game state and the case where the second game performance is performed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, as well as generating an operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without the expiration of the validity period, It is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination, and a second game performance (second special (a variable performance corresponding to a symbol), and the first game performance is executed in the normal game state and the first game performance is performed in the specific game state. The execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, as well as generating an operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without the expiration of the validity period, It is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination, and a second game performance (second special (variable effects corresponding to the symbols), and when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, the game effect The execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , a normal time-saving game state), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance, a variable performance of only flashing lamps), and the specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable performance) that is controlled according to the end of the special game. a second specific game state (a special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed; Executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the performance (vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo-continuation performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) The vibration performance includes a valid operation period, and a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid operation period. , vibration performances related to development performances, cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.), and second vibration performances that are executed without the expiration of the validity period (pre-read vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) ), the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed such that their performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2 game performance (variable performance corresponding to a second special symbol), a case where the second game performance is executed in the first specific gaming state, and a case where the second game performance is executed in the second specific gaming state. The execution rate of the second vibration performance during a predetermined period after the start of the game performance (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different depending on when the second vibration performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, as well as generating an operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without the expiration of the validity period, It is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination, and a second game performance (second special (a variable performance corresponding to a symbol), and the game performance is different between a case where the first game performance is executed in the specific game state and a case where the second game performance is executed in the specific game state. The execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), and the vibration performances mentioned above In addition to generating a valid operation period, a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a final performance) is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a re-lottery performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, It is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) and a second game performance (corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. after the start of the game performance, in the case where the first game performance is performed in the specific game state and the case where the second game performance is performed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, as well as generating an operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without the expiration of the validity period, It is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination, and a second game performance (second special (a variable performance corresponding to a symbol), and the game performance is different between a case where the first game performance is executed in the specific game state and a case where the second game performance is executed in the specific game state. The execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for making the judgment, and game effects according to the result of the judgment (variable effects with variable display of effect symbols, variable effects only with variable display of the fourth symbol, variable effects only with flashing lamps) and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes an initial vibration for vibrating the operating means after the start of power supply, and the performance control means is capable of performing an initial vibration to vibrate the operation means after the start of power supply, and during execution of the game performance, the performance control means It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the operating means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuation performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.). , the vibration performance includes a valid operation period, and a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, an advanced performance, a cut-in performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid operation period. a vibration performance related to a performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance that is executed without the expiration of the validity period (a vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.). It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the operation means is operated in different modes for the initial vibration performance and the second vibration performance. It is possible to make it vibrate. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for making the judgment, and game effects according to the result of the judgment (variable effects with variable display of effect symbols, variable effects with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable effects with only flashing lamps) a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing the game performance; , a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) can be executed, and the vibration performance has a valid operation period, and also has a valid operation period. The first vibration performance (vibration performance related to dialogue preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the said operating means inside, and the validity period. A second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating a vibration performance, and the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance are included in the performance period. It is possible to perform the vibrations so that they do not overlap, and it is possible to vibrate the operating means in different manners in the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a game performance (accompanied by a fluctuating display of performance symbols) according to the result of the determination. A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance, a variable performance with only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable performance with only flashing lamps, and the operation means is configured to perform a first operation means (a performance button ) and a second operation means (a production lever, a firing handle) different from the first operation means, and the production control means is configured to perform a vibration production () that vibrates the first operation means during execution of the game production. It is possible to perform vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuation performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc., and the vibration performances include operations. A first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a final performance, and a repeat performance) is generated in response to the operation of the first operating means during the operation validity period. a vibration performance related to a lottery performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without causing the validity period, and It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that their performance periods do not overlap, and when the second vibration performance is performed during operation of the second operating means, the second vibration performance Vibrations related to the performance are transmitted to the player via the second operating means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting port), and stores the determination information acquired by the acquisition means as a pending memory. storage means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and determining in advance whether or not to execute the special game. a preliminary determination means (main control board 110); a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, various time-saving gaming states) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance in which a performance pattern is displayed variably according to the result of the determination, and the operation means includes a first operation means (performance button) and a first operation. and a second operation means (a production lever, a firing handle) different from the first operation means, and the production control means is configured to perform a vibration production (pre-reading vibration production, dialogue preview production) that vibrates the first operation means during execution of the variable production. , a pseudo continuous performance, a developed performance, a cut-in performance, a decisive performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc.), and the vibration performance has an operation validity period, and A first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a dialogue preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the first operating means during the operation validity period. ), and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without causing the validity period, and the second vibration performance is the same as in the previous article. It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the above-mentioned where the ready-to-win performance is performed during the normal gaming state. When a variable performance is executed, the rate at which the second vibration performance is executed is higher before the execution of the ready-to-win performance than during the ready-to-win performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. The performance control means (performance control board 130) executes a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance with only blinking lamps), and the performance control unit executes a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration) that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances related to production, dialogue preview production, pseudo continuous production, development production, cut-in production, decisive production, re-lottery production, confirmed production, etc., and the vibration production has a valid operation period. At the same time, a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.) is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. (vibration performance) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, and a vibration performance related to the first vibration performance. It is possible to execute the second vibration performance so that the performance period does not overlap, and the game performance includes a first game based on the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. a performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol); and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition; The case where the second vibration performance is performed during the second game performance in the specific game state is higher than the case where the second vibration performance is performed during the first game performance in the normal game state. The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher in the case of . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), and the vibration performances mentioned above In addition to generating a valid operation period, a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a final performance) is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. , vibration effects related to re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, symbols aligned, C symbols aligned, vibrations related to confirmed effects, etc.) that are executed without the expiration of the validity period. performance), it is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance is based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. (Variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol), and the number of types of the second vibration performance that may be executed during the first game performance in the specific game state (vibration related to pattern alignment, etc.) performance), the number of types of the second vibration performance that may be executed during the first game performance in the normal gaming state (pre-read vibration performance, step-up notice performance, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmed). Vibration effects related to presentations, etc.) are becoming more common. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 20th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, as well as generating an operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance that is executed without the expiration of the validity period (pre-reading vibration performance, step-up notice performance, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation effect, etc.) ), the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed such that their performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2 game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol), and the number of types of the second vibration performance that may be executed during the first game performance in the specific game state (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol). The number of types of the second vibration performance that may be executed during the first game performance in the normal gaming state (pre-read vibration performance, step-up notice performance, pattern alignment, C pattern, etc.) There are more vibrating effects related to matching, confirmed effects, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), and the vibration performances mentioned above In addition to generating a valid operation period, a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a final performance) is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. , vibration effects related to re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, symbols aligned, C symbols aligned, vibrations related to confirmed effects, etc.) that are executed without the expiration of the validity period. performance), it is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance is based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. (Variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol), and the number of types of the second vibration performance that may be executed during the second game performance in the specific game state (pre-read vibration performance, step-up vibration performance) The number of types of the second vibration performance that may be executed during the first game performance in the normal gaming state (pre-read vibration performance, etc.) Vibration effects related to step-up notice effects, pattern matching, C pattern matching, confirmed effects, etc.) are becoming more common. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, as well as generating an operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance that is executed without the expiration of the validity period (pre-reading vibration performance, step-up notice performance, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation effect, etc.) ), the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed such that their performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2 game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol), and the number of types of the second vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance) that may be executed during the second game performance in the specific game state. , symbol alignment, vibration effects related to confirmed effects, etc.), the number of types of the second vibration effects that may be executed during the first game effect in the normal gaming state (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up vibration effects, etc.) Vibration effects related to preview effects, pattern matching, C pattern matching, confirmed effects, etc.) are becoming more common. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance of only blinking lamps), and the performance control means is capable of performing an initial vibration of vibrating the operating means after the start of power supply. , a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a line preview performance, a pseudo-continuation performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) ), and the game performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the vibration performance is performed at a predetermined timing ( A first vibration performance (vibration performance related to pseudo-continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) that is executed before the reach) and a second vibration performance that is performed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during the reach). The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed during execution of the first game performance in the normal gaming state. , during execution of the first game performance in the specific game state, execution of the first vibration performance is restricted, but the second vibration performance can be performed, and the initial vibration and the first vibration performance are , it is possible to vibrate the operating means in different ways. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance of only blinking lamps), and the performance control means is capable of performing an initial vibration of vibrating the operating means after the start of power supply. , a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a line preview performance, a pseudo-continuation performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) ), and the game performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the vibration performance is performed at a predetermined timing ( A first vibration performance (vibration performance related to pseudo-continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) that is executed before the reach) and a second vibration performance that is performed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during the reach). The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed during execution of the first game performance in the normal gaming state. , during execution of the first game performance in the specific game state, execution of the first vibration performance is restricted, but the second vibration performance can be performed, and the initial vibration and the second vibration performance are , it is possible to vibrate the operating means in different ways. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), and the above-mentioned game performances includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the determination based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. A second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of information determination, and the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (pre-reading) executed at a predetermined timing (before reach). Vibration performances related to vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, step-up preview performances, etc.) and second vibration performances (development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances) that are executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration production. , a vibration effect related to a re-lottery effect), and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, The execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), and the above-mentioned game performances includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the determination based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. A second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of information determination, and the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (pre-reading) executed at a predetermined timing (before reach). Vibration performances related to vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, step-up preview performances, etc.) and second vibration performances (development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances) that are executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration production. , vibration effects related to re-lottery effects, etc.), in the case where the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and the case where the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, The execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The game performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. A second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the above-mentioned determination information, and the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) Performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, step-up preview performances, etc.) and second vibration performances (development performances, cut-in performances) that are executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration production. , a deciding performance, a vibration performance related to a re-lottery performance, etc.), where the first game performance is executed in the specific game state, and when the second game performance is performed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different between the two. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The game performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. A second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the above, and the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance executed at a predetermined timing (before reach). A second vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach) , a vibration performance related to a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), a case where the first game performance is executed in the specific gaming state, and a case where the second game performance is executed in the specific gaming state. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different between the two. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) that makes a determination, and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, various time-saving gaming states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps) according to the result of the determination. The effect control means is capable of performing an initial vibration of vibrating the operating means after the start of power supply, and is capable of performing a vibration effect of vibrating the operating means during execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, It is possible to perform a vibration performance related to a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc., and the vibration performance is performed at a predetermined timing (before reaching ) is performed (vibration performance related to pre-reading vibration performance, line preview performance, step-up notice performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance is performed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). production (vibration production related to development production, cut-in production, deciding production, re-lottery production, etc.), the execution ratio of the first vibration production is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, and the The operating means can be vibrated in different manners between the initial vibration and the first vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 30th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) that makes a determination, and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, various time-saving gaming states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps) according to the result of the determination. The effect control means is capable of performing an initial vibration of vibrating the operating means after the start of power supply, and is capable of performing a vibration effect of vibrating the operating means during execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, It is possible to perform a vibration performance related to a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc., and the vibration performance is performed at a predetermined timing (before reaching ) is performed (vibration performance related to pre-reading vibration performance, line preview performance, step-up notice performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance is performed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). production (vibration production related to development production, cut-in production, deciding production, re-lottery production, etc.), the execution ratio of the first vibration production is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, and the The operating means can be vibrated in different manners between the initial vibration and the second vibration performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means that can be operated by the player and can emit light in a predetermined manner. (production button, production lever), acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting port), A determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute a special game, and a game performance (a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols, a variation of only a variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. The performance control means (performance control board 130) executes a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance with only blinking lamps), and the performance control unit executes a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration) that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a vibration performance related to a performance, a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc.), and the vibration performance is performed at a predetermined timing ( The first vibration performance (vibration performance related to pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up notice performance, etc.) that is executed before the reach) and the first vibration performance that is performed at a different timing from the first vibration performance (during the reach). 2 vibration performances (vibration performances related to development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, etc.), and the light emission mode of the operating means includes a first light emission mode (white light emission, red light emission), A second light emitting mode (rainbow light emission) in which the expectation level for the special game to be executed is higher than that of the first light emitting mode, and in the game effect that notifies that the special game will be executed, the second light emitting mode When the first vibration effect is executed, the operating means is more likely to emit light in the first light emission mode than when the vibration effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirty-second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means that can be operated by the player and can emit light in a predetermined manner. (production button, production lever), acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting port), Judgment means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute a special game, and state control that can be controlled to a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. means (main control board 110), and executes a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps) according to the result of the determination. A performance control means (performance control board 130), the performance control means is configured to perform a vibration performance (a pre-reading vibration performance, a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, an advanced performance) that vibrates the operating means during the execution of the game performance. , a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, etc.). Vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, line preview performances, step-up preview performances, etc.) and second vibration performances (development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances) that are executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration production. (a vibration performance related to a performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), the execution rate of the first vibration performance is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, and the light emission mode of the operating means includes a first vibration performance. The special game includes a light emission mode (white light emission, red light emission), and a second light emission mode (rainbow light emission) that has a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than the first light emission mode, and the special game is executed. In the game performance that notifies the operator, the operating means is more likely to emit light in the first light emission mode when the first vibration performance is executed than when the second vibration performance is executed. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for making the judgment, and game effects according to the result of the judgment (variable effects with variable display of effect symbols, variable effects with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable effects with only flashing lamps) and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes an initial vibration for vibrating the operating means after the start of power supply, and the performance control means is capable of performing an initial vibration to vibrate the operation means after the start of power supply, and during execution of the game performance, the performance control means It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the operating means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.). , the validity period of the operating means includes a first validity period (validity period related to dialogue preview performance and pseudo-continuation performance) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game performance, and a first validity period that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game performance; a second validity period (validity period related to cut-in performance, fixed performance, etc.) occurring at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period, and the operation means during the second validity period. The vibration effect can be executed when the operating means is operated, and the initial vibration and the vibration effect executed when the operating means is operated during the second valid period are different from each other when the operating means is operated. and can output different operation sounds depending on whether the operating means is operated during the first valid period or when the operating means is operated during the second valid period. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for making the judgment, and game effects according to the result of the judgment (variable effects with variable display of effect symbols, variable effects with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable effects with only flashing lamps) and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes an initial vibration for vibrating the operating means after the start of power supply, and the performance control means is capable of performing an initial vibration to vibrate the operation means after the start of power supply, and during execution of the game performance, the performance control means It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the operating means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.). , the validity period of the operating means includes a first validity period (validity period related to dialogue preview performance and pseudo-continuation performance) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game performance, and a first validity period that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game performance; a second validity period (validity period related to cut-in performance, fixed performance, etc.) occurring at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period, and the operation means during the first validity period. The vibration effect can be executed when the operating means is operated, and the initial vibration and the vibration effect executed when the operating means is operated during the first valid period are different from each other. and can output different operation sounds depending on whether the operating means is operated during the first valid period or when the operating means is operated during the second valid period. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) that makes a determination, and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game ends. control board 110), and a performance control means that executes a game performance (a variable performance with a variable display of performance symbols, a variable performance with only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp) according to the result of the determination. (performance control board 130), the performance control means is capable of performing an initial vibration of vibrating the operation means after the start of power supply, and the operation means during the valid period that occurs during the game performance. It is possible to perform a vibration performance (a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a dialogue notice performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, a promotion success performance, etc.) that vibrates the operating means in accordance with the operation of the The validity period includes a first validity period (validity period related to dialogue preview performance and pseudo continuous performance) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game performance, and the first validity period during the game performance. A second validity period (validity period related to advanced performances, decisive performances, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period, and the game performance in the normal gaming state and the specified The execution rate of the vibration performance according to the operation during the first valid period is different for the game performance in the gaming state, and the number of vibrations ( time) and the number of vibrations (time) in the vibration performance executed in response to an operation during the second valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for making a judgment, and state control capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. means (main control board 110), and executes a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps) according to the result of the determination. performance control means (performance control board 130), the performance control means is capable of performing initial vibration to vibrate the operating means after the start of power supply, and the performance control means is capable of performing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means during the validity period that occurs during the game performance. Executing a vibration performance (a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a dialogue notice performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, a promotion success performance, etc.) that vibrates the operation means in response to the operation of the operation means. The validity period includes a first validity period (validity period related to dialogue preview performances and pseudo-continuous performances) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game production, and a second validity period (validity period related to development performance, decisive performance, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period, and the game performance in the normal gaming state and , the execution rate of the vibration performance according to the operation during the first validity period is different from the game performance in the specific game state, and in the vibration performance executed according to the operation during the first validity period. The number of vibrations (time) is different from the number of vibrations (time) in the vibration performance executed in response to an operation during the second valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to a low probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game when the type of jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, and when the type of jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol. Although the game machine is configured to shift to a high-probability game state that continues until the next jackpot game after the end of a jackpot game, the game machine may shift to a high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all jackpot games.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are finished, the game is moved to a high probability game state, and if the player wins the falling lottery that is executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation display in the high probability game state, the high probability game state is ended and the normal A gaming machine that returns to a gaming state may also be used.

Furthermore, when a game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of a jackpot game, the gaming machine may be configured to shift to a high probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. However, a gaming machine may be used in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

Further, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that equivalent meanings to the claims and all changes within the scope be included.

1 Game machine 5 Game board 44 General figure gate 45 First starting port 47 Second starting port 50 Big prize opening 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can execute special games advantageous to players,
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition or the establishment of a second acquisition condition;
determining means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information;
prior determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game before the determination performed by the determination means;
a state control means capable of controlling to a specific gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the special game ends;
A production control means for executing a game production according to the result of the determination,
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform a vibration performance in which the operating means is vibrated during execution of the game performance,
The vibration production includes
a first vibration performance that generates an operation valid period and is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation valid period;
A second vibration performance that is executed without generating the operation validity period,
The first vibration performance is
It is possible to execute based on the determination result of the determination means,
The second vibration performance is
It can be executed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, and it can be executed at a timing earlier than the first vibration performance so that the first vibration performance and the performance period do not overlap. and
In the game production,
a first game performance according to a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition;
a second game performance according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition,
The second vibration performance during a predetermined period after the start of the game performance in the case where the first game performance is executed in the normal game state and the case where the second game performance is performed in the specific game state. Ease of execution varies;
When the first game performance is executed in the normal game state, there are more types of vibrations of the vibration performance that can be executed than when the first game performance is performed in the specific game state. A gaming machine featuring: